JP6671806B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a tank rail for guiding a game ball from a ball tank to a downstream side has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1). This tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging foreign matter generated by the game ball.

JP 2013-215440 A (FIG. 2)

Where the foreign matter falling from the holes provided in the tank rails when attached to the control board disposed below the tank rails, or failure occurs in the control board electrical troubles occur, such as or malfunction Was causing it. In recent control boards, as the number of objects to be controlled increases, the pin interval between connectors becomes narrower. As the number of connectors increases, the interval between connectors becomes narrower, and furthermore, the pin interval between ICs becomes smaller. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures against electric trouble due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an electric trouble due to a foreign object falling from a tank rail.

(Solution 1)
In gaming machines,
`` A gaming machine including a game board in which a game using a game ball is performed, and a liquid crystal display device that displays a predetermined effect image in relation to the game,
On the back side of the gaming machine,
A substrate on which electronic components are mounted,
A substrate box for housing the substrate,
A game ball supply unit that receives game balls from outside the gaming machine and guides the game balls downstream;
An upper plate surface having a predetermined width in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, and a rear plate surface having a predetermined length in the vertical direction of the gaming machine,
Is provided,
The game ball supply unit,
A ball tank that receives and stores game balls,
A tank rail formed from substantially the center in the left-right direction of the gaming machine to near one side end of the gaming machine so as to roll the gaming balls stored in the ball tank toward the downstream side. , And
At least a part of the tank rail is formed with a discharge hole that allows foreign substances to drop downward,
The protection portion is disposed at a position below the tank rail so as to be located directly below the discharge hole, and from a position below the tank rail while the upper plate surface is kept directly below the discharge hole. It is possible to move,
The substrate box has a plurality of walls forming an internal space in which the substrate is housed, and is arranged without sandwiching another substrate box below the upper plate surface of the protection unit, The wall portion serving as a rear surface of the substrate box is disposed on the front side of the rear plate surface of the protection unit, and the wall portion serving as a rear surface of the substrate box is disposed on the front side of the emission hole. They are arranged almost horizontally, "
It is characterized by the following.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to a foreign object falling from the tank rail .

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position from the front right. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the body frame and the body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where a door frame is opened from a main body frame and a main body frame is opened from an outer frame in another embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, each of which is exploded and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame from the front and disassembled. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after the rear case and the fraud prevention member are removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. FIG. 39 is a sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 38 (a). FIG. 40 is a sectional view taken along line YY of FIG. 39 including a partially enlarged view. It is an exploded perspective view of a foul cover unit including a partial enlarged exploded view showing another form of the operation line invalidating member. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of a foul cover unit showing another mode of the operation line nullification member. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of a foul cover unit showing another mode of the operation line nullification member. (A) is a longitudinal section front view of a foul cover unit showing another form of the operation line nullification member, and (b) is a cross-sectional plan view thereof. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A), (b) is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 45 showing a normal flow of a game ball (foul ball), and (c) is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 45 showing a state in which an illegal ball is prevented from reversing. . It is a top view of a foul cover unit. It is a top view of a foul cover unit which shows other forms of an operation line nullification member. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) is an enlarged view of the Z part of FIG. 49, (b) is an enlarged view of the Z part of FIG. 49 showing a state in which a foul ball passes. (A), (b) is the enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49 which shows the state in which the operation line is invalidated. (A), (b) is a magnified view corresponding to the Z part of FIG. 49 showing a state in which the operation line invalidating member is motorized, and showing a state in which the operation line is invalidated. It is a perspective view of an important section showing other forms of an operation line nullification member. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 3B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit exploded and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the plate unit from the advancing and retreating direction of the production operation unit button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation unit disassembled for every main member from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled as viewed from above and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below and front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit from the left front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit from the front and the upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation button unit and looked from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lower position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the upper position. It is an explanatory view showing the relation between the production operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is an explanatory view showing a relation between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the production operation unit viewed from a pressing direction of a pressing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position, and (c) is a center pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, and (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front lower part disassembled. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decorative board. It is a front view of a main part frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, which is cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (A) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . It is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotation position of the dispensing blade. It is a rear view of the payout apparatus for demonstrating prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout. It is a modification of a dispensing device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a main part frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board unit from the lower back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction center. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from behind. (A) is a perspective view seen from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front in (a). FIG. 120 (b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball to a detour passage in an upper part of a main part frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the hinge side back. FIG. 118 is an enlarged view of a part of the cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 118 (a). It is another structure of this invention in which a countermeasure against metal powder is taken (configuration of countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment). It is another structure of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration of measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment). It is another structure of this invention in which a countermeasure against metal powder is taken (configuration of countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment). 14 shows another configuration of the present invention in which countermeasures against metal powder are taken (configuration of countermeasures against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment). It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 131 is an enlarged front view of the main part of the game board of FIG. 131. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows another form. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows another form. (A), (b) is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows another form. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows another form. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows another form. FIG. 137 is a partially enlarged front view of the gaming board of FIG. 137. FIG. 132 is an enlarged front view of the main part of the game board, showing a modification of FIG. 132. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a function display unit attached to an upper left corner of a front component outside a game area. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring routing from a function display unit on a main control board. It is a schematic perspective view of an internal structure, such as a back left movable decorative body. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 149 is a sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a view on arrow A in FIG. 148. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure showing composition of a frame earth board. It is the schematic of the handling of the conductor which floated with respect to the earth provided in the various effect units provided in the game board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram illustrating an outline of a circuit configuration of a power supply board. It is the perspective view which expanded the power supply board partially. FIG. 155 is a view on arrow B in FIG. 155. FIG. 9 is a silk printing (part 1) of an electronic component printed on a mounting surface of a power supply board. FIG. 9 is a silk printing (part 2) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline of a production discontinuation electronic component. This is a configuration of a measure against a commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic circuit diagram illustrating a circuit of a main control board. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a payout control board. FIG. 4 is a perspective view illustrating an outline of wiring to a substrate treated as a main substrate. It is a block diagram explaining electrical connection of each decoration board with which a door frame is provided. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of an arrangement method of an LED constant current drive circuit. FIG. 167 is an enlarged view of a part D in FIG. 167 as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface. This is a configuration of a countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. This is a configuration of a measure against a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment. FIG. 172 is an enlarged view of a part D ′ in FIG. 169 or a part D ″ in FIG. 170 as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface. This is a configuration of a countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 172 is an enlarged view of a portion D ′ ″ in FIG. 172 as viewed from a surface where LEDs are not mounted. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decoration board provided with a magnetic pole change detection circuit etc. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of main control side power-on. 175 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 175. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main control timer interrupt process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payment control part. 178 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing at the time of turning on the power of the payout control unit in FIG. 178. 179 is a flowchart illustrating the continuation of the processing at the time of turning on the power of the payout control unit, following FIG. 179; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a peripheral control part. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control section power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a center longitudinal cross-sectional view of the game board including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 192 is an enlarged view of a Z1 part shown by an arrow in FIG. 192 including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 192 is an enlarged view of an arrow Z2 portion. It is XX sectional drawing of FIG. It is an enlarged view of the Z3 part of FIG. 195. It is the end surface front view of the game board which cut the middle of the thickness direction of the light guide plate. It is the front view which decomposed | disassembled and arranged the front view of the game panel and center member which omitted the back decoration member. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view showing a base panel and a front surrounding member of a game panel. It is a perspective view showing a base panel and a back decoration member of a game panel. It is an exploded perspective view showing a base panel and a back decoration member of a game panel. It is an exploded perspective view of a production unit. It is an exploded perspective view showing a production support frame and a drum unit of the production unit. It is an exploded perspective view showing a drum unit of an effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view showing the rear cover of the production unit. FIG. 4 is a central vertical cross-sectional view of a main part illustrating a moving state of a drum. FIG. 189 is an enlarged view of a Z4 part in FIG. 188. It is a partially enlarged front view of the door frame which shows a handle unit. 209 is a sectional view taken along the line SS in FIG. 209. FIG. It is an exploded sectional view showing a handle unit. It is an important section enlarged sectional view of a door frame which shows other forms of a handle unit. It is a front view of the pachinko machine provided with two handle units. It is a perspective view of the door frame provided with two handle units. It is a right view of a door frame. It is an enlarged view of the Z5 part of FIG. 214. FIG. 213 is a partially enlarged front view of a door frame showing the handle unit on the right side in FIG. 213. FIG. 217 is a sectional view taken along line TT of FIG. 217. FIG. 213 is a cross-sectional view of the handle unit showing a state of being moved linearly from FIG. 218. It is an exploded sectional view showing a handle unit. FIG. 213 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the line TT of FIG. 217 showing the handle unit on the left side of FIG. FIG. 233 is a cross-sectional view of the handle unit illustrating a state of being moved linearly from FIG. 221. FIG. 222 is a sectional view taken along line U-U in FIG. 222. It is an important section enlarged sectional view of a door frame which shows other forms of a handle unit. It is the principal part enlarged perspective view which looked at the upper part of the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the principal part expansion perspective view which looked at the upper part of the pachinko machine from behind. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the upper part of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an enlarged right side view of a main part of the upper part of the pachinko machine. It is a principal part enlarged right side view of the upper part of the pachinko machine which shows the modification of a front top top plate. It is a principal part enlarged right side view of the pachinko machine upper part which shows other forms of a front top top plate. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 231 is a partially enlarged front view showing the lower half of the game board of FIG. 231. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back opposite to the opposite side of FIG. It is a center longitudinal cross-sectional view including a partially enlarged view. It is a combination plane sectional view in which the cutting position is changed around the lower game zone of the game board. It is a perspective view of a 3rd display. It is a front view of a 3rd display. It is a front view of the 3rd display which shows a changed state. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the 3rd display. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back side of the 3rd display. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the lower layer game zone of a game board. 244 is an exploded perspective view showing a lower game zone of the game board viewed from a direction different from FIG. 244. FIG. (A) is a longitudinal sectional view showing a sorting device of a third sorting unit, and (b) is a longitudinal sectional view of the sorting device showing a state of a game ball which has been vibrated by an external force. It is an important section expanded sectional view of a ball rolling member showing other forms of a ball guidance part. It is a perspective view of a right-handed game zone including a partially enlarged view. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the D cut angle position formed in the axis of rotation of the 1st, 2nd distribution stepping motor. It is a circuit diagram of a voltage switching circuit. It is a schematic diagram showing arrangement of a polyswitch. 9 is a table illustrating a drive management block of a first distribution stepping motor. 9 is a table illustrating a drive management block of a second distribution stepping motor. It is the schematic of the mounting method of a field effect transistor. 3 is a circuit illustrating a vibration detection circuit. FIG. 3 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, an example of the gaming machine will be described for the pachinko machine 1 with reference to FIGS. 1 to 170, and the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 171 to 189. For convenience of explanation, the side facing the player of the pachinko machine is referred to as “front” or “front”, and the opposite side is referred to as “rear” or “back”.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is at the ascending position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is at the ascending position as viewed from the front right. is there. 10 and 11 are perspective views of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3 for opening and closing the door frame 3. A main body frame 4 which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a game ball B which is removably mounted on the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. (See FIG. 106). A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game is driven is provided.

  The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 with the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 extending vertically and separated from each other. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the outer frame upper member 30 And an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the upper outer frame assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the upper frame hinge assembly 50 and the lower frame lower hinge member 60 allow the outer frame 2 to be connected to the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

  Also, when the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. The player has a handle 182 as an operation medium operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player separately from the handle 182. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained by operating the effect operation unit 301 in addition to the game using the game ball B.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. Hinge member 510 and lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and the door frame 3 to be opened and closed, and a metal frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the body frame base unit 500. And a ball launching device 540 for hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 for paying out the received game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and attached to the main body frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 includes outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a board attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral arranged behind the game panel 1100 A control unit 1500, and an effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, A table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of skill panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes a back effect unit 3100 capable of performing a movable effect or a light emitting effect according to a game state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 and change the movement of the game ball B, and the game ball B is received. And a receiving port such as a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, and a special winning opening 2005 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player. A gate unit 2003 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, enabling a prize to the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time) to the player by passing the ball B, and a gate unit 2003 for allowing the game ball B to enter the ball. A disadvantageous first inlet 2006 (details will be described later), which does not provide any benefit, is provided. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the first receiving entrance 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player operates the handle unit 180 for operating the player to input the game force of adjusting the hitting force, thereby hitting the game ball B with an arbitrary strength. be able to. This allows the game ball B to be accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the like in the game area 5a, thereby causing the disadvantageous first receiving opening. The player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 such that the player does not enter the entrance 2006.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to a game state that is changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or a movable effect by the back effect unit 3100. It is possible to entertain the player by causing a luminous effect.

  The pachinko machine 1 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 (the amount of operation of the handle 182) by the ball firing device 540 when the player rotates the handle 182 with the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 described later. , And the game ball is guided into the game area 5a of the game board 5 through a launch ball passage formed by a launch passage portion 1012 formed by the launch rail 544, the outer rail 1001, and the inner rail 1002. You. When a game ball hit into the game area 5a is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like, a predetermined number of game balls are opened by the payout device 580 described later in accordance with the received winning opening. From the upper plate 201.

  In addition, due to the strength of the game ball being unable to reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball and the like, that is, if the game ball fired with a weak firing force does not reach the game area 5a, FIG. As shown in FIG. 39, it falls into a foul ball drop opening 1013 opened between the end (end) of the firing rail 544 and the end (start) of the outer rail 1001, and it is returned to a later-described return position. It is received by foul ball receiving portion 150c of foul cover unit 150 constituting passage portion 1014, and is discharged to lower plate 202 from lower dish ball supply port 211c which is an opening for a ball, passing through foul cover unit 150.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 16 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

  As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are vertically separated and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and an upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

  The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward with its phase inverted.

  The outer frame 2 allows the outer frame hinge assembly 50 to detachably support the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially and rotatably by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are respectively disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, and are arranged to be separated from each other left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to an upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly depressed rightward in a rear portion of the left side surface obtained by dividing the front-rear direction into three equal parts, and a right portion from a portion opposite to the concave portion 11a in the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b bulging to the right and a hollow portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of the upper portion 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c of the rear side to be inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, and causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame left member 11; By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c abutting on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a abut on the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat upper and lower side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a right side from a rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 13d to contact the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. In contact with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, so that the outer side is fixed. It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and causes the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, an outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper right connecting member attached to an upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and an outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a which is flatly depressed to the left at a rear portion of the right-side surface where the front-rear direction is divided into three equal parts, and a left portion which is leftward from a portion opposite to the concave portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b bulging in the upward direction, and a hollow portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat contact portion 23d extending shortly toward the right side. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By contacting the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, whereby the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are used to hook an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hooking member 24 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 24a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a plate-shaped hooking piece 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the cage is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. And a flat-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 penetrates forward and backward through the hooking piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described below.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with cutouts 30a that are respectively depressed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The upper left and right fixing members 12b and the upper and right fixing members 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutouts 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are depressed from the general surface at the left end. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and extends left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41, A box-shaped front panel member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A left and right box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open frontward, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes cutouts 41a which are respectively depressed toward the center in the left-right direction while being vertically penetrated at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The lower horizontal connecting portion 13c and the lower horizontal connecting portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutouts 41a at both left and right ends, respectively, in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is concave from the upper surface, and has a concave portion 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and escapes to the front end side from a rearward position at the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portion 41b maximizes the capacity of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height, The entire rear side is open. The front panel 42 is closed by the rear panel 43 so that the open rear side cooperates with the rear panel 43 to become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends right and left on the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel 42 to the front side of the rear panel 43, the front panel 42 cooperates with the front panel 42 to form a panel internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear part 43 of the curtain plate has a tubular connection tube part 43a extending left and right and projecting upward at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicating with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connection cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end is located upward as it goes rearward from the front end side, which coincides with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tubular portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about ３ of the entire length of the rear plate 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the whole rear member 43. Are also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection tube portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder 43 a. The enclosure 624a is in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball-meshing preventing mechanism 44 causes the game ball B to stay between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 by staying the game ball B at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is for preventing the pinching.

  The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and has a mounting portion 44 a formed flat so as to be touched by an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later; A first discharge port 44b opening upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c opening upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b of the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a; and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is located upward as going backward. A portion 44e.

  The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game balls B to pass. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the inner space 40a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Therefore, the game balls B that have entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is used when an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d that rises from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized entry of a tool. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upright wall portion 44d, even if it bends upward, it comes into contact with the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion occurs. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game sphere B that has fallen on the placing portion 44a for some reason becomes the standing wall portion. Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game balls B easily stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game balls B are staying on the placing portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B are sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. As a result, there occurs a problem that the main frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first discharge ball 60d. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the rear panel member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2) through the outlet 44b or the second discharge port 44c. The ball B can be prevented from being pinched.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front panel 42 and the rear panel 43 so as to be separated from each other, and the opening 42a of the front panel 42 from the rear side. A grill member 46 having a flat plate shape, and a port member 47 having two cylinders that are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween and have two cylinders extending in the front and rear directions. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

  When the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the pair of guide members 45 abuts on the lower ends of the door frames 3. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide, and facilitates opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having countless small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted rearward (in the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622 by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (the player side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched between the upper end of the connection tubular portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 and is compressed. This prevents sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 22 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame 2 viewed from the lower front. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the concave portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 for mounting the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b, and an upper fixing portion; A flat horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and a lower portion extending from the edge extending from the left side to the front side of the front extension portion 51b to a portion where the bearing groove 51c is open. And a flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 described later in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending forward and backward, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from a rear end of the lock body 52a, and a lock member 52 extending leftward from a rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally left forward and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably mounted on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by a mounting screw 53 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The distal end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall 51e of the outer frame hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c at a position on the front side of the lock body 52a so as to accommodate the hinge pin 512 on the body frame of the hinge member 510 on the body frame.

  By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under outer frame]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d sized to penetrate vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and allow only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by stamping and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. Thus, it is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. The rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 60 d coincide with the first discharge ports 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main frame are closed as the main frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and it is possible to discharge from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge holes 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game balls B from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 24 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 25 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 26 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extending vertically when viewed from the front. The inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Have been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by a player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 includes a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover a lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, and a door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the tray, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400 and the upper side of the plate unit are attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a square (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically and having a door window 101a that penetrates forward and backward, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear lower right corner on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and mounted near a rear right lower end on the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. Door frame main relay board 104, a door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the door frame main relay board 104, and a door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub relay board 105. The relay frame 106 after the handle, the door frame relay substrate cover 107 that covers a part of the door frame main relay substrate 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay substrate 105 from the rear side, A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 to provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. Further, the foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which has been fired by the ball firing device 540 with a weak firing force and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202, This is for guiding the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved by the ball launching device 540 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is something to drive.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 32B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side of the main frame 4 so as to be hinged rotatable with respect to the main frame 4, closes the front surface of the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and has a game board mounted on the main frame 4. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted on the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to cover a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and a door frame base 101. And a cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is mounted on the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates back and forth, and whose inner peripheral shape in a front view is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. The upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the door window 101a are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively. The lower side forming the inner periphery is vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. As described above, the entire door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the lower right corner in front view of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b whose left end is inclined slightly forward from the right end side, a handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a door window 101a. Between the front side and the right end in the front view, from the rear side to the front side, and into the insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b, which penetrate back and forth on the front left side in front view, and pass through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 in front. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the ball.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the ball for the lower plate that faces the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 forward. A passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper plate that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to a lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view and that faces a through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150; A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  The door frame base 101 has a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i formed at the lower left corner in front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrating back and forth. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are provided such that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located forward and the body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 is located rearward when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth above the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the door window 101a. The through-hole 101j is a hole through which a wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted, and penetrates the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting a handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a, A plurality (three in this example) of ridges 102c protruding into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper part of the cylindrical part 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower part of the cylindrical part 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state where the three protrusions 102c and the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicular to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a state of being similarly inclined.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Accordingly, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211, it is possible to favorably guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

  Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on a rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed on the left side in front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner in rear view at the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the rear handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and has a connection cable 503 (FIG. 99) extending from the main body frame 4. And FIG. 100) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L-shape in which an external shape is combined with a rectangular shape extending left and right on the right side in a front view of an upper part of a rectangular shape extending vertically and extending vertically. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side in rear view. The door frame auxiliary relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decorative part decorative board 413, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled with the door frame base unit 100 in such a manner that a portion extending up and down of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is a door. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150 on the rear side.

  The handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangular shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The relay board 106 after the handle is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The relay board 106 after the handle is in a state where the rear side is covered by the relay board cover 108 after the handle in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover, relay board cover after handle, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a vertically extending portion in an inverted L-shape) are provided. It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and at the left in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed near the left end on the front surface and in the center in the left and right direction on the lower surface.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and to provide the door frame base unit 100 with rigidity. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 includes a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that are vertically separated and are disposed at right and left sides and a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that connect upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached to a position closer to the upper side from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcement frame 112 and a plurality of cylinders are vertically mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 so as to be vertically separated from each other. And a hooking member 116 to be provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend up and down with a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically separated from each other and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcement frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction, and extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right in a vertical direction that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a cut squarely downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is disposed to be separated from each other in the left and right directions, and a pair of rear pieces formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear pieces facing each other. The vehicle includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat shape from the sides to the front, and a flat front piece connecting the front ends of the pair of front extensions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that projects forward when viewed in plan. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole that penetrates forward and backward. The hook members 652 of the locking unit 650 are locked by these hook members 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by punching a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcement unit 110, the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the upper reinforcement frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 is And the door frame base 101 is located below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 match the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. And the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 movably in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in a front view, and a flat protruding piece 121b extending forward from upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has a mounting piece 121 a mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a vertically extending portion penetrates from below near a front end of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and an upper end is located on the upper side. A portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511 a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511 of the upper frame body hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121 around a portion extending vertically of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is urged upward by the lock spring 124 via the flange member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by a lock spring 124, and a horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower projecting piece. By abutting on the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

  When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the hinge assembly 120 moves the entire upper hinge pin 122. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert or pull out the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510. it can. By inserting the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in the front view can be hinged with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinged in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1-8. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in a hinge rotatable manner in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in front view, a flat protruding piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a hinge pin 126 below the door frame (see FIG. 23) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the front end 125b.

  The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame is a cylindrical metal rod, and a tapered chamfer is applied to the outer periphery of the lower end. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is coaxial with a portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above and below the hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main frame side lower hinge member. Can be.

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 has a columnar cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a regular lock inserted into the keyhole 132 and attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. A rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 is achieved by inserting a pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 into a pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252 h of the plate unit main body 252 in the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 23 and the like).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 35A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 36 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 and play the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate pull button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Is a box-shaped front cover 141 having an open front end, and a game ball which has entered a front cover 141 which is formed in a box shape having a front end opened and closed at the rear end thereof, which penetrates in a front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hit ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball firing device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. At the rear side of the ball 141, a ball removing member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 are provided one by one in the rear cover 14. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported around a vertically extending axis between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the drawing, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a when viewed from the front, and a ball ejection member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball ejection member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 described later extends forward from 141c. The front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit for removing the upper bowl ball 240 is provided. Further, a portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball guide path 241c is formed to be closed from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 143 has a partition part 143a below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, the upper surface of which is lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 144, and a partition part 143a. Around the axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bent in a V-shape from near the center in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from an upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b below the operating rod 143c. And a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 35A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray removing slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper tray removing button 222 of the tray unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 (see FIG. (Upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a having a fan shape in a plan view centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. The ball holder 144b includes an arc-shaped recess 144b extending from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holder 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the sphere holding portion 144b of the sphere feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation in the left-right direction.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and a ball holding portion 144b in a direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and a ball holding portion 144b in which the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to pivot between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540, and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is stopped by the blocking unit 144a from moving toward the ball holding unit 144b (hit ball supply port 142a), and stays on the partition unit 143a (a state where it stays at the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partitioning portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a, which is the standby position, is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip that swings up and down in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 about an axis extending in the up-down direction while rotating about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the movement of the ball.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. Have been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears, and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves around the right end part downward. To return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 causes the ball feeding solenoid 145 to swing the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding crank 147 is engaged with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and is engaged with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extending upward from the shaft 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 36 (b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 drives the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 moves the ball feeding operating rod 146 away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Also, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. To rotate. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B at the standby position, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF). State), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 151) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the ball removing member 143 rotatably supported by the shaft or the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removing member 143 contacts the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper ball removing slider 242 operated by pressing the upper ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. In the normal state, the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removing portion 141b to partition the ball. The game ball B does not invade.

  Then, when the player presses the upper plate removing button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate removing slider slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion, and the operating rod 143c moves with the downward movement of the operation transmitting portion. Also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is removed from the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the operating member 143c of the removing member 143 contacts is formed by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition 143a. , The impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball punching member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be separated from the partitioning portion. At 143a, it is possible to prevent bouncing.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 36 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and The operation line invalidating member 700, which is the first fraud prevention means, is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line nullifying member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side. I have. Here, the invalidation of the operation line means that the operation line cannot be normally operated because the operation line is cut or pinched (pinched and stopped) or entangled (rolled up) or adhered by hot melt or the like. It refers to the state.

  The operation line disabling member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape having an outer shape in a front view extending left and right, and is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center at a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. The inclined portion 703 formed in a C-chamfered shape at the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the first and second piece portions 701 and 702 and the first and second piece portions 702 and 702, respectively. And The first piece 701 of the operation line nullifying member 700 is bent with respect to the flat surface of the operation line nullifying member 700 such that the right end in front view in FIG. On the other hand, the second piece 702 extends on the same plane as the flat surface of the operation line nullifying member 700. Thus, in plan view, the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 form a shearing portion 700v that spreads in a V-shape toward the right.

  The operation line nullifying member 700 is attached to the attachment concave portion 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 is located inside the hit ball supply port 142a. It is in a state of communicating with.

  According to the operation line nullifying member 700, an unauthorized ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as the game ball) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. Or, a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as that) is driven from the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, and comes out to the upper plate 201 side attached to the illegal ball. The game is played by the ball launching device 540 when an operation line is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using an illegal ball, or when an illegal act such as moving an illegal ball into and out of the first starting port 2002 is performed. The operation line attached to the illegal ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 due to the momentum of the illegal ball fired (hit) with a strength that can reach the area 5a. The first piece 701 and the second piece 702 Can be cut into as scissors by narrowed site of formation shear portion 700v, it is possible to suppress the fraud using a fraud sphere takes place thus invalidates the operating line.

  Note that the first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be another embodiment. For example, if the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball is cut or narrowed to prevent fraud, the metal plate may be bent in a different form from the above, or the bent operation line invalidating member 700 may be bent. The configuration may be provided, or a resin molded member having a shape capable of cutting or narrowing the operation line attached to the illegal ball may be provided instead of the metal plate.

  When the illegal ball is made of a synthetic resin such as acrylic, a metal game ball at the above-described standby position (on the above-mentioned partition 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with a non-contact type (for example, a proximity switch). ), And the detection signal is added to the driving conditions of the ball feeding solenoid 145 which is the electric feeding means, thereby preventing the illegal ball from being shot. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal ball made of synthetic resin, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not drive for ball feeding.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
Fail cover unit 150 of door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 is fired by the ball firing device 540 with a weaker force (a firing force that cannot reach the game area 5a) than a predetermined force (a fire force that can reach the game area 5a), and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is fired. The game balls B (foul balls) that have not reached the inside are guided to the lower plate 202, and the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 are guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. .

  As shown, the foul cover unit 150 is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 whose front side is open, and a flat lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view, and has a lower normal payout passage 610 a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and an upper dish ball supply port 211 a which is a ball opening of the dish unit 200. And a lower full tank discharge unit 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 which is open rearward at the lower right side of the through ball path 150a when viewed from the front. And a full tank receiving port 150b.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side in front view of full tank receiving port 150b, and lacks momentum despite being fired from firing rail 544 by ball firing device 540 of main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving portion 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into a foul ball drop port 1013 formed between the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the inside of the game area 5a, and a right front view. In the vicinity of the lower corner, the game ball B, which is open frontward and is received by the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c, is discharged forward and the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for a ball of the dish unit 200, is provided. Outlet 150d that communicates with the air, a communication passage 150 that connects the ball outlet 150d (strictly speaking, a storage passage 150e described later) and the foul ball receiving portion 150c. It has a, and. The communication passage 150h has an upper passage wall 150i disposed under the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c at a gradient opposite to that of the bottom wall 150g, and almost one game ball from the upper passage wall 150i ( And a lower passage wall 150j disposed in parallel at a distance of 1 ball), the starting end of which is open upward at the downward inclined end of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and the end of which is stored. It opens downward to the passage 150e.

  In addition, a series of passages from the foul ball drop port 1013 established between the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the ball discharge port 150d through the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the communication passage 150h, and the storage passage 150e are returned as foul ball return. A return passage 1014 is formed by a series of these elements.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving section 150c and the ball discharging port 150d by the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible area is provided.

  The through ball passage 150a is formed so as to extend over both the unit body 151 and the cover member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of storage passage 150e, and has a flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to unit body 151 and lid member 152, and movable piece 153. And a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 moves into the storage passage 150e to some extent. Game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. Then, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. This makes it possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B, and stops the further payout of the game balls B when the full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. At the same time, the fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, and a prompt can be made to cancel the fullness of the lower plate 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150 a, and a discharge passage opening / closing door of a lower full tank path unit 610 in a discharge unit 560 described later of the main body frame 4. 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the operation protrusion 613a can contact (see FIG. 109). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined such that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b ( Front opening) can be opened.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line invalidating member 7000 as a second fraud prevention means for suppressing fraud by the fraudulent ball Q to which the operation line L is attached, and similarly, the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 are provided. The operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S, which are the third fraud prevention means, are provided at the foul ball drop opening 1013 opened between the two.

  The second operation line nullifying member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. As shown in the figure, both lateral projections 7001 are fitted and supported in the mounting holes 151h of the unit body 151 and the mounting holes 152h of the lid member 152, and are fixedly attached (adhered) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Furthermore, the unit body 151 and the cover member 152 cover and house the unit so that the hands of employees and gaming machine assembly workers are difficult to contact due to safety considerations.

  The specific operation line nullifying member 7000 includes components equivalent to the operation line nullifying member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece 701 in FIG. A V-shape opening in a direction facing the downward flow direction of the sphere of the communication passage 150h by the one piece portion 7010 and the second piece portion 7020 extending from the convex portion 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece portion 702. Is formed.

  In addition, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40, the center of the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the operation line nullifying member 7000 corresponds to the cover member 152 of the foul cover unit 150, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. It is disposed so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface, and is directed toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line nullifying member 7000 at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. A tapered guiding portion 150k that can guide the operation line L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game ball to flow down on the upper surface thereof, and is turned toward the lid member 152 at the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The first inclined portion 150ka descending to the operation line nullifying member 7000 side, and the width is narrowed along the lid member 152 toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line nullifying member 7000 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka. It has a second tapered portion 150 kb having a tapered shape (a shape capable of capturing the operation line L), and a tapered guiding portion 150 k formed of the second inclined portion 150 kb. Then, when the operation line L, which is tensioned by the rolling of the illegal ball Q or the tension from the outside, comes into sliding contact with the guiding portion 150k, the tension applied to the operation line L causes the second inclined portion 150ka to move from the first inclined portion 150ka to the second inclination portion 150ka. The operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidating member 7000 by sliding on the inclined portion 150 kb of. Thus, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidating member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for smooth flow of the normal ball and guiding the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, the corners of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k may be formed in a curved shape.

  Since the second operation line nullifying member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is changed using the space communicating from the lower counter ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The attached illegal ball Q is made to enter the game area 5a, and at the same time, the operation line L protruding toward the lower counter ball supply port 211c is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q, It is possible to prevent illegal acts such as moving the ball Q into and out of the first starting port.

  For example, using a special tool such as a cell plate, the illegal ball Q is pushed into the return passage unit 1014 from the lower counter ball supply port 211c, flows backward, and is sent to the firing position of the ball firing device 540 (hereinafter, “illegal act”). A)), when the illegal ball Q moves toward the firing position of the firing rail 544 over the folded portion of the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, The operation line L is pulled (pulled by tension) and wraps around the folded portion in a U-turn shape. Then, the operation line L is guided by the operation line nullifying member 7000 along the taper of the guiding portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the first piece 7010 and the second piece 7020, and finally enters Since the operation line L is cut off and the operation line L cannot be operated as a result, it is possible to suppress an illegal act using the illegal ball Q.

  Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the firing position, which is intentionally turned into a foul ball, and the lower counter ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Also, in the event that an illegal act of grasping the operation line L connected to the illegal ball that has become a foul ball and firing the subsequent illegal ball Q to the game area 5a (hereinafter referred to as “illegal act B”) is performed, The operation line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled by the subsequent ejection of the illegal ball Q (with tension applied). L is pressed against the folded portion, and the operation line L enters the shearing portion 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above, and as a result, the operation line L cannot be operated. Yes To become. FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are explanatory diagrams assuming a case where the fraudulent act B is performed. Also, with respect to the above-mentioned fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line nullifying member 700 or the like as the first fraud prevention means cannot sufficiently exert an effect on the fraudulent ball Q which becomes a foul ball (for example, a foul ball). The operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention means even if the fraudulent ball Q is fired with a certain degree of strength). Therefore, this embodiment reinforces the fraud measures by the first fraud prevention means. It also has an effect. Therefore, when the injustice B is targeted, the operation line nullifying members 700 and 7000 as the first and second fraud preventing means, and the operation line nullifying member 7000H as the third fraud preventing means described later. , 7000S are appropriately used together, and one first operation line nullifying member 700 and another second operation line nullifying member 7000 or a third operation line nullifying member 7000H, 7000S are provided. The pachinko machine 1 may be provided together. In this case, the first operation line nullifying member 700 and the second operation line nullifying member 7000 are provided together on the door frame 3 side and in a state where they are not exposed to the outside. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble described above, the anti-fraud information is hard to leak. In addition, the operation line nullifying members 700 and 7000 can easily maintain the security performance if they are replaced together with the door frame 3 because the sharpness and the like affect the security performance.

  By the way, the operation line nullifying members 700 and 7000, which are the first and second fraud prevention means described above, cut the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v and nullify the operation line L, but pinch the operation line L. That is, the operation line L is sandwiched between the two metal plates 7011 and 7022, for example, so that the flexible operation line L cannot be pushed or pulled so that it is difficult to push and pull, and the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot be easily operated. May be invalidated as follows.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is formed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined by hatched portions in the enlarged view of FIG. 41, and the metal plates 7011 and 7022 The first half of the non-joined portion at the tip of is expanded into a V-shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the second half of the non-joined portion is defined as a clamping portion 7044. Such an operation line nullifying member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and furthermore, the unit main body 151 is hardly touched by an employee or a game machine assembler due to safety considerations. And is covered and accommodated from outside by a lid member 152.

  According to the operation line nullifying member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 42, the operation line L is pulled by the illegal ball Q and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. When the folded portion of the metal plate is turned into a U-turn shape, it is guided by the operation line nullifying member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the folded portion, and the clamping portion in the latter half of the non-joined portion between the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022 7044, it is pinched and pinched like tweezers.

  As a result, the illegal ball Q that has flowed backward from the lower counter ball supply port 211c due to the illegal act A described above reaches the firing position of the firing rail 544, or the illegal ball Q intentionally turned into a foul ball by the illegal act B. Can be prevented from reaching the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening, and even if it reaches there, the operation line L is sandwiched by the operation line invalidating member 7000. Therefore, no matter how much the flexible operation line L is pushed in from the lower counter ball supply port 211c, the flexible operation line L is only loosened thereat, and as a result, the amount of the operation line L to be extended cannot be adjusted (the illegal ball Q hanging on the game area 5a). Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to prevent an illegal act using the illegal ball Q.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joined portion at the tip of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded into a V-shape to form the introduction guide portion 7033, and the second half of the non-joined portion is set to the clamping portion 7044. However, instead of this, one metal plate is bent so as to overlap the plate surfaces, and the tip end of one of the bent plate surfaces is expanded in a V-shape to introduce the guide portion 7033 (guide portion). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a sandwiching portion between both plate surfaces is used as the sandwiching portion 7044. Thereby, while achieving the same effect as the above-described fraud deterrence effect, the assembling work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of the metal plate can be improved.

  The operation line nullifying member 7000 for pinching the operation line L is not shown, but a double-sided tape is installed in a gap between the second inclined portions 150 kb in FIG. Thus, an adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L guided to the second inclined portion 150 kb may be immobilized by being adhered to the adhesive portion.

  Also, the operation line nullifying member 7000 for holding the operation line L is configured by changing the above-mentioned one composed of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to a coil spring as shown in FIG. The guide portion 150k may be installed and formed such that the guide direction of the second inclined portion 150kb and the center axis of the guide portion 150k are substantially orthogonal to each other. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb fits between adjacent coils of the coil spring and is clamped.

  Coil springs, such as tension coil springs and torsion coil springs, which have a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when there is no load, must be installed in a compressed state, such as a compression coil spring. This is more advantageous for installation work.

  In addition, the coil spring may be installed in a straight state when no load is applied. However, as shown in FIG. 43, the coil spring is installed so as to be curved in a direction in which the coils on the entry side of the operation line L slightly expand. It is more preferable that the operation line L enters smoothly. As described above, when the operation line nullifying member 7000 is formed of a coil spring, it can be manufactured at a low cost, so that the cost can be reduced.

  Further, a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted into the operation line nullifying member 7000 from the ball opening (lower counter ball supply port 211c), and the guide plate 150k to the operation line nullifying member 7000 is closed with the cell plate. In order to cope with this, in the embodiment described above, in order to cope with this, the course change portion of the return path portion 1014 of the foul ball (the portion corresponding to the position directly above the lower counter ball supply port 211c in this embodiment) A slit 1015 into which such a cell plate (foreign matter) enters is formed (see FIG. 39). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress further unauthorized manipulation of inserting the foreign matter from the ball opening (lower counter ball supply port 211c) and closing the guide portion 150k. In addition, as a countermeasure against illegal work in which foreign matter such as a cell plate is inserted from the ball opening (lower dish ball supply port 211c) to close the guide portion 150k, foreign matter such as a cell plate as in the above-described slit 1015 is removed. A configuration in which a projection-shaped obstacle 1016 that impinges on a foreign substance such as a cell plate or the like to impede reaching the guide 150k as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. As such, a higher level of fraud prevention may be achieved.

  Also, the first and second operation line nullifying members 700 and 7000 described above have a static structure that nullifies the operation line L after entering it, but FIGS. 49, 50, and 51. 52 and 53, a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D that positively invalidates the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal ball Q may be used.

  FIGS. 49, 50, and 51 show one specific example of the dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D. The operation line nullification member 7000D has a foul ball return path (return path section 1014). (A corner corresponding to a position directly above the lower bowl supply port 211c).

  That is, in FIG. 49, the operation line nullifying member 7000D includes a horizontal plate-shaped ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-shaped nullifying portion 2646 vertically projecting from the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion 2645. And a shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the nullification portion 2646 intersects with the center portion, and an arc-shaped ball stopper 2648 centered on the shaft hole 2647 protruding rightward from the upper edge of the nullification portion 2646, A support shaft 2649 implanted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and is rotated about 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving position in FIG. Can swing to the release position. Further, the operation line nullifying member 7000D is provided with a balance weight 2660 on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the nullifying portion 2646 across the shaft hole 2647. The ball receiving portion 2645 is urged by the balance weight 2660. The ball receiving position shown in FIG. 50A is maintained in a state where no external force (specifically, the load for one game ball) is applied, while the load for one game ball is applied to the ball receiving portion 2645. At this time, it swings to the release posture of FIG. 50 (b).

  In addition, the end edge of the nullification portion 2646 of the operation line nullification member 7000D is an intersection 2651 that turns around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the nullification member 7000D swings to the release position shown in FIG. 50 (b), the intersecting side portion 2651 fits into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

  When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the above-described dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D, the foul ball connects to the communication passage 150h of the foul ball return passage as shown in FIG. Immediately after flowing down and changing the course in the downward direction by the course changing unit, it is placed on the ball receiving unit 2645 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Due to the load of the foul ball, the operation line nullifying member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649, and changes to the release posture of FIG. Then, the foul ball placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line nullification member 7000D is discharged to the downstream storage passage 150e, and the operation line nullification member 7000D released from the foul ball is attached with the balance weight 2660. Return to the original ball receiving posture by the force.

  In rare cases, a plurality of foul spheres may be generated at once. Even in such a case, while the first foul sphere is processed by the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the subsequent foul sphere is as shown in FIG. 50 (b). Is stopped by the arcuate ball stopper 2648, and the processing is continued after the operation line invalidating member 7000D has returned. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul spheres are generated at the same time, processing can be performed one by one without any trouble.

  Next, the above-described fraudulent act B (a plurality of fraudulent balls Q are connected to the operation line L and one of the fraudulent balls Q is fired from the hit ball supply port 142a) Into a foul sphere by intentionally launching the foul sphere weakly from the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for a ball, and further grasping the operation line L connected to the foul sphere, and then following the fraudulent ball. When the illegal ball Q flows due to an illegal act of firing the ball Q into the game area 5a), the illegal ball Q flows down the communication passage 150h as shown in FIG. 51 (a), and the course is changed downward by the course changing unit. Immediately after being placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, the operation line nullifying member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 due to the load of the illegal ball Q, and changes to the release posture of FIG. 51B. At this time, the nullifying portion 2646 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D also rotates, and the intersection side portion 2651 of the edge crosses the foul ball return passage and fits into the receiving portion 2652 on the passage side. When crossing the foul ball return path, the operation line L passing through the foul ball return path naturally also crosses the foul ball return path, so that the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. Stop). Then, since the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot fall, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D continues the release posture without being released from the illegal ball Q. Of course, since the operation line nullifying member 7000D is located at a position where it cannot be reached even if a hand is put in through the lower dish ball supply port 211c which is an opening for a ball, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q remaining at this position is taken out from the outside.

  If it is difficult to reverse the operation line L by meandering the operation line L between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652, the state in which the operation line L is caught by the operation line invalidating member 7000D is obtained. It is also difficult to return the illegal ball Q to the hit ball supply port 142a. This allows the illegal ball Q remaining on the operation line invalidating member 7000D to be saved and collected as a proof ball.

  The dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D described above utilizes the own weight of the illegal ball Q. However, the operation line invalidating member 7000D may be operated by the electric driving means as shown in FIG. Good.

  That is, the operation line nullifying member 7000D of FIG. 52 connects the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 serving as the electric driving means to the portion where the above-described balance weight 2660 is provided, and also connects the ball detector to the nullifying portion 2646 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D. When the game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises, and the operation line invalidating member 7000D shifts from the ball receiving position to the release position. When the game ball changes, and the game ball is released from the ball receiving portion 2645 and is detected by the ball detector 2655 (change of the signal from the presence or absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is lowered and the operation line is lowered. The invalidating member 7000D is to return from the release position to the ball receiving position. .

  When a normal ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D, the occurrence and release of the ball are detected by a change in the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 is received in response thereto. In order to operate appropriately, the foul balls are processed one by one similarly to the operation line nullifying member 7000D using the own weight.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, and the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises to invalidate the operation line. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the illegal ball Q, as described above, the operation line L is caught by the intersection side portion 2651 of the invalidating portion 2646 and the receiving portion 2652, and the illegal ball Q does not fall. Since no emission signal is generated from the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 stays at the raised position. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q cannot be taken out from the aimed ball opening, illegality can be prevented beforehand.

  Note that the above-described dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D cuts and invalidates the operation line L by providing a cutting blade at the intersection 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidating portion 2646. be able to. Further, the operation line nullifying member 7000D of the present embodiment has a function of preventing the intrusion of the illegal ball Q from the ball opening side in a state where the ball receiving portion 2645 covers the return passage portion 104. It can also be used as reverse running prevention means. Therefore, a higher fraud prevention function is exhibited.

  Further, in addition to the above-described configuration, the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D has, for example, a nullifying portion formed in a shutter plate structure that linearly advances and retracts to open and close the communication passage 150h, and has a tip end of the shutter plate. Is a crossed side crossing the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the communication passage 150h and downstream from the movable region of the crossed side, and passes through the movable region of the crossed side. After detecting the illegal ball Q by this ball detector, the invalidating portion is operated, and the operation line L is pinched or cut off at the intersection side crossing the communication passage 150h. Is also good.

  Further, the above-described dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D can be applied to the first operation line nullification member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operation line invalidating member 7000D. In this case, since the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, the effect of suppressing illegality can be surely enhanced.

  FIG. 53 shows a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D, which winds and invalidates the operation line L.

  In other words, the operation line nullifying member 7000D is a square ring-shaped nullifying portion 2646 attached to the communication passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be rotatable around a rotation shaft 2656 that is orthogonal to the passage. And a motor 2657 as an electric driving means for rotating the nullification unit 2646, and a horizontal bar crossing the communication passage 150h of the nullification unit 2646 as an intersection side 2651 provided downstream of the movable (rotation) area of the intersection side 2651. And a ball detector 2655, and the invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once each time a foul ball is detected by the ball detector 2655.

  When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with such an operation line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball enters the communication passage 150h, passes through the nullification section 2646, and the foul ball is detected by a ball. The invalidating unit 2646 idles once by being detected by the detector 2655, but the foul ball flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside from the ball opening.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q due to the illegal act B described above flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the illegal ball Q dives through the invalidation section 2646. Since the illegal ball Q passes through the invalidating unit 2646 and the invalidating unit 2646 makes one rotation, the operation line L is wound around the invalidating unit 2646. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q stops in the communication passage 150h, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q will reach the hands of the unauthorized person.

  Note that the ball detector 2655 that detects the illegal ball Q may be one that is displaced by receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In such a case, the illegal ball Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the unnecessary idle rotation of the operation line invalidating member 7000D for winding the operation line L described above.

As described above, the description of the dynamic operation line invalidating member includes the following technical idea.
"A game area where games are played with game balls,
A ball launching device that launches a game ball,
A launching passage section that forms a launching sphere passage communicating from the launching position of the ball launching device to the game area,
A return passage portion forming a foul ball return passage connecting a foul ball drop opening established in the middle of the launching ball passage and a ball opening for discharging a game ball to the outside in front of the machine,
Fraud prevention means capable of preventing the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball from being operated from the forefront,
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidating member that invalidates the operation line by nipping or cutting or winding the operation line,
The operation line disabling member includes an intersection that crosses the foul ball return path of the game ball, and operates the intersection when the illegal ball passes through the movable area of the intersection. A gaming machine configured to cross a return path, and to pinch, cut, or wind up the operation line passing through the foul ball return path at the intersection side to invalidate the operation line. "

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10, FIG. 11, FIG. 39, FIG. 47, and FIG. ) And an operation line nullifying member 7000S provided at an end of the outer rail 1001 (specifically, a resin rail base 1001x).

  The operation line nullifying member 7000H provided at the end of the protruding side of the firing rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is comb-shaped so that an operator's hand does not directly touch the cutting edge. Are covered by the safety cover 1017 arranged side by side. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover 1017.

  Therefore, as described above, using the special tool such as a cell plate, the illegal ball Q is pushed into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower counter ball supply port 211c to flow backward, and is sent to the firing position of the ball firing device 540. When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the firing rail 544 and rolls due to the inclination toward the firing position, the operation line L is pulled (with tension applied) to the operation line invalidating member. It is cut by touching the cutting blade of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

  In addition, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent to the firing position from the hit ball supply port 142a, and is intentionally made into a foul ball from the lower counter ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Even in the event of cheating B in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball Q is grasped and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a, the fraudulent ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage 1014 Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line invalidating member 7000H in the process of falling, it is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

  On the other hand, the operation line nullifying member 7000S provided on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001 has a large number of hard resin wires in a brush shape as shown in FIGS. It protrudes.

  According to the operation line nullifying member 7000S, the illegal ball Q tentatively reaches the game area 5a and hangs in a state of being connected to the operation line L, and the end of the operation line L is a lower dish ball supply port which is a ball opening. Even if a fraudulent person is grasping via the 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside to raise the fraudulent ball Q in the game area 5a, the operation line L is caused by the tension of the wire of the operation line invalidating member 7000S. After that, even if the force of manipulating the operation line L to lower the illegal ball Q is subsequently relaxed, the operation line L is less likely to slip due to the resistance received from the wire group of the operation line invalidating member 7000S. Movement of the hand that has been loosened does not reach the illegal ball Q. That is, since the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, an illegal act using the illegal ball Q can be suppressed as a result.

  Thus, the third fraud prevention means is that the operation line nullifying member 7000H on the firing rail 544 side exhibits an effect in the initial stage of fraudulent acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the operation line nullifying member 7000S on the side exerts an effect, a higher level of fraud prevention effect can be obtained.

  Note that it is of course possible to use either one of the operation line nullifying members 7000H and 7000S alone, and it is also possible to use both the operation line nullifying member 7000H and the specific nullifying member of the operation line nullifying member 7000S. The forms may be interchanged, or the same invalidating member may be employed.

  In addition to the case where the operation line nullifying members 7000H and 7000S are separately formed as in the present embodiment and attached to the firing rail 544 or the outer rail 1001, for example, a metal plate forming the firing rail 544 is appropriately processed to disable the operation line. Forming member 7000H integrally, or by integrally forming a wire on a resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001, or by forming a V-groove at the corner of the rail base 1001x as shown in FIG. 8B. May be engraved, and the operation line L may be attracted to the inside of the groove of the holding portion 7000Sv to be held.

  Further, the operation line nullifying member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line nullifying member 7000 as shown in FIG. 48, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described in FIGS. , 7022, and a guide portion 150k including a first inclined portion 150ka and a second inclined portion 150kb may be provided on the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001.

  As described above, the embodiment in which the second operation line nullifying member 7000 for nullifying the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014. Although the form provided in the drop port 1013 has been described, the present invention is not limited to the above-described form.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is provided at a folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h, that is, at the entrance of the communication passage 150h. An invalidating member 7000 is provided at the outlet portion of the communication passage 150h (see the arrow z in FIG. 39), on the rear side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. 38 (a), or the outer rail constituting the foul ball drop port 1013. The operation line L is a portion that bends by contacting a part of the return passage portion 1014, such as provided at the start end of the 1001 and the end of the firing rail 544. At any position in the return passage portion 1014, provided that the portion is subjected to a pressing force when it is to be stretched straight by receiving the tension caused by the pulling force of the user. It may be. The installation position of the operation line invalidating member 7000 of the present embodiment is a position where the player cannot touch the ball even if the fingertip is inserted from the opening for the ball, and this position is the safety surface of the player and the operation line invalidation. It is preferable in consideration of a security surface that makes it difficult to perform unauthorized operations on the forming member 7000 itself.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is provided to be shifted to one side of the communication passage 150h, but as shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is formed so as to fill the entire width of the passage. A cutting blade may be arranged. In FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), the end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the start end portion of the communication passage 150h are formed as a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017, and the cutting edge of the cutting blade is an operator. Is not touched. As the cutting blade of the operation line nullifying member 7000 in this case, a known cutting blade structure or a tip structure is used, which is installed in the sheath-shaped holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i, and the unit main body 151 If a loading port 1019 and a discharge port 1020 are provided in each of the lid members 152, and the cutting blade is pushed out in such a way that the old and new can be replaced, the sharpness can always be maintained. In addition, in FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), reference numeral 1021 is a pinching part for the operating line L cut into the valley of the safety cover part 1017, and the operating line L can bite into the pinching part 1021. It has become. Therefore, even if the operation line invalidating member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L may bite into the pinching part 1021 such as the bottom wall 150g, so that the certainty of the fraud prevention is improved. improves.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the foul ball is returned to the lower plate is shown. However, there is a gaming machine having a structure in which the foul ball is returned to the upper plate (including the case where the lower plate is not provided). In this case, using the space communicating with the game ball 5a from the upper counter ball supply port (ball opening), a fraudulent act of letting the fraudulent ball Q with the operation line L attached into the game area 5a (the fraudulent acts A and B described above) May be performed. In the case of such a gaming machine, it is illustrative that a second fraud prevention means is provided at a predetermined portion of the foul return passage located in a space communicating from the upper bowl supply port to the gaming area 5a as in the above-described embodiment. it can.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side, but the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the main body frame 4 side.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with one second fraud prevention means. However, a plurality of second fraud prevention means may be provided. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portion in the above-described embodiment are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (in each of the folded portions) has the second configuration as in the above-described embodiment. A fraud prevention means may be provided. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the effect of deterring an illegal act using the illegal ball Q.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal plate is provided as the second fraud prevention means in the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014, but a resin molded product having a similar configuration is provided instead of the metal plate. Alternatively, the molding of the foul cover unit 150 itself may have a special shape so that it can function as the second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate which is the second fraud prevention means in the above-described embodiment is not provided, and instead, a tapered shape provided at a folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h is provided. In order to be able to capture the operation line L at the narrowest portion (narrowest portion) of the guide portion 150k, a slit-shaped capture portion is formed in a resin molded component constituting the return passage portion 1014, The operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q may be pinched by the capture portion, which is the narrowest portion of the guide portion 150k. Even with such a configuration, the same illegal deterrent effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is cut or pinched by the operation line invalidating member 7000. However, FIG. In FIG. 46 and FIG. 49, the illegal ball reverse which prevents the illegal ball Q from entering through the ball opening (prevents the reverse movement and reverse flow of the illegal ball Q) without affecting the flow of the normal ball. By providing the advance prevention means, the illegality by the illegal ball Q is prevented.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a special tool such as a cell plate (foreign matter) for pushing an illegal ball Q into a course changing portion (a portion corresponding to immediately above the lower counter ball supply port 211c) of the return passage portion 1014. In addition, it is possible to exemplify the provision of the attracting portion 1022 for attracting the illegal ball Q itself to another passage and sealing the movement (first illegal ball reverse movement prevention means). Thereby, it is possible to suppress an illegal act such as the illegal act A described above, which reverses the illegal ball Q, without affecting the flow of the normal ball. In addition, at the entrance of the attraction unit 1022, a capture valve that can swing only in the direction of entry of the counterflowing illegal ball Q into the attraction unit 1022 (allows entry into the attraction unit 1022, A one-sided valve (not shown) that disables disengagement may be provided, so that traces of using the illegal ball Q and evidence of misconduct can be left.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 46, a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the downflow direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the illegal ball Q from moving backward (backflow). Yes (the second illegal ball reverse prevention means). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of backflowing the fraudulent ball Q, such as the fraudulent act A described above, without affecting the flow of the normal ball. The operation line invalidating member 7000D in FIG. 49 is also a type of check valve, and has the same effect as the check valve 1023.

  Further, the static operation line invalidating member and the dynamic operation line invalidating member described above may of course have both.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an operation line nullification member different from the first operation line nullification member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014. However, such an operation line nullification member is provided with, for example, a foul ball drop port 1013. It may be provided between the firing position or between the fall ball drop port 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

  In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is detachably mounted. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and The front of the area 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to the door frame base 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending in a flat plate shape outward from a position below the upper left and right corners in front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the projection 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 116). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161 respectively, and are separated from each other so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 116).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes from the base 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. I do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking pieces 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 are inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated such that the protrusion 163b is positioned below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thus, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by a procedure reverse to the procedure described above. Thus, the glass unit 160 is detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is at a rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding portion 163b regulates the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the projection 163b does not rotate to a position above the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction of the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is provided with a flat main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 projecting rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. The upper end of the main body 171 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, an out guiding part 1003, a part of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. The pachinko machine 1 is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the rear projecting piece 172 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear protruding piece 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state where the rear protruding piece 172 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut on the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. The hitting of the game ball B into 5a is not inhibited.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In the state where the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a portion where the front surface of the main body 171 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and projects rearward from the lower side of the main body 171. The removed rearward projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 has a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 (see FIGS. 30 and 32 to 34) of the door frame base unit 100, and the player operates the game ball B in the upper plate 201 to play the game board 5. Can be driven into the game area 5a.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration board 184. And a handle cap 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 behind the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 to the outer periphery. A handle member 181 having a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188; A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to an initial rotation position (a rotation start end in a counterclockwise direction in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 urged in the direction.

  Also, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end projecting outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 in a front view and having a base. A single button 193 whose end side is rotatably mounted on an axis extending back and forth on the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a single button mounted on the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 193. An operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in a radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and an inward direction from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. The three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, which protrude outward from the outer peripheral surface in a circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (a shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, and the other end of the handle return spring 190 is locked. And a locking projection 182f.

  The four first projections 182a, the second projections 182b, the third projections 182c, and the fourth projections 182d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulging outward, and the first protrusion 182a has a counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. The side surface in the direction is concave (gouge) so as to curve inward. The second projection 182b is such that a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first projection 182a by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees in a clockwise direction. It protrudes slightly lower. The second projection 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the most protruding portion bulging outward, and the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c is such that a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from a most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees in a clockwise direction. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surface of the third protrusion 182c is substantially linearly inclined on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is more gradually inclined than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c by a clockwise rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and It protrudes slightly higher. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 182d are substantially linearly inclined, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cap 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cap 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and round, and has translucency. The handle cap 185 has a lens member formed three-dimensionally of a transparent member inside. The handle cap 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

  The handle unit 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined such that the right end side is located behind the left end side in plan view and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached via is also inclined outwardly in plan view (in other words, its tip end is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182, that is, the strength input by the player.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player contacts the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. For this reason, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and cannot hit the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the handle control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 controls the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the operation before the operation of the single-shot button 193 is performed by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

  Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is largely rotated clockwise in a front view. Then, when the game ball B is strongly driven into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the fourth protrusion 182d is positioned at the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. And the fourth projection 182d is used as the first projection 182a to change the handle 182 so that the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. , The feeling of fatigue of the game can be reduced, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from behind. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. The plate unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 mounted on the front surface of the plate base unit 210. , And an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left and right directions, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the upper plate 201, and a right side of the upper plate main body 212. A mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213, The unit includes an upper tray removing unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213, and an upper tray removing unit 240 attached behind the upper tray removing unit 230.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and has a lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202, and is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251, a dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit body 252, and separated from each other in the left and right directions. It includes a dish upper right decoration unit 275, a dish lower left decoration unit 280 and a dish lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the dish left upper decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The rendering operation unit 300 includes, as the rendering operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is an effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, an operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a cage rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring transmission for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to a lower surface of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, a decorative substrate cover 353 for covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the operation unit base 320. Vibration speaker 354, an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And

  The plate unit 200 is entirely bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is disposed so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. A ball rental operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300 with the upper plate 201, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201. As is clear from the above description, the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the effect operation unit 300, and the like protrude toward the player side in an intermediate region in the left-right direction of the lower half of the front surface of the door frame 3. A forward bulging structure is provided.

[3-5-1. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212. The upper plate 201 is formed in a container shape that bulges forward to a large extent on the left side from the left and right center in front view and opens upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion that is about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges forward most. The front end of the upper plate 201 is receded rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 62). ). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface thereof is positioned at a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211 e. B is inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game balls B discharged forward from the upper dish ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper dish 201, and the received game balls B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b that is electrically grounded (earth ground) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B contacts (rolls) to play a game. The static electricity charged on the ball B can be removed.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating up and down in the bottom wall so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower bowl 202 is closed by a lower bowl removing unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially square shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is disposed near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl 202 of the lower bowl 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower bowl supply port 211c in a state where the lower bowl 202 is assembled to the pan unit 200.

  The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c while the lower plate hole 202a is closed, and open the lower ball hole 202a. Can be discharged below the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). In addition, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The released game balls B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower bowl extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 of the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the back. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The plate base unit 210 is a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the plate 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 which is mounted on the upper right side of the upper plate main body 212 in the upper front part of the plate unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and which is mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front side of the plate unit base 211. And a dish unit relay board 214.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. And a unit 240 for removing an upper tray ball attached to the rear of the tray unit base 211 behind the unit 230 for removing the upper tray ball.

[3-5-3a. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is a flat plate-shaped (shallow open rear portion) extending right and left over the entire width of the door frame base 101. (Box shape).

  The plate unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in a front view, and extends rearward and downward under the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punched metal mounted on the front side, a lower tray ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at a lower portion on the left side with respect to the right and left center in front view, and extending rearward in a tubular manner; A cutout portion 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass therethrough, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically behind the ball supply port 211c, and front and back at the upper right side in front view of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. And an upper plate ball feed port 211e which extends vertically and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper plate ball feed port 211e, and has a mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is mounted, and an upper portion at the left of the upper plate ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removing slider 242 of the upper tray removing unit 240 penetrates forward and backward below the tray body, and penetrates forward and backward at the lower right corner in front view. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view. Port 211i.

  The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 in a state where the upper plate ball supply port 211a is assembled to the door frame 3, and the cylindrical rear end thereof passes the upper plate ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  In a state where the lower dish ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower dish 202, and the cylindrical rear end is connected to the lower dish ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The downstream end of the ball guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the upper ball is removed is connected to a notch 211d formed at a portion of the lower ball supply port 211c that extends in a cylindrical shape. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are moved to the upper plate ball outlet 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140, by operating the upper ball drain button 222. The ball is discharged from the lower bowl supply port 211c into the lower bowl 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the tray is removed.

  The upper bowl feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper bowl removing unit 240 when assembled to the bowl base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) in which the upper part and the rear part are opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side is larger than the left and right center in front view and bulges forward. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end receding rearward as it goes rightward in a front view from a portion that bulges forward most, and a depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than an outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined such that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed at the upper portion near the right end.

  The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that a portion near the right end, which is closed at the top, is sunk below the ball rental operation unit 220 in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200. The upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a formed at an upper middle portion in the left-right direction, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape whose upper part is open. The mounting base 213 has an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the rear right corner.

  The front slider 232 of the unit for removing upper and lower balls 230 is inserted through the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. In addition, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted into the through hole 213b.

[3-5-3d. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the lower left dish decorative board 283, the lower right dish decorative board 288, and the operation section relay board 392. It is for doing. The plate unit relay board 214 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the mounting base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and sends cash to a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After a predetermined number of game balls B are inserted into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 after the player or the prepaid card is inserted, the remaining amount of cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine is displayed, or the ball rental machine is used. To return the cash or the prepaid card inserted in the game ball B after renting out the game ball B.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is disposed to the right of the extraction button 222 and has a translucency, a ball lending button 224 that is disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation It includes a return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball rental operation base 223.

  The upper bowl removing button 222 protrudes upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display section is constituted by three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. When a ball rental button 224 is pressed after a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game ball B that has been lent is deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. The ball lending display section displays the amount of cash or prepaid card remaining in the ball lending machine. An error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit for removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 for removing the upper tray ball and the unit 240 for removing the upper tray ball in the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. When the upper ball removing button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper ball removing unit 230 and the upper ball removing unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to form the upper plate 201. This is for discharging the game balls B stored therein to the lower plate 202.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 to the left of the mounting protrusion 211f and below the ball lending operation unit 220. The unit for removing the upper tray ball 240 is attached to a rear portion of the unit for removing the upper tray ball 230 on the rear surface of the tray unit base 211.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231, and a front barrel 231 that is vertically movably inserted into the barrel of the front base 231. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end abutting on the lower end of the upper counter ball removing button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper counter ball removing slider 242 of the upper counter ball removing unit 240. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The unit 240 for removing the upper tray ball is provided with a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. A slider 242 that is slidably mounted on the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 that is mounted on the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion to which the upper ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and has a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward at the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides the ball backward, and a game at a position lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b at the rear surface of the rear base 241. And a guiding path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled with the plate base unit 210, and forwardly passes through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at the position where it opens. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed such that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower portion in a state where the ball feeding guiding path 241b is assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The portion extending to the left and right of the ball guide path 241c protrudes rightward in rear view from the portion where the upper plate ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. And is open on the right side in rear view. A portion extending left and right of the ball guide path 241c is closed by a rear cover 244 on the rear side. In a state where the ball guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper portion of a portion extending vertically below the ball feed guide path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the ball guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish removing slider 242 has a square shape in a front view, and has an operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from an upper left corner and protruding rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined such that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  In the state where the slider 242 for removing the upper tray ball is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242 a penetrates the slider insertion opening 211 g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242 a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the head. Further, in the state in which the upper ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball removing member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. The rod 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper countersunk slider 242, and urges the upper counterslider 242 upward. Accordingly, the upper countersunk slider 242 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by opposing the urging force of the spring 243.

  The unit for removing the ball from the upper ball 230 and the unit after removing the ball from the upper ball 240 are positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the slider for the upper ball from the ball is removed. The upper ball removing button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward through the front slider 232 in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c abutting on the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition between them.

  Therefore, in a state where the upper plate ball removing button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and are sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 through the entrance 141a and the ball feed member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper ball removing button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper ball removing slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the operation of the upper ball removing slider 242 is performed. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partitioning portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B, which has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b, is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball ejection guide path 241c, and then is lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper tray removing button 222 is released, the upper tray removing slider 242 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is removed via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball pullout button 222 is raised, the ball pullout member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c abutting on the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball dropout 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is sent to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feed unit 140 by the unit for removing the upper plate ball 230 and the unit for removing the upper plate ball 240, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5-4. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202, is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and has the effect operation unit 300 attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202, and a dish unit base 251 covering the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the dish 211, a lower dish emptying unit 260 attached to the lower face of the lower dish body 251, and a dish attached to the upper part of the front face of the dish unit body 252 while being left and right apart from each other. The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit mounted below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the main unit 252, respectively. 285.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and that is open at the top and rear. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

  The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the right front end in plan view. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl removing hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower bowl removing unit 265.

  The lower plate main body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 in a state where the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. When the lower dish main body is assembled to the dish unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211, and the lower dish ball outlet hole 202a is connected to the lower dish ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210, and decorates the front of the plate unit 200. The plate unit body 252 protrudes so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and protrudes forward on the left side in the left-right direction on the lower side. The upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 bulges forward from the left and right ends to the center in the left and right direction at the upper part and extends downward and is separated to the left and right. Has a lower front decorative portion 252b bulging forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251; and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and have a dish upper left decorative unit 270, a dish lower left decorative unit 280, a dish upper right decorative unit 275, and a dish lower right decorative unit on the front surfaces thereof. 285 are attached. The right side of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The plate unit main body 252 has a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows a player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed such that the top and bottom become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending forward and backward by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

  Further, the plate unit body 252 includes a front notch 252e cut out upward from a lower front end of a portion of the lower front decorative portion 252b covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom notch 252f which is cut out at a portion below the bottom. In the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f, the lower tray removing unit 260 is inserted.

  Further, the plate unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion opening 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b back and forth and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side swelling portions 252a that are located at the center in the left-right direction. And a production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which the attachment 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is approximately １ ／ of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 when assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. . Further, in a state where the lower plate removing unit 260 is assembled with the lower plate removing unit 260, the lower plate removing button 260 of the lower unit removing unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate removing base 260 of the lower unit removing unit 260 is attached. The bottom notch 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are on the same plane.

[3-5-4c. Lower plate empty unit]
The lower dish removing unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower dish ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower dish ball extracting hole 202 a, the game balls B are stored in the lower dish 202 or the game balls B are discharged from the lower dish 202. It is to make it.

  The lower plate removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a plate-like lower plate removing base 261 having a through hole vertically penetrating at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower plate removing unit 261. A slider 262 mounted on the upper surface side of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower counter ball removal button 263 mounted on a front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 for urging the slider 262 forward; The slider 262 is provided with a lower ball removing cover 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower ball removing cover 265 through the slider 262 in an open state.

  The lower plate empty base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom cutout 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the lower plate empty hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower bowl removing hole 261 is formed in the same size as the lower bowl removing hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-back direction, and is slidably mounted in the left-right center of the lower dish removal base 261 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a columnar shape.

  The lower ball removing cover 265 is attached to the lower ball removing base 261 at a position on the left side of the slider 262 at a position on the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically. And the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower bowl removing lid 265 is formed with a left-right extending slit into which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the state where the lower dish removing unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish removing base 261 closes the bottom cutout 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower face of the lower dish removing base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the lower tray removing unit 260, in a normal state, the slider 262 is located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower tray removing lid 265 is located immediately above the through hole. And the through hole (lower countersunk ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower bowl 202 is closed by the lower bowl removing lid 265, and the lower bowl 202 can store the game ball B. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower bowl removing button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower counter button 263 is pressed rearward to move rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower counter button 263. Becomes When the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower bowl removing lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower bowl removing lid 265 centers on the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It turns in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removing cover 265 located immediately above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, whereby the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removing hole 202a is opened. The game balls B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by the pressing of the lower plate removing button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate removing button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower bowl removing lid 265 is kept rotating backward, the lower bowl removing hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower bowl 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower bowl removing hole 202a from this state, when the lower bowl removing button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b, is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. You. Then, when the pressing of the lower ball removing button 263 is released, the slider 262 is moved forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower ball removing button 263 is returned to a state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower countersunk ball cover 265 rotates and the right end side is located immediately above the through-hole, and the lower countersunk ball hole 202a is closed by the lower countersunk ball cover 265. Thereby, the game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5-4d. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper front side of the upper side bulging portion 252 a of the dish unit main body 252. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the dish unit 200.

  The upper left dish decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right and has a translucent upper left dish decoration 271, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface.

  The upper left dish 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The upper left dish reflector 272 is inserted from the rear inside the upper left decorative body 271, and a through-hole is formed in a portion of the upper left dish substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The upper left dish decorative substrate 273 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the upper left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be made to emit light.

  The upper left plate decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. And is continuous. Since the upper left dish decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the upper left dish decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left decoration board 273 emit light, the entire front of the upper left dish decoration 271 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The plate upper right decorative unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical shape, extends right and left, and has a translucent plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decorative body 276, and And a dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely right and upper at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decorative board 278 corresponding to the LED. The dish upper right decorative substrate 278 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish upper right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be made to emit light.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. And is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4e. Bottom left dish decoration unit and bottom right dish decoration unit]
The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front side of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275, respectively. Can be The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The lower left dish decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right, and has a translucent lower dish decoration 281, a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decoration 281, A lower left dish decoration board 283 mounted on the rear side of the lower dish reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front.

  The lower left dish decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. In the lower left dish decoration 281, a semicircular arc bulging forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276 has a central axis extending slightly obliquely to the upper left rear at the left end, and a center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that a half cylinder is bent. The lower left corner of the dish 281 has a spherical shape at the left end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the lower left decorative plate 281 becomes thinner toward the left end. The lower left decoration 281 is formed in milky white.

  The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted from the rear inside the lower left decorative body 281, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left decorative board 283 corresponding to the LED. The lower left dish decoration substrate 283 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the lower left dish decoration 281. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left dish decoration board 283 are full-color LEDs, and the lower left decoration body 281 can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  The lower left dish decoration unit 280 is located on the lower left side of the upper left dish decoration unit 270 in a state where the lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end of the lower left dish decoration unit 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300 is located. It is continuous with the left end. In the lower left dish decoration unit 280, the left end of the lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left dish decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decoration piece 281 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left decoration board 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decoration piece 281 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical shape, extends right and left, and has a translucent lower right decoration 286 and a lower right lower dish attached to the rear side of the lower right decoration 286. It comprises a reflector 287 and a lower right decorative plate 288 mounted on the rear side of the lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as going from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The lower right dish decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that a half cylinder is bent. The right lower end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the lower right decoration 286 becomes thinner toward the right end. The lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the rear inside the dish lower right decorative body 286, and a through hole is formed in a part of the dish lower right decorative board 288 corresponding to the LED. The dish lower right decorative board 288 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish lower right decorative body 286. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decoration plate 288 are full-color LEDs, and the lower right decoration body 286 can be illuminated by emitting light.

  The dish lower right decorative unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decorative body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous with the right end of In the lower right dish decoration unit 285, the right end of the lower right decoration body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right dish decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decoration piece 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower right decoration board 288 emit light, the lower right decoration body 286 The entire front surface can be almost uniformly illuminated and decorated, and it can be seen that the fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall configuration of staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the direction in which the effect operation button moves forward and backward. FIG. 68 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. The effect operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, decorates the plate unit 200, and, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates and participates in the effect. Is what you can do. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The rendering operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about に 対 し て of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a center pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operation unit 302. And an annular outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b disposed between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotating operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330 An operating ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operating ring transmission gear 350 to the operating section base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and has a plurality of effect operation ring decoration substrates 352 and effect operation ring decoration substrates 352. The decoration board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the display unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit facing the inside of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left and right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper part and the rear part opened.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is depressed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the upper front end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 attached from the rear inside the dish center decoration body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative board 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear inside the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the front light And a decorative board 316 below the center of the dish on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the LED are mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape that bulges downward at the front side from the center rearward in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is a production operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252. 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on an upper end edge extending in a front semicircular shape is located forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest part when assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape whose front view is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and is formed on the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends along a front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a forward part below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A lower plate center decoration 312b in which the protruding semi-arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semi-arc shape. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius), and extending in a semi-arc shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a shape bent as described above. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the plate center upper decoration 312a, and the plate center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the plate center upper decoration 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. In addition, when assembled to the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish upper decorative body 312a are respectively connected to the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish center lower decorative body The left and right ends of 312b are respectively connected to the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is equal to the door frame. The distance is about の of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted from the rear into the dish center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 and attached thereto. The dish center reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center decoration board 314 from leaking rearward (inward). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-circular shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) on the upper surface. Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center decoration board 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center decoration body 312a can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish bottom reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish bottom decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish-under-center decoration board 316 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-circular shape along the dish-under-center decoration 312b, and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) on the upper surface. Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the light emitting decoration of the dish center lower decorative body 312b can be performed by emitting light.

  Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the semi-circular shape of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower plate decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, When the LED of the upper center decorative substrate 314 and the LED of the lower plate center decorative substrate 316 emit light, the whole can be almost uniformly light-emitting and decorated, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end protruding farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 when assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decorative body 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decorative body 271 and the plate upper right decorative body 276, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is the plate lower left decorative body 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by integral decoration.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit mounting of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape whose upper part is opened.

  The operation unit base 320 has a substantially cubic box-shaped outer shape, and a main body 321 whose upper part is open, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (here, four) legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and mounted to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body 321 has a vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom wall from below, and a portion of the lower surface where the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and can amplify the vibration and convert the vibration into sound such as voice or music and output the sound. it can.

  The leg 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. In the main body 321, a through hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The outer diameter of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially coincident with the inner circumference of the upper plate center decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the operation ring transmission gear rotatably around an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. 322 is exposed outside.

  When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in a state where the vibration speaker 354 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to a lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5-5c. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. 71 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 71 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from the lower front. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by a player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation section 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice as large as the dimension in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter of approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation section base 320, an annular rotating base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotating base. A plurality of bushes 333 which are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the shaft 332 and are rotatably mounted around an axis which extends vertically to the ring mounting base 331, and which are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to move the rotary base 332 upward. And a restricting ring retaining member 334.

  The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to a lower outer ring cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and a lower side of the outer ring cover 335. The outer ring lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotary operation unit 302 and the inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are mounted on the upper surface of the rotary base 332 to form a part of the rotary operation unit 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

  The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge on which the rotating base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction, in the outer circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a boss 331b for cylindrically protruding upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions for rotatably mounting the bush 333 and a circumferentially spaced outer side than the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of portions. The plurality of through-holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs on the effect operation ring decorative board 352.

  The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring attachment base 331, and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a protruding downward from the lower surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state where the ring gear 332a is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a three-dimensional shape on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc constituting the outer and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape. And a plurality of outer upper cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending to the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. I have. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative part 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotating base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer and lower portion of a circle extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and to the center side from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b which are arranged in plurality. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming an inner and upper part of a circle extends in an annular shape, and a tube extending downward from an inner end of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which a circular arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface 337 b has the same cylindrical inner diameter as the rotary base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer upper cover 335, the outer lower cover 336, and the inner cover 337 are assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface 335a, the outer lower surface 336a, and the inner surface 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion of a half or more of a circle, and the entire portion has a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5-5d. Rotary drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 73 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 73 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation axis projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342; a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343; and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and cover the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. I have. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the transmission gear 344, and a leftward protruding portion from the left side of the gear portion 345a. A plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detecting pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detecting pieces 345b are circumferentially arranged at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from integral multiples of the intervals of the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Accordingly, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It has become. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotation drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper part of the gear part 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed part of the gear part 345a is the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Meshes with In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 as a whole in a state where the rotation drive unit 340 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to drive the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby causing the rotary operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate. it can.

  In addition, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring drive is performed in the same rotation direction as the rotated operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to provide the rotation operation unit 302 with an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The transmission ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing 325.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the rendering operation ring 330, and rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. And a drive-side gear portion 350b in the form of a spur gear meshing with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring gear 350a and the drive gear 350b have the same pitch circle diameter. The bevel gear ring side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above and the gear attachment member 351 being attached to the operation portion base 320. Can be

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring gear 350a is meshed with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive gear 350b is The transmission drive gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 meshes with the gear 345a. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can also rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Directional operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which a ring is divided into front and rear, and a front decorative substrate 352a formed in a long and narrow strip shape having a front semicircular arc shape, and a rear semicircle. And a rear decorative substrate 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having an arc shape. On each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative board 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state where the effect operation ring decorative board 352 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 having a transparent upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear similarly to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352 a from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and passes through the decoration substrate cover 353 and the through-hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to form the rotation operation portion 302 on the outside of the ring. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be illuminated from inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration in which the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5 g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with its output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as voice, sound effect, and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a vibration plate. In addition, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. At this time, the player gets a feeling as if the effect operation unit 300 was shaking. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device in which an eccentric weight is rotated by a motor, and can provide a variety of effects to a player.

  The purpose of the vibration speaker 354 is to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and to give sound information so that vibration is obtained by resonance. Here, since the resonance depends on the characteristics of the vibrating speaker 354 attached to the gaming machine, the material and hardness of the member to which the vibrating speaker is attached, and the mounting method, input sound information only at a specific frequency. In such a case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb the variation in these characteristics, the frequency of the input sound information is not a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a certain width. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, 38 Hz to 42 Hz is changed (swept) eight times in one cycle of each 1 Hz, approximately one second. This is intermittently repeated for one second sweep input and one second later input again.

  In the assembling work of the gaming machine, the inspection (operation confirmation) of the vibrating speaker at the time of shipment is performed by operating the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game. It is designed to be based on this. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when turning on the game machine (or when the inspector turns on the game machine while operating the RAM clear switch), the main control board 1310 transmits (outputs) a command for clearing and initializing the RAM to the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later. When the peripheral control board receives this command, the peripheral control board performs a vibration speaker operation confirmation process for inspecting (operating) the vibration speaker. The inspector can confirm the sound (sound) of the sound and the music by the vibration speaker 354 and also confirm the vibration of the staging operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354 by the vibration speaker operation confirmation processing. .

[3-5-5h. Direction operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as viewed from the lower front. FIG. 78A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lower position, and FIG. 78B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the upper position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged symmetrically with a button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a center axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward and in a columnar shape, and a disc-shaped connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other and having a circular outer shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. Disk-shaped lifting base 364 and a pair of guide shafts 362 A pair of lift springs 365 urges the provided lift base 364 is passed upwardly, and a.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and having an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 mounted on the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 so that the central shaft 366 is inserted therethrough. 370, the lower and upper cam drive gear member 370 are connected to the lower end, and the central shaft The elevating cam member 371 which is rotatably mounted and rotatably attached to the elevating base member 364, and the elevating driving gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam driving gear member 370 are covered from above. And a disc-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Furthermore, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be movable vertically by a pair of guide shafts 362. Center button body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the center button body 373. A central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having a closed upper end with a diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover above the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a center button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button main body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing operation section 303a.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the center button main body 373 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and an outer peripheral portion. An outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 which covers the outer periphery of the central button body 373. A cylindrical outer decorative lens 379 having a three-dimensional decoration and disposed on the outer peripheral side and above the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, and ascending and descending so as to cover the outer peripheral and upper surfaces of the outer decorative lens 379. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 with the central button cover 375 facing upward at the center Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The pressing detection sensor 381 is attached to the button unit base 361. An elevation detection sensor 382 that detects the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting / lowering cam driving gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a pressing detection sensor 381 and a lifting / lowering detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is attached. The button unit base 361 has the lower end of the leg 361 b attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361, forward and rearward from the center, at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends thereof are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361, and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The elevating base 364 has an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating at the center so as to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. An upright wall portion 364c that protrudes upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d that project toward the inside of the central hole 364b near the lower end of the upright wall portion 364c. I have. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably mounted around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in a vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 has a space in which the bottom part 373b of the center button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the upper part 363, while the upper end of the upright wall part 364c abuts on the upper base 363. Has formed. Further, the lifting base 364 is moved up and down by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the lifting cam member 371.

  The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to a lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And an elevation detecting piece 370c which is cylindrically protruded downwardly from and is notched at two locations facing each other, and is detected by an elevation detecting sensor 382. The lifting cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 at the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar shape and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the lifting base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis, a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 78). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  In addition, the lifting cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 to move the elevating base 364 up and down.

  The central button body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts penetrating the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the upright wall 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a columnar shape and are inserted into the button spring 374.

  The center button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, whereby the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the center button main body 373.

  The center button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 into which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and the lower ends are attached with screws into which washers are inserted. When the washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevating base 364, the upward movement of the center button main body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373 b (lower end of the center opening 373 d) of the center button body 373 comes into contact with the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 is formed so as to penetrate downward. The center button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a smaller urging force than the lifting spring 365.

  The center button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tube portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided so as to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373 a of the center button body 373.

  A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can cause the center button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer periphery button decoration board 377 are full color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration board 377 can make the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers an upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular board section 378 a is extended from the inner periphery of the board section 378 a in a cylindrical shape. A cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction upward are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is mounted on the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 above the substrate portion 378a. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a covering the outer periphery of the outer decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b extending from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a to the center. In the outer peripheral button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380 a is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b has an inner diameter substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  In the assembled state, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the effect operation button unit 360 has the guide pins 364d of the lift base 364 in a state where the lift base 364 is urged upward by a pair of lift springs 365. The lifting cam member 371 is inserted from below into a locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 has moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. In this state, the center button main body 373 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Therefore, in the state assembled to effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of outer peripheral button cover 380. Also project upward (see FIG. 79 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 78A), when the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body 373 is pressed. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation section 303a is detected. When the center pressing operation section 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 81 (c)).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. There is no detection by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the elevating cam drive is driven via the driven gear 369 meshed with the elevating drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 78 moves rightward, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the fourth position. Rolling to the left part of the locking portion 371c of the one cam 371b, the lifting base 364 moves downward via the guide pin 364d against the urging force of the lifting spring 365.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls leftward along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365. At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to be in the ascending position.

  In the state of the ascending position, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the operation of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the state of the ascending position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. In the state of the ascending position, the positional relationship between the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowering position is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 has moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has protruded above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in a state where they are assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are projected more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (see FIG. 81 (b) and the like). reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the state of the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The central button body 373 moves downward against the force and comes into contact with the lifting base 364. When the center button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 protrudes below the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is connected to the button unit base 361. , The pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward by a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the elevating base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b) is also in the lowered position.

  As described above, when the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 projecting downward from the lifting base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation unit 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the ascending position, the elevating base 364 is moved via the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the elevating spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the elevating base 364 are in the lowered position. However, since the center button cover 375 (central pressing operation part 303a) projects upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view. Then, in FIG. 78 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d is moved to the first cam. Rolls along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c depressed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original lowering position is restored.

[3-5-5i. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to a rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 mounted on the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 mounted in the board box 391.

  The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the rendering operation unit 300. The operation section relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer periphery button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the elevation detection sensor 382, and the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 and the relay. I have.

[3-5-5j. Operation of the production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the rendering operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the rendering operation unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 81 (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 81 (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position, and FIG. 81 (c) is the center pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer circumference pressing operation unit disposed between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The center pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer pressing unit 303b is formed by the outer button cover 380 and the outer substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state where the front side of a virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the circular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is inclined to be lower. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 disposed in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, the pressing operation unit 303 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 79, etc.).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. Rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotary operation unit 302 by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by a player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and is rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in left side view. The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is different from the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Thus, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. . On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the left side, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b of the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which a half or more arc of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. And, as shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that is easy to grasp by a player's hand. .

  This allows the player to touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a manner that the player can easily perform. Sex is raised. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can perform a rotation operation even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lower position or the upper position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape below the effect operation ring 330. Thus, by turning on the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-embellished. Further, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, so that the plurality of LEDs arranged in order are rotated in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be made to emit light. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to a player as if an LED (decorative board) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in the state of the descending position that projects slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation unit 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380). Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

  In the normal (down position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b of the pressing operation section 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b (the outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing detection is performed. No pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 causes the pressing operation portion 303 to vigorously protrude upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 81 (b)). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotating operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward more than the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330.

  When the center operation unit 303a is pressed downward in the state where the operation unit 303 is in the raised position, first, the center operation unit 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the center operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressing. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b The state is substantially the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 81 (c)). In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 detects pressing.

  Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation section 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation section 303a is projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 81A). . In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressing.

  As described above, regardless of the lowered position or the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end. I have. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to press the center pressing operation unit 303a firmly, so that attention can be paid to the operation of the staging operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , It is possible to further entertain the player-participating type production.

  Note that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation is facilitated by using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 becoming a hindrance. As a result, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is mounted on the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame left side base 401 attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402, And a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative body 404, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Have been. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can emit and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a penetrating front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the upper left dish decoration 271 of the upper left dish decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. 453 is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side of the front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 in a flat plate shape, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of decorative portions 410b inside the side window capable of emitting light, which are arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult for the pachinko machine 1 where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to obscure the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine disposed on the right side, and the player playing with the right pachinko machine. Thus, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 attached to the front surface and having a plurality of side window decoration portions 410b extending cylindrically forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on portions corresponding to the in-window decorative portion 410b, and a plurality of side-window decorative portion decorative substrates 413 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and a plurality of side-window decorative members 412 are provided. And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends up and down, and is attached to the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through hole 416a that penetrates in the left and right direction and forms a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical and front and rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. Frame that has a through-hole 417a that extends in the shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms a side window 410a. The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and covers the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three in this case) of side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The decorative portion 410b in the side window of the decorative member 412 in the side window has a front end side formed in a truncated conical cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than a rear end side, and a front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decorative member 412 in the side window is attached to a portion of the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a position lower than the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The side window interior decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having a light transmitting property.

  The decorative portion decorative substrate 413 in the side window is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the decorative member 412 in the side window, and the decorative member 412 in the side window is formed on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411. Is attached to a portion behind the connection base 412a. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative portion decorative board 413 in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window decorative portion decorative board 413, four LEDs are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross shape around the axis of the side window decorative portion 410b at a position behind each of the plurality of side window decorative portions 410b. Have been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, up, down, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and is formed in a wavy shape such that the shape in the front-rear direction moves forward and then rearward from the upper end to the lower end. Have been. The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a that penetrate back and forth, and in which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends up and down and front and rear, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending wavy along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending vertically, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

  The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a flat plate shape and extends up and down and back and forth. The rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends wavy along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending up and down, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the side window decorative member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419 and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. Have been. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can emit light and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy manner along the right side reflector 415. Thereby, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the upper right decorative plate 276 of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate unit 200, and the upper end of the upper right side of the door frame 450 of the door frame top unit 450. The body 453 is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks embedded. The front side (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy manner so that a ４ portion from the top projects most forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration section 410b extending in the front and rear direction within the side window 410a, and emits light from the LED of the side window interior section decoration board 413. Thus, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b inside the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be hardly seen through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of this embodiment, in the normal state, the LED of the side window decoration unit decorative board 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of side window decoration units 410b is turned off. The player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side (the end of the island facility) of the pachinko machine 1 through the space between the three side window interior decoration portions 410b. Therefore, a player who is searching for the present pachinko machine 1 (the main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not need to move to the front of the present pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities to easily operate the present pachinko machine 1. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game in the present pachinko machine 1 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates through the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration part 410b can block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity. The player can make the entire game area 5a hard to see from the player, and make it difficult for the player to feel as if viewed by another player, so that the player can play the game without hesitation. .

  Furthermore, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LEDs of the side window decoration portion decoration board 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzling and change the visibility through the side window 410a. Let it. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is radiated in a band shape and radially. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the game area 5a, and makes it difficult for another player, such as an adjacent player, to look inside the game area 5a. As described above, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent another player from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the attention is paid to the other player. You can prevent discomfort from becoming unable to concentrate on the game as a result of being unable to concentrate on the game, and prevent the mood from being lost by inducing mistakes, and make the game more fun by focusing the player on the game In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 88 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 88 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state which carried out. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit when disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covers both left and right sides and the front upper part of the door frame top base 451. , A top frame cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, a lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a door. A door frame top left decorative board 456 attached to the left of the door frame top center decorative board 455 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and in front of the top upper cover 452, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front. Have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top central reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. A top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front of the top top cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. A bottom cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a bottom cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top bottom cover 465 from below; Door frame top relay installed near the upper right end of the base 451 A plate 467, and a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat main body 451a extending to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction, and near the left and right ends on the front surface of the main body 451a. And a front protruding portion 451b protruding forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is located upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends move rearward as the front ends downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protruding portion 451b on the right side in the front view is also opened upward.

  The top upper cover 452 has a shape in front view substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451. The top upper cover 452 covers the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is formed in a shape that connects between the front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most protruding forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction. In addition, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface that is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in milky white having a light transmitting property. The door frame top decoration body 453 has a form in which the semicircular arc bulging forward becomes smaller in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction, connects the front end and the rear end, and extends vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the left and right outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can make the center part of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left part of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can make the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are connected to the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs so as to penetrate forward and backward.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top central speakers 462 face downward and forward. The center speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protruding portions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high range of sound such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, and form an integral decoration. I have. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side by a pair of top center speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91 and the like. FIG. 91 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  A dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a dish upper left decorative board 273, a dish upper right decorative board 278, a dish center upper decorative board 314, a door frame left side decorative board 402, a door frame right side decorative board 418, a door frame top center decorative Since the board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting LEDs on the decorative boards, A light emission effect can be shown to a player so that light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 and a coaxial arrangement in the ring of the rotary operation unit 302. A pressing operation portion 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation portion 302 below the rotation operation portion 302. The two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) and large-diameter dish upper decorations 312a and 312b are attached vertically spaced apart from each other at the top and bottom of the dish. The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Thus, in the plate unit 200, the three operation parts 302 and the two upper plate center decorations 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b are vertically arranged with three donut-shaped members. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made more conspicuous.

  Also, the upper left dish decoration 271, the upper right dish decoration 276, and the lower left dish decoration 281, the lower right dish decoration 286, and the lower middle dish decoration 312 b arranged below the upper dish decoration 312 a are cut in half. The thickness of the tube-shaped tube is made slightly thinner, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the effect operation unit 300, since it becomes larger upward from the lower end, the sense of perspective in the vertical direction can be emphasized, and the rotation operation unit 302, which can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 is rotatably mounted on an upper surface of the plate unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be located forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotary operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the state is inclined so as to be lower, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made easily visible, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The rotation of the operation unit 302 can be performed, and the player's participation-type effects can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameter of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower plate decoration 312b is larger than that of the rotary operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotating operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b protrude forward more than the upper plate 201, and the plate center 200 Since the decorative body 312a and the lower plate center decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b can be largely conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from the other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and to appeal the player. And the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The entire configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 93 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably mounted on the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall on the upper and lower sides of the front left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left front view of the main body frame base unit 500. A main frame upper hinge member 510 which is rotatably mounted on the upper frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the upper frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3; Main frame lower hinge assembly which is attached to the lower left end of the base unit 500 on the front view and is rotatably mounted to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted. And a solid 520.

  The main body frame 4 is mounted on the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a metal main body reinforcement frame 530 is mounted on the lower front part of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the inside, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main frame base unit 500, and a payout base A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the unit 550 for paying out the game balls B to the player side; a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear portion of the main frame base unit 500; A back cover 640 that is attached to the rear side of the game board 5 so as to be openable and closable and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501; And Tsu (500) viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The body frame base unit 500 has a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and has one guide passage extending leftward in a groove shape that is open upward, and a second rail 553 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555 that is separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and is attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553, and a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at the position shown in FIG. It includes a Tamatome member 557 are, a.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding path for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and a game ball guided by the single guiding path of the ball guiding unit 570. B, a payout device 580 for paying out B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game balls B through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path. And a lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through the unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a door frame hook 652 or a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is urged and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 99 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 100 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main frame. The body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 and the main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to a lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a having a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about ／ of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b penetrating the game board 5 from the front side, and a game board forming a lower side of the game board insertion port 501b and having the game board 5 placed thereon. The game device includes a placement section 501c and a game board regulation section 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placement section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a firing device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting portion. The cylinder unit 501e penetrates back and forth on the right side of the unit 501e when viewed from the front, and the cylinder unit 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. At 620, a circular speaker opening 501g of the main unit frame 620a of the speaker unit 620a facing the front and a main frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b of the base main body 501a in a plate shape in a plate shape, and a locking unit 650 is attached to a right side surface, and a back cover 640 is provided at a rear end. A rearwardly extending portion 501j rotatably attached and formed near the upper and lower ends on the left end in front view of the rear surface of the base body 501a for attaching the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. And an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 is capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be detached.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting concave portion 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be rotatably mounted on the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide main body 502a extending left and right, and protrudes forward at both upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends rightward from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b protruding, a column-shaped mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b to each other, and penetrating front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a. And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

  The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting concave portion 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is large enough to be accommodated in the cable mounting concave portion 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis that extends vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Accordingly, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame auxiliary. Connected to relay board 105.

  Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 100 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hingedly attached to the main body frame base 501 (left side). ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In a state in which the guide body 502a is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a, the left and right directions of a plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are changed. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being fastened together with the guide main body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted into the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main frame 4. (See FIG. 100 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  When the hinge is rotated so that the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 in this state, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 100 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but stops increasing when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 pushes the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. Thus, when the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back by 180 degrees changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force for closing the connection cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the folding habit, and to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving. The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

  Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is connected to the cable holder 103 a at a position closer to the center axis (axial center) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is moved by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103 a when the door frame 3 is closed. It can be pulled toward the center axis (axial center) of the hinge pin 126 below the door frame.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door frame is passed through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502 and centered on the center axis (axial center) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame than the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103. An angle at which a tangent to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the center axis (axis center) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees or less. It is configured so that Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. As the door frame 3 is moved in the closing direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed, and the door frame 3 can be securely closed. In addition, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on body frame]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 above the door frame is rotatably mounted.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge body 511. And an upper hinge pin 512 that is pivotally supported by the outer hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 when viewed from the front in a horizontally extended portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511 a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. Have.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to an upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is rotatably supported by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to the door frame with respect to the body frame 4. 3 can be mounted so that it can be hinged.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under body frame]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is mounted on the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably mounted on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3. Door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped material is bent upward in an L-shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of the flat plate-shaped plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an interval upward from a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower part. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower part for the door frame into which the lower hinge pin 126 of the lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restriction piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Can be The body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross section in plan view, and has a constant cross section and extends vertically. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded die.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

  The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also passes through the space between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 inside the main body frame 4 (from the left side). The illegal insertion of a tool into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launching device]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is mounted on the main body frame 4. 5 for driving into the game area 5a. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 540 is attached to the flat-plate-like launching base 541 attached to the launching device attaching portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the launching base 541 on the right side when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting hammer 543 having a base end attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a vicinity of the tip of the hitting hammer 543. A launch rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to a firing position on the upper right end of the upper surface of the firing rail 544, and the game ball B is placed at the firing position of the firing rail 544. When the handle 182 is turned in the supplied state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting hammer 543. The game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 passes through the launching ball passage (see FIG. 39) of the launching passage portion 1012 composed of the launching rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the gaming board 5 (see FIG. 39). Driven in.

  Note that if the launched game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, as shown in FIG. 39, the distance between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 is increased. Fall from the foul ball drop opening 1013 opened in the foul ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014, and pass through the foul cover unit 150 from the lower dish ball supply port 211c which is an opening for a ball. It is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 102 and the like. FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 102 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to a rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a top plate 551a extending in the front-rear direction with a substantially constant width in the left and right direction, and a width in the front-rear direction from the left side in front view of the top plate 551a. A left side plate portion 551b extending substantially downward and having substantially the same width; and a right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction extending from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction and having a width substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a and extending shortly downward. A back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and substantially constant rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. A left back plate portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end in width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left back plate portion 551e to the same position as a rear side of the left plate portion 551b, and a left plate portion 551b. From the front of the lower side to the right to the left of the backboard Includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 51e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L-shape in a front view, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward in the L-shape. In addition, on the rear surface of the upper part 551d of the back plate, an eave part 551da protruding rearward is formed in a region separated by a predetermined length from the lower side in the left-right direction.

  In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b has upper and lower sides of the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends up and down with the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left plate portion 551b, and the right plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501.

  The payout base 551 has a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by a left plate portion 551b, a back plate left portion 551e, and an inner plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes rightward in an upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 that is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and that opens in a box shape that extends left and right and that opens upward. A tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is provided at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball retaining member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

  The ball tank 552 is made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in opaque black, and has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction. And the front-back direction is formed to be shorter than the front-back depth of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is formed of a non-conductive transparent synthetic resin, and is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view in which the depth in the front-back direction is diagonally left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and is formed to extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward to form a single guide passage. Have been. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with an upper end opening of one guide passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at an appropriate angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight leftward substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d are disposed substantially on the same plane. It has become so. The cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is plurally bent downward from the front side to the rear side of the top plate 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate 551a). It is formed in a stepped shape. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopper 557 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded in opaque white, and are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. . The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Things.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in an opaque white color, and has a second portion at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553. One rail cover 554 side end is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 111). This rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in the upper and lower stages, and rectifies them so that they flow in a single stage on the downstream side. The ball is not clogged even when the height is lowered.

  The ball stopping member 557 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in opaque red, and is slidably attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 in the vicinity of the left end in front view, in the left-right direction. By sliding the game ball B, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, so that the game ball B does not flow from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a in which the tank rail 553 is disposed is lower downward from the front side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a) as described above. It is formed in the shape of a plurality of bent steps. A part of the plurality of bent steps is formed as a board housing portion 551aa for mounting the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground board 559. The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered with a terminal cover 551k molded of a transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal plate 558 includes a mounting surface and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, external terminals XCN1 arranged in a line from left to right as viewed from the rear of the payout base unit 550). ＸXCN10 are provided.) The substrate is accommodated in such a manner that the payout base 551 is viewed from the front and the mounting surface thereof is vertical toward the rear of the payout base 551 so that the external terminals are exposed. It is attached to the portion 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground substrate 559 has a mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are provided) are mounted with the mounting surface facing downward. When viewed from the front, the dispensing base 551 is disposed in front of the external terminal plate 558, attached to the substrate accommodating portion 551aa, and covered by the terminal cover 551k. Therefore, the frame ground board 559 is housed in a space formed by the board housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of a transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be visually recognized from outside the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

  Note that among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted). On the other hand, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (the mounting height becomes 9.8 mm when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is inserted). In a state where the frame ground substrate 559 is housed and mounted inside the substrate housing portion 551aa and the external terminal plate 558 is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate housing portion 551aa, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the frame ground substrate 559 is formed. Is hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558, making it difficult to see. However, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559, only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558, and the pachinko machine 1 can be viewed from the back (for example, see FIG. 93). Although the height of the ground terminal ECN3 is 13.4 mm, which is high as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the pachinko machine 1 is hidden by the ball rectifying member 556 and is difficult to visually recognize. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 have a low height of 7 mm as described above, cannot protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558, and are hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back. Is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be described later.

  The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame ground substrate 559 is for temporarily collecting electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places and grounding (earth ground) the island facilities of the game hall.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 103A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 103B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 104A is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104B is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Payout device 580 that pays out the game balls one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies, to the payout device 580, the game balls B arranged in a line by one guide path of the tank rail 553. The payout device 580 includes a single payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the single guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a single ball removal branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. In the normal state, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball ejection lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released from the ball-exiting passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game balls B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B discharged from the ball discharge passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball discharge path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to an upper portion of the rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

  The ball guiding unit 570 includes a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which the game balls B can flow and is opened forward, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. A flat guiding path front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 movable by a game ball B flowing in the guiding path 570 a, and a game ball B in the guiding path 570 a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cut detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the ball (see FIG. 111).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 in a front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, and extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning over the width of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front, rear, right and left directions and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Can be guided in a row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably mounted around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed so that. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on a portion projecting into the guide passage 570a, whereby the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Becomes

  The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

  When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is connected to the discharging passage of the discharging device 580. 580a communicates with the upstream end. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding path 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guiding path 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guiding path 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, it detects the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 105 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. FIG. 106A is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and FIG. 106B is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in FIG. It is. FIG. 107 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotation position of the dispensing blade. FIG. 108 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining prevention of clogging of the ball and dropping of the ball. In FIG. 107, in order to explain the rotational position of the dispensing blade, a dispensing gear member and a part of various gears, which are not visible from the back of the dispensing device, are described so as to be visible and are to be described. A small circle is attached to the bottom of the ball housing portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. Here, first, the configuration of the dispensing device 580 will be described, and then, the rotation position of the dispensing blade, prevention of ball clogging and prevention of ball dropout will be described.

[4-7-2a. Configuration of Dispensing Device]
The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the rear of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate portion 551e. The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581 having a dispensing passage 580a that is a box-like shape opened backward and through which game balls B can flow, and a ball ejection passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a. A flat-plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward. ing. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded in opaque black. The dispensing device rear lid 582 is made of polycarbonate resin and is molded transparently. Therefore, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B flowing down the payout passage 580a can be visually recognized from the back side of the payout device 580 through the transparent payout device rear lid 582.

  The dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583. An attached spur gear drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9), and a spur gear gear meshed with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. And the second transmission gear 586 (the number of teeth Z1: 20), the second transmission gear 586, and a spur gear-shaped second gear rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. The transmission gear 587 (the number of teeth Z2: 20), the spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a (the number of teeth Z3: 24) meshing with the second transmission gear 587, and extend outwardly from the dispensing gear 588a. A dispensing gear member 588 having a number of detecting pieces 588b and rotatably mounted between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583, and dispensing between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. A dispensing blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the gear member 588 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a, and a detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that is attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is detected. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that performs the rotation. The payout motor 584 is controlled by the payout control board 633 and driven stepwise. When the payout motor 584 is step-driven, the payout motor 584 step-rotates the rotation shaft at a predetermined angle (18 degrees in the present embodiment) in accordance with the step drive. That is, the payout motor 584 rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step rotation. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin and are molded in opaque black. The dispensing blade 589 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin, and is molded into an opaque white color.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and detects a game ball B, a payout detection sensor 591, and the payout device main body 581 and the payout device. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is attached to the part branched from the pay-out passage 580a by the lid 582 so that the ball-moving passage 580b can be opened and closed. And a ball ejection lever 593 slidably mounted in the up-down direction by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin, and is molded to be opaque white. The ball extraction lever 593 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin, and is molded in opaque red.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction is larger rightward in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward at a position closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward from the upstream end downward, and after being bent slightly diagonally rightward from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery thereof. Are formed so as to form a circular arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589 so as to be formed, and extend vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in the rear view from the center of the dispensing blade 589.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end. As the payout detection sensor 591, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used.

  The ball passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end. A part of the inner wall of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a has a predetermined distance dimension and a rib-shaped ball blocking prevention portion 581r protrudes toward the ball ejection passage 580b at the branching portion. The upper surface of 581r and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a are formed in the same plane to form a right-downward inclined surface in rear view. A detailed description of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r will be described later.

  The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched, and on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached, the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main body-side guide wall 581a that projects rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and that is formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b in rear view. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rightward as viewed from the rear at a height of about 1/3 from above in rear view. It is formed at the left position. The main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the rear, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side in the rear view of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by a dispensing device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat detecting pieces 588b having an arc shape extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The dispensing blade 589 is provided with a plurality of arcuate blade pieces 589a extending concentrically outward from the rotation axis in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade and the side wall of the payout passage is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The dispensing blade 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b that is recessed by a circular arc having a radius larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. By forming the ball accommodating portions 589b at equal intervals, a shape is formed in which three wing pieces 589a serving as peaks and three ball containing portions 589b serving as valleys are alternately formed. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b. Thus, the payout blade 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and also rotates clockwise in rear view. This allows the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b to move to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are attached coaxially and integrally rotatable by a dispensing device rear lid 582 and a dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left side of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The ball-moving movable piece 592 has its upper end rotatably mounted on the upper and lower ends of the main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a rectangular shape, and is attached so that the concave side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it can protrude into the ball ejection passage 580b or retreat outside the ball ejection passage 580b.

  The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be vertically slidable near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 on the left side in rear view. The ball pull lever 593 partially projects through the payout device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can be brought into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 106). In this manner, the ball can be removed by opening the ball removal passage 580b using the ball removal lever 593.

  When the ball removal is performed by raising the ball removal lever 593 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B is in a state like a rosary connection upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592. Flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side beyond the ball removal movable piece 592. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight and straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flow straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as suppressing the flow of the game ball B like the payout blade 589. Will also flow down quickly.

  As described above, in a state where the ball-moving movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-pulling passage 580b, so that the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-pulling passage 580b. Game ball B abuts vigorously against the lower end of the payout device, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it is possible to move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the contacting force causes the ball removal movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball is not sandwiched between the wall of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force is not applied to the movable ball 592 by the game ball B, and the ball is movable by the collision of the game ball B. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  Because of this, the ball-moving movable piece 592 can be hardly damaged, so that more game balls B can be discharged to the island facility side downstream of the ball-pulling passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  When the ball-moving movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes through a space between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a at a smaller interval than the game ball B, and the ball removing passage 580b. When the game ball B comes into contact with the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-pulling passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 moves between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a. When moving outward through the gap, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B is spaced more than the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

  The movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable piece 592 is caused by the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable piece 592, so that the movable piece 592 can be hardly damaged and the main body side guide is provided. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball passage 580b.

[4-7-2b. Rotation position of dispensing blade]
As described above, the dispensing device 580 includes a spur gear-shaped driving gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached to the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 (meshed with the driving gear 585). The number of teeth Z1: 20), the second transmission gear 587 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z2: 20), and the dispensing gear 588a in the form of a spur gear meshing with the second transmission gear 587 (number of teeth) Z3: 24) and a plurality of detection pieces 588b, a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588, and the like. When the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotationally driven, the rotation is performed via the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588. It is transmitted to rotate the blade 589.

  Here, the rotation speed of the payout gear member 588 is obtained by reducing the rotation speed of the payout motor 584 by the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. . This reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588 by calculation based on mechanics. In the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor that is excited by 2-2 phase excitation and has a rotation axis that rotates 18 degrees in one step rotation (360 degrees after the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates 20 steps). = 18 degrees × 20 steps). The discharge blade 589 that rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588 is 6.75 degrees (= 18 degrees × reduction ratio n) when the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 rotates one step. It will rotate. Thus, when the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the payout blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 54 steps), and when it makes one rotation (360 degrees rotation), it becomes 4.5. It will rotate extra degrees.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, the dispensing blade 589 is rotated by 364.5 degrees. It is necessary to rotate the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 53.333. The number of steps, which is the number of times, is not an integer.

  That is, in the present embodiment, three ball housing portions 589b are formed at equal intervals in the dispensing blade 589, and the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle according to the step driving, Through the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588, the dispensing blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees (that is, the rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 is 1). The payout blade 589 rotates 6.75 degrees when the step is rotated (rotated by 18 degrees), so that the payout blade 589 can send out one ball of the game ball B every 120 degrees rotation. In order to rotate the blade 589 by 120 degrees, it is necessary to rotate the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 17.777... Step rotation (= 120 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees). Thus, in the present embodiment, the payout blade 589 sets the 18-step rotation, which is an integer rounded up to the decimal point, to the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589. By rotating 589 over 120 degrees (actually, rotating 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotations × 6.75 degrees)), the rotation position of the payout blade 589 reaches the position where the next game ball B is received. Can be rotated.

  The payout blade 589 can pay out three game balls B every rotation (360 degrees rotation), but sometimes pays out only one game ball B. For example, tobacco dust or dust For example, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 may be erroneously detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590. Therefore, each time one game ball B is paid out, the process of setting the origin of the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is performed. Is preferred. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is 18 step rotation, which is an integer rounded up to the decimal point, as described above. The payout blade 589 is rotated more than 120 degrees (actually, it is rotated 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotations × 6.75 degrees)), and each time one game ball B is paid out, the payout blade 589 is paid out. The process of setting the origin of the rotation position of the blade 589 is performed to improve the accuracy of the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589.

  In addition, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer as described above, so that each time one game ball is paid out. Even if errors accumulate, the rotation angle of the dispensing blade 589 is detected by a plurality of detecting pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the dispensing blade 589, so that one game ball can be detected. Each time a payout is made, the accumulated error can be reset. Thereby, even if an error occurs every time one game ball is dispensed due to the influence of cigarette dust or dust, the accumulated error can be reliably reset every time one game ball is dispensed. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to reduce an error in the rotational position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends out the game ball.

  In addition, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer as described above, so that each time one game ball is paid out. The positioning position is different every time. Thus, the positions where the game balls and the payout blades 589 contact each time are different each time, so that the adhesion positions of the dust and the dust can be dispersed. Also, if the speed reduction ratio of the rotation transmitting member is set to cause such a positioning error, the error accumulates. However, even if the error accumulates every time one game ball is paid out, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 becomes larger. The detection is performed by the plurality of detecting pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 shown in FIG. 105 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the dispensing blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, by changing the rotation position of the ball feed rotation unit that receives and sends out the game balls every time the game balls are paid out, the position where the dust and the dust are attached is dispersed, so that the ball and the dust are dispersed. On the other hand, a strong payout device 580 can be provided. Note that the payout device 580 has one payout passage 580a as described above. Therefore, when the payout speed of the game balls is the same as compared with the payout device having the payout blades in the two payout passages, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having the single payout passage 580a in the present embodiment. Needs to rotate twice as fast. Then, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having one payout passage 580a in the present embodiment collides with the game ball and the payout blade 589 as compared with the payout device having payout blades in the two payout passages. Since the number of times is doubled, there is a high probability that tobacco tar and dust will adhere to the dispensing blade 589.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, as described above, the payout blade 589 exceeds one rotation. When the control for determining and managing the set is performed, the angular difference of 4.5 degrees is generated with respect to one rotation of the discharge blade 589 every time the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 rotates 54 steps. In this case, the angle difference eventually builds up to 360 degrees (= 4.5 degrees × 80 sets), and the number of balls to pay out the game balls B increases by three.

  As described above, the payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three 120-degree regions having a 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed are arranged along the circumferential direction. . As described above, the detection piece 588b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout control board 633 rotates the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 so that the above-described angle difference does not occur. By setting a 120-degree area having a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed as one management range, one game ball B can be used. It can be managed as a payout operation.

  Specifically, among the 120-degree areas in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588, the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed. In this state, the light-shielding range corresponds to nine-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 (equivalent to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588). The area of 60 degrees where the detection piece 588b is not formed is a state in which the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, so that the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps as a light receiving range. (Equivalent to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) of rotation of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the area of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction of the dispensing gear member 588 is set as a light-shielding area of the area of 60 degrees on which the detecting piece 588b is formed, and the nine-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is detected. The area of 60 degrees where the piece 588b is not formed is set as a light receiving range and controlled by 18 step rotations including the 9 step rotation of the rotation axis of the payout motor 584, and the payout of one game ball B is performed. The rotation is performed by rotating the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 18 steps.

  When the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates nine steps, the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps). And the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 can be rotated slightly larger than the light receiving range of 60 degrees, so that a 60-degree area (light-shielding range) where the detecting piece 588b is formed, A 60-degree area (light receiving range) where the detection piece 588b is not formed can be reliably determined.

  Here, a method of setting the origin of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the payout control board 633 is in a state where the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 has transitioned the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (“the first edge”). The rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is set as the point A. At this point A, the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side from the payout blade 589 is restricted by the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589.

  The dispensing control board 633 sets the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by five steps from the point A as the origin as shown in FIG. 107 (b). At this origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589. In this state, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line.

  The dispensing control board 633 sets the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by four steps from the origin as the point B. At this point B, the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 transitions from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 (referred to as a "second edge detection state"). As shown in FIG. 107 (d), in a region where the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 that rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588 rotates from the point A to the origin and the point B, as shown in FIG. Of the 120-degree area in the circumferential direction of the member 588, a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed).

  The dispensing control board 633 sets the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by nine steps from the point B as the point A again. At this time, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 at the origin is moved to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. As shown in FIG. 107 (d), in a region where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates from the point B to the point A, as shown in FIG. Of the 120-degree area in the circumferential direction (a 60-degree area in which the detection piece 588b is formed).

  Here, the control of the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 will be briefly described. The payout control board 633 executes the payout control-side power-on processing when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that occurs momentarily). When performing the initial setting process and the interrupt start setting in the payout control-side power-on process, the payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the regular process. The payout control board 633 generates an interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms) after the interrupt start setting, and executes the payout control side 2 ms interrupt processing. The payout control board 633 repeatedly performs various processes such as a payout motor control process, a history creation process, and an origin setting process in the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process.

  The payout control board 633 excites the payout motor 584 by performing 2-2 phase excitation with a pulse width of 4 ms by repeatedly executing the payout motor control processing. The payout control board 633 checks the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 every 2 ms by repeatedly executing the history creation processing. The dispensing control board 633 controls the excitation of the dispensing motor 584 by the 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms, that is, based on the detection signals from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 confirmed this time and the previous time, respectively. The result of confirming whether the detection piece 588b is in the state of blocking or not blocking the optical axis is determined from the least significant bit of the history information having an 8-bit width from the least significant bit. After shifting one bit at a time toward the bit, if the result of confirmation of the current and previous times indicates that the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit. On the other hand, when both the current and previous confirmation results indicate that the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, or When the result of confirmation is different from the time (for example, one of the confirmation results of the current time and the previous time is a time when the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the other is the result of the blade rotation detection sensor When the detecting piece 588b does not block the optical axis 590), the value 1 is set to the least significant bit.

  As described above, in the history creation processing, the payout control board 633 updates and generates history information having an 8-bit width every 4 ms when the excitation of the payout motor 584 by the 2-2 phase excitation is switched. The payout control board 633 executes an origin setting process of setting the rotational position of the payout blade 589 to the origin based on the history information updated and created every 4 ms. The dispensing control board 633 repeatedly executes the dispensing motor control processing to rotate the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by five steps from the state where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the point A, as described above. Since the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 becomes the origin, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located in a 60-degree area where the above-described detection piece 588b is not formed, and the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is detected. 588b is in a non-blocking state.

  Then, in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having an 8-bit width, the detection piece 588b is provided by the blade rotation detection sensor 590 immediately before the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is located at the point A. 0000001B ("B" indicates bit information; the same applies hereinafter) is set because the optical axis has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (first edge detection state). . When the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 advances from the point A to the origin, since 00111111B is set in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored in the history information having an 8-bit width, In the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 performs the first masking process on the history information with the first determination value of 11110000B, thereby extracting data from eight times to five times before from the history information as a calculation result. Later (here, the calculation result becomes 00110000B by the first masking process), and the second determination value of 00010000B is further subjected to the second masking process on the extracted data, thereby obtaining the data five times before the history information. Data is taken out as an operation result (here, the operation result is 00010000 by the second mask processing). If the value is 0, it is determined that the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is not at the origin, and the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is not set as the origin. It is determined that the current rotational position of the blade 589 is at the origin, and the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is set as the origin.

  Note that, in the origin setting process, when the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is set as the origin, the discharge control board 633 rotates the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 by five steps from the state where the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is located at the origin. Then, the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is set to the point B, and the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated nine steps from the state where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the point B (that is, the rotation shaft exceeds the light shielding range). This process is completed again in a total of 13 step rotations in which the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is set to the point A again. That is, in the present embodiment, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting processing, the payout control board 633 operates until the time until the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates a total of 13 steps elapses. An origin detection prohibition time is provided to prohibit the origin setting for the dispensing blade 589.

  The payout control board 633 executes the payout motor control processing to switch the excitation of the payout motor 584 by the 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms. As shown in FIG. 107, the dispensing control board 633 rotates the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by five steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the point A, and determines the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 as the origin. Is 20 ms (= 4 ms × 5 step rotation), and the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the origin to change the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 to B. The time taken as a point is 16 ms (= 4 ms × 4 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated 9 steps from the state where the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is located at the point B (that is, the light-shielding range is changed). The time when the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is again set to the point A is 36 ms (= 4 ms × 9 step rotation). As described above, the payout of one game ball B is performed by the 18-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. Since the rotation is performed by 18 steps of rotation of the rotating shaft of the motor 584, the time is 72 ms (= 4 ms × 18 steps).

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine including a payout device that pays out a number of game balls according to the rotation amount of a payout rotating body that receives and sends out game balls by driving a payout motor (for example, JP-A-2004-041261 (paragraph [0052] and FIG. 4). In the gaming machine of this document, the rotation time of one step of the payout motor is set to 18 mS, and the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees and pay out one game ball by outputting data drive data for four steps. ing. In a pachinko machine installed in a pachinko parlor, it is inevitable that tobacco tar and dust attached to the game balls adhere to the inside of the payout device. In addition, since the dispensing device is not disassembled and cleaned, a dispensing device that is resistant to cigarette dust and dust is required. By the way, in the gaming machine of this document, the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees and pay out one game ball by driving the payout motor for four steps. It can be seen that the contact position between the ball and the payout rotating body is the same every time. For this reason, there has been a problem that the positions where tobacco dust and dust adhere are fixed and are easily deposited.

[4-7-2c. Ball clogging prevention and ball dropout prevention]
Next, prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout will be described with reference to FIG. Here, first, prevention of ball clogging at the time of ball removal will be described, and subsequently, prevention of ball dropout due to a non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described.

  As described above, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened. I can do it. When removing the ball, the ball removing lever 593 is raised to bring the movable ball removing piece 592 into a rotatable state. At this time, when the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the discharge passage 580a from the ball housing portion 589b of the discharge blade 589. In this state, a total of four game balls B are parked over a rib-shaped ball blocking prevention portion 581r which has a predetermined distance dimension and protrudes toward the ball ejection passage 580b. As the predetermined distance dimension, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is on the right side of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and on the downstream side (that is, the payout blade 589 exists). (The downstream side of the discharge passage 580a). As a result, a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a has a predetermined distance dimension from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589, and the rib-shaped ball clogging preventing portion protrudes toward the ball discharge passage 580b. When a plurality of game balls B stop in the payout passage 580a up to 581r, a part of the last game ball B that stops stays in the ball blocking prevention portion 581r so as to protrude toward the ball removal passage 580b. That is, the predetermined distance dimension is formed so as to constitute the side wall of the ball passage 580b when the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is parked on the upper surface of the ball blocking prevention portion 581r. The above-mentioned game ball B flowing down along the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) which is parked on the upper surface of the ball blocking prevention portion 581r. In this case, the length is such that it can flow down to the ball extraction passage 580b. As described above, by stopping the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) on the upper surface of the ball blocking prevention unit 581r in a state where a part thereof protrudes toward the ball removal passage 580b (in other words, the ball blocking prevention). (The length of a portion of the game ball B parked on the upper surface of the portion 581r protrudes toward the ball passage 580b), and the width of the ball passage 580b is limited to a width that allows one ball B to flow down. You can do it.

  In addition, as described above, the ball clogging prevention portion 581r has the upper surface and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the payout passage 580a formed in the same plane, and has a downward-sloping right inclined surface in rear view.

  That is, in the case where the ball is to be removed while the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is parked on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a. However, even if the ball collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r has a downward-sloping right inclined surface in rear view. The center (center of gravity) of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball blocking prevention unit 581r is located on the right side and downstream of the left end side of the ball blocking prevention unit 581r. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r from being hit by the collision and flowing down to the ball removal passage 580b. Be able to Going on. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game balls B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a from being clogged near the left end of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r.

  As a result, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) parked on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r passes the ball removal path (the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a) along the ball removal path 580b. The downward flow path of the game ball B on the side (flow path flowing down to the side) is restricted to the width of one ball of the game ball B as the width of the ball removal passage 580b as shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 108 (a). This can prevent ball clogging. Therefore, clogging of a ball at the time of ball removal can be reliably prevented. In the present embodiment, the width of the ball ejection path 580b is set to be from the minimum width: 12 mm to the maximum width: 14 mm, although the width varies depending on the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589. It is set to 13 mm when the position is stopped at the origin. Incidentally, ball clogging is likely to occur at a place where the width of each passage is narrowed from a place wider than twice the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball to slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball (for example, 21 mm).

  Next, a description will be given of prevention of ball dropout due to a non-energized state of the payout motor 584. In the state where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108A, only one game ball B in the dispensing passage 580a is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. At the same time, the game balls B are connected to the game balls B, and the subsequent game balls B are stopped in the payout passage 580a in a state of contact with the game balls B. In this state, as described above, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line. Further, as described above, the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper side by about ３ of the total height so as to gradually move leftward from the upstream end to the lower side, and slightly rightward therefrom. After being bent obliquely downward, it is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right width, and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589.

  For this reason, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B abutting on the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 is set at the center (the center of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589). (Center of gravity) position and slightly shifted to the left side of the position. When the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, the game ball B accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 follows. The rightward force (that is, the clockwise rotation force) acts on the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 due to the ball pressure of the game ball B due to its own weight.

  In such a state, when the dispensing motor 584 is de-energized, the dispensing blade 589 naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the dispensing blade 589, and is accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. The game ball B flows down (is sent out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, so that a ball dropout occurs.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the dispensing motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 does not The shape of the dispensing passage 580a on the right side of the dispensing blade 589 in rear view is formed so that the dispensing can be stopped by six steps of rotation from the origin.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and (c), when the dispensing motor 584 is de-energized, the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates six steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and stops. , The game ball B contacting the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589, the point S1 contacting the side wall of the dispensing passage 580a, and the outer periphery of the dispensing blade 589 having the arc-shaped blade piece 589a. Of the surface is closer to the ball storage portion 589b in which the game ball B is stored (that is, the ball storage portion 589b in which the game ball B is stored, and the ball storage portion in which the game ball B subsequent to the ball storage portion 589b is not stored) Part 589b and the S2 point of the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a connecting the ball 589a to the ball housing portion 589b side where the game ball B is housed from the center of the outer circumferential surface. It is formed the shape of sea urchin dispensing passage 580a. As a result, a ball pressure can be generated that presses the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a of the dispensing blade 589, and the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 can be stopped by rotating the dispensing blade 589 by six steps from the origin. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from slipping out due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584.

  In the case where the payout control board 633 starts controlling the payout motor 584 in a state where the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates six steps from the origin of the payout blade 589 and stops, the payout blade 589 rotates six steps from the origin of the payout blade 589. As shown in FIG. 107 (d), the state is advanced by rotating two steps in the light-shielding range (9 steps) beyond point B, which has been rotated four steps from the origin, as shown in FIG. 107 (d). However, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 13 steps (as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the rotation proceeds two steps out of the nine steps and proceeds by the remaining seven steps + the fifth step from the point A), the dispensing blade 589 Is the origin, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 flows down (is sent out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and the payout is performed. It is adapted to be reliably detected by the detection sensor 591. Therefore, even when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout blade 589 (rotated and advanced by six steps) and stopped, an excessive number of balls to be paid out of the game balls B does not occur.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the payout control board 633 responds to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or the payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. In response, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is controlled to pay out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a momentary power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), first, the payout motor 584 is controlled so as not to perform the operation of returning the rotational position of the payout blade 589 to the origin. As described above, when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout blade 589 (rotates by 6 steps and stops), the number of balls to be paid out is increased. This is to prevent that.

  In the above-described embodiment, the dispensing blade 589 includes a plurality of blade pieces 589a having a circular arc shape extending outward in a flat plate shape at three intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. May be provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. FIG. 109 is a cutaway rear cross-sectional view of a dispensing device provided with a dispensing blade 589 having four arcuate blade pieces 589a and provided with a radio wave sensor, which is a modification of the dispensing device. FIG. 109 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit corresponding to FIG. 105 described above, which is cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction, and is denoted by the same reference numerals as in FIG. In the case where the discharge blade 589 has four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape, not shown in FIG. 109, the above-described discharge gear member 588 is a flat plate-shaped detection piece having an arc shape extending outward. 588b are provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the area of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction of the dispensing gear member 588 is defined as a 45-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed as a light-shielding range. It is managed by a total of 18 step rotations including the 9 step rotation of the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 and the 9 step rotation of the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 with the 45 ° area where the detection piece 588b is not formed as the light receiving range. Thus, the reduction ratio n is selected, and the payout of one game ball B is performed by rotating the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 18 steps. In other words, the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, and the second transmission gear 585 can rotate the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 by 90 degrees when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 18 steps. The reduction ratio n can be determined by selecting the number of teeth of the gear 587 and the number of teeth of the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588, respectively.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the payout device 580 includes the payout detection sensor 591 attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a and detecting the game ball B. However, a radio wave sensor for detecting radio waves may be provided near the payout detection sensor 591. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, and detects the passing of the game ball B. However, when affected by radio waves, the game ball B actually passes. Nevertheless, it is possible to simulate a state in which the game ball B does not pass due to malfunction. In this case, the payout control board 633, to which the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input, determines that the payout of the game ball B is not completed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and By performing control to rotate the rotation shaft of 584 excessively, a large amount of game balls B are paid out. In order to detect such a fraudulent act of acquiring the game ball B illegally (referred to as “radio wave goto”), as shown in FIG. Can be provided. The detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 is input to the payout control board 633. When the payout control board 633 determines that an abnormal radio wave is emitted based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594, The rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is urgently stopped, and a radio wave notification command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a radio wave notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives the 8-bit radio wave goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310 changes the radio-wave goto notification command from the 8-bit width to the 16-bit width and sets the radio goto warning sound to the maximum volume. At the same time, various LEDs are set to be in a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode that flashes red) by setting various LEDs to be informed that radio waves can be notified, and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the radio wave goto notification command having a 16-bit width, the effect display device 1600 displays a large message “An abnormality has occurred” and controls various LEDs to a warning notification light emission mode. I do.

  Instead of the radio wave sensor 594, a contact-type ball passage sensor 594 ', which is a contact-type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch, may be used. The detection signal from the contact-type ball passage sensor 594 'is input to the payout control board 633, and the payout control board 633 outputs the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and the detection signal from the contact-type ball passage sensor 594'. On the basis of this, when the number of balls that have paid out the game balls B do not match, it can be determined that some kind of fraud has been performed. When it is determined that any wrongdoing has been performed, the payout control board 633 urgently stops the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 and transmits a goto notification command to that effect to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives the goto notification command having an 8-bit width from the payout control board 633, the goto notification command is changed from the 8-bit width to the 16-bit width, the goto warning sound is set to the maximum volume, and various types of speakers are used. At the same time, the various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode blinking red), and are shaped so that the goto can be notified, and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the goto notification command having a 16-bit width, the effect display device 1600 displays a large message “An abnormality has occurred” on the effect display device 1600, and controls various LEDs to a warning notification light emission mode. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor, but may be a DC motor. In this case, when the DC motor is step-driven, the rotation shaft is step-rotated at a predetermined angle of 18 degrees in accordance with the step drive. That is, the DC motor rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step rotation.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is connected to the drive transmission gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588, which constitute a rotation transmitting member. , The rotation of the dispensing blade 589, but the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated at a low speed to rotate the rotation transmitting member (a plurality of gears (for example, the first transmission gear 586 ′, The second transmission gear 587 ′ and the payout gear 588 a ′) of the payout gear member 588 may be configured to increase the speed and rotate the payout blade 589. In this case, the speed-up ratio of the rotation transmitting member is predetermined so that the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is not an integer. Each time one ball is paid out, the positioning position is different each time. Thus, the positions where the game balls and the payout blades 589 contact each time are different each time, so that the adhesion positions of the dust and the dust can be dispersed. Also, if the speed increase ratio of the rotation transmitting member is set to cause such a positioning error, the error accumulates. The rotation angle is detected by a plurality of detecting pieces 588b (light-shielding pieces) of the dispensing gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the dispensing blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 1 in which the speed increase ratio of such a rotation transmitting member is determined in advance, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends out the game balls is changed every time the game balls are paid out, and the dust and dust are changed. By dispersing the positions where the particles adhere, it is possible to have a dispensing device 580 that is strong against dust and dust.

[4-7-3. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full spherical path unit 600 is formed in a square shape whose front view is vertically extended.

  An upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 with an open rear side, and a box-shaped mount attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and has an open front side. And a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover attaching portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 opens upward near the left end in the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a height of about ／ of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a communicates with the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends rightward as viewed from the front by about 3/4 of the entire width, and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and near the right end of the upper surface in the front view. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 111).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, an upper normal discharge passage 600c, an upper full discharge passage 600d, and an upper ball discharge passage 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left side in a front view. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving path 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout path 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thus, the game balls B released (paid) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 pass through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the. Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball discharge passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 includes a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 mounted on the upper side of the lower full base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a mounted on the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharging passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. And a closing spring 614 that is biased.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c are arranged in order from the front left, on the upper surface of a portion extending above the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state where they are arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball passage 610c extends forward along the right side of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b. Opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and as the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operation protrusion 613 a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower filled tank path unit 610 is assembled with the dispensing unit 560, and the lower normal dispensing passage 610a, the lower filled tank dispensing passage 610b, and the lower ball emptying passage 610c, which are open upward at the rear upper end, are respectively filled with the upper filled tank. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the tan ball path unit 600. Thus, the game balls B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full fill payout passage 600d are lower full fill payout passages 610b. , And the game balls B released downward from the upper ball passage 600e flow through the lower ball passage 610c.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is open immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b. The downstream end of the lower ball passage 610c is open to face the ball guide portion 627 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 that opens to the left.

  In the normal full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting on the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided. Is rotated clockwise in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full fill payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Game ball flow in payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branched from the ejection passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. In the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  The ball tank 552 that is opened upward has a predetermined number based on the detection of the ball being cut by the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, for example, from the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Of game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blades 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout blades 589. Becomes

  Then, the game ball B in the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it can be seen that the game balls B are stored at least in the passage from the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated clockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream from 589. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blades 589 (ball storage portions 589b) are sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

  The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 normally passes through the upper ball storage passage 600b and is disposed immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and passes through the plate unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, it becomes impossible to discharge the game balls B forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game balls B paid out from the 580 stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B are upstream from the lower normal payout passage 610a. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that is in communication. When the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. The game balls B start to stay, and the game balls B begin to flow toward the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout path 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout path 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received. Thereafter, the game ball B received by the full tank receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thus, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  In addition, when the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

  When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are to be discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the state of the rising end position. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and rotates in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. , And is pushed out of the ball passage 580b. As a result, the game balls B can enter the ball passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game balls B are discharged downward through the ball passage 580b.

  At this time, at the portion of the ball-moving movable piece 592, the falling game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a than the ball-moving movable piece 592, so that the ball removing movable piece 592 is provided. Is hard to break.

  Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball empty passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball empty passage 600e of the upper full ball empty path unit 600 and the lower ball empty passage 610c of the lower full ball empty path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside (the game hall) of the pachinko machine 1. To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 112 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 112 (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below and below. FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 116 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to a lower portion of the rear surface of the body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from behind. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a is mounted on the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a position lower than the game board placement portion 501c, and forwards near the left end in front view of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end in front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of vertically extending slits, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A space front concave portion 621b that is depressed so as to bulge forward from the rear side on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction and diagonally downward toward the rear. And an open connection portion 621c.

  The main frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sound.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape opened frontward, and a portion on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. Is formed so that the protrusion of the boss becomes small. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficient space behind the speaker box 623 on the right side from the center in front view, and to arrange the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620a includes the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623, and forms a part of the enclosure 624 that contains the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In the enclosure 624, since the space front concave portion 621b swelling forward on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front is formed, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes rightward. Even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount, the space to the right of the main frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

  When the main unit frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection tube portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48 between the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622. And the inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 of a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the front panel 42 of the curtain plate.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to a relatively large depth to the right in front view, and the connection unit 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear is not attenuated particularly in the low frequency range, and the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not attenuated. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to amplify the sound, so that a large sound with heavy bass can be output even if the aperture of the main frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass. Accordingly, a sound output from the front surface of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are obtained. This allows the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space is formed in the speaker cover 621, and the speaker box 623 is formed. In addition, a through-tube 623a which extends in a tubular shape in communication with the through-hole 621d and penetrates forward and backward is formed. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610, and is viewed from the front. A ball guide unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving unit that receives the game ball B discharged upward from the game board 5 and opened upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide unit 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B having passed through the ball guide unit 627 and the discharged ball receiving unit 628 downward.

  The ball-pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening leftward at an upper portion of a left side in a front view, and a downstream end opening leftward of the discharged ball receiving portion 628. In a state in which the ball guide unit 627 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end is opposed to the downstream end opening of the lower ball discharge passage 610 c of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the lower end guide portion 627 has the lower end. The game ball B released from the ball passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharged ball receiving portion 628.

  The ejection ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 has a left end in front view continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by a ball pull-out guiding unit 627 or a discharged ball receiving unit 628, and Since the air is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is easy to secure a wide space on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than a conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631. The power supply board cover 631 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the power supply board 630 can be seen through the power supply board cover 631 without removing the power supply board cover 631 from the rear base 626. I have. There is a transformer (not shown) in the island facility of the game hall, which steps down a commercial power supply voltage of 100 VAC (100 VAC) to a game machine power supply voltage of 24 volts (24 VAC). 24V AC which is stepped down in the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply board 630 via a power cord (not shown). The power supply board 630 generates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC +35 V, DC +12 V, DC +5 V, etc.) from 24 V AC supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies them to various substrates. The power supply board 630 must originally be supplied with a power supply voltage of 24 V AC for a game machine, but there is a possibility that a commercial power supply voltage of 100 V AC is supplied due to an incorrect connection of a power supply cord (not shown) and the power supply board 630 is destroyed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the power supply unit 620c is configured to be exchangeable using a Phillips screwdriver, which is a general tool (note that a fastener is used without using a general tool such as a Phillips screwdriver). Can also be configured to be detachable by manual operation).

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (FIG. 116). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball rental button 224 of the ball rental operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Then, the designated number of game balls B are paid out to the player (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202).

  The payout control board box 632 includes a cover (not shown) and a base (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The payout control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are transparently molded from a polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the payout control board 633 (whether or not an unauthorized modification has been made or an unauthorized IC is mounted) Can be checked from outside the payout control board box 632. The dispensing control board box 632 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the beta body, respectively. When the dispensing control board box 632 is closed using one sealing mechanism, In order to open the control board box 632, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and a trace of opening and closing of the payout control board box 632 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the illegal opening and closing of the payout control board box 632, and the deterrent to the payout control board box 632 against improper actions is enhanced.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear face of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The board base 634 is attached to the rearmost surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost part of the main frame speaker 622, and most protrudes rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (the body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) in front view so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 which is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached thereto. The back cover 640 has a right side in front view attached to a vertically extending rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and a left side thereof is a payout base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side in a front view of a flat plate extending up, down, left, and right is bent forward, and a contact portion 640a that is lowered forward by one step is formed on the upper side. When assembled to the frame 4, the rear surface is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface of the upper back plate 551 d of the payout base 551 (the rear surface of the eave portion 551 da formed on the above-described upper back plate 551 d). I have. When the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a comes into contact with the rear surface of the upper back plate 551 d of the payout base 551, and the contact portion is , And are covered with an eaves portion 551da protruding from the upper portion 551d of the back plate.

  Except for the contact portion 640a, the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, and depending on the rotation direction, the door frame. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  Further, the locking unit 650 urges the hook 652 for the door frame downward and also urges the hook 653 for the outer frame upward, and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) of the door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinders 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501 f of the main body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted by being engaged with the transmission member 133 and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outside members are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in front view, a plurality of The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main frame 4, when the unlocking lever 656 for the outer frame is slid downward, the plurality of hooks 653 for the outer frame move downward, and the outer frame 2 is moved relative to the main frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this manner, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hooks 652 and the outer frame hooks 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame or the outer frame hook 653 becomes the hook member 116 or the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the lock state is established by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed Configuration of Upper Body Frame]
Next, a detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 118A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 118B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 119 is an enlarged view showing an upper portion in an enlarged manner in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 120 (a) is a perspective view from the upper front when tank rails and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 120 (b) is a perspective view from the lower front as (a). FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing an area in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 125 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind the hinge side.

  As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the outer frame 2 by the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body mounted along the upper side and the left side of the rear side of the body frame base 501 in front view. A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551 and extending upward and downward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail 553 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to an upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a tank rail. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, a payout device 580 attached to the rear side of the payout base 551 downstream of the tank rail 553, and for paying out game balls B to the player side; , Is provided.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction in plan view, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lower in front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape having an open upper side. Have been. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is cut out from above on the front wall 552b and that is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about ／ of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the end of the left wall 552d to the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (right wall 552e side). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and a downstream side extending to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a in which the width direction orthogonal to the flowing direction of the game balls B is formed so that only one game ball B can flow. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In addition, the main guiding portion 553a extends from the right end side to the left in the left-right direction in parallel with an axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side to about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in plan view. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end in parallel with an axis extending in the left-right direction from there. .

  The tank rail 553 has a portion extending in the main guide portion 553a parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed such that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game balls B are formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be circulated (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length in the left and right direction at the portion where the upper side is closed, on the bottom surface of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a and on the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a in front view (in the present embodiment, approximately Three rectangular cutouts 553aa having a width of 30 mm) are formed at predetermined intervals (about 10 mm in the present embodiment). Due to the rectangular cutout portion 553aa, the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a has a thickness of about 7 mm (approximately 2.5 mm in the present embodiment) added from the rear wall to the front wall of the main guiding portion 553a toward the front. A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and the thickness of the bottom plate of the bottom surface of the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a from the bottom surface of the main guide portion 553a upward (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). , About 2.5 mm), a rectangular hole having a height of about 7 mm and a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and these rectangular holes are connected to each other.

  The game balls B flowing from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 fall due to metal powder being peeled off from the game balls B due to abrasion such as collision of the game balls B or rubbing. For this reason, when the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B is attached to the main guiding portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is obstructed, and the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. , And the payout of the game balls B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that metal powder generated by abrasion of the game balls B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B naturally falls from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, so that the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guiding portion 553a, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B attached to the main guiding portion 553a falls to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa. As a result, the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a, and a cotton swab is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by an attendant such as a game hall clerk, which is caused by abrasion of the game ball B attached to the main guiding portion 553a. By performing the operation of removing the metal powder, the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a position where the upper side is closed above the main guiding portion 553a, and the main rail 553 is arranged such that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in a width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b bulging wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrowing in width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. I have. By the bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. The bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side to the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes one line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed inside, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b slightly extends at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that comes into contact. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball dust in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a shape extending constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the inside game ball B is always pushed in a fixed direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball dust) is liable to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside circulates. By dispersing the direction in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball damage) can be suppressed.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. Accordingly, even if a ball jam (ball damage) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the clogging of the ball in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, and the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging can be shortened as much as possible. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in various performance units or the like, it is possible to check the status of the transmission motors, gears, belts, and other transmission mechanisms while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4. The same operation and effect as the application effect can be obtained.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. Of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface 501m and the rear end of the overflow tank 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b of which the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in the left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, the interval in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, and A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side to the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring can be connected from the rear, and an upper surface of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. A terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is flat from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, at a distance lower by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the lower side to the rear. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a gap having a distance about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface 501 m and the outer frame upper member 30. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m, and extends substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m. The upper end is higher than the left and right steps 501n and 501o on both left and right outer sides of the left and right steps 501n and 501o, and extends in a front and rear direction in a strip shape. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in rows at a smaller interval than the diameter. The left step part 501n is formed to be shorter in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left-stage portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner at the rear end becomes slightly lower in a front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. The right step part 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear left corner is slightly lower in a front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. Is formed at a height that is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  The main body frame base 501 is assembled with the main body frame 4 and, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface 501m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface 501m. The left end of the right side of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end of the detour passage 552g, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and has a front end that is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and is inclined so that the rear end is lower. And a weir extending upward from an end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. As for the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g, the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and the left end side thereof. From the right to the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled with the main body frame 4 such that the rear end thereof extends along the front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction and extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. Extending. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided rearward by the detour passage 552g changes its distribution direction from the slanted rear end to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction in which the game ball B flows in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g is formed in a wide portion of the tank rail 553. From the game ball B. Further, since the game balls B are supplied from the bypass path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular to the flow direction) of the game balls B, the tank rails formed by the game balls B from the bypass path 552g. Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

  Since the detour passage 552g extends obliquely in the left-right direction such that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the game ball B can be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow due to the obliquely extending rear end. By discharging the gas to a wide area, the occurrence of ball dust in the tank rail 553 can be suppressed.

  In addition, a portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to an outer portion of the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left portion of the rear wall 552c in the front view on the tank rail 553. A game ball B that flows under the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (on the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from within the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at a position behind the bypass passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is equal to the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Height). Therefore, on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) where the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided backward can be reliably received on the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

  The spherical tank 552 is a flat plate that extends rightward from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in a front view from a position about 1/3 of a total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from a left end of the front wall 552b, and a right end side in a left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b at about 1/9 of the total length to a position near about 1/2 of the total length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and extending parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, The rear wall 552c is formed to have a constant width in the front-rear direction and to extend from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position about one-third of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction in parallel with the rear wall 552c.

  In the spherical tank 552, in plan view, a right end of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and a straight line connecting the end of the right end to the front wall 552b and the end to the rear wall 552c. The enclosed area has an opening 552k formed to penetrate vertically. Further, the ball tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left-right direction outward and the up-down direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. The spherical tank 552 is configured such that the heights of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper edges of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the body frame base 501). (The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (the right end in a front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight leftward in the left-right direction are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j, when assembled to the main body frame 4, is stepped downward from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in the ball tank 552 so as to step backward. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). Nearby position) and then extend rearward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is mounted on the rear surface in a state where a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can open a grip portion by operating a lever to grip the end of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the operation and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left-stage portion 501n, the right-stage portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by white arrows in FIG. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined such that the right end of the rear end is lower, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined such that the rear end left corner is lower. In addition, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end sides thereof are lower in a front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

  Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island facility, first, the game balls B exceed the lowest overflow portion 552f of the outer peripheral upper end edge. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can flow out of the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface 501m (see FIG. 123). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, and it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In addition, the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball dust) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be prevented.

  Further, since the detour passage 552g is provided, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the backward pressing force from acting on the game balls B in the ball tank 552 by the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass path 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553 to prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

  In addition, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is formed. The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thus, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface 501m and flowing from the overflow surface 501m to the bypass passage 552g is moved to the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side. The clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). , The game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass 552g without passing through the overflow surface 501m. Thus, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is made to flow backward from the overflow surface 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a certain direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a certain direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B are different, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing and biting each other, thereby preventing the game balls B from being clogged. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, and are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the upper portion of the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, the game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is provided. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end to the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a is reduced. Since the game balls B are changed so as to coincide with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned so as to be aligned in the width direction as the plurality of game balls B move downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side). A plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are passed downstream through the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction and forming one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the overflow surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, a certain number of game balls B can be stored therein, and the tank rail 553 has a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j therebetween). Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be farther from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility jumps or is supplied vigorously at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, there is no problem such as a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

  Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facility is used for the ball 552. Even if the game ball B jumps on the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it is difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface 501m to the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 123) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and the game balls B are clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facility bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 123, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g by their inclination, and a problem occurs when the game balls B spill out of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls stacked on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, a space (vacant space) where the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j), that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g. The game ball B guided by the bypass path 552g can be reliably received.

  Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 in which the upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, it is not affected. The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

  Further, while the ball tank 552 is molded of a conductive resin, the tank rail 553 and a peripheral control board box of a peripheral control unit 1500 described later are molded of a non-conductive resin. In the present embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they have the same polarity. Therefore, the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 is removed from the peripheral control board box having the same polarity. And is not attracted to the peripheral control board box.

  In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, one notch, hole, or groove may be formed in the ball passage on which the game ball B rolls, similarly to the notch 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 shown in FIG. 111 having one guide path 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering shape downward, the metal of the game ball B in the guide path 570a A cutout, a hole, or a groove capable of removing powder from the guiding passage 570a to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571 of the guiding unit 570 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 111, a payout device 580, a board unit 620, and the like are disposed below the ball guiding unit 570. The payout device 580 has a board on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted. The board unit 620 includes the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. 112, and various boards are arranged. For this reason, when a notch, a hole, or a groove is formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, the hole, or the groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the B metal powder from adhering to various substrates disposed below the guidance unit 570. Therefore, an eave-shaped member can be formed by projecting rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear cover 582 of the dispensing device 580 shown in FIG. 103, and can be formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. The positions of the cutouts, holes, or grooves to be made and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted in the dispensing device 580 can be shifted, and both can be adopted. It can also be configured. In addition, the eave-shaped member is moved rearward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. The power supply board cover 631, the dispensing control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be formed by protruding the power supply board cover 631, the positions of the notches, holes, or grooves formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. And the position can be shifted, or both can be adopted. It should be noted that the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, and the cover side walls provided on the upper side of the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635 shown in FIG. This can also prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering to various substrates. In the main control board 1310 arranged below the peripheral control board box 1505, the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310 is arranged at a position where the peripheral control board box 1505 becomes an eave, By arranging an eave-shaped member corresponding to 1300 or not forming a ventilation hole in the cover side wall provided on the upper side of main control unit 1300, it is possible to prevent the metal powder of game ball B from adhering.

[4-12. Configuration of measures against metal powder]
Next, an electric trouble (short-circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is an enlarged view of a part of the cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 118 (a), and is a schematic diagram of a configuration for preventing metal powder. In FIG. 126, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only portions of the game board 5 necessary for description are shown as cross-sectional views.

  When metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed below the tank rail 553, An electrical trouble may occur, causing a problem in the peripheral control unit 1500 or causing a malfunction. For example, a peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes an IC such as a peripheral control IC, a ROM, and an SDRAM described below, and a peripheral data ROM board described later includes an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. As the pin intervals of these ICs are reduced, the pin intervals of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are reduced, and the interval between the various connectors is reduced by increasing the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, since the distance between the connector and the special connector is narrow, it is necessary to take measures against an electric trouble due to a foreign object falling from the tank rail.

  First, a plurality of notches 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) as shown in FIG. It is displaced rearward as compared with the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface (on the rear side) (in the present embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). Are displaced by the distance dimension of).

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side to the back side of the top plate 551a (from the front to the back of the top plate 551a). ), A plurality of steps are formed in a stepped shape bent downward. The upper back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the bent top plate 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d are substantially flush with each other. It is to be arranged. When the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the upper back plate 551 d of the payout base 551. In addition, the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d.

  As a result, the metal powder of the game sphere B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, is received and adhered to the top plate portion 551a, or adhered to the convex portion 551da. You can do it. Further, the contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d of the payout base 551 are in surface contact protrudes rearward at the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. Since the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the notch portion 553aa through the notch portion 553aa, is covered by the formed convex portion 551da, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 starts from the contact portion. Of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) so as not to fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. It has become.

  In this manner, the top plate portion 551a and the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 are formed of the metal of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Prevents powder from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eaves that can be used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600 is shifted (in the present embodiment, shifted by a distance dimension that is about half the diameter of the game ball B). (I.e., the peripheral control unit 1500 is not disposed immediately below the cutout portion 553aa), the electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553. This is effective for preventing metal powder.

  Further, while a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, upper and left sides of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) are provided. Since the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later) because it is not provided on each of the cover side walls provided on the lower side and the right side, respectively. However, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the inside of the cover 1501.

  The cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 has a square-shaped FAN mounting recess for mounting the air-cooling fan FAN at the center thereof, and a plurality of concentric circles on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes, which will be described later, are respectively formed along the slits. The cover body 1501 has seven connector holes provided along a lower side thereof, which are provided on a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to a volume adjustment switch, and A volume adjustment hole is formed, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output substrate described later. In a state where the peripheral control board 1510 is attached inside the cover body 1501, gaps are formed in the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are respectively exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between a volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a volume control hole formed on the cover body 1501, A volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume control hole. Further, in a state where a liquid crystal output board described later is attached inside the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and two connector holes formed on the cover body 1501, The two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are respectively exposed from these two connector holes.

  When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the space inside the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings, thereby controlling the periphery. Air from outside the unit 1500 is passed through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover 1501 and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 housed in the space between the cover 1501 and the base 1502. In addition to the above-mentioned clearances (the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501), the volume adjustment switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the cover And a sound volume adjustment hole formed in body 1501. During and through the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal driving board, and two connector hole formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The sum (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes formed on the bottom surface of the FAN attachment concave portion of the cover body 1501 is the sum of the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and the area described above. Clearance (seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed on the cover body 1501), a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and formed on the cover body 1501 A volume adjustment hole, a gap formed in the liquid crystal output board, and an area in a gap formed in the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501 and the two connectors formed in the cover 1501). It is getting smaller. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the space inside the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When the air is taken in, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to prevent the heavy powder of the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inside space of the cover body 1501 through the ventilation holes 1501az under the influence of the air flow.

  By the way, when the wings of the air cooling fan FAN of the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, when the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500 is sucked toward the inner space of the cover body 1501 through the wings by this rotation, the air cooling fan FAN Since the flow velocity of the air due to the rotation of the wings increases, the probability that the heavy powder of the metal powder of the game ball B is sucked toward the inner space of the cover body 1501 under the influence of the air flow increases, An electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder causes a failure (failure) in various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the inside of the cover 1501. Become.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), by forming a protruding portion along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, heavy powder of metal powder of the game ball B is air-cooled. The game ball can be configured to have a function as an eave for preventing the fan from being sucked into the fan FAN, and by forming a protruding portion along the vicinity of the upper side of the FAN mounting recess formed on the cover body 1501. It can be configured to have a function as an eave to prevent heavy powder called metal powder B from being sucked into the air-cooling fan FAN, and the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN is thin. (That is, the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN compared to the distance dimension in the depth direction of the FAN mounting recess. When the air-cooling fan FAN is accommodated in the FAN mounting recess formed in the cover body 1501, heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B is removed by the inner wall of the FAN mounting recess when the fan is mounted in the FAN mounting recess. It can be configured so as to have a function as an eave for preventing being sucked into the FAN. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

  Next, another configuration of the present invention in which a countermeasure against metal powder that can avoid an electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B is taken (hereinafter referred to as a “countermeasure against metal powder according to the second to fifth embodiments”) Will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130. FIG. 127 shows a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment. FIG. 128 shows the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment. FIG. 129 shows a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 130 shows a configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment. In FIGS. 127 to 130, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 126 (hereinafter, referred to as “configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment”) are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the portions of the game board 5 necessary for explanation are shown as cross-sectional views.

[Comparison between the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate 551a as described above ( The upper part 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top part 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side part 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the upper portion of the back plate 551d are disposed as described above. The rear surface and the rear surface are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is in front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment is formed in a stepped shape bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and upward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. And a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one-half the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed above the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a and the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the tank rail 553, The rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 are arranged on substantially the same plane. Note that the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 arranged on substantially the same plane as the tank rail 553 is formed so as to branch out from the portion where the effect display device 1600 is attached and to extend rearward.

  In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 has the payout base 551. Is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is connected to the rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010. Is in contact with the mounting recess 3010da, which is in contact with the mounting recess 3010da, and the abutting portion is covered by an upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

  As described above, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail 553 is disposed. While the rear surface of the upper plate 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d are disposed on substantially the same plane, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate unit 551a in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment. When the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the back face of the tank rail 553 and the back box of the back unit 3000. The difference is that a rear surface 3010d of the base 3010 is disposed on substantially the same plane. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is formed on the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551. The rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d is covered with a convex portion 551da formed on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is attached to the rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010. It is said that it is in a contact state where it comes into surface contact with 3010da, and the contacted portion is covered by an upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da. It is different at the point.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be obtained. In other words, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is received by the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000. It can be attached. Further, a contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the mounting concave portion 3010da formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are in surface contact with each other is formed by the upper wall formed by the mounting concave portion 3010da. Since the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, comes into contact therewith, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back unit 3000) Of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 (see below).

  As described above, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 have fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. The metal powder of the game ball B is directed toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eave that can prevent it from falling. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, it is desirable to provide the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

[Comparison between the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate 551a as described above ( The upper part 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top part 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side part 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the upper portion of the back plate 551d are disposed as described above. The rear surface and the rear surface are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment is formed in a stepped shape bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the bent top plate 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate 551a is close to the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to protrude below the notch 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a.

  In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 has the payout base 551. Is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the third embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is positioned below the tank rail 553. The upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a which are in contact with the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. Are arranged on the same plane.

  As described above, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail 553 is disposed. In contrast to the rear surface of the upper plate 551d and the rear surface of the upper plate 551d, the rear surface of the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the third embodiment. A bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and a rear surface of the tank rail 553 and an end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are substantially flush with each other. In that they are located in In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is formed on the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551. The rear surface is in contact with the rear surface, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the third embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is bent below the tank rail 553. The upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is in contact with the end surface of the top plate portion 551a, and the contact portion 6 And the upper surface of 0a are different in that they are arranged on the same plane.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, is bent below the tank rail 553. It can be received and adhered on the upper surface of the contact portion 640 a of the rear cover 640. Further, a contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 are in contact with each other is in contact. As a result, the gap is not formed, so that the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, comes into contact with the game panel of the game board 5 from the contact portion. It cannot fall toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the 1100 (the rear side of the effect display 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It has become.

  As described above, the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is provided with the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. It is assumed that the metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eave that can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  A contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in contact is in contact. As a result, no gap is formed, but the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is sunk closely below the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. Or the positional relationship in which the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is sunk closely under the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640. A gap is not formed in the closely contacted portion between the formed contact portion 640a and the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. The metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, comes to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the closely contacted portion. The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface (behind the effect display device 1600) cannot fall down toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, it is desirable to provide the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

[Comparison between the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate 551a as described above ( The upper part 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top part 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side part 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the upper portion of the back plate 551d are disposed as described above. The rear surface and the rear surface are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  In contrast, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed in the front-rear direction is different from that of the top plate 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment is formed in a stepped shape bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a extends rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to protrude by a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one third of the diameter of the game ball B).

  In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 has the payout base 551. Is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is positioned below the tank rail 553. And is in contact with the convex portion 551ab formed on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a so as to protrude downward, and the contacted portion is the tank rail 553. Is covered by a rear surface of a bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the top plate 551a.

  As described above, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail 553 is disposed. In contrast to the rear surface of the top plate 551a, the rear surface of the tank 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d are arranged on substantially the same plane. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate unit 551a. In addition, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed so as to slightly project rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. Is different. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is formed on the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551. The rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d is covered with a convex portion 551da formed on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is bent below the tank rail 553. The rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is in contact with a convex portion 551ab formed so as to protrude downward and is in contact with the convex portion 551ab. Disposed below the tank rails 553, are different in that covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate 551a.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, is bent below the tank rail 553. 551a so that they can be received and adhered. Further, a front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and a convex portion 551ab formed below the tank rail 553 and protruding downward on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a. Since the abutting portion that is in surface contact is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553, the contact portion falls outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa. The metal powder of the played game ball B is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder abuts. The peripheral control unit 1500 cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  As described above, the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is a game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). , And also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game balls B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the bent top plate portion 551a functioning as an eave disposed below the tank rail 553 is used as a separate member (another structural component) as the top plate portion 551a. It can also be configured to be attached to

  When the top plate portion 551a is formed as another member (another structural component), a mechanism that can be detached or moved from the mounting position to return to the mounting position may be used for the purpose of removing the attached metal powder. In this case, by making the top plate 551a a color different from that of the peripheral members, the mechanism portion that can be detached or moved from the attachment position and returned to the attachment position can be clarified, and the work of removing the attached metal powder is improved. Let it.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa, is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, it is desirable to provide the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

[Comparison between the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate 551a as described above ( The upper part 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top part 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side part 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is arranged as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. Are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 130, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a in which the tank rail 553 is disposed in the front-rear direction is different from that of the top plate 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment is formed in a stepped shape bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. And a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one-half the diameter of the game ball B). In other words, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to protrude downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a.

  In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 has the payout base 551. Is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the contact portion formed by largely bending the upper side of the back cover 640 forward. The front surface of 640a is arranged in parallel with the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a, and comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a which is arranged to project downward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. It is in contact.

  In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 has the payout base 551. Is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 has a gutter-shaped main guide. The top plate 551a, which is disposed parallel to the front wall of the portion 553a and protrudes downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a, is in contact with the rear surface of the top plate 551a. The contacting portion is disposed so as to be largely shifted forward from the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a.

  As described above, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail 553 is disposed. While the rear surface of the top plate 551a and the rear surface of the top plate 551a are arranged on substantially the same plane, the rear surface of the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a. In the state where the bent top plate portion 551a is not arranged below the tank rail 553, and the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper side of the back cover 640 is largely bent forward to form a contact. The difference is that the portion 640a is arranged. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is formed on the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551. The rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d is covered with a convex portion 551da formed on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is in contact with the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a. It is in a state of being in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a which is arranged in parallel and protrudes downward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a, and is in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a. Min, is different in that it is arranged largely shifted forward from notches 553aa which is plurally formed to the main guiding part 553a.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, is disposed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 and on the upper side of the back cover 640. The side can be received and adhered on the upper surface of the contact portion 640a formed by bending the side largely forward. Furthermore, it is arranged in parallel with the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a, and is arranged so as to protrude downward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. The contact portion where the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is in surface contact with the cutout portion 553aa formed plurally in the main guiding portion 553a is largely shifted forward and is in contact with the contact portion. Are not formed. For this reason, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, comes into contact with the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box of the back unit 3000). The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the display 3010 cannot fall down toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As described above, the contact portion 640a formed by largely bending the upper side of the back cover 640 toward the front is externally transmitted from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder of the dropped game ball B is sent to the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In addition to functioning as an eave that can be prevented from falling down, it also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game balls B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, it is desirable to provide the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

  Incidentally, a game machine provided with a tank rail for guiding a game ball from a ball tank to a downstream side has been conventionally proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-215440 (FIG. 2)). This tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging foreign matter generated by the game ball. However, if foreign matter falling from the hole provided in the tank rail adheres to the control board disposed below the tank rail, an electrical trouble may occur, causing the control board to malfunction or malfunction. Had become. In recent control boards, as the number of objects to be controlled increases, the pin interval between connectors becomes narrower. As the number of connectors increases, the interval between connectors becomes narrower, and furthermore, the pin interval between ICs becomes smaller. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures against electric trouble due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 131 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, and FIGS. 132 to 139 are enlarged front views of main parts of the game board. FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by a player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. The game area 5a includes a first game area 5a1 where a game ball fired with a predetermined firing force (in the case where the operation amount of the handle 182 by the player is small) can flow down, and a specific firing stronger than the predetermined firing force. A second game area 5a2 to which a game ball fired by force (in the case of a shooting force strong enough to jump over the first game area 5a1 / a large amount of operation of the handle 182 by the player) can flow down, and the second game area 5a2. It can be divided into a gaming area 5a2 and a third gaming area 5a3 downstream where the first gaming area 5a1 merges.

  In the left half of the first game area 5a1 of the game area 5a and the third game area 5a3 connected to the downstream side, a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B A plurality of general winning openings 2001 for giving out (payout) are provided, and the right half of the second game area 5a2 and the third game area 5a3 connected to the downstream side thereof are provided to the player by receiving the game ball B. And a predetermined bonus (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B), a general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, a special winning opening 2005, and the passing of the game balls B are detected, and a player is detected. A gate portion 2003 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, opening and closing the opening / closing piece 850 of the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time so as to enable a prize), and the center of the third game area 5a3. To Specific privilege to the player by receiving the game ball B (e.g., payout, etc. of a predetermined number of game balls B.) Is first start hole 2002 to grant is provided.

  Further, in the second game area 5a2, as a unique reception port capable of receiving the game ball B, an unfavorable second port that can receive the game ball B, collects the game ball B, and does not give a benefit to the player. One receiving port 2006 is provided. Note that, in the second game area 5a2, the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004, which receive the game ball B and give a predetermined privilege to the player, are provided with the second winning opening 2001, which is more advantageous than the first receiving opening 2006. Also called reception. This second receiving port may be relatively advantageous over the first receiving port 2006, so that the setting of the first receiving port 2006 is such that no game ball is given to an incoming ball. For example, one game ball may be provided upon entry. Further, if the setting of the first reception port 2006 is to give one game ball to incoming balls, two or more game balls may be given by incoming balls.

  Also, the game area 5a connects the first game area 5a1 and the second game area 5a2 at the upper side, so that the game ball B fired with a specific strong firing force enters the second game area 5a2. And a communication passage portion 5a4 that can pass through.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a front component 1000 whose outer shape is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails 2007, which come into contact with the game ball B, are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 which is within the game area 5a.

  The game board 5 has a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a game which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and is driven by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 151) for controlling the contents.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. A front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat base panel 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the base panel 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the third game area 5a3 of the game area 5a, and has a first opening port 2002 and one general winning opening 2001, and a first opening game unit 2100; A side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 near the middle area between the area 5a1 and the third game area 5a3 and having two general winning openings 2001; a second game area 5a2 and a third game area; Attacker unit 2400 attached near the middle area of the game machine and having a special winning opening 2005, one general winning opening 2001 (second receiving opening), a second starting opening 2004 (second receiving opening), and a gate portion. 2003 and a first reception port 2006, and a substantially upward center in front view in the game area 5a (the first game area 5a1, the second game area 5a2, and the third game area 5a3). A frame-shaped center member 2500 attached to state) surrounded three sides of the both lateral and bottom, and a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape having an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a2 in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably mounting the display device 1600, a drive board unit 1700 mounted below the opening 3010 a 2 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of mounted inside the back box 3010. And a back effect unit 3100.

  The drive board unit 1700 includes a panel relay board 1710 that relays connection between a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 151) and various sensors and various switches provided on the game board 5, and a peripheral control board 1510 included in the peripheral control unit 1500. A panel drive board 1720 for driving various decorative boards and various electric drive sources (various motors and various solenoids) in response to commands from the PC; a drive board box 1730 for accommodating the panel relay board 1710 and the panel drive board 1720; It has.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction in front view and extending clockwise in the circumferential direction in front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  The front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front constituent member 1000 and having an upper part curved inside the front constituent member 1000, and a game ball B of the outer rail 1001. An impact portion 1006 made of rubber or the like is provided at the intersection of the terminal end in the hitting direction and the upper end of the right rail 1005.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member that is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction and rotatable only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened and the closed position. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 has an out ball opening 1008 that penetrates forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out ball opening 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end thereof, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear security projections 172 of the security frame 170 of the door frame 3 project rearward from the security cover 170. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 penetrate the lower full tank. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the route unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and has the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached. The game panel 1100 has a flat base panel 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the base panel 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the base panel 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has been. In this embodiment, the base panel 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The base panel plate 1110 has a decorative pattern formed by a plurality of linear grooves on the rear surface. The decorative pattern according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of horizontal lines extending horizontally at regular intervals, a plurality of upper right oblique lines rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees at the same intervals as the plurality of horizontal lines, a horizontal line and an upper right oblique line. , And a plurality of horizontal diagonal lines that are rotated clockwise by 60 degrees at the same intervals as the horizontal lines. In other words, the decorative pattern is a geometric pattern in which the contours of an equilateral triangle formed by a horizontal line, an upper right diagonal line, and an upper left diagonal line are arranged in a plurality of fixed patterns. This decorative pattern, when assembled on the game board 5, has two regular triangular contour parts on the left and right sides of the first starting port 2002 and three regular triangular contour parts near the upper end of the inner rail 1002. Are further provided inside each of them with a picture composed of contour lines of two equilateral triangles having different sizes.

  The decorative pattern has a V-shaped cross section. This decorative pattern 1150 can be visually recognized from the front player side even when a plurality of panel decorative LEDs that emit light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 mounted on the panel decorative board are not lit. To decorate the game area 5a. The base panel plate 1110 was formed into a geometric pattern consisting of a plurality of regular triangular outlines when the panel decoration board of the panel decoration substrate was illuminated to emit light into the base panel plate 1110. The decorative pattern can be illuminated.

  The decorative pattern of the base panel plate 1110 includes a radiating portion that mainly reflects forward the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 to the inside, and a light emitting portion that forwards the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 to the inside. And a radiation light guide section that reflects light toward the light source and guides the light along a linear shape. The radiation light-guiding portion satisfies at least one of a groove having a deeper depth and a longer perimeter in a cross section than the radiation portion. The radiation light guide section is formed so as to connect (or intersect) the plurality of radiation sections, and irregularly reflects the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 to the inside in the base panel plate 1110. Light can be guided in the direction in which the groove extends. In other words, the radiating light guiding portion plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiating portions connected to itself to the other, thereby limiting the arrangement portion and the number of the panel decoration LEDs. Among them, the photosensitivity (the ratio of the amount of light emitted (reflected) forward) of the entire decorative pattern of the base panel plate 1110 is increased. Specifically, the radiating light guide unit is a radiating light that is disposed outside the normal light guide region from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel decoration LED of the lower left panel decoration board described later. The light is guided to the portion, the radiating portion emits light, and the sensitivity of the entire decorative pattern is increased.

  This allows more light to reach the radiating light guide portion to the radiating portion of the decorative pattern formed in a portion where light from the panel decoration LED does not easily reach (a portion outside the normal light guiding region). As a result, the radiating portion can be illuminated with a sufficient amount of light. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED of the panel decoration substrate emits light, the light incident inside the base panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiating portion and the radiating light guiding portion, and has a geometric shape including a plurality of regular triangular outlines. A decorative pattern formed in a school pattern can be illuminated with uniform brightness over substantially the entirety.

  The base panel 1110 has an outer recess 1111 which is the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponds to the outer ball opening 1008 of the front component 1000 and which is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the base panel 1110 has a plurality of through holes 1112 penetrating therethrough for mounting the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 is large enough to include the base panel 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in the present embodiment) than the base panel 1110. Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 holds the base panel 1110 in a detachable manner, is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and has a through hole 1121 whose inside is substantially the same size as the game area 5a and penetrates in the front-rear direction. It has.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a cutout portion 1122 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000. When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the notch 1122 penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch 1122. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and the front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below and the rear side in a state where it is assembled on the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is mounted.

  When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out ball opening 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 151) for controlling the contents of the game and payout of the game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And

  The main control board box 1320 includes a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are transparently molded of polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been performed or an unauthorized IC is mounted) Is checked from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the beta body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against improper acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting port sensor 2402, a special winning port sensor 2403, a first receiving port sensor 2406, a starting port solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, and a general winning port sensor. 3001, a first starting port sensor 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 131 and 142 to 144. FIG. 142 is a schematic view of a function display unit attached to the upper left corner of the front component outside the game area, FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from behind, and FIG. 144 is a function display on the main control board. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring routing from a unit. Here, first, the function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a will be described, and subsequently, the function display attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The unit 1400 will be described.

[5-5-1. When attached to the lower left corner of the front component outside the game area]
As shown in FIG. 131, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state where the function display unit 1400 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator 1401 made up of three LEDs for displaying the game status and a normal lottery result selected by passing the game ball B to the gate unit 2003, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 131. A normal symbol display 1402 composed of two LEDs and a normal reservation display 1403 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display 1404 including eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and a first starting port. A first special reserve number indicator 1405 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the reception of game balls B to 2002, and a second special lottery drawn by the reception of game balls B to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display 1406 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result, and a second special reserved number display 1407 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves related to the reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 And

  Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like, the function display unit 1400 includes a round formed of five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005. A display 1408.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-5-2. When mounted on the upper left corner of the front component outside the game area]
As shown in FIG. 142, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The arrangement of various displays of the function display unit 1400 is obtained by rotating the arrangement of various displays of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 131 clockwise by 90 degrees, and the functions of various displays are also shown in FIG. The functions are the same as those of the various display units of the function display unit 1400.

  Here, as a countermeasure against noise when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, in particular, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to each other. A plurality of wirings for transmitting a control signal from the control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “wiring”) will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, a wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector 1400a provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is provided from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear face of the back box 3010. When it is routed to the upper side, it is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is collectively formed by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 vertically formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the gaming panel. Along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the rear lower portion of the substrate holder 1100 or directly attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. It is drawn down.

  Then, when the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and the function display unit connector MFCN is provided along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. After that, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  As described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a longer wiring length, and particularly, the rear face of the game panel 1100 from the upper right corner of the game board 5 and the back box. The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is formed by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 vertically formed along the right side of the back surface of the back box 3010. The main control board box 1320 is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320 along the right side of the main control board box 1320 on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the game panel 1100 at the lower rear side thereof. In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the area in which the wiring FCBL is routed is located in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Will be arranged.

  The game panel 1100 includes a panel decoration board on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs for irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel board 1110 are mounted, a board cover mounting the panel decoration board to the panel holder 1120, In the case where the panel decoration board is provided, the panel decoration board is composed of an upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front, and a lower left panel decoration board arranged at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front. Be composed. The board cover includes an upper left board cover for attaching the upper left panel decorative board 1131 to the panel holder 1120, and a lower left board cover for attaching the lower left panel decorative board to the panel holder 1120.

  An upper left panel decorative board 1131 is arranged behind the function display unit 1400. The wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable electrically connected via a connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decoration board 1131, is bent upward on the rear side of the game panel 1100, and is formed on the front side of the back box 3010. When it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the upper side and is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in a state of being close to (or in contact with) the above-described wiring FCBL, a lower portion of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is obtained. Are bent toward each other, gathered together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and pulled below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Turned. Then, the wiring UPCBL is separated from the path of the wiring FCBL described above, is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the driving board unit 1700 under the peripheral control unit 1500, and along the upper side of the driving board unit 1700. After being routed and routed above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

  As described above, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel driving board 1720 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wiring length, and in particular, has an upper right corner of the game board 5. The wiring FCBL that is routed from the corner to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and moves up and down along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in a plurality of directions collectively extend to the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Like the wiring FCBL described above, the area where the wiring UPCBL is routed is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Is arranged in front of the payout unit 560 that has been set.

  As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding path for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and a single guiding path of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the guided game balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, A lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  Further, as described above, the game balls B are polished in the island facilities of the game hall, or rubbed with each other in the circulation between the island facilities and the pachinko machine 1, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby causing electromagnetic noise. Release. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game balls B can stay and the payout unit 560 are installed, and around the area.

  The main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, includes a main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like ( FIG. 151). The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The forced reset by the circuit cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a performs a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a performs a reset without executing a main control side power-off process described later, and executes a main control side power-on process described later again. Will be done. In this case, since the main-control-side power-off process is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a always occurs, as described later. The contents of the RAM are completely erased (cleared). That is, when the main control MPU 1310a is activated again after the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the RAM is cleared.

  In the present embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type package is adopted as the package of the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a are used. The main control board 1310 projects from the soldering surface (the surface opposite to the mounting surface). That is, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

  As described above, since the static electricity easily accumulates in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 are mounted and the surrounding area, when the electromagnetic wave noise is emitted by the electrostatic discharge, the function display is arranged in front of the payout unit 560. In some cases, the wiring may intrude into the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the unit 1400 and the main control board 1310, and the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected. Invading the wiring UPCBL. As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may jump out and enter the wiring UPCBL. On the contrary, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL may jump out and enter the wiring FCBL.

  For example, a wiring FCBL for electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 temporarily moves in a wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is routed linearly from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, on the right side of the main control board box 1320 and approximately from the upper side of the main control board box 1320). It is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the upper side or the lower side of the main control board box 1320 where it has a quarter length. When passing over the function display unit connector MFCN disposed closer to the main control board box 1320, After being bent toward the side and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN, when electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL is When routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, the front of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a (that is, When passing through the area (in front of the bottom plate of the control board box 1320), the electromagnetic noise enters the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL, and has entered. Under the influence of electromagnetic wave noise, the main control MPU 1310a performs forced reset by its own built-in reset circuit. Door and there is a consuming fear.

  When a wiring accommodation groove is formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 instead of the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, the wiring FCBL is After being drawn out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, it is housed not along the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, but drawn out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320. It is electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, when the electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is housed and routed along the wiring housing groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the main control MPU 1310a When passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of, the electromagnetic noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. There is a possibility that the main control MPU 1310a may be forcedly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of the penetrated electromagnetic wave noise.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the position of the connector MFCN for the function display unit to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the position of the mount of the main control MPU 1310a are defined as the positional relationship between the connector MFCN for the function display unit and the main control board. The main control MPU 1310a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, while being arranged closer to the left side from the center of the lower side of the 1310. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged below the function display unit connector MFCN below a center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310.

  This allows the main control MPU 1310a to be arranged at a distance from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the MPU 1310a from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space separated from the main control board 1310 by the main control board 1310. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, by arranging the main control MPU 1310a apart from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the main control MPU 1310a is not affected. On the main control board 1310, or in a space where the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310, it is possible to attenuate electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the wiring FCBL. ing. Also in this regard, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged such that the right side of the package is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter, referred to as “first wiring separation distance dimension”). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so that the electromagnetic wave that has entered the wiring FCBL This is to prevent noise from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL via a space having the first wiring separation distance dimension.

  Further, as described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is provided in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. (Or accommodated along the wiring accommodating groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200), without being drawn around, on the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. When it is routed downward along, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN. The main control board box 132 is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. The distance dimension between the wiring FCBL routed along the lower side and the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (hereinafter, referred to as "second wiring separation distance dimension"). ) Can be largely secured. The second wiring separation distance dimension has a larger distance dimension than the first wiring separation distance dimension. Thus, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL enters the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL through a space having the second wiring separation distance dimension. Can be prevented. Also in this regard, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL. However, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to each other through the panel relay board 1710. It is also possible to configure so that the connection is established. In this case, it is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or eliminating the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL on the panel relay board 1710 (that is, a plurality of elements that transmit a control signal from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic wave noise with respect to the wiring FCBL). Thus, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. It is known from the observation result of the electromagnetic wave noise waveform that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass.

  Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like, an EMC countermeasure component (a coil, a bead, a capacitor, and the like) can be given. When a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. When a more abrupt attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL. May be inserted respectively.

  In addition, the panel relay board 1710 detects a game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5 and a gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5. A special winning opening sensor 2403, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 provided on the gaming board 5, and a magnetism acting near the first starting opening 2002 provided on the gaming board 5 The two wires from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 are electrically connected and collected. That is, in the panel relay board 1710, in addition to the two wires from the various sensors, the wires FCBL from the function display unit 1400 are also electrically connected and collected. Note that two wires from the first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 and a second starting port for detecting the game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 The two wires from the sensor 2402 are electrically connected directly to the respective predetermined connectors of the main control board 1310 without going through the panel relay board 1710, respectively.

  The panel relay board 1710 is electrically connected to a wiring FCBL from the function display unit 1400 in addition to two wirings from various sensors to a main control board 1310 via a connector 1710a. Therefore, when the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710, the panel relay board 1710 can reduce or reduce the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. By providing an element capable of removing (that is, by providing an element capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic wave noise to a plurality of wirings FCBL transmitting a control signal from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400, respectively) ), It is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise from entering the two wires from various sensors.

  As described above, the wiring UPCBL for electrically connecting the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel driving board 1720 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wiring length, and particularly, a game board. 5, the wiring UPCBL routed from the upper right corner to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is bent toward the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The wiring UPCBL is routed under the peripheral control unit 1500 and up to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 by being grouped by the plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction. As in the case of the above-described wiring FCBL, there is a case where the electromagnetic wave noise enters the region. As described above, the wiring UPCBL is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, and After being routed above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector, so that the influence of electromagnetic wave noise due to the wiring UPCBL reaches the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500. There is a risk.

  Specifically, on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 148) and a connector provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be described in detail later. CN8 and CN9 are arranged (see FIG. 148). Various wirings respectively corresponding to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are electrically connected. For this reason, when various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring UPCBL are arranged so as to intersect or contact with each other (straddling), the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL jumps out to the connectors CN2 to CN9. When invading various wirings that are electrically connected, the effect of the electromagnetic wave noise that invades the wiring UPCBL causes, for example, the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600 to be disturbed (for example, a pattern such as a black screen). Disturbance occurs).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, although not shown, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 so as to be separated from the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. I have. Thus, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not intersect or contact (straddle) various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Specifically, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the driving board unit 1700 does not contact in parallel with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9, and does not electrically connect to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Does not come in contact with some of the various wires connected to In this embodiment, in order to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the above-described built-in reset circuit, various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310 intersect or contact with the wiring UPCBL. Not arranged to be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the wiring UPCBL that is routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 and the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 As a positional relationship with a mounting position of a peripheral control IC 1510a (to be described later shown in FIG. 151), the peripheral control IC 1510a is disposed above a center line passing through a middle point between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control 1510. That is, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a Are separated from each other.

  Accordingly, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged apart from the wiring UPCBL routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 via the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the noise of the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 Intrusion into various pins can be prevented. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL into which the electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is separated from the wiring UPCBL routed under the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Accordingly, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring UPCBL, the wiring UPCBL may be provided on the peripheral control board 1510 or in a space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected. To attenuate the electromagnetic noise that enters. Also in this respect, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL into which the electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Furthermore, the board between the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 is electrically connected via wiring (not shown), and the wiring and the wiring UPCBL intersect or contact with each other. Therefore, the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated in the panel driving board 1720, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is connected from the panel driving board 1720 through the wiring. It is extremely difficult to invade the peripheral control board 1510 due to the electromagnetic wave noise. Also in this respect, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL into which the electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Note that, in the panel driving board 1720, the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated by the ground (solid earth). However, it is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or eliminating the electromagnetic noise (that is, It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic noise for a plurality of wirings UPCBL transmitting a control signal from the panel driving board 1720 to the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400. . This makes it possible to reliably attenuate or eliminate the electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the wiring UPCBL in the panel drive board 1720. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL into which the electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. It is known from the observation result of the electromagnetic wave noise waveform that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass.

  Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like, an EMC countermeasure component (a coil, a bead, a capacitor, and the like) can be given. When a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings UPCBL. Further, when a more abrupt attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into a plurality of wirings UPCBL, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. May be inserted respectively.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the wiring for electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring UPCBL and the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the panel driving board 1720 are electrically connected. Of the wires (not shown), the wire UPCBL passes near the ball supply means (at least one of the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580). The wiring UPCBL of the wiring forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 is the same as the various decorative boards 184, 273, etc and the like on the door frame side except the upper left panel decorative board 1131. The wiring is arranged so as not to intersect or contact wiring forming a transmission path with the substrate 1510. Therefore, such a configuration can be adopted for various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310. For example, among various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310, a wiring passing under an environment strongly affected by electromagnetic noise and another wiring except this wiring are arranged so as not to cross or contact with each other. Thus, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a (main control board 1310) that can be operated by the high frequency circuit of the crystal oscillator from being forcibly reset by the above-described built-in reset circuit. Therefore, malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the wiring for electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 (the transmission path for electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 is formed) The wiring UPCBL and the wiring (not shown) for electrically connecting the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the panel driving board 1720 as a wiring connector, but a connector provided on the back side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 The wiring UPCBL ', which is a connection cable electrically connected via the 1131a, may be routed so as to be directly electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the wiring UPCBL ′ is a wiring that forms another transmission path that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 (except for the upper left panel decorative board 1131, and as other effect means, various decorative boards 184 and 184 on the door frame side). 273, etc, etc., and a wiring that forms a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510). Accordingly, the wiring forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, that is, the connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 are directly electrically connected. The wiring that forms the other transmission path electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 when the electromagnetic wave noise that has invaded the wiring UPCBL ′ to be connected (the transmission path between the control means and the other production means except for the specific production means) It is possible to prevent the wires to be formed from entering the connectors CN2 to CN9 of the peripheral control unit 1500 (various wires electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 (see FIG. 148)). Therefore, malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 extends from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear face of the game panel 1100 and to the rear face. When the wire is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, it is bent downwardly of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and each of the wiring processing pieces 3011 is formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. When the game board 5 was routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear face of the game panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear face of the back box 3010, it was bent from the upper side toward the left side, and the rear face of the back box 3010 was bent. On the left side, the wiring processing pieces are bent again downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and are formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The left side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower portion of the game panel 1100 and attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200. When it is routed downward along the side, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320, and is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN. After that, the function display unit connector MFCN may be electrically connected.

  By doing so, the distance between the wiring FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a can be made larger than the above-described first wiring separation distance, so that the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL reduces the wiring FCBL. Of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having a distance dimension from the main control MPU 1310a to the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a. Because the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the game board 5 is located below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. By being disposed, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are mounted, and when electromagnetic noise is emitted due to the electrostatic discharge, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are removed. This is because there is a case in which a wiring FCBL, which is arranged below and electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310, is intruded.

  In the case where such a mode is adopted and the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. Thus, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation result of the electromagnetic wave noise waveform, it is known that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above. It is designed to pass signals having a waveform width.

  Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like, as described above, an EMC countermeasure component (a coil, a bead, a capacitor, and the like) can also be given. The capacitors are inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to the FCBL. If a capacitor is used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. When a more abrupt attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL. May be inserted respectively.

  In the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 extends from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear face of the game panel 1100 and to the rear face. When the wire is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, it is bent downwardly of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and each of the wiring processing pieces 3011 is formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Although the wiring FCBLs that have been collected by the wiring processing pieces 3011 are bent toward the left side at the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, It is gathered by the lower wiring processing piece provided on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100. Is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, and is drawn downward along the left side of the main control substrate box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. After being bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320 and routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. When connected, there is a possibility that electromagnetic noise entering the wiring FCBL may affect the peripheral control unit 1500.

  Specifically, on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, connectors CN2 to CN7 (see FIG. 148) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged. Various wirings respectively corresponding to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are electrically connected. For this reason, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL intersect or contact with each other (straddling arrangement), so that electromagnetic noise entering the wiring FCBL is electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. , The effect image is drawn on the effect display device 1600 due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise invading the line FCBL (for example, disturbance of the pattern such as a black screen). Occurs).

  Therefore, the wiring FCBL should not cross or be connected to the various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 so that the wiring FCBL is not routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 (the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500). It is preferable to configure so as not to be in contact arrangement (straddling arrangement). For example, as a method of laying out the wiring FCBL in which the various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL do not intersect or come into contact with each other (a straddling arrangement), an illustration provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 as a drawing method. When the wiring FCBL electrically connected through a connector which is not connected is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent from the upper side to the left side, On the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent again toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces are formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, thereby playing the game. Before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the panel 1100, the substrate holder 1200 is bent to reach the upper side. When the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the main body 1200 is pulled downward along the left side of the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320. May be electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN after being routed below the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side.

  By doing so, the distance dimension between the wiring FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a can be made larger than the above-described first wiring separation distance dimension. Through the space having the distance dimension from the wiring FCBL to the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a, it is possible to prevent intrusion into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. Because the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the game board 5 is located below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. By being disposed, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are mounted, and when electromagnetic noise is emitted due to the electrostatic discharge, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are removed. This is because there is a case in which a wiring FCBL, which is arranged below and electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310, is intruded.

  In the case where such a mode is adopted and the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. Thus, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation result of the electromagnetic wave noise waveform, it is known that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above. It is designed to pass signals having a waveform width.

  Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like, as described above, an EMC countermeasure component (a coil, a bead, a capacitor, and the like) can also be given. The capacitors are inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to the FCBL. If a capacitor is used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. When a more abrupt attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL. May be inserted respectively.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, but above the center line. Although the main control MPU 1310a is arranged in the above, the positional relationship is reversed and the main control MPU 1310a is arranged below the center line, whereas the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged above the center line. In this case, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a may be arranged so as to be separated from each other on the main control board 1310. Even with such a configuration, the main control MPU 1310a can be arranged to be separated from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. The connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a can be prevented from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via a space separated from the main control board 1310. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 extends from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear face of the game panel 1100 and to the rear face. When the wire is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, it is bent downwardly of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and each of the wiring processing pieces 3011 is formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower portion of the game panel 1100 and attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200 Was being routed downward along. In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed is located in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Had been placed. As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding path for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and a single guiding path for the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B guided by each of the game balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward. And a lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side. In other words, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed in this manner is located in front of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the lower full tank path unit 610 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Had been arranged. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which the electromagnetic noise can enter, in addition to the wiring of the wiring FCBL, the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the dispensing device 580 , So as not to be routed in a wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320 (or formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200). After being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN, the electric power is transferred to the function display unit connector MFCN so that the function display unit connector MFCN is not housed and routed along the wiring housing groove. It may be configured to be connected to each other.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, but in this area, a plurality of full-color LEDs are provided instead of the function display unit 1400. A decorative board to be mounted may be attached. A plurality of wirings (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “wirings”) that are electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the decorative substrate, for example, refer to FIG. 143. To be more specific, when the game board 5 is routed from the upper right corner to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side are combined together, bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500, and connected to the corresponding peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510). After the wire is pulled down to below, the wire can be electrically connected to this connector. When it is routed from the upper corner to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent from the upper side to the left side, and the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. And bent together toward the right side below the peripheral control unit 1500 by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. After the wiring is routed below the connector of the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510) to be connected, the wiring can be electrically connected to the connector.

  In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the area where the wiring is routed by such a wiring routing method is the payout attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Since it is arranged in front of the unit 560 or in the vicinity (below) of the ball tank 552, there is a possibility that electromagnetic noise enters the wiring as described above.

  Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 arranges the connector below the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, whereas the connector is arranged from the center line. By disposing the peripheral control IC 1510a above, the connector and the peripheral control IC 1510a are arranged to be separated from each other on the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be arranged at a distance from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected. It is possible to prevent various pins of the peripheral control IC 1510a from invading through the space separated at 1510. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, by disposing the peripheral control IC 1510a away from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected. On the control board 1510, or in a space where the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other on the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to attenuate the electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the wiring. Also in this regard, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Although the decorative board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are directly and electrically connected by wiring, the decorative board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It is also possible to configure so that the connection is established. In this case, it is preferable that the panel relay board 1710 be provided with an element capable of reducing or eliminating the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring (that is, a plurality of wirings that transmit a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the decorative board). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic wave noise. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring from affecting the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. It is known from the observation result of the electromagnetic wave noise waveform that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass.

  Examples of such an element include an EMC component (coil, bead, capacitor, etc.) in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like. Are inserted so as to be connected in series, respectively, and when a capacitor is used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings. When a more abrupt attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into a plurality of wirings, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. Circuits configured in combination may be inserted respectively.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is disposed behind the function display unit 1400, and the wiring UPCBL electrically connected via the connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131. Is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010 when it is bent upward on the back surface of the gaming panel 1100, and is brought into close proximity (or in contact with) the wiring FCBL described above, When the wire is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, it is bent downwardly of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and each of the wiring processing pieces 3011 is formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. It was gathered, but it was routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the back of the game panel 1100 and to the upper side of the back of the back box 3010 Bent from the upper side to the left side, and bent again downward on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and vertically bent along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. When they are gathered by the formed wiring processing pieces and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 is bent toward the right side to be bent. After being routed along the upper side of the 1700, and routed above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, it may be electrically connected to the predetermined connector. In this case, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 (see FIG. 148) of the peripheral control unit 1500 (not shown) are routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 to drive the drive board. The unit 1700 is separated from the upper side. Thus, the wiring FCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not intersect or contact (straddle) various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. With this configuration, the wiring UPCBL routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 and the peripheral control of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 As a positional relationship between the mounting position of the IC 1510a (see FIG. 151) and the peripheral control IC 1510a, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be disposed above a center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control 1510. In other words, by disposing the peripheral control IC 1510a above the center line passing through the middle point between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other. can do. Accordingly, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged apart from the wiring UPCBL routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 via the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the noise of the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 Intrusion into various pins can be prevented. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL into which the electromagnetic noise can enter.

  By the way, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a display device (display unit) for displaying a normal figure change display game, a special figure change display game, a display of a game state, and the like is arranged on the surface of a game board (for example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraphs [0014] and [0070], FIG. 2 and FIG. 21). The display of the display device (display unit) is controlled by a CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device. By the way, when electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring for electrically connecting the display device (display unit) and the game control device (game control means), the CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device passes through this wire. There was a possibility of affecting.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 151) and the like for controlling an effect presented to a player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. I have. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image. ing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, and other boards (a peripheral data ROM board, a liquid crystal output board to be described later) and the like. ing. The configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center member 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side in front view, and right fixing pieces 1602 protruding outward from the right side in front view. The effect display device 1600 includes two fixing grooves 3010c that are opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described below, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally behind the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is inserted. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The front unit 2000 is attached to the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front of the base panel 1110, and a part of the rear end passes through the through-hole 1112 to form the base. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of panel 1110.

  As described above, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the third game area 5a3 of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and one general winning opening 2001. A side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 near an intermediate area between the first game area 5a1 and the third game area 5a3 and having two general winning openings 2001; and a second game area 5a2. And an attacker unit 2400 attached near the middle area of the third game area and having a special winning opening 2005, one general winning opening 2001 (second receiving opening), a gate section 2003, and a second starting opening 2004. (Second reception area), which has a disadvantageous first reception port 2006 and is slightly upward in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front (the first game area 5a1 and the second game area 5a2). A frame-like center member 2500 attached to the third game area 5a3 (in a state where both sides and the lower three sides are enclosed), and a display effect unit 2600 attached to the center member 2500. Have.

[5-8-1. Center member]
The center member 2500 of the front unit 2000 includes a gate sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball B received in the second start port 2004, A first receiving port sensor 2406 for detecting a game ball B received in one receiving port 2006, and the attacker unit 2400 detects a gaming ball B received in the large winning port 2005. 2403 (also referred to as a count sensor) (see FIG. 126). In addition, the center member 2500 includes a starting port solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate section 2003. The attacker unit 2400 includes An attacker solenoid 2405 is provided for opening and closing the special winning opening 2005 in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

  The center member 2500 is disposed in the game area 5a above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, substantially in the center in a front view, and slightly upward. 830. The center member 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. .

  The frame-shaped center member 2500 has a surrounding frame 832 protruding forward from the front surface of the base panel 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 around the lower side, and is driven into the game area 5a by the surrounding frame 832. Game ball B cannot enter the frame.

  The center member 2500 includes, on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the surrounding frame 832 when viewed from the front, a warp entrance 2501 in which the game balls B in the first game area 5a1 are open to enter, and a game ball B entering the warp entrance 2501. A warp exit 2502 which is openable in the frame and which can be released, and a stage shelf 2503 which can release the game balls B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction and then release the game balls B to the third game area 5a3. Have.

  The stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to the position directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center member 2500 is mounted on the game panel 1100 (base panel 1110). ) Is formed in a wavy shape such that the substantially center position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides. The stage shelf 2503 is configured such that a portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left and right direction and a lowest portion (valley) on the left and right sides thereof become lower toward the front. It is inclined, and the game balls B can be released to the third game area 5a3 from those portions.

  When the center member 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) in the center in the left-right direction of the stage shelf 2503 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. Thus, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage shelf 2503, it is accepted in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  The center member 2500 has an extended region forming portion 2504 located on the front side of the second game region 5a2 protruding to the right in front view. The region forming portion 2504 is sequentially arranged from the top in FIG. , A gate section 2003, a first reception port 2006, a general winning opening 2001 (second reception port), and a second start port 2004 (second reception port) with an opening / closing piece 850, and these are provided in the second game area 5a2. It is mounted from the front in the formed mounting opening. In the area forming part 2504, similarly to the first game area 5a1, the obstacle nail 2007 is implanted in the base panel 1110. In the present embodiment, the center member 2500 and the region forming portion 2504 are configured to be provided integrally, but as another form, the center member 2500 and the region forming portion 2504 are configured to be provided separately. You may. When the area of the second game area 5a2 is small, a ball flow lower surface portion or an obstacle protrusion is formed in the area forming section 2504 so that the area forming section 2504 is equivalent to the above-described second game area 5a2. It may have a function.

  The center member 2500 is attached to the game board 5 and, between the upper surface of the surrounding frame 832 (specifically, the upper surface on the right side from the center in the left-right direction) and the outer rail 1001 surrounding the upper side of the game area 5a. It is attached so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (11 mm in the present embodiment) (a gap having a width slightly larger than one game ball; 13 mm in the present embodiment) is formed. This gap is the communication passage portion 5a4 that connects the first game area 5a1 and the second game area 5a2 described above.

  The communication passage portion 5a4 of the embodiment shown in FIG. 131 is a stop portion provided at the intersection of the outer rail 1001 and the right rail 1005 from the tapered corner portion 832b of the step portion 832a substantially at the center of the upper surface of the surrounding frame 832. It has a horizontal passage portion extending in the left-right direction up to 1006, and a vertical passage portion located downstream of the horizontal passage portion and extending in the vertical direction. The lateral passage portion is a substantially linear gap, and extends substantially tangentially to a vertex of an arc along the outer rail 1001 drawn by the shot game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B fired with a specific strong firing force (a firing force that jumps over the first game area 5a1) rides on the upper surface of the tapered corner portion 832b of the step portion 832a of the surrounding frame 832. By centrifugal force, it can roll while contacting the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 and move to the back of the horizontal passage portion (near the entrance of the vertical passage portion).

  The vertical passage portion of the communication passage portion 5a4 has a vertical gutter-like discharge opening 848aH immediately below the stop portion 1006 and communicating downward as shown in FIG. A partition having a predetermined width is formed by a portion 848a and a vertical gutter-shaped discharge portion 848b that opens downwardly and communicates downward by opening an opening 848bH approximately one game ball away from the discharge portion 848a with respect to the hitting direction of the game ball B. It is provided in a form partitioned by a portion 848e. The partition portion 848e plays a role of separating the opening 848aH and the opening 848bH, and the top (top surface) thereof is inclined so that the game ball flows down to the right. The partition 848e has a reinforcing member (reinforcement resin 848e1) formed to have a predetermined width in the left-right direction in consideration of a game ball collision, and a housing portion 848e2 for housing the reinforcing member. . Further, right and left partition walls 848e3 that divide the discharge portion 848a and the discharge portion 848b in the left-right direction are formed downward from the surrounding wall that forms the storage portion 848e2, and a game ball B that flows down the discharge portion 848a and a discharge portion. The game ball B flowing down the 848b is prevented from being mixed during the flow. In the embodiment of FIG. 132, the top (uppermost surface) of the partition 848e between the opening 848bH and the opening 848aH virtually connects the bottom surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 (the upper surface of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500). It is formed at a height that is substantially the same as the extension on the extension line when extended. As a result, of the game balls B fired with a specific strong firing force (a firing force having a strength that jumps over the first game area 5a1), the bottom surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 is moved at a speed that does not jump over the partition portion 848e. The rolling game ball B enters the opening 848bH in front of the partition 848e. Further, of the game balls B fired with a specific strong firing force (a firing force that jumps over the first game area 5a1), the game ball B passes over the top of the partition 848e while being in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force. The game ball B (the game ball B floating above the bottom of the communication passage portion 5a4 and passing over the top of the partition portion 848e) collides with the stop portion 1006 and enters the opening 848aH. In addition, the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b are arranged side by side at the top of the second game area 5a2, that is, the points 5a2a and 5a2b that enter the second game area 5a2 (the exit portion of the communication passage section 5a4 or the second section). The game areas 5a2 are connected to each other in a different state. As described above, in the present embodiment, while having the playability of firing the game ball B with a specific strong firing force (a firing force that jumps over the first game area 5a1), the specific strong firing force Taking into account the strength of the steering wheel adjustment within the range, a new game characteristic is provided in which the directions of the game balls after jumping over the first game area 5a1 are diversified.

  As described above, in the second game area 5a2, the general winning opening 2001 (second receiving opening) and the second starting opening 2004 (in which the predetermined ball is given to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B). The second reception port), the gate section 2003, and the like, and the first reception port 2006 (the input ball = out in the embodiment) in which the handling for the incoming ball (the result of the incoming ball) is set disadvantageously from the second receiving port. It is provided, and the probability of entering the ball is appropriately set according to the type of the exit of the communication passage portion 5a4 and the arrangement of the obstacle nails 2007.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 132, the game ball B that enters (falls) from the point 5a2a corresponding to the opening 848aH of the discharge part 848a immediately below the stopper 1006 through the communication passage part 5a4 into the second game area 5a2 is It is set so that the probability of entering the ball at the first entrance 2006 is greater than the probability of entering the ball at the second entrance and the probability of passing through the gate unit 2003.

  On the other hand, the game ball B entering the second game area 5a2 from the location 5a2b corresponding to the opening 848bH of the adjacent discharge portion 848b has a small probability of entering the first reception port 2006 and is relatively close to the second reception port. It is set so that the probability of entering the ball or the probability of passing through the gate unit 2003 increases.

  Therefore, when the player hits the second game area 5a2, the player collides with the stop portion 1006 in order to aim at the discharge portion 848b that leads to the left route, which is easy to enter the second entrance and difficult to enter the first entrance 2006. Without doing so, the striking force of the handle 182 is carefully adjusted so that the game ball B is fired at such a speed that the game ball B can roll on the bottom surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 at a speed that does not jump over the partition portion 848e.

  Note that the emission portions 848a and 848b are provided with speed reduction means such as an obstacle ridge 849 and a bent portion 849s in the middle of the flow path, and the game ball B passes through which of the emission portions 848a and 848b. The time for allowing the player to recognize whether or not the player is playing is secured. This is because which discharging section 848a or 848b the game ball B passes through greatly affects the profit of the player. Note that the deceleration means in the middle of the flow path is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the obstacle ridges 849 may be provided on both of the emission portions 848a and 848b, and the bent portions 849s may be provided on both of the emission portions 848a and 848b. Alternatively, a transparent cover having a width enough to cover the front of both the emission portions 848a and 848b may be provided, and the transparent cover may be provided with an obstacle ridge on the back side. Good.

  In addition, the effect display device 1600 is enlarged so that the image of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at a position corresponding to the back side of the emission portions 848a and 848b, and the passage surfaces of the emission portions 848a and 848b are formed transparent. An image of the effect display device 1600 may be visually recognized through the transparent passage surface, and the emission units 848a and 848b may be decorated with the image of the effect display device 1600. For example, a specific image (for example, a flame image) is displayed behind the emission unit 848b in a game state (for example, a time reduction game state) in which it is necessary to use the second game area 5a2. Alternatively, the player may be informed that the release section 848b is advantageous.

  In addition, prior to the start of a game state (for example, a time reduction game state) in which the second game area 5a2 needs to be used, an announcement that informs the player in advance that the emission unit 848b is more advantageous than the emission unit 848a. An image (for example, a message image of “Please hit right on the left passage!”) May be displayed in a predetermined display area, or a message “Right hit on this path may be displayed behind the discharge section 848b. A message image of "Tene!" May be displayed, and a more detailed explanation effect on "right-handed" than before may be executed so that the player is not confused at the start of the time saving state.

  Further, in these cases, it is preferable to provide effect sensors (emission type detection means) for detecting the game balls B at, for example, the openings 848aH and 848bH of the emission portions 848a and 848b, respectively, so that the emission portions through which the game balls B pass are provided. Depending on which of 848a and 848b is, a predetermined notification using sound or image display, or light emission of the light emitting body provided in the emission units 848a and 848b may be performed. For example, each production sensor counts the number of game balls that have passed through the emission unit 848a and the number of game balls that have passed through the emission unit 848b, and the type of notification (notification pattern) depends on the status of the count values. Can be exemplified. Specifically, when the count value of the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge unit 848a in the time-saving game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), a voice notification of “Go for it!” Or a specific image display a, When all or a part of the light emission in the specific light emission pattern a is performed, or when the count value of the number of game balls that have passed through the emission unit 848b in the time saving game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), “congratulations”. "!", A specific image display b, or all or a part of the light emission in the specific light emission pattern b. In addition, when the count value of the number of game balls that have continuously passed only the emission unit 848a without the game balls passing through the emission unit 848b has reached a predetermined number (for example, three), "Be careful!" Of the sound, the specific image display c, or all or part of the light emission in the specific light emission pattern c, or a game in which the game ball continuously passes only through the emission portion 848b without passing the game ball through the emission portion 848a. When the count value of the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, three), voice notification of “good! Good!”, Specific image display d, and all or part of light emission in the specific light emission pattern d are performed. It is possible to give more satisfaction and achievement to the player.

  FIGS. 133 to 139 show other forms of the communication passage portion 5a4, the release portions 848a and 848b, or the second game area 5a2.

  133 shows that the width in the height direction of the communication passage portion 5a4 is expanded to approximately two game balls, and the height is used to separate the opening 848bH from the opening 848aH. The top of the portion 848e is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 (the upper surface of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500). As a result, the game ball B rolling on the bottom surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 hits the left side of the top of the partition portion 848e and enters the opening 848bH. Can be easier.

Further, since the width of the communication passage portion 5a4 in the height direction is wide and the height of the hit game balls B can be seen at a glance, it can be predicted at an early stage which of the discharge portions 848a and 848b enters. Therefore, the firing force can be adjusted in a short time.
Further, even if a so-called “twisting” of firing a plurality of game balls B collectively is performed, when a plurality of game balls are moved side by side as shown in FIG. The game ball B hits the partition portion 848e and flows to the discharge portion 848b, and the upper game ball B jumps over the partition portion 848e and flows to the discharge portion 848a, so that damages such as "twisting" hardly occur.

  By the way, in the form as shown in FIG. 133, the game ball B that has been hit repeatedly hits the partition portion 848e as described above, and the game ball B that hits and hits the stop portion 1006 also hits. It is preferable to provide reinforcement such as forming of a rib or insert of a metal plate, which can withstand the impact of the above. Further, since the game balls B come into contact repeatedly, a cover made of a wear-resistant material such as a metal plate may be provided on the surface of the partition 848e.

  The embodiment shown in FIG. 134 differs from FIGS. 132 and 133 in that the branch portion 848c extends further upstream than the reinforcing resin 848e1. Specifically, in FIG. 134, the communication passage portion 5a4 has a vertical partition extending in the left-right direction that separates the passages so that a plurality of spherical passages are formed in a vertical direction upstream of the discharge portions 848a and 848b. A branch portion 848c having a wall 848c1 is provided, and the first spherical passage 5a4a of the plurality of spherical passages formed by the branch portion 848c is the discharge portion 848a of the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b (the first discharge passage 848a). The second ball passage 5a4b of the plurality of ball passages formed by the branch portion 848c communicates with the discharge portion 848b (second discharge portion) of the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b. It is configured so that

  The branch portion 848c has a metal buffer pin 848d at the tip thereof. The buffer pin 848d receives the impact of the game ball B and prevents the branch portion 848c from being damaged. Of course, the buffer pin 848d may not be provided if the front ends of the upper and lower partition walls 848c1 of the branch portion 848c are covered and reinforced with a metal cover or the like.

  Also in this case, the player adjusts the firing force of the game ball B with the handle 182 and aims at one of the first ball passage 5a4a and the second ball passage 5a4b. Since it is necessary to strike the passage 5a4a and the second ball passage 5a4b separately, it is difficult to adjust the handle 182, and the difference in technique among players is easily reflected. Therefore, the sense of achievement and satisfaction when the intended result is obtained increases.

  In FIG. 134, a space portion is formed on the left side of the accommodation portion 848e2 of the reinforcing resin 848e1, and the reinforcing resin 848e1 can be inserted into this space portion, or the reinforcing resin 848e1 can be inserted. For example, another reinforcing member different from the above may be mounted to further improve the strength. Also, in consideration of the appearance when the space is enlarged, a predetermined decoration is applied to the surface side of the reinforcing resin or the reinforcing member mounted in the space, or the reinforcing resin or the reinforcing Some effect device (for example, a fourth symbol display device or a sub liquid crystal) may be provided instead of the member to have both effects of the reinforcing surface and the effect surface.

  135 (a) and 135 (b), a dropout 5a4c is provided at a part of the branch 848c of the communication passage 5a4 in FIG. 134 to connect the first ball passage 5a4a and the second ball passage 5a4b. A part of the game ball flowing through the one-ball passage 5a4a can drop into the second ball passage 5a4b and fall from the second discharge portion 848b to a specific portion 5a2b of the second game area 5a2. In this case, a variation of the adjustment of the handle 182 that strikes the discharge portions 848a and 848b (for example, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), the game ball B is hit against the buffer pin 848d of the branch portion 848c, and the traveling direction is changed upward. The game ball B hits the outer rail 1001 and rebounds so as to enter the dropouts 5a4c.), Thereby increasing the interest in the game.

  The one shown in FIG. 136 is the one shown in FIG. 134 in which the tip of the branch portion 848c is set near the step 832a of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500, so that the tip of the branch portion 848c is hit. The game balls B are more likely to be rebounded to the first game area 5a1, so that the difficulty of hitting the first ball passages 5a4a and 5a4b is further improved. 134, 135 (a) and (b), since the rebound space 832c is provided between the tip of the branch portion 848c and the step portion 832a of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500, Most of the game balls B hit by the portion 848c and rebound enter the second ball passage 5a4b while rolling on the upper surface of the surrounding frame 832.

  137 and 138 show an example in which the emission portions 848a and 848b in FIG. 132 are lengthened and the second game area 5a2 is shortened in the vertical direction. Since the residence time of the game ball B can be lengthened, there is an effect that the visibility of the game ball B passing through the emission units 848a and 848b can be improved.

  137 and 138 are examples in which the risk of entering the first reception port 2006 is increased by arranging the first reception port 2006 above and below the gate section 2003. Since the thrill aiming at 2003 can be increased, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be increased.

  As described above, in the examples of FIG. 131 to FIG. 138, a difference in profit between the points 5 a 2 a and 5 a 2 b entering the second game area 5 a 2 is provided between the points 5 a 2 a and 5 a 2 b on the subsequent fall path, and the point 5 a 2 b which is always more advantageous is provided. Although the target is set, different types of profits are provided in the subsequent falling paths between the entering points 5a2a and 5a2b, and one of the points 5a2a and 5a2b is appropriately selected according to the game state so as to aim. You may.

  In other words, in the example of FIG. 139, the game ball B entering from the point 5a2a corresponding to the opening 848aH of the discharge part 848a immediately below the stopper 1006 through the communication passage part 5a4 has a probability of entering the first reception port 2006. Is set to be larger than the probability of entering the second entrance, but may pass through the gate unit 2003.

  On the other hand, the game ball B entering from the location 5a2b corresponding to the opening 848bH of the adjacent discharge unit 848b has a very low probability of entering the first reception port 2006 and a high probability of entering the second reception port. Is set to

  Therefore, when the player strikes the second game area 5a2, he or she may take the risk of entering the first reception port 2006 depending on the game state and aim at the gate section 2003 to collide with the stop section 1006, and then release the discharge section. Hitting the handle 182 as appropriate, for example, aiming at the release portion 848b that is difficult to enter the first reception opening 2006 and easily enters the second reception opening in the case of the big hit state, and is easy to reach the large winning opening 2005 with low risk. Force adjustment will be performed.

  Although not shown, the above-described center member 2500 is divided into a portion common to different models, such as a portion corresponding to the second game area 5a2 of the center member 2500 and a portion other than the portion. A plurality of (at least two) blocks may be divided into portions to be changed, and the blocks may be combined to form one center member 2500. By doing so, it is possible to mass-produce a common part between the respective models, so that the cost of the center member 2500 can be suppressed.

  In addition, when a member between the discharge unit 848a and the discharge unit 848b is movable and a specific condition is satisfied, the interval between the openings 848aH or 848bH of one of the discharge units 848a or 848b may be widened.

  In addition, a deceleration means such as an obstruction ridge 849 provided on the discharge portions 848a and 848b may be provided also on the inner surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 so as to adjust the approach to the discharge portion 848b technically.

  In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the rear unit 3000 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is discharged.

  Further, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is done.

  The game balls B received in the second starting port 2004 are sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, and are discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is sent to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 after being detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403, and is discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. The game balls B received in the first reception port 2006 are sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the first reception sensor 2406, and are discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below.

  The first starting port sensor 3002 includes a first starting port sensor main side (hereinafter, referred to as a “first starting port sensor main side 3002a”) and a first starting port sensor subordinate side (hereinafter, “first starting port sensor 3002a”). The first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor subside 3002b are at least erroneous detection prevention distance dimensions (14 mm in the present embodiment). And has a larger distance dimension than the diameter of the game ball (11 mm).) Since the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b use the same non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port When the sensor ball side 3002b and the sensor ball side 3002b are arranged so as to be equal to or less than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension, the game ball B passing through the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor main side 3002a together with the first starting port sensor main side 3002a. The game ball B passing through the first starting opening sensor subordinate 3002b may be detected by the first starting opening sensor subordinate 3002b together with the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a. This is because there are cases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b are spaced apart from each other by a dimension distance (43 mm in the present embodiment) larger than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. Accordingly, when the first starting port sensor main side 3002a detects the game ball B passing through the first starting port sensor main side 3002a, the electrical influence of the detection reaches the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b. Thus, the physical structure prevents the first starting port sensor slave 3002b from erroneously detecting even though the game ball B has not yet passed through the first starting port sensor slave 3002b. When the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b detects a game ball B passing through the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b, Since the electric effect of the knowledge affects the first starting port sensor main side 3002a, the first starting is performed even though the game ball B has already passed the first starting port sensor main side 3002a. The mouth sensor main side 3002a can prevent erroneous detection by a physical structure. As described above, the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 is first detected by the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a by passing through the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a, and then is detected by the first starting opening sensor main side. After passing through the side 3002b, the first starting port sensor is detected by the slave side 3002b, and then discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3002 composed of two sensors (double sensors) of the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor sub-side 3002b is employed, so that the first starting port sensor is provided. The game ball B received in the mouth 2002 can be reliably detected. In addition, an illegal ball (a game ball, a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as this, or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as this) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. ) Will be described in detail later on a fraud detection process that can detect and report fraud by radio wave irradiation using the first opening sensor 3002 including two sensors (double sensors).

[5-8-2. Table production unit]
Although not shown in detail, the presentation effect unit 2600 is based on a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a plurality of effect decorations that can move and emit light, and can perform a movable effect and a light emission effect. The display effect unit 2600 can perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, and the like by appropriately using a plurality of effect decorations, and can present a variety of pattern effects to a player by appropriately combining them. It is possible to make the player hard to get tired of, and to entertain the player by various effects, thereby suppressing the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  The presentation effect unit 2600 is attached to the center member 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center member 2500. The presentation effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center member 2500, and is provided with a transparent flat light guide plate that closes the frame of the center member 2500, and is decorated by emitting light from the upper surface of the light guide plate. A decorative board for the first pattern on which a plurality of LEDs for the first pattern are mounted, and a plurality of LEDs for the second pattern, which are illuminated and decorated by irradiating light from the right side of the light guide plate. A second design decorative substrate, and a plurality of diffusion lenses provided between the right side surface of the light guide plate and the plurality of LEDs for the second design and diffusing light from the plurality of LEDs for the second design. , Is provided. The plurality of LEDs for the first picture and the plurality of LEDs for the second picture are full-color LEDs.

  The light guide plate has a first pattern formed by an innumerable innumerable upper reflection portion that reflects only light from above in the forward direction, and an innumerable indentation in the shape of irregularities that reflects only light from the right direction to the front. And a second pattern formed by the reflecting portion. In other words, the display effect unit 2600 can cause the first pattern to emit light when the LED of the first pattern decorative board is lit, and emits the second pattern when the LED of the second pattern decorative board is lit. Can be displayed.

  The light guide plate has countless upper reflective portions forming the first pattern, and countless right reflective portions forming the second pattern, each of which is formed with fine irregularities. In a state where the plurality of LEDs for the first pattern of the substrate and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern of the decorative substrate for the second pattern do not emit light, the back unit 3000 which is transparent and is arranged on the rear side is seen. Various decorations and effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  A plurality of upper reflecting portions forming the first pattern and a right reflecting portion forming the second pattern are provided with a plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and a plurality of LEDs for the second pattern, respectively. It has a plane that extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the LED and that is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate. The upper reflector and the right reflector are recessed in a pent roof triangle. The upper reflector and the right reflector reflect light incident from the corresponding plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern in a direction substantially parallel to a vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate. Reflect in the direction. On the other hand, light incident from a plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and a plurality of LEDs for the second pattern that are not compatible is reflected in a direction inclined with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate. Therefore, only the light from the corresponding plurality of LEDs for the first picture and the plurality of LEDs for the second picture can reach the eyes of the player located in front of the light guide plate.

  The plurality of LEDs for the first pattern mounted on the lower surface of the first pattern decoration board are arranged in a line in the left-right direction, and the first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth LEDd is divided into four groups. The first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth LEDd are arranged in a predetermined number (here, three) from the left so as to make two rounds.

  The first picture is a picture composed of a plurality of equilateral triangles bounded by respective extension lines of the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the left upward diagonal line forming the decorative pattern. The first pattern is a pattern of six large triangles of approximately the same size as a regular triangle formed by gathering four contours of one regular triangle in the decorative pattern, and inside the contour of one regular triangle in the decorative pattern It is composed of a plurality of small triangular patterns that can fit. The six large triangle patterns are arranged in a circle around the center of the game area 5a so that the whole becomes a hexagon, and a plurality of small triangle patterns are arranged so as to surround the six large triangle patterns. Are located.

  The large triangular pattern of the first pattern is such that a plurality of equilateral triangles having different sizes are superimposed such that the sizes become smaller in order in a state of being eccentric to the vertex side near the center of the game area 5a. It is formed in a picture. The small triangular pattern of the first pattern is formed as a pattern in which contour lines of an equilateral triangle are arranged concentrically.

  The first pattern is a first pattern portion configured by a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the first LEDa, a second pattern portion configured by a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the second LEDb, It comprises a third picture portion constituted by a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the three LEDs c, and a fourth picture portion constituted by a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the fourth LEDd.

  In the first pattern, a large triangle pattern in which a plurality of equilateral triangles having different sizes are overlapped, the first pattern portion, the second pattern portion, the third pattern portion, the fourth pattern portion so that the size becomes smaller in order. The part, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, and the third pattern part are eccentrically superimposed on the center side of the game area 5a. In addition, the small triangular pattern composed of a plurality of equilateral triangular contours in the first pattern, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, the fourth pattern part, so that the size becomes smaller in order. Are arranged concentrically in this order.

  The second pattern is a pattern having a guide (message) to the player including characters “CHANCE!”.

  Next, the light emission effect by the display effect unit 2600 will be briefly described. When the first LEDa of the first design decorative substrate emits light, the light incident into the light guide plate is reflected to the front at the first design portion, and the remaining second, third, and fourth design portions are formed. Since the part and the second pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the first pattern part appears to be shining from the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, when the second LEDb of the first design decorative board is caused to emit light, the light incident into the light guide plate is reflected to the front in the second design portion, the remaining first design portion, the third design portion, the second design portion, Since the four picture portions and the second picture portion are reflected outside the front, only the second picture portion appears to be shining from the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, when the third LEDc of the first design decorative substrate emits light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected to the front at the third design portion, and the remaining first design portion, second design portion, and second Since the four picture portions and the second picture portion are reflected outside the front, only the third picture portion appears to be shining from the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, when the fourth LEDd of the first design decorative substrate emits light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected to the front at the fourth design portion, and the remaining first design portion, the second design portion, and the second design portion. In the third picture portion and the second picture portion, the light is reflected to a portion other than the front, so that the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 sees only the fourth picture portion shining.

  And, in the first pattern, in the portion of the large triangle pattern, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, the fourth pattern part, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, Are eccentrically superimposed on the center side of the game area 5a, and in a small triangular pattern portion, concentric circles are formed in the order of a first pattern portion, a second pattern portion, a third pattern portion, and a fourth pattern portion. Since it is arranged toward the center, when the first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, the fourth LEDd, in order to emit light, the first picture portion, the second picture portion, the third picture portion, Light is emitted in the order of the fourth picture portion, so that a light emission effect such as an animation having a movement moving from the outside toward the center can be performed.

  On the other hand, when the fourth LEDd, the third LEDc, the second LEDb, and the first LEDa are illuminated in this order, the fourth pattern part, the third pattern part, the second pattern part, and the first pattern part are illuminated in this order, It is possible to perform a light emission effect such as an animation having a movement moving from the center side to the outside.

  Further, when the first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth LEDd emit light in different colors, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, and the fourth pattern part are respectively different colors. Can emit light.

  Further, when the plurality of LEDs for a plurality of second patterns of the second decorative board for a pattern is made to emit light, the light incident into the light guide plate is reflected to the front in the second pattern, and the remaining first pattern portion, Since the second, third and fourth pattern portions are reflected to other than the front, only the second pattern appears to be shining from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, a plurality of LEDs for the second pattern can emit a second pattern consisting of the characters “CHANCE!”.

  As described above, according to the rendering unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns (first pattern part, second pattern part, third pattern part, fourth pattern part) are formed by one light guide plate. Can be emitted, so that it is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each picture in order to display an animation or the like, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, since it is possible to easily secure a wide space behind the light guide plate, other effect units can be arranged in that space, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the light guide plate allows a translucent first pattern to appear in front of the back unit 3000 and the effect display device 1600 to show a light-emitting decoration that moves like an animation. It can have a strong impact on players who are familiar with the performance, can surprise and entertain the player, and can make the player think that there is something good, It is possible to increase the sense of expectation of the player for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the first pattern and the second pattern, by setting the pattern related to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the base panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, the inside and outside of the frame of the center member 2500 are continuous. The decoration with a sense of unity can be shown to the player, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

  In addition, since only the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can satisfactorily see the luminescent display of the first pattern and the second pattern by the light guide plate, it is difficult for other players who are away from the front to see the luminescent display. The luminescent display of the first pattern and the second pattern becomes difficult to see, making it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate is being performed. In addition to being able to play the game, it is possible to play the game without worrying about other players, and it is possible to entertain the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000 and a first starting opening sensor that detects a gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. 3001 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 151).

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape having an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a2 in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably mounting the display device 1600, a drive board unit 1700 mounted below the opening 3010a2 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back effect mounted inside the back box 3010. And a unit 3100.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a2 penetrating through the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with an interval from the periphery of the opening 3010a2. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view and into which the left fixing piece 1601 is inserted; A cut-out portion 3010d which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the left side of the portion 3010b in rear view, and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

  The opening 3010a2 of the back box 3010 is formed slightly smaller than the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the rear surface of the cutout portion 3010d so as to be slidable up and down.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses and mounting holes for mounting the back effect unit 3100 and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  The back effect unit 3100 moves or emits light according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a plurality of effect decorations, and can perform a movable effect and a light emitting effect. The back effect unit 3100 can perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, and the like by appropriately using a plurality of effect decorations, and can present a variety of pattern effects to a player by appropriately combining them. It is possible to make the player hard to get tired of, and to entertain the player by various effects, thereby suppressing the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Here, an example of an effect decoration that can perform a movable effect or a light-emitting effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a schematic perspective view of the internal structure of the effect decoration. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310, which is an effect decorative body, is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a2 in the back box 3010.

  The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is formed in a triangular pyramid shape with the tip directed rightward. You can do it. The outer shape of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 when viewed from the front is formed in an equilateral triangle. In addition, the triangular pyramid-shaped upper left movable decorative body 3310 is inclined such that the tip is located forward in the left-right direction.

  The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is a trapezoidal base decoration part 3311 whose shape in a front view narrows to the right, and is rotatably attached to the right side of the base decoration part 3311, and the tip is directed rightward. And a top left rotation drive motor attached to the interior of the base decoration part 3311 and attached to the inside of the base decoration part 3311. And a back upper left base decoration board for emitting and decorating the base decoration section 3311, and a rear left upper front section mounted on the right side of the base decoration section 3311 for emitting and decorating the front decoration section 3312. A decorative substrate 3311a. The base decorative portion 3311 and the preceding decorative portion 3312 are formed to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration part 3311 to which the base decoration board 3311 is attached are mounted on the back upper left base decoration board. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa (in this embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the left side of the first-stage decorative portion 3312 are mounted on the back upper left first-stage decorative board 3311a. ing.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the back upper left rotary drive motor is performed by a main gear (not shown) attached to and fixed to the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the rear upper left rotary drive motor and the rotary shaft of the preceding decorative portion 3312. The front decorative portion 3312 is rotated via a not-shown upper left rotation transmission mechanism in which the attached and fixed driven gear (not shown) meshes. A magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape is arranged and fixed on the left side surface of the preceding decorative portion 3312 facing the right side surface of the base decorative portion 3311 near the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3312. Specifically, the magnet 3312a is located near the rotation axis of the pre-decoration part 3312, and is positioned on the left side of the pre-decoration part 3312 such that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the pre-decoration part 3312. In addition to being arranged perpendicular to the interior, the left side is accommodated in the internal space of the first-stage decorative portion 3312 such that the left side does not project from the left side of the first-stage decorative portion 3312 toward the right side of the base-stage decorative portion 3311. Is fixed. The magnet 3312a is arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the first decoration part 3312. This is because the rotation of the first decoration part 3312 by the back left upper rotation drive motor causes the rotation axis of the first decoration part 3312 to have a resonance phenomenon. The position does not occur.

  Since the magnet 3312a is fixed to the vicinity of the rotation axis of the preceding decoration part 3312, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation axis) of the back left upper rotation drive motor is performed via the above described back left rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When the rotation is transmitted to the rotation axis of the decoration section 3312 and the preceding decoration section 3312 starts to rotate, the trajectory becomes a circular orbit.

  Therefore, on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a, a Hall element, and a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (facing the magnetized surface of the small cylindrical magnet 3312a) are provided. A rear upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, which is constituted by peripheral circuits and can detect a change in magnetic pole, is mounted. The back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab detects the magnetism of the magnet 3312a fixed to the precedent decoration part 3312, specifies the rotational position of the precedent decoration part 3312, and sets the original position. The detailed description will be described later. In addition, as the original position (standby position) of the rotation position of the preceding decorative portion 3312, for example, the vertices of the triangles of the base decorative portion 3311 and the preceding decorative portion 3312 coincide, and one triangular pyramid is formed. The state in which it is formed can be mentioned.

  Note that, in the above-described embodiment, the shape of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 when viewed from the front is an equilateral triangle. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The shape may be “octagon”, “fan”, “star”, or the like.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a small electronic component (magnetic sensor) called a back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is used as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the preceding decorative portion 3312. Adopted as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of a certain pre-decoration portion 3312, and by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3312 of the pre-decoration portion 3312, the rotational position of the pre-decoration portion 3312 is specified and the standby position is determined. (Original position) is set, but it can be used as a sensor for detecting the approach of a magnet by a magnet. This is because the small electronic component (magnetic sensor) called the upper left back magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab intermittently operates the magnet 3312 of the preceding decorative portion 3312 when the preceding decorative portion 3312 is continuously rotated. This is because magnetism should be detected, but when magnetism is continuously detected, the approach of an unauthorized magnet can be detected as a magnet.

  Furthermore, in the embodiments described above, the various drive motors provided in the various effect units are stepping motors, but a motor (servo motor) provided with a rotation detector such as an encoder may be used. In this case, the rotation angle of the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the servomotor is detected by a rotation detector, and the drive pulse is controlled by feedback control. Thereby, the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the servomotor can be set to a predetermined rotational speed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game balls supplied from the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 as the ball supply means are paid out to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first receiving opening 2006, and the special winning opening 2005, which are reception openings provided in the game area 5a defined by the division 5 in FIG. And a ball collecting device having a collecting port for collecting the collected game balls together with the collected game balls at an out port 1008 provided in a game area 5a defined by the game board 5, and the game collected by the ball collecting device. A ball transport device for transporting a ball toward the ball launching device 540 is provided. 0, a game area 5a defined by the game board 5, a ball collection device, and a ball conveyance device, forming a circulation path of the game ball, and configured to circulate a predetermined number of game balls in a closed manner. Can be performed.

[6. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, a peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 13 (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 146 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 147 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 148 is a front view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 149 is a line XX of FIG. 150 is a sectional view taken along the arrow A in FIG. 148. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, the peripheral control unit 1500 has a transparent cover 1501 having an open rear and a box shape longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction, and a main control for controlling the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on a command from the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510 A liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the liquid crystal display board; a peripheral control board 1510; a peripheral data ROM board 1520; and a metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise entering the liquid crystal output board 1530. A conductive material attached to (adhered to) a predetermined portion of a metal shield plate 1540 A sexual member 1545 includes a transparent base member 1502 for closing the opening of the cover member 1501, a. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions together with a metal shield board 1540 in the internal space of the cover body 1501, thereby forming the shield board 1540. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502.

[6-1. Cover body]
Peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the peripheral control board 1510 is provided on various substrates attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There are a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two-thirds when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back, and is arranged on the left side of the cover 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged such that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape, and On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape twice larger than the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and is disposed on the lower right side of the cover 1501.

  The board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Connected.

  The cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is molded transparent, and covers the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) when viewed from the front. The side walls 1501b to 1501e are formed in a box shape having an opening by protruding rearward (front side of the pachinko machine 1).

  The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air-cooling fan FAN at a position slightly above and to the right of the center when viewed from the front side and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are respectively formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. At the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave part 1501aa, at the positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air-cooling fan FAN having a square shape, a columnar predetermined shape inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 is provided. Guide projections 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 each having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN) are formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. By forming the slit 1501aaa as an arc-shaped slit, it is possible to prevent various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from being illegally taken out of the peripheral control board 1510.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 formed diagonally near the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooling fan FAN is mounted by being pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan screw (not shown) having a shape integrally formed with a pan head and a flat washer is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan screw with the seat, comes into contact with the front of the air cooling fan FAN and the front of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN jumps out of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  In addition, the cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). ), A wiring extraction recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wire pull-out recess 1501ab.

  When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a is located at a position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d attached to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side. The connector recess 1501ac is formed as one closed substantially horizontally elongated rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area having the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 as an upper part and the connectors CN2 to CN7 as a lower part). It is formed to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (a position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). I have. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Note that the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac substantially occupies a lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a measure against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume control are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. It is a position that does not interfere with the hole 1501ac8, and two vertically extending reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed to protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 become connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. And from the volume adjustment holes 1501ac8. At this time, when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, the plug is hidden even when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted by the protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a on the upper side of the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac. It cannot protrude from the surface of the cover plate 1501a. The volume control switch 1510d is lower than the height of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust, metallic powder, or the like attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, the dust or the like adheres to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d. Can be prevented.

  When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a has one closed rectangular area along the lower side corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The opening of the cover body 1501 is located at a position where the connector concave portion 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa (a position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa). The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are disposed on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. . At this time, when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper surface of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is hidden by the projecting wall of the cover flat plate 1501a even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted. It cannot protrude from the surface of the cover plate 1501a. Accordingly, even if dust, metal powder, or the like, attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN8 and CN9. It has become.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side thereof when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for connecting the wiring cover 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that can communicate with the wiring drawing opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawing opening 1501ae is smaller than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is provided at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503 at a predetermined height of a columnar shape inserted into the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than a distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). A projection 1501afa having a dimension (dimensions) is formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting hole 1501afb1 is formed at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2.

  When the wiring cover 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover 1503 and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The wiring cover 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring cover opening 1501ae is closed and a plurality of wirings (for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the plurality of wirings from touching. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a non-conductive resin, and is molded transparently.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed near the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side wall 1501c and protrude outward at predetermined intervals in the center. In addition, a hinge hook 1501cc disposed above the guide 1501ca and protruding outward, and a hinge hook 1501cd disposed below the guide 1501cb and protruding outward are formed, respectively. A chamfer is formed on the rear side of the left end of each of the guides 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea projecting outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 on the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Around the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control. On the back side of the substrate 1510, copper solder foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 each having a circular shape are formed, and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are respectively formed by a peripheral control board. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line 1510.

  When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501ag1, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. So that Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are replaced with the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 and the L shape of the shield plate 1540. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a are arranged so as to match with the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In addition, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan-head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 open the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged inside (i.e., do not protrude outside the open side end faces).

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to four through-holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protruding portions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are formed diagonally from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions where the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are formed. Have been. Around the four through-holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520; Copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 each having a circular shape are formed on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In this state, the land 1520rf4 of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540. At the same time, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3 correspond to the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1. It will be in contact. Also, the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the pan screw made of metal is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 This is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate. 1530 ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

  When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of a metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The fixed back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to four through-holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At a position, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed to project diagonally from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and a liquid crystal output. Copper solder foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 each having a circular shape are formed on the back side of the substrate 1530, and the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are respectively formed on the liquid crystal output substrate. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line 1530.

  When attaching the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 abut against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2. At the same time, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (thread portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Accordingly, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. It will be connected to 1530 ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of a metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 and screwed into the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. And is fixed to the back side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, in addition to being disposed inside the side end face (that is, so as not to protrude outside the opening side end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e). The rear surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the rear surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

  Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the cover plate 1501 is attached. In a state where the peripheral control IC 1510a is sandwiched and fixed between the peripheral control IC 1510a and the various substrates, a gap having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa. (In the present embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  In the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az are formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the space inside the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings, thereby controlling the periphery. By taking in air from outside the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the space inside the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover 1501. Further, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. In addition, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the above-described ventilation holes 1501az, and the above-mentioned gaps (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the seven The clearances formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume adjustment switches 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the gaps formed in the volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 Two connectors CN8 provided And CN9, via the two connector hole 1501ac9,1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The sum (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN attachment recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the plurality of cover flat plates 1501a of the cover body 1501. The clearances described above (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the cover body 1501) and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 , A volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap formed in the cover body 1501, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac1 formed in the cover body 1501. If is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, it was added to the. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. Air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is formed in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in a plurality of shield plates 1540 housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When the air is taken in through the ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small.

[6-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is transparently molded, and is formed on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of a horizontally long rectangular base plate 1502a when viewed from the front. The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed in a box shape having an opening by projecting forward (toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1). The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Accordingly, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are provided inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Are fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

  When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a is arranged at predetermined intervals along the lower side, at a position not interfering with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, for wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7. Vertically elongated disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from warping due to the force at the time of inserting the connector for connection and disconnection of the electric wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510. Then, a force for inserting a connector for connecting a wiring to the connector CN1 or a force for operating the volume adjustment switch 1510d at a position not interfering with the connector CN1 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the Electrical wiring pattern formed on the zero elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa4 in the lateral direction to prevent the breakage is formed.

  The base flat plate 1502a is located on the right side when viewed from the front, and at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later. A rectangular through-hole 1502ab which is slightly longer than the back surface of the connection piece 1540d and which is long in the vertical direction is formed.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left base side wall 1502c. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

  The plate-like guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa, 1502cab, and the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502cae, 1502caf. The L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover 1501 are inserted. The L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping around, the L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It can be engaged.

  In the center of the right base side wall 1502e, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is formed. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for mounting the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[6-3. Shield plate]
The metal shield plate 1540, which can reduce (suppress) electromagnetic noise entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, has a horizontally long rectangular shield when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 bent rearward by a predetermined distance (in the present embodiment, 12 mm from the back surface of shield flat plate 1540a) at the upper center on the left side and the lower center on the left side of flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). Are formed respectively.

  Further, when viewed from the front, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension on the upper right side and the lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) (in the present embodiment, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by 12 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed, respectively, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). Between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, an L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d bent backward by a predetermined distance (in the present embodiment, 25 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (adhered) from the upper end to the lower end of the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d.

  The shield flat plate 1540a has cutouts formed therearound so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially located at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa and the wiring drawing concave portion 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. Accordingly, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield plate 1540a, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover plate 1501a and Wiring leading recess 1501ab is inserted without contacting opening 1540aa of shield plate 1540a.

  The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane. The back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 and the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed so as to be parallel to each other. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 project from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as described above. It is one mounting boss hole of a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as described above. One of the formed pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are located at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. And two mounting boss holes out of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed to protrude.

  Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the cover plate 1501 is attached. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the substrate and various substrates, a distance dimension of a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (this embodiment). In the embodiment, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing the metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

  The two spaces have a distance of a first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A second space 1505a (see FIG. 149) having a width of 12 mm (in this embodiment, see FIG. 149) and a second space 1505a between a front surface of a shield plate 1540a of a metal shield plate 1540 and a back surface of the cover plate 1501a described later. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (1.6 mm in the present embodiment).

  In the first space 1505a, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (a peripheral control IC 1510a, a control ROM 1510b described later, an SDRAM 1510c described later, a real-time clock IC not illustrated, a backup power supply 1510e described later, a power supply creation circuit not illustrated, A resistor (not shown), a capacitor (not shown), LEDs ML1 to ML4 described later, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 described later, various electronic components provided on a peripheral data ROM board 1520 (a peripheral data ROM 1520a described later, a resistor not illustrated, a capacitor not illustrated), While a special connector SCN3 described later) and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 (a resistor not shown, a capacitor not shown, a special connector SCN4 described later) are accommodated. The second space 1505b, various electronic parts and the like is not at all accommodated. This is because various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise can be accommodated in the first space 1505a to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise and various electronic components that generate heat in the second space 1505b. This is because heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a by not accommodating the first space 1505a is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540. That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise.

  In the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540, ventilation holes 1540az having the same shape are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, like the ventilation hole 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. I have. When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa of the cover 1501 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to blow out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. Thereby, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the space inside the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[6-4. Conductive elastic member]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning (elasticity), and includes a conductive coating portion 1545a, It is composed of a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c stuck to the conductive covering portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1545b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be given. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by a peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

  The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape having a width of 5 mm and a height of 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a rectangular shape having a width of 2 mm and a height of 0.035 mm. have.

[6-5. Various connectors]
A peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover 1501 includes a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a VRAM, a sound source, a serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”), and various I / Os. A peripheral control IC 1510a in which an O interface and the like are integrated on a single semiconductor chip, and various programs and progresses of the effects that can control the progress and demonstration of the game effects (demonstration performed while waiting for the player). Various control information (peripheral data) stored in a control ROM 1510b which stores various prescribed schedule data in advance and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on a peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be transferred and stored. To supply power even when power is cut off to a real-time clock IC (not shown), an SDRAM 1510c composed of a DRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide type volume control switch 1510d capable of controlling the volume, and a real-time clock IC (not shown). A power supply generating circuit for generating various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The peripheral control IC 1510a, the ROM 1510b, the SDRAM 1510c provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 have a smaller IC pin interval and various connectors CN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. To CN7, the pin interval between the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 is narrowed, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 is increased, so that the interval between the connectors CN1 to CN7 is narrowed, and the interval between the connector CN7 and the special connector SCN2 is also narrowed. ing.

  The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

  Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os and various parallel I / Os. Various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, UART communication is employed as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), and various boards provided on the game board 5 side and various boards provided on the door frame side For example, SPI communication or I2C communication is employed as a communication method for transmitting control data to the communication device (a communication is performed via a corresponding connector among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

  In the present embodiment, for example, by using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electric drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various motors provided in various effect units, and communicates via the connector CN6 or the connector CN7). And an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operation ring drive motor 342 and an operation button lifting drive motor 367 provided in the effect operation unit 300), and communicate via the connector CN3. ) Is transmitted to the drive control IC for driving the game board 5, and various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in various effect units, which communicate via the connector CN6). From various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300). , And the and receives signals from communicating through the connector CN3.) As the detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer speed by the SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer speed by the I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  As various parallel I / Os, there is a GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air-cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1) or is provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of the controlled object and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), or a control signal for the controlled object (not shown) provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the GPIO (to the connector CN6). And outputs a signal from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. In the present embodiment, GPIO is used so as to function as serial communication. For example, in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)), a clock signal is generated from the GPIO, and data is output bit by bit from the GPIO based on the clock signal. Can produce serial data. By using such a GPIO so as to function as serial communication, for example, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 side in predetermined interrupt processing (for example, interrupt processing generated every 16 milliseconds (ms)) (Communicated via the connector CN1), the light emission data can be output as a plurality of game board side serial systems, and a plurality of LEDs (communicated via the connector CN6) provided on the door frame 3 side. ) Can be transmitted by a plurality of door frame side serial systems.

  In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , UART communication is assigned to the connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to the connector CN6 (that is, the connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and SPI communication is assigned to the connector CN7. Is assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (corresponding to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various kinds of control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed in accordance with an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

  The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) and can realize a high data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the board, and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the board. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board. The liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board.

  The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of a plurality of types of video signals. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal systems include a plurality of types such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a Mobile Industry Processor Interface (MIPI) system, an Embedded Display Port (eDP) system, and a clockless system. In this system, four systems (a total of four systems) are adopted: one system for the RGB system, two systems for the LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and the MIPI system. In the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. A peripheral control board that employs, for example, the eDP system instead of the MIPI system, and uses one system for the RGB system, two systems for the LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one system for the eDP system 1510 can also be created.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes an LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, an LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, an LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and an LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. As will be described later, various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The LED ML1 confirms (monitors) a state in which DC +5 V is supplied, and maintains the lighting state in a state in which DC +5 V is supplied. The LED ML2 is for confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +12 V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state where DC +12 V is supplied. The LED ML3 is for confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +35 V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state where DC +35 V is supplied. The LEDML4 is for confirming (monitoring) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the cover plate 1501 is attached. As described above, in a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the substrate and the various substrates, a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, the two spaces have the first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. The distance between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension of 12 mm (in this embodiment, 12 mm) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension of 2 (1.6 mm in this embodiment) at a predetermined height.

  As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the like. ing. The first space 1505a thus formed can be illuminated brightly by turning on the LEDs ML1 to ML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in that they have a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing in a plug of the corresponding connector in a direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move vertically when viewed from the front when they are fitted.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets, respectively.

  When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is in the front-rear direction when viewing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) from the front (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ), A floating mechanism is provided that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the user pushes in by moving a predetermined distance range toward () direction. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the (peripheral control board 1510) moves to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not contact the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

  The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, whereby the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is in the front-back direction (the direction between the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ) Is provided with a floating mechanism capable of absorbing an error in the front-rear direction which occurs when the push-in operation is performed by moving a predetermined distance range toward (). Note that the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 may be mounted on the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control) in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is mounted and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, a special (so that the front (upper surface)) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 does not contact the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front (upper surface) of the socket of the connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is used for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is used for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a that can store various types of control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. As various control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image, a character image, and a design image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 Light emission data defining the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishment, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on the vehicle, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc., the door frame 3 and the game board 5 Driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effectors provided can be given.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory, is inexpensive, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed as compared with a NOR flash (non-volatile) memory. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  As described above, by adopting a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to suppression of power consumption, and read out various stored data at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is easily affected by noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is not adopted in which the boards between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected to the control board 1510 by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

  The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover 1501 will be described later. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided therein into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Since the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a after being pushed in, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. By connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket can be absorbed. Prevent damage to the surrounding The transmission path between the substrate and the control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be can be reliably formed.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, though within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing an error in the front-rear direction generated at the time of connection, damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket is prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. It can be formed reliably.

  The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control substrate 1510 from the connector CN10, so that the effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (for example, for a player). An image that informs that a big hit gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state occurs, an image that conveys that the big hit gaming state does not occur, and a state where the big hit gaming state occurs although the big hit gaming state does not occur This is an important substrate for drawing an image (such as an image indicating that the user is approaching) as an image. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected to each other via wiring (harness) between the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510. By adopting a configuration in which the connector 1515 is electrically connected to an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

  The procedure for attaching various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 inserts a socket of the special connector SCN4 included in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into a plug of the special connector SCN2 included in the peripheral control substrate 1510. After being pushed in, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, a socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction generated when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510, the connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket can be removed. Peripheral control board to prevent damage The transmission path between the substrate 510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be can be reliably formed.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, though within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing an error in the front-rear direction generated at the time, damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket is prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is reliably formed. Can be formed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the rear surface and the rear surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control substrate 1510 with respect to the front surface. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced as compared with the case of performing the three-dimensional arrangement, for example, a large effect unit (operating a movable effect Electrical drive source and drive mechanism, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operating position) It can contribute to ensuring the depth direction of the distance dimension of fit.

[6-6. How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are connected to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through-hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is disposed so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the rear side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arranged to match the hole 1501ah2 and made of metal A through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 are arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 have an arrangement corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed at the bottom.

  Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. To fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form it on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. Thus, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is attached. The state is sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  Subsequently, since the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 can be directly or finely adjusted. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are finely adjusted and arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing the holes toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted on the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a at predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is covered. The body 1501 and the various substrates are sandwiched and fixed.

  As described above, among the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby restricting the movement in the up, down, left and right directions. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restricted by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side, the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restricting in the vertical and horizontal directions. The protrusion is not formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is reduced by the peripheral control board 1510. When fixed to the back side of 1501a, absorption is performed by the respective dimensional tolerances of through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control board 1510 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a. You can do it.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, plate-like guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are formed. The guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab. It is inserted into the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Then, the base body 1502 is turned around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502, and covers the base body 1502 as it is. When the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d is put on the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d projects from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Inserted metal one-way screw Screwed toward the base side sealing section 1502ea formed on the base member 1502 Te. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the distal end surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. And the base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in a state of inscribed (surface contact). In this sealed state, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 projects from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protrusion length) extending to the back surface is 6.8 mm.

  In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent to the illegal operation of the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

  Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn from the wire drawing recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A pan screw with a metal seat (not shown) (a screw having an integrated pan head and flat washer) is screwed into the drawer and the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. Accordingly, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  Subsequently, the peeling paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. The adhesive tape 1545c of 1545 is attached (adhered).

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600, behind the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box is inserted by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it toward a mounting hole that forms a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of.

  As described above, effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. The frame-shaped metal frame houses a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a driving circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 as described above, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. To the same ground (GND). When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, an L-shaped circuit connection piece of a metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. 1540d passes through a not-shown through hole formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and as shown in FIG. 150, contacts the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member 1545. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in this embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), so that a dimensional deviation due to a dimensional tolerance or an assembly error is caused. Can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. Thus, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected to each other, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected. Since it is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 and can be set to the same ground (GND), it is necessary to construct an environment that is strong against electromagnetic noise for the peripheral control unit 1500 and its surroundings. Can be.

  In the above-described assembling method, in the procedure for mounting various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of a metal shield plate 1540 is inserted. The through-hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is disposed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the formed mounting boss hole 1501ag4, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is attached to the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. And the metal shield plate 1540 A through hole 1540b2a formed in shape attachment pieces 1540B2, arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is located at the above-described predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is located on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back side of the cover body 1501). The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the liquid crystal output board 1530 on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a cover body when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back side). After being fixed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. The special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 The peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is positioned at the above-mentioned predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 is (It is arranged on the left side.) Even in such a mounting procedure of various substrates, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction generated at the time of pushing is absorbed, so that the plug and the socket can be connected. Of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 can be reliably formed, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the periphery can be prevented. A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines having different game specifications. In the present embodiment, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a according to the game specification of the game board. Are stored depending on the game specification of the game board by storing the peripheral data corresponding to the game data, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board dependent on the type of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board, and does not depend on the type of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 including a peripheral data ROM 1520a in which peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored, and a peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-described inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

  As a method of a video signal input to a display device such as an effect display device, for example, as described above, there are a plurality of types of systems such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types are electrically connected by the above-described board-to-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced according to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the method of the video signal (LVDS method) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-described inter-board connector.

  In the present embodiment, the cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and are molded transparently, and the inner space of the cover 1501 includes a peripheral control board. Various substrates such as a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540 so that the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. Then, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is guided to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal shield plate 1540 to be removed. Is available. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic wave noise on each of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630), which contributes to cost reduction of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). Can be.

  Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 are described. Will be described. As described above, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az can not only cool the space inside the cover 1501 but also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 148, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa are connected to the peripheral control board. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b included in the control ROM 1510, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number) , Pin numbers, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing are checked from multiple angles. So that the area is larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. It is. Thus, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed via the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. . Further, the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b keeps the lighting state in a state where the DC +5 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and therefore the LED ML1 is originally supplied with the DC + 5V. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a spotlight function of illuminating the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. , And the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 respectively (for example, , Connector pin count, IC (Direction, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, silk printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Are distributed so as to form a large area where the contents can be almost confirmed from angles in multiple directions. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the content printed on the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the content printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are displayed. In addition to the corresponding relationship, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, the LED ML3 disposed near the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where DC +35 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the state of supply, it is used as a spotlight for brightly illuminating the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by silk printing, respectively. The visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 special connectors provided in SCN3 obtaining.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530). 1530 and 1530, so that the contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, etc.) printed on the silk screen can be visually recognized. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the silkscreen printing. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. In addition, the LEDML4 arranged near the special connector SCN2 keeps the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, and therefore, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although having the function, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a function as a spotlight for brightly illuminating an inter-board connector with the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The visibility of the contents printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 by silk printing is improved, and the visibility of the inter-board connector is improved by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  Further, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az disposed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with the product number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1 and SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pin 1510c2 and the content (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And the state of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing are distributed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, respectively, so that the areas can be confirmed from various angles. Are located. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can be. Further, since the LEDML2 disposed near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is kept turned on when DC +12 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, Although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +12 V is supplied, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2) is further provided with a spotlight function of illuminating the SDRAM 1510c brightly. , The visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved.

  In addition, among a plurality of blades constituting the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN, a gap between the blades (specifically, a gap between the blades when an inspector rotates the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN). From this, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

  In the present embodiment, as the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a surface-mount type, a wide type having an angle of about 120 degrees, and a type with weak directivity are employed. Also suitable for lighting applications. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the cover plate 1501 is attached. As described above, in a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the substrate and the various substrates, a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, the two spaces have the first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. The distance between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension of 12 mm (in this embodiment, 12 mm) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension of 2 (1.6 mm in this embodiment) at a predetermined height. As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the like. ing. The first space 1505a thus formed can be brightly illuminated by the LEDs ML1 to ML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination.

  In addition, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a gloss, and a region on the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. In addition, it also has a function as a reflector that can reflect the light emitted from the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 to the surroundings and return the light to the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflective portions may be configured to further apply a glossy colored paint.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. Since the unit 560 is disposed, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these units, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby serving as a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities in the game hall. As described above, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and transparently molded as described above. In addition, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. In this case, the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to grounds (GND) of various substrates. In the present embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. A configuration was adopted in which the same ground (GND) was provided by electrically connecting to the (GND) line.

  Thereby, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base The electromagnetic noise introduced from the body 1502 is guided to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 through the metal shield plate 1540 to be removed. Can be. In other words, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Electromagnetic noise that has entered from the body 1502 can be guided to a circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via a metal shield plate 1540 to be removed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000), the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data A board-to-board connector provided by a special connector SCN3 provided on the ROM board 1520 and a board-to-board connector provided by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged near the center of the ball tank 552. By doing so, it should be placed away from the tank rail 553 It has become possible way. As described above, the tank rail 553 can drop the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. By arranging the inter-connector away from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game balls B in the inter-board connector described above.

  Further, a board-to-board connector including a special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. The board-to-board connector is a state in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In FIG. 148, as shown in FIG. 148, it is possible to make the arrangement long in the vertical direction, so that the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, or the like adheres can be minimized. If the above-described inter-board connector is arranged to be long in the left-right direction, the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, or the like adheres is extremely increased. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged long in the left and right direction as shown in FIG. Although the area to which the powders and the like have become extremely large, as described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is formed by a projecting wall called a cover flat plate 1501a. Even if the plugs corresponding to CN1 to CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a Dust, dust having some metallic property, etc. adhered to the cover side wall 1501 It is dropped from, so that it can be prevented from adhering to the connector CN1～CN9. As described above, the direction in which the above-described inter-board connector is arranged and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged so that dust, powder having any metallic property, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electric terminal. Is selected.

  In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with plugs for the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a socket for the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a socket for the special connector SCN4. However, they may be arranged so that the direction in which information and signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information and signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information and signals can be correspondingly a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, since various types of control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data The ROM board 1520 is on the transmitting side and the peripheral control board 1510 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector serving as a plug (or a special connector serving as a socket), and correspondingly, a peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a plug and a special connector) serving as a socket. Special connector). Further, in the above-described embodiment, since a plurality of types of video signals are output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is on the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector serving as a socket), and correspondingly, if the liquid crystal output board 1530 is used as a socket, the special connector (or serves as a plug). Special connector).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are configured by being transparently molded as a non-conductive resin. It may be formed by molding an opaque black resin, or if the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin, they may be formed by translucent colored molding. It may be. Even with such a configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, the above-described peripheral control board is provided on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). By fixing various substrates such as the 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with pan head screws made of metal, as described above, the various substrates are connected to the ground (GND). be able to. Accordingly, noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can flow to the ground (GND) of various substrates, and the noise can be removed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In a state where the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, the predetermined distance is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension of height (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. Space is the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the metal shield plate A first space 1505a having a first predetermined height distance dimension (12 mm in the present embodiment) between the shield plate 1540a and the rear surface of the shield plate 1540a, and a front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540; A second space 1505b having a second predetermined height distance dimension (1.6 mm in the present embodiment) between itself and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In other words, the distance dimension at the first predetermined height is formed larger than the distance dimension at the second predetermined height. In the case where a large-sized production unit (an electric drive source and a drive mechanism capable of operating a movable production body, and various sensors for detecting an origin position and an operation position) is arranged on the game board 5, the depth direction is If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension at the first predetermined height and the distance dimension at the second predetermined height may be configured as the same distance dimension at the predetermined height, The distance dimension at the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension at the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise in the first space 1505a, and to prevent heat in the second space 1505b. By not accommodating various electronic components and the like that emit light, heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540.

  In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the metal shield plate 1540d, so that the product number printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is formed. And the model (or management number), the state of the IC pins in the control ROM 1510b, and the content (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized. Also, the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the states of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, the direction of the IC, Part number, pin number, etc.) and peripheral data ROM The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are respectively silk-printed. (E.g., the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) of the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540d. Note that, in addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d so that the periphery thereof can be visually recognized. . Also, the shape of the connector between the boards (special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the board of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) can be checked so that the connection state of the connector between the board and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. A rectangular opening may be provided at a position of a metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to an area larger than the area formed by the special connector SCN3, or a peripheral control board 1510 and a liquid crystal output board. The shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector with the 1530 can be confirmed. The position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the large area It may be configured to provide a rectangular opening in.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1505b provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501 are provided. Except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed singly or in combination. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game balls B) drops toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. Thus, it is possible to prevent an electrical trouble due to foreign matter falling on various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to a foreign object falling from the tank rail 553. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed on the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed on the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is formed via the ventilation hole 1501az. When foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B) which falls on the inside of the game ball B falls and enters, the foreign matter dropped on the various substrates of the peripheral control board box 1505 is electrically connected. This is because the probability of occurrence of trouble increases.

  In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, the cover side walls 1501b to 1505b provided on the upper, left, lower, and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501 are provided. Of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. In this case, by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, it is possible to contribute to suppressing a rise in the temperature of the peripheral control board box 1505. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the ventilation hole 1501az is formed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game balls B) falling toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 and entering, causing the peripheral control board box 1505 to drop onto various substrates. This is because the probability that an electrical trouble due to a foreign matter will occur increases.

  By the way, conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a ROM in which image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, and characters are stored, and an effect control board on which a CPU for controlling a display device that displays various images is mounted. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to the display device. For this reason, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to modify and produce the effect control board in accordance with the video signal input to the display device, and it is difficult to suppress the cost of the effect control board. there were.

  Conventionally, a ROM in which image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, and characters are stored, an effect control board (effect control means) on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted, and the like. (For example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall to the gaming machine are charged with static electricity by rubbing the game balls when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the battery.

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, and each control is shared. Have been. The main control board 1310 is capable of controlling a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 can control various effects during a game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and can control the progress of the effects based on various commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. Things. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout of the game balls B and the like, and a firing control unit 633b for controlling the firing of the game balls B by rotating the handle 182.

[7-1. Main control board]
A main control board 1310 capable of controlling the progress of the game includes a main control program that controls a power-on process executed at the time of power-on and controls a game operation executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. A main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands such as a RAM and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various sensors are inputted. A main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and monitoring for a power failure or a momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage. Power failure monitoring circuit 1310e and RAM stored in main control MPU 1310a Has a, a RAM clear switch 1310f in order to completely erase the broadcast. The main control MPU 1310a is operated by a high frequency circuit of a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided on the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing improper operation, and the like are also built in.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. The non-volatile RAM previously stores a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code having only one in the world) for identifying an individual by a manufacturer that manufactures the main control MPU 4100a is stored. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to an inconsistent content, forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a to the effect that it has been affected by electrical noise. This is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit has a mechanism that cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a performs a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a performs a reset without executing a main control side power-off process described later, and executes a main control side power-on process described later again. Will be done. In this case, since the main-control-side power-off process is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, as described later, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased ( Clear). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset signal is not output from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a to the payout control board 633. Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is kept in the activated state.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter, “main control built-in hardware”) that updates a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game. Random number circuit ”). The hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical value range of 0 to 65535 is set as the minimum value and the maximum value is set in advance in the present embodiment). The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. More specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first sets a clock signal (main signal) input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. When all the values in are completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values within the predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a big hit determination random number. Is set as

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various sensors at its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, since the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, the main control input circuit 1310b outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals. It is configured as a circuit to be output.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. A main control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the set information, a main control output circuit without a reset function without a reset function having no reset terminal, It is composed of The main control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with the reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset, so that a signal based on the information is output. Are configured as circuits that do not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control output circuit without a reset function outputs a signal based on the information because information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit output from the various output terminals.

  A first starting port sensor 3002 (the above-described first starting port sensor main side 3002a and a first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b) for detecting a game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, a second starting port 2004 The second starting port sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the game, the general winning port sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and the gate for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003 A sensor 2401, a first receiving port sensor 2406 for detecting the game ball B received in the first receiving port 2006, a large winning port sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the special winning port 2005, and the game area 5a. The detection signals from the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting illegal magnetism in the main control MPU1 via the main control input circuit 1310b Is input to the input terminal of a given input port of 10a.

  The respective detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 are input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, that is, the main control input circuit 1310b The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, the respective detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2401, the first entrance sensor 2406, the big winning opening sensor 2403, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are transmitted via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly. Specifically, it is input to the main control board 1310, and is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on these detection signals, so that the main control output circuit with reset function outputs the main control solenoid. By outputting a control signal to the drive circuit 1310d, a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting port solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405 is output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function, the status display 1401 of the function display unit 1400 and the ordinary symbol display 1402 are output from the main control output circuit with reset function. , Ordinary hold indicator 1403, Passing each drive signal to the special symbol display 1404, the first special reservation number display 1405, the second special symbol display 1406, the second special reservation number display 1407, and the round display 1408 via another board. No, that is, output directly.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, thereby outputting the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit with the reset function. The main control with reset function by outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the main control output circuit with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function The output circuit outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In this embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3002 (the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b), the second starting port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the special winning opening A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the sensor 2403, whereas a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 are provided. , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are used for the first startup port sensor 3002, the second startup port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401.

  In addition, when an advantageous game state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the special winning opening sensor 2403 is used. Detection of B also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the special winning opening sensor 2403 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 and the first reception sensor 2406 where the game ball B does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first reception sensor 2406 does not frequently occur. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first entrance sensor 2406. Regardless of whether the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001 or the first entrance sensor 2406, a proximity switch having high durability and long life may be used.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function, thereby transmitting the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without reset function. , Various commands are transmitted as serial data. Upon normal completion of receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 633 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 11310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with reset function. The main control output circuit with the reset function outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 633.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function as serial data. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is provided with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. BC0 (see FIG. 160 and the like). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the main control MPU 1310a completely erases (clears) the data from the main control built-in RAM. I have. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without reset function, and is output from the main control output circuit without reset function to the payout control board 633.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with DC + 12V and DC + 35V from the power supply board 630, and monitors the DC + 12V and DC + 35V for signs of power failure or momentary power failure. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning when detecting a power failure or an instantaneous power failure of + 12V DC and + 35V DC. While being input to the input terminal, the main control board 1310 (output via the main control output circuit 1310c), and the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 4110. Is input to Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Note that the power failure notice signal may be configured to be input to a board or the like on which the door frame 3 is mounted.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to two power lines: a power line to which DC + 12V is supplied (+ 12V power line) and a power line to which DC + 35V is supplied (+ 35V power line). By monitoring the voltages respectively, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of a power failure such as a power failure or a momentary power failure as compared with the case of monitoring the voltage applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 35V power line. Is available.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
In addition to the payout control of the game ball B, a payout control board 633 that performs a launch control, a ball feeding control, and the like of the game ball B performs a payout control unit 633 a that performs various controls related to payout, and performs a firing control by the firing solenoid 542. A launch control unit 633b for performing ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145, an error LED display 633c for displaying a state of the pachinko machine 1, and an error LED display 633c for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 633c. An error cancel switch 633d.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control section]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 controls a power-on process that is performed when the power is turned on, and controls a game medium payout operation that is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. A payout control MPU 633aa, which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs including a payout control program to be controlled and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various sensors relating to payout are input. A payout control input circuit 633ab, a payout control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, a payout motor drive circuit 633ad for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580, It has.

  The payout control MPU 633aa has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”), and its operation ( A watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built in.

  The payout control input circuit 633ab is not provided with a reset terminal at its various input terminals for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various sensors, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the payout control input circuit 633ab outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals by not resetting the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset. It is configured as a circuit to be output.

  The dispensing control output circuit 633ac is configured as an open collector output type having an emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. A payout control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the output information, a payout control output circuit without a reset function without a reset function without a reset terminal, It is composed of The payout control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, the dispensing control output circuit with the reset function is configured to reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by the dispensing control system reset, and thereby output a signal based on the information. Are configured as circuits that do not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit without the reset function is configured such that a signal based on the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the dispensing control system reset. It is configured as a circuit output from the various output terminals.

  A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing detection of the dispensing device 580. The detection signal from the sensor 591 and the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  A detection signal from a door frame opening switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4 and a detection signal from the main frame opening switch that detects the opening of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are output from a payout control input circuit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via 633ab.

  Various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received via a payout control input circuit 633ab at the input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 633aa in a serial data system. An operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f from the main control board 1310 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  When normally receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data is completed, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output with reset function. By outputting to the circuit, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the main control board 1310.

  Further, the payout control MPU 633aa transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit without reset function from the output terminal of the serial output port, thereby outputting the payout control output without reset function. Various commands are transmitted from the circuit to the main control board 1310 as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  The dispensing control MPU 633aa outputs a drive signal for driving the dispensing motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the dispensing control output circuit with reset function, thereby driving the dispensing control output circuit with reset function. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED display 633c. By outputting a drive signal for display to the payout control output circuit with reset function, a drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the error LED display 633c.

  The error LED display 633d is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 633d include the following. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 633 is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570, and when the number “2” is displayed, it is “ball ball” (specifically). Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout blade 589 and the game ball B are engaged and the payout blade 589 becomes difficult to rotate), and the number “3” is displayed. When the "Count switch (Specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, "retry" is performed. (Specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the lower plate 202 is notified that the game ball B in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full) and when the number “7” is displayed, “CR” is displayed. "Not connected" (that is, the electrical connection is disconnected at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1), and the numeral "9" is displayed. When displayed Is in stock (prize ball stock (unpaid) is present) "(specifically, the number of game balls B not paid out has reached a predetermined number). I have.

  Further, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out as a prize ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with the reset function, whereby the payout control with the reset function is performed. The output circuit outputs the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown).

  Further, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 558 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (built-in with an infrared LED and a photo IC), and through the plurality of photocouplers, a game room (a hall). ), The number of balls of the game balls B and various information (game information, error contents relating to the payout operation of the game balls or the fact that there is an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall computer. The external terminal board 558 and the hole computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers. The computer is designed not to malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310, which can proceed with the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, can control the payout and the like. An abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 that can perform and the peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect, so that a malfunction or a failure is about to occur. The hall computer recognizes the number of game balls B actually paid out by the pachinko machine 1 as prize balls, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, and thereby, the payout information of the game balls B by the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1 (so-called payout information). , Pitch information) and the game of the player.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. . The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the payout control MPU 633aaa via a CR unit input / output circuit (not shown). Input is made to an input terminal of a predetermined input port. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of the lent game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. The input is displayed on the ball lending display unit of the lending operation unit 220.

  Note that various kinds of voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the payout control board 633 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. As described above, the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor BC0 (see FIG. 160 and the like) serving as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. Reference). With this capacitor BC0, the payout control MPU 633aa in addition to the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) even in the power-off process. When the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output from the payout control input circuit. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control MPU 633aa, and is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 633aa.

[7-2-2. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors related to firing are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal based on the clock signal. A firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a firing solenoid driving circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing reference. A ball feeding solenoid driving circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are shot toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. And generates a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182 and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will The detection signal from the single-button operation sensor 194 for detecting whether or not is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of the game ball B to be launched toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182 based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, and the launch reference pulse The input is output to the firing solenoid 542 as a trigger. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, and thereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to output the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. As described above, while the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Is controlled.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the effect based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and includes a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, and various I / Os. A peripheral control IC 1510a in which an interface or the like is integrated on one semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b in which various programs and various schedule data for defining the progress of the effect are stored in advance, and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in a peripheral data ROM board 1520 are stored. 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data), a slide-type volume control switch 1510d capable of controlling the volume, and a real And backup power source 1510e which can also supply power during power failure to the time clock IC, and includes a power supply generating circuit (not shown) to create various supply voltages, and peripheral control input circuit (not shown), the. Various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports, various parallel I / O ports, and the like.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs various types of control information (periphery) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 as one process of the initial setting process when the power is turned on (including the case where power is restored from a power failure). ) Is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. As described above, since the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 have a transfer rate of 2 Gbps, control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Transfers at high speed. As the control information (peripheral data), as described above, background data for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, image data such as character images, design images, etc., and are provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data defining the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and games It is drive data for driving and controlling various movable effectors provided on the board 5.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information associated with the processing or delete the information. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the startup of its own system, it reads various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and proceeds with the effect. .

  Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the start of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on the various commands, and reads the various schedule data. In accordance with the schedule data, various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read, control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600, and the various LED light emission modes are adapted to the various effects. In such a manner, various effects are performed by performing control such that sound such as music and sound effects matched to the various effects flows.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 in the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Control to output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. When the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is ready to receive screen data defining the screen configuration, the VDP notifies the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a by outputting a V blank signal to the CPU.

  The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads and generates sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and outputs the sound data. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matched to various effects are played from the 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, and the like. When a slide volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, the volume control signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker An audio signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) is output to the base frame 464 and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the main frame 4. By doing so, a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) can be provided.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the startup of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on the various commands, and reads the read schedule data. Along with, the game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full-color LED, a single-color LED, or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is transmitted from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is read and transmitted as a command from various serial I / O ports to each decorative board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720, or is driven to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 Game board side drive data for outputting a signal to SDRAM Read from 510c1 and 1510c2 and transmit as commands to panel drive board 1720 from various serial I / O ports, or drive to operation ring drive motor 342 provided on door frame 3 and operation button up / down drive motor 367 Door-side drive data for outputting a signal, and a door-side for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full-color LED, a single-color LED, or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 The door-side drive light-emission data composed of the light-emission data and the door-side drive light-emission data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as a command from various serial I / O ports to the door frame 3 side. The panel drive board 1720 is provided on the game board 5 based on the received game board side drive data (that is, the command) when receiving the game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a). A drive motor control circuit (not shown) capable of outputting a drive signal to various drive motors provided in the various effect units is provided.

  The detection signals from the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) of the various effect units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are transmitted to the panel drive board 1720, and The signals are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. Further, a detection signal from the press detection sensor 381 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, a detection signal from the elevation detection sensor 382, a detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and a second rotation detection sensor 348 Are received by the various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. Also, signals from the air-cooling fan FAN that convey the rotation state of the air-cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

  Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510. The power supply creation circuit (not shown) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from one voltage (for example, DC +12 V) among various voltages from the power supply board 630. Types are created and supplied.

  The peripheral control IC 1510a includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

[7-4. Panel drive board]
Here, a brief description will be given of a panel drive board 1720 which is a subordinate board of the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the relationship with each decorative board of the game board 5 will be described, and then, the relationship with various drive motors of various effect units and the relationship with various detection sensors will be described.

[7-4-1. Relationship with each decorative board of game board]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full-color LED, a single-color LED, or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5. Is read out from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands from various serial I / O ports to each decorative board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720. Each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided with one or more LED constant current drive circuits capable of flowing a predetermined constant current to the LEDs.

  As each decorative board of the game board 5, for example, a decorative board for the first picture on which a plurality of LEDs for the first picture to be illuminated and decorated by irradiating light from the upper surface of the light guide plate in the rendering unit 2600 is mounted. And a second pattern decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs for a second pattern, which are illuminated and decorated by irradiating light from the right side of the light guide plate in the presentation effect unit 2600, are mounted.

  Further, as each decorative board of the game board 5, for example, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a which are arranged at the upper left corner in the front view of the panel holder 1120 and emit light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel board 1110 are mounted. An upper left panel decoration board 1131, a lower left panel decoration board on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs arranged at the lower left corner in a front view of the panel holder 1120 and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel board 1110 are mounted; There is.

  Further, as each decorative board of the game board 5, for example, a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa for emitting and decorating the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are mounted. There is a decorative substrate 3311a and the like.

[7-3-1b. Relationship with various drive motors of various production units]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads, from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 as described above. The command is transmitted from the various serial I / O ports to the panel drive board 1720 as a command. As described above, the panel drive board 1720 receives the game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) by a drive motor control circuit (not shown), and the drive motor control circuit (not shown) Based on the board-side drive data (that is, the command), a drive signal is output to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5.

  As the various drive motors provided in the various effect units, for example, there is a back left upper rotation drive motor for rotating the preceding decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310.

[7-3-1c. Relationship with various detection sensors]
As described above, the detection signals from the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various effect units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are, as described above, panel driving. The signals are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the board 1720 and the peripheral control board 1510.

  As various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various effect units, for example, the standby position (original position) of the rotational position of the preceding decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 Position) which is mounted on the back upper left decorative board 3311a.

  The standby position (original position) of the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is based on a detection signal from the magnetic back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab mounted on the back left upper front decorative substrate 3311a. This is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[8. Ground wire system]
The frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 can collect electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places, and ground the ground (earth ground) to the island facilities of the game hall. Here, the grounding wire system using the frame grounding board 559 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a configuration of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 152 (a) is a side view of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 152 (b) is a mounting surface of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. 152 (d) is a table showing the description of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground substrate 559. As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the frame ground board 559 is in a state where its mounting surface is downward (that is, in a state where the connector insertion ports of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are respectively downward). It is housed and mounted inside the board housing part 551aa formed on the top plate part 551a of the payout base 551 shown in FIG. 102 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 152 (b), the frame ground substrate 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, ECN2 arranged in a line from the right side to the left side along the upper side thereof, and the center of the left side. A lower ground terminal ECN3 is arranged. The ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 152 (d), the ground terminal ECN1 is used as an interface ground and provided on the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 of the main frame 4 shown in FIG. The connection terminal is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN2 via an interface ground wire. The ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal of the game hall island equipment via the island equipment ground wire as an island equipment ground. The ground terminal ECN3 is shown as a ball tank ground in the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. 102 (b) (specifically, outside the side wall of the ball tank 552 near the substrate accommodating portion 551aa). Attach one end of the ball tank ground wire with a metal screw The other end of the ground wire is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN4. The ground terminal ECN4 serves as a metal ground for the main body frame, and the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. (Specifically, one end of the main frame metal ground wire is attached to a metal screw (not shown) on the upper side of the main frame reinforcing frame 530, and the other end of the main frame metal ground wire is electrically connected. The ground terminal ECN5 is electrically connected to a ground connection terminal provided on the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 114 as a power supply ground via a power supply ground wire.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (c), the circuit of the frame ground substrate 559 has a ground terminal ECN3 serving as a ball tank ground electrically connected to one end of a resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 serving as a power ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are each electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. The other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to a ground terminal ECN5 serving as a power supply ground, a ground terminal ECN2 serving as an island facility ground, and a ground terminal ECN1 serving as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are employed as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

  Electromagnetic noise flowing to the earth terminal ECN1 as the interface earth is guided to the earth earth of the island equipment of the game hall via the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and is removed therefrom. Electromagnetic noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN3 is guided to the earth ground of the island facility in the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire, is removed, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground. The electromagnetic wave noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire is guided to the earth ground of the island facility in the game hall, and is removed. Via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire It is guided to the earth ground of the island capital of the gaming hall is adapted to be removed.

  As shown in FIG. 98, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball 552 is supplied with game balls B from the island facilities of the game hall, and the ball tank 552 is supplied with the game balls B to the payout unit 560. The game balls B are polished in the island facility of the game hall, or rubbed against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and emit electromagnetic wave noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game balls B can stay and the payout unit 560 are installed, and around the area.

  Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is disposed near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is likely to accumulate. In the frame ground substrate 559, the ground terminal ECN3 serving as a ball tank ground, and the main body frame metal The ground terminal ECN4 and the ground terminal ECN2 are connected to the ground terminal ECN2 as the ground for the island equipment, respectively. It is now possible to lead to the earth ground of the island facilities of the game hall via the ground wire That. In other words, the electromagnetic noise entering from the ball tank 552 or the dispensing unit 560 where the static electricity easily accumulates is transferred from the frame ground board 559 via the ball tank 552 or the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 as a frame ground called a frame ground. By leading to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be removed by flowing to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall.

  In the present embodiment, of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 serving as a ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 serving as a main frame metal ground are, as described above, in a region that is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. Therefore, a large-sized ground terminal is adopted, and the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground, as described above, transmits the electromagnetic noise flowing into the frame ground substrate 559 to the game hall. A large ground terminal is used because it is guided to the earth ground of the island facility for removal. The ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 employing this large ground terminal are square with a cross section of 1.14 mm on a side, rated current: 7 A (when AC / DC, AWG # 18 is used), rated voltage: It has general specifications of 250 V (AC / DC), applicable electric wire range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and has a height of 13.4 mm as shown in FIG. When the housing corresponding to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm).

  On the other hand, the electromagnetic noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 serving as the interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 serving as the power ground is smaller than the above-described ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4, and the current is small. For the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5, small ground terminals are used. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 adopting the small-sized ground terminals are square having a cross-sectional shape of 0.64 mm on a side, rated current: 3 A (when AC / DC, AWG # 22 is used), and rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250 V (AC / DC), applicable electric wire range: AWG # 30 to # 22, and has a height of 7 mm as shown in FIG. 152 (a) (the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 have When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm).

  In the present embodiment, the respective ground wires (the island facility ground wire, the ball tank ground wire, and the body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 are electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Since the current due to the electromagnetic noise is larger than the respective ground wires (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire), the respective ground wires (island facility ground wire, ball tank) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4. The thickness of the ground wire (main frame ground wire) is larger than the thickness of each ground wire (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. In the present embodiment, 1.6 mm is adopted as the thickness of the frame ground substrate 559 as shown in FIG. 152 (a).

  As described above, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places is once collected on the frame ground substrate 559, the electromagnetic wave noise is guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall, and can be removed. The ground substrate 559 has a function of exhibiting a static elimination action.

  In addition, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places is once collected on the frame ground substrate 559 and can be guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed, the pachinko machine 1 The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 disposed on the upper side of the pachinko machine 1 is routed to the power supply board 630 disposed on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and the electromagnetic wave noise is once aggregated in the power supply board 630 to provide an island facility for the game hall. The arrangement of the ground wire (wiring) is extremely simple as compared with the configuration in which the ground wire is led to the ground.

  In addition, since the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 can be arranged in the board accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551 in a state of being close to each other, a plurality of electric wire connections provided on the external terminal plate 558 can be provided. Terminal 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in the present embodiment, there are ten external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 arranged in a line from left to right as viewed from behind the payout base unit 550). ) And a hall computer provided in a game hall, respectively, by wiring, an earth terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground on the frame ground board 559, and a ground connection terminal provided in the island facility of the game hall. , And the work of electrically connecting the island equipment ground wire (wiring), and can be performed as a series of work Because, it is possible to contribute to improvement in workability.

  In addition, since the frame ground substrate 559 is configured to be able to be disposed in the substrate accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground substrate 559 and the island facility of the game hall are provided. Various control boards provided on the game board 5 (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game) are provided with island facility ground lines (wirings) for electrically connecting the provided ground connection terminals. Control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the control, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like). It is possible to eliminate adverse effects on electronic components (including connectors) provided in the device.

  Further, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the main body frame 4 and the ball tank 552, which are strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise, and the vicinity of the dispensing unit 560 And a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 of the body frame base unit 500, a ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and a ground terminal ECN4 as a body frame metal ground on the frame ground substrate 559, respectively. The length of the ground wire (ball tank ground wire, body frame metal ground wire) to be electrically connected is made extremely short, and the electromagnetic wave noise is guided from the frame ground board 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall to be removed. be able to.

  In addition, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball tank 552 where static electricity easily accumulates and the frame earth substrate 559 that exhibits a static elimination action are electrically connected. The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) is determined by the length of the body frame metal ground wire (wiring) for electrically connecting the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 to the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits a static elimination action, and the length of the power supply. The length of a power supply ground line (wiring) for electrically connecting the substrate 630 to the frame ground substrate 559 that exerts the charge eliminating function, and the interface that electrically connects the interface substrate 635 to the frame ground substrate 559 that exerts the charge removing effect. It can be configured to be the shortest as compared with the length of the ground wire (wiring).

  Further, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the main body frame 4 and the ball tank 552, which are strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise, and the vicinity of the dispensing unit 560 In contrast to the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500, the frame ground board 559 has a ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and a ground terminal ECN4 as a body frame metal ground. Although a large current flows, the resistance is reduced by the resistances ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground substrate 559, so that the operation of the power supply substrate 630 is not affected. Guide to the earth ground of the island equipment in the game hall via the ground wire to remove It is possible.

  By the way, conventionally, each ground is temporarily integrated on the power supply board arranged on the CR unit side at the lower part of the main body frame so as to easily supply the AC power supply of the CR unit, and connected to the earth ground of the island facility via the power supply board. There has been proposed a gaming machine that touches and grounds (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIGS. 84 and 85)). Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often placed below the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to consolidate the ground on the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank or the prize ball device on the upper part of the gaming machine toward the lower power supply board. By laying the ground wire in this way, electromagnetic noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing on the way and may have an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is integrated on the power supply board, if any problem occurs on the power supply board, the ground may be affected, or current may flow through the ground wire, which may affect the operation of the power supply board. there were. In addition, when the earth ground of the island facility is located above the gaming machine, it may be cumbersome because it is necessary to route the ground wire gathered by the power supply board from below to above and connect again.

[9. A conductor floating against the ground]
Next, with reference to FIG. 153, members provided on a game board for handling conductors floating on the ground will be described. FIG. 153 is a schematic diagram of handling of a conductor floating on the ground provided in various effect units provided in the game board.

  As described above, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5, and the payout unit 560 is arranged beside the game board 5. In the ball path, the game balls rub against each other and become charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby causing a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities in the game hall. As described above, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise.

  In the game board 5, various effect units are provided in the back unit 3000. Various effect units include structures used for improving rigidity, mechanical parts for driving mechanisms, electric parts (including a housing for electric parts), conductive plating applied to decorative structures, and 2. Description of the Related Art A plurality of conductors such as a structure (including a decoration structure) formed of a conductive resin are used. Further, the game board 5 is provided with various substrates, and these various substrates and various effect units are arranged close to each other. In addition, the influence of these conductors on the electric circuit when electrostatic discharge occurs varies depending on the size of the surface area. When the conductor has a small surface area, the amount of charge that can be stored is small, and the effect of the electrostatic discharge on the electric circuit can be neglected, and there is no need to remove electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge. On the other hand, if the conductor has a large surface area, the amount of charge that can be stored is large, and the influence of the electrostatic discharge on the electric circuit cannot be ignored, and it is necessary to safely remove electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge. .

  In a state where these conductors are floating with respect to the ground, the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to the above-described electromagnetic wave noise, so that the conductors are affected by the electromagnetic wave noise and electrostatic induction occurs. Then, when the electrostatic discharge is generated from the conductor floating with respect to the ground, there is a possibility that various substrates provided in the game board 5 may be damaged.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the plurality of conductors in the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, when at least the electrostatic discharge is performed, it affects various boards provided in the game board 5 and malfunctions. A structure that does not float on the ground was adopted for objects that might be damaged or that might be damaged.

[9-1. Example of handling the conductor of the production unit (1)
Among the various production units, one of the production units is provided with a metal reinforcing plate (not shown) so as to cover the back side thereof in order to increase its rigidity, and among the left and right ends of the reinforcing plate, One disposed near the drive motor 3151 is attached to a metal slide rail 3151 ns that can slide vertically by a predetermined distance, and the other not disposed near the drive motor 3151 is formed of a metal not shown. A sliding portion (not shown) which slides along the cylindrical bar (moves while sliding the surface of the metal cylindrical bar along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical bar) (may be formed of a conductive resin, (It may be formed of a non-conductive resin.)

  In the present embodiment, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various effect units, when at least the electrostatic discharge is performed, the one that may affect various substrates provided in the game board 5 to cause malfunction and damage may be caused. As an example, a conductor whose surface area is larger than a predetermined surface area is selected as an object that does not float on the ground, and each of them is structurally contacted and fixed and conducts. And For example, a metal reinforcing plate and a metal slide rail 3151 ns are mounted and brought into structural contact with each other to establish an electrically connected state.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), a metal back rail 3151ns for a back-and-back moving arm, which is slidable by a predetermined distance in a vertical direction, is disposed near a drive motor 3151. The housing and the mounting hole 3151n closer to the slide rail 3151ns among the pair of mounting holes 3151n and 3151f provided in the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 are connected via the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc. In addition to being electrically connected, the mounting hole 3151f remote from the slide rail 3151ns and the panel driving board 1720 are electrically connected via the second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151fc.

  Wiring terminals are crimped to both ends of the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc, and a wiring terminal at one end is fixed to a metal case of the slide rail 3151ns by screws and fixed at the other end. Terminal is screwed and fixed to a mounting hole 3151n provided in a metal casing of the drive motor 3151. At this time, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151n is fixed to the effect unit.

  The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3151fc has a wiring terminal crimped at one end thereof, a connector provided at the other end thereof, and a wiring terminal provided at one end thereof provided in a metal housing of the drive motor 3151. And the other end connector is inserted and fixed to the corresponding connector on the panel drive board 1720. At this time, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151f is fixed to the effect unit. When electrically connected to the panel drive board 1720, the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc is electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs0. The ground (GND) line of the panel drive board 1720 is connected to the ground of various substrates such as the power supply substrate 630, the main control substrate 1310, the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, various relay substrates, and various decorative substrates. (GND) line.

  A plurality of electric wires (harnesses) for driving the drive motor 3151 are provided with connectors, and are inserted into corresponding connectors on the panel drive board 1720 different from the connector into which the connector of the second conductor potential variation prevention wire 3151fc is inserted.

  As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various effect units, when at least the electrostatic discharge is performed, there is a possibility that various substrates provided in the game board 5 may be affected and malfunction, or may be damaged. For a conductor whose surface area is larger than a predetermined surface area, the conductors are structurally brought into contact with each other and fixed and brought into a conductive state, for example, a metal reinforcing plate and a metal slide rail. 3151 ns are attached and structurally contacted and electrically connected to establish a conductive state. These conductors include a first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3151 nc, a metal housing of the drive motor 3151, and a second conductor. The wiring is electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc and the resistor Rs0 of the panel driving substrate 1720.

  As a result, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various effect units, at least one of the plurality of conductors that, when electrostatically discharged, may affect various substrates provided in the game board 5 and may malfunction or may be damaged. As the conductor is configured so that the surface area of the conductor alone becomes larger than a predetermined surface area, these conductors are not floated from the ground, so if the electromagnetic noise enters these conductors temporarily In this case, the penetrated electromagnetic wave noise can be guided to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive substrate 1720 to be safely removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunctions and damages of various substrates provided on the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic noise).

  Further, as described above, even if the electromagnetic wave noises enter these conductors, the electric wave portions of the various circuit boards provided in the game board 5 are not affected by the malfunctions or failures even if the electromagnetic wave noises enter the conductors. The pachinko machine 1 can continue to operate normally, and the impact due to the electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the big hit game state, and the occurrence state of the probability change It is possible to prevent player discomfort such as disappearance.

[9-2. Example of handling of conductor of production unit (part 2)]
The various effect units include a metal slide in which one of the other effect units disposed near the drive motor 3151 among the two ends in the vertical direction of the moving arm base is slidable by a predetermined distance in the horizontal direction. The other, which is attached to the rail 3151ns and is not disposed near the drive motor 3151, slides along a metal cylindrical bar (not shown) (slides the surface of the metal cylindrical bar along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical bar). (Not shown) (which may be molded with a conductive resin or may be molded with a non-conductive resin) is attached.

  In the present embodiment, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various effect units, at least when the electrostatic discharge is performed, various conductors provided on the game board 5 may be affected and malfunction or damage may be caused. As an example, a conductor whose surface area is larger than a predetermined surface area is selected as an object that does not float on the ground. For example, a metal slide rail 3151 ns.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 153 (b), a metal housing of a metal slide rail 3151ns that is slidable by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction and is disposed near the drive motor 3151, Of the pair of mounting holes 3151n and 3151f provided in the metal housing of the motor 3151, the mounting hole 3151n (3452n) which is closer to the slide rail 3151ns is electrically connected via the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc. And the connection hole 3151f remote from the slide rail 3151ns and the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit are electrically connected via the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc.

  Wiring terminals are crimped to both ends of the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc, and a wiring terminal at one end is fixed to a metal case of the slide rail 3151ns by screws and fixed at the other end. Terminal is screwed and fixed to a mounting hole 3151n provided in a metal casing of the drive motor 3151. At this time, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151n is fixed to the effect unit.

  The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc has a wiring terminal crimped at one end thereof, a connector provided at the other end, and a wiring terminal provided at one end thereof provided in a metal casing of the drive motor 3151f. And the other end connector is inserted and fixed to the corresponding connector on the relay board 3151a provided in the rendering unit. At this time, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151f is fixed to the effect unit. When the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc is electrically connected to the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs2. The ground (GND) line of the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit includes a panel drive board 1720, a power supply board 630, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, various relay boards, It is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line of various substrates such as various decorative substrates.

  A plurality of electric wirings (harnesses) for driving the drive motor 3151 are provided with connectors, and are connected to corresponding connectors on a relay board 3151a provided in a rendering unit different from a connector into which a connector of the second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151fc is inserted. Inserted. The relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit is electrically connected to the panel drive board 1720 via electric wiring (harness). This electric wiring (harness) is provided with connectors at both ends thereof, and is inserted into and fixed to the corresponding connector on the panel drive board 1720.

  As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various effect units, when at least the electrostatic discharge is performed, there is a possibility that various substrates provided in the game board 5 may be affected and malfunction or damaged. For example, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3151 ns is the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3151 nc and the metal casing of the drive motor 3151, for example, in which the conductor has a larger surface area than the predetermined surface area. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) through the body, the second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151fc, and the resistor Rs2 of the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit.

  As a result, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various effect units, at least one of the plurality of conductors that, when electrostatically discharged, may affect various substrates provided in the game board 5 and may malfunction or may be damaged. As the conductor is configured so that the surface area of the conductor alone becomes larger than a predetermined surface area, these conductors are not floated from the ground, so if the electromagnetic noise enters these conductors temporarily However, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered can be guided to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the resistor Rs2 of the relay substrate 3151a provided in the effect unit, and can be safely removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunctions and damages of various substrates provided on the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic noise).

  Further, as described above, even if the electromagnetic wave noises enter these conductors, the electric wave portions of the various circuit boards provided in the game board 5 are not affected by the malfunctions or failures even if the electromagnetic wave noises enter the conductors. The pachinko machine 1 can continue to operate normally, and the impact due to the electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the big hit game state, and the occurrence state of the probability change It is possible to prevent player discomfort such as disappearance.

  As described above, the electromagnetic noise generated at various points in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 5 is once collected in the frame ground substrate 559, and guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island facility in the game hall to be removed. Therefore, the frame ground substrate 559 has a function of exhibiting a static elimination action. That is, a path is formed for guiding electromagnetic wave noise generated at various places in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 5 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall and safely removing the noise. On the other hand, among the plurality of conductors in the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, when at least the electrostatic discharge occurs, it may affect various boards provided in the game board 5 and malfunction. If something exists or is likely to be damaged, it can be guided to a circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and safely removed so as not to float on the ground. That is, among the plurality of conductors in the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least one of the plurality of conductors that, when electrostatically discharged, may affect various boards provided in the game board 5 and malfunction. There is formed a path through which electromagnetic wave noise can be guided to circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and safely removed for those that may be damaged. In this manner, independent paths for safely removing electromagnetic wave noise are respectively formed in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the game board 5, and are not affected by each other. Therefore, also in this respect, malfunction and damage due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic noise) can be prevented.

  As described above, the effect of a conductor on an electric circuit when electrostatic discharge occurs depends on the size of its surface area. In addition, the easiness of electrostatic discharge of the conductor changes depending on the distance between the conductor and the electric circuit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by taking into account the size of the surface area of the conductor and the distance dimension between the conductor and the electric circuit, among the plurality of conductors, the electromagnetic wave noise is guided to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall for safety. The conductors that need to be removed are individually selected (the conductors to be grounded or not are individually distinguished), and the electromagnetic noise is led to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates). The conductors that need to be safely removed are individually selected.

  In the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of conductors in the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least when the electrostatic discharge is performed, it affects various boards provided in the game board 5 and causes an error. For those having a surface area of a conductor that is larger than a predetermined surface area as a thing that may be activated or a thing that may be damaged, each of them is structurally contacted and fixed and brought into a conductive state, for example, A metal reinforcing plate and a metal slide rail 3151 ns are attached to each other to be structurally in contact with each other so that they are electrically connected to each other and are in a conductive state. Via the metal housing of the motor 3151, the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc, and the resistance Rs0 of the panel drive board 1720 Although the path is electrically connected to the land (GND), a metal screw is provided in place of the metal housing of the drive motor 3151, and the operation is performed through the metal screw alone. Alternatively, a lug plate (a metal lug terminal is fixed to an insulating substrate) may be provided, and the operation may be performed via the lug plate. That is, these conductors are connected to the ground (GND) via the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc, the metal screw (or lug plate), the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc, and the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive board 1720. It may be a path that is electrically connected to. A plurality of conductors in various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 can be similarly configured.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3151 ns is electrically connected to the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 via the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151 nc crossover wiring. , A metal slide rail 3151 ns conductor and other conductive members (for example, a structure used for improving rigidity, a mechanical component of a driving mechanism, an electric component (including a housing of the electric component), and a decoration) And one of a plurality of conductors such as a structure (including a structure for decoration) formed by conductive plating applied to the structure and a conductive resin, and another crossover wiring. May be electrically connected. In other words, a configuration in which two or more crossover wirings are used for electrical connection may be adopted. In this case, a plurality of conductors may be electrically connected in a daisy chain with a crossover wiring, respectively, a plurality of conductors may be connected in series and in parallel by a crossover wiring, or a metal screw may be provided. The relay of the crossover wiring for electrically connecting one conductor to the other conductor may be performed via a single metal screw, or a lug plate (a metal lug terminal may be connected to an insulating substrate). May be provided through the lug plate. It is preferable that each of the plurality of crossover wirings is configured to have a shorter length.

[10. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 155 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 156 is a view taken in the direction of arrow B in FIG. 155, and FIG. 158 is a silk print (No. 1) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate, FIG. 158 is a silk print (No. 2) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board, and FIG. It is a perspective view explaining the outline of. Here, the circuit configuration of the power supply board will be described first, followed by the method of identifying electronic components having the same shape, the confirmation of the fusing of the fuse, the capacity of the capacitor, and the countermeasures for the electronic components to be discontinued.

  As described above, in the island facility of the game hall, there is a transformer (not shown), which steps down the commercial power supply voltage of AC100V to the power supply voltage for gaming machines of AC24V. When a plug of a power cord (not shown) is inserted into a power outlet of 24 VAC, which is a power supply voltage for a gaming machine of an island facility in a game hall, 24 VAC is supplied to the power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 generates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC +35 V, DC +12 V, DC +5 V, etc.) from 24 V AC supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies the power supply board 630 to each board in the pachinko machine 1. doing.

[10-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 154, the circuit of the power supply board 630 includes a power switch 630a, a noise suppression circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor improvement circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply creation circuit 630f, a power supply destruction circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. The circuit 630h is mainly configured.

  24 VAC from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). When AC24V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown), the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm) (The supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal), and are input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a through the B-type blowout specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law. Specifically, 24 V AC line 1 (hereinafter referred to as “AC 24 V 1” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “L side”)) is input to the input terminal 3 of the power switch 630 a, and the power switch is The line 2 of AC 24 V (hereinafter, described as “AC 24 V 2” (may be described as “N side”)) is input to the input terminal 1 of 630 a. Output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise suppression circuit 630b.

  When a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 630a, the input terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 are electrically connected to each other, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise suppression circuit 630b. At the same time as the supply is started, the input terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 are electrically connected, and the supply of AC24V2 to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise suppression circuit 630b is started. Thus, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff such as a store clerk of the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 become electrically non-conductive, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power substrate 630. The supply is cut off, and the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 become electrically non-conductive, so that the supply of AC24V2 to various circuits of the power supply board 630 is cut off. Thus, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off by the OFF operation of the power switch 630a.

  In addition, while the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall remains ON, the staff such as the game hall clerk turns on the breaker of the game hall to turn on the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, or the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be turned off all at once by turning off the breakers in the game hall.

[10-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure, and a choke coil L1, and the output of the power switch 630a. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, the normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

  The common mode noise suppression circuit CMC includes capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacity and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers) and have the same varistor voltage. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

  One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is connected via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the ground connection terminal DCN5 as a frame ground FG2. This ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 152 via a power supply ground wire (not shown).

  The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC includes a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

  One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. One end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via a power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via a power switch 630a.

  AC24V1 output from the output terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise suppression circuit CMC and the normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and is also input to the power supply line connector DCN2 as AC24VA, AC24V2 output from the output terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC24V. . The choke coil L1 is a component for preventing common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise disturbance. The power line connector DCN2 is provided outside the pachinko machine 1 via a power line for an interface board (not shown), an interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 115, and a power line for a CR unit (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to a CR unit (not shown).

  The AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[10-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter, referred to as “FETs”) Q1 and Q2 and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q1 and Q2, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and a Zener diode.

  The AC24V1 having the common mode noise reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are input to the CAI terminals of the power generation circuit 630f, respectively.

  AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified to DC by switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and are connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2. 2 and are output from each. The packages of the FET Q1, the FET Q2, the Schottky barrier diode D1, and the package of the Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type and are fixed to the radiation fin HS1 (see FIG. 155). ing. The radiation fin HS1 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  As described above, the AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c and also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. And output to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  The rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 is input to the power factor improvement circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[10-1-3. Power factor improvement circuit]
The power factor improvement circuit 630d includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter, referred to as “FETs”) Q3 and Q4, and a peripheral circuit 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and an inductor.

  The direct current whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and directly to the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630da. Respectively. To the gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4, a power-factor improvement circuit gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit is input via the peripheral circuit 630da. Source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

  The direct current whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 suppresses generation of harmonics by switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da to improve the power factor, and the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10. Is output from each. The package types of the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the package types of the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (the above-described TO-220F). The fin HS2 is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 155). The heat radiation fins HS2 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  The DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improvement circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[10-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e includes a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminals of the plurality of electrolytic capacitors are respectively grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and the DC terminals whose power factors are improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d are input to the positive terminals thereof. The smoothing circuit 630e smoothly (smooths) the pulsating current from the DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d and outputs the smoothed pulsating current to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. In the form, it has the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and has a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm. The power is supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 as +35 V DC. The power supply line supplied through the fuse FUSE3 is a + 35V power supply line of each board in the pachinko machine 1.

[10-1-5. Power supply creation circuit]
When the DC from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power generation circuit 630f generates DC + 12V and DC + 5V from the input DC. The power supply creation circuit 630f outputs the created DC + 12V from the + 12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the created DC + 5V from the + 5V terminal to output the created DC + 5V from the power supply board 630 to the pachinko machine. 1 to each substrate. The power supply line supplied from the + 12V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f becomes the + 12V power supply line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and the power supply line supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f becomes + 5V of each board inside the pachinko machine 1. Power supply line.

  The power supply creation circuit 630f controls the switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da in the power factor improvement circuit 630d by controlling the output of the power factor improvement gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. To suppress the generation of harmonics.

  In the power supply generation circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the AC-DET terminal via the diodes D5 and D6. The power supply generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal, and determines whether or not to output a power supply destruction circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

  The plug of the power cord (not shown) is not inserted into the power supply outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the game facility, and is incorrectly inserted into the power supply outlet of 100 VAC, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage of 24 VAC for the game machine. When inserted, the power supply voltage higher than DC +35 V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

  The power supply generation circuit 630f determines the magnitude of the power supply voltage based on the power supply voltage whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal (threshold value: the present embodiment) In this case, the voltage is set to about 50 V.), a power supply destruction circuit gate signal can be output to the power destruction circuit 630g.

  When the power supply creation circuit 630f outputs a power supply destruction circuit gate signal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the power supply destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters a short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g enters the short mode, when the power switch 630a is in the ON state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is supplied to the power supply via the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g. By flowing at a stretch toward the CGND terminal of the creation circuit 630f, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown.

  The GND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. The ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 to which the GND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is grounded becomes the ground (GND) line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[10-1-6. Power supply destruction circuit]
The power supply destruction circuit 630g includes an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter, referred to as “FET”) Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 have one end electrically connected to the other end opposite to the resistor R25 electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal.

  When a power supply destruction circuit gate signal is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the power supply destruction circuit 630g activates the FET Q5 to connect the source terminal to the drain terminal of the FET Q5. When a large current flows toward the drain (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become overcurrent), the FET Q5 is destroyed, and the state of the short mode in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 conduct is maintained. Is done. The FET Q5 has the same package type (the above-described TO-220F) as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10. , Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, are arranged at positions not in contact with the radiation fins HS1, HS2. Specifically, the FET Q5 is arranged between the radiating fins HS1 and HS2 and is not fixed to the radiating fins HS1 and HS2 at all (see FIGS. 155 and 156). The purpose of this is to absorb and cool the heat via the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 so that the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are not destroyed by heat generation. On the other hand, when the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become overcurrent), the FET Q5 is short-circuited by heat. This is to contribute to being destroyed in time.

  That is, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the gaming facility, and is erroneously inserted into the power outlet of 100 VAC, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage of 24 VAC for the game machine. When the power supply generation circuit 630f is inserted, the magnitude of the power supply voltage is set to a predetermined value (threshold value) based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. : In this embodiment, the voltage is set to about 50 V.) When the voltage reaches the voltage, a gate signal for a power supply destruction circuit is output to the power destruction circuit 630g, and control is performed so that the FET Q5 self-destructs. This maintains a short-circuit state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 conduct, and the source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. When the power supply generating circuit 630f is in the ON state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g via the FET Q5 in the short mode, thereby causing the power supply generation circuit 630f to operate. By flowing into the CGND terminal at a stretch, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown. A which is the power supply voltage Even inserted incorrectly into a power outlet of 100 V, so that the can be reliably prevented that the pachinko machine 1 within each substrate except the power substrate 630 is broken.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island equipment in the game hall, and is erroneously inserted into the power outlet of 100 VAC, which is the commercial power voltage higher than the power supply voltage of 24 VAC for the game machine. In a state in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is broken by being inserted, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are replaced with ones which are not blown, and the plug of the power supply cord is AC24V which is a power supply voltage for a game machine of an island facility in a game hall. Even if it is plugged into a power outlet, since the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is already destroyed and the short mode is maintained, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the rectification circuit 630c , And the power destruction circuit 630g When a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f through the FET Q5 in the short mode, a large current flows through the replaced fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 or Both will blow again. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is not destroyed, the plug of the power supply cord must be connected to the island facility in the game hall. Even if it is plugged into an AC 24V power outlet, which is a power supply voltage for gaming machines, it is not possible to start a game.

[10-1-7. Backup power supply circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes a Schottky barrier diode D20 and a capacitor BC0. The Schottky barrier diode D20 has a low forward voltage drop and a high switching speed. The anode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 is electrically connected to a power supply line (that is, a + 5V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of power supply generation circuit 630f, and the cathode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 is connected to capacitor BC0. It is electrically connected to the plus (+) terminal. The negative (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). The main power supply line serving as a backup power supply line from the terminal between the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0 to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. A circuit is formed in which a wiring pattern for extracting the VBB and the payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 151 is formed. I have.

  That is, the negative (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). A main VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 from the terminal between the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the payout control The payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the substrate 633 is a circuit divided into two systems, a payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f becomes a Schottky barrier diode D20. And supplies it to the capacitor BC0 to charge the capacitor BC0, and supplies it to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB to hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM The payout VBB is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, and holds various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), and a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In this case, DC +5 V by the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630 f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. In response, capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge prevents the supply to the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f by the Schottky barrier diode D20, while providing the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. The information is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a and holds various information stored in the main control built-in RAM. Then, various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held.

  That is, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including a case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), and a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In this case, even if DC +5 V from the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630 f is not supplied to the capacitor BC 0, the capacitor BC 0 discharges the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a are held, and stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB. Various information is stored.

[10-2. Method of identifying electronic components having the same shape]
Next, a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 include the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky transistors of the power factor correction circuit 630d. The package types of the barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g are the same (TO-220F), and the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 have the same shape (diameter: 5 mm, length). Length: 20 mm transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal).

  Although the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different types of electronic components, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic components that are not destroyed, and the FET Q5 is the only electronic component that is destroyed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, the only electronic components that are mounted on the power supply board 630 and have the same shape are those that are destroyed. In order to make it easy to identify the components, silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 has characteristics different from those of the other components.

  Specifically, for the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, which are electronic components that are not destroyed, as shown in FIG. The line and the thick white line indicating the direction in which the electronic components are to be arranged are silk-printed, and the silk-printed TSLK1 to 4 for the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 and the silk-printed for the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4. Thus, TSLKs 5 to 8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. The thick white line is the side fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 155, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 need to be arranged adjacent to each other to fix the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. It is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 such that the silk printing of the white outline on which the HS2 is arranged and the thick white lines of the silk printing TSLK1 to 8 are connected.

  On the other hand, as for the FET Q5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), a white outline and a plurality of white oblique lines arranged at regular intervals in the outline. The ad1 and the thick white line indicating the direction in which the electronic components are arranged are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 by silk printing TSLK9 as silk printing. That is, the white oblique line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  As described above, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 have the same shape, the silk print printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. By observing the white diagonal line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern among the TSLKs 1 to 9, which electronic component among different types of electronic components having the same shape is more closely watched than other electronic components. It is possible to identify whether the electronic component should be used. Accordingly, it is possible to very easily specify which electronic component among the different types of electronic components having the same shape is the only electronic component to be destroyed.

  When the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the clerk of the amusement hall to the FETQ5 by telephone, the silk-printed TSLK9 having the white slanted line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern. By instructing to search for, the clerk such as a game hall clerk can accurately grasp the position of the FET Q5, so that the service center clerk can easily communicate with the clerk such as the game hall clerk. Become.

  Thereby, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to give the FETQ5 by telephone, the clerk of the game hall clerk etc. The noticeable FET Q5 can be specified among a plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. Therefore, of the plurality of electronic components, the remarkable FET Q5 can be identified from the other electronic components FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

  The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are completely different electronic components as described above, whereas the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are the same. Although it is a kind of electronic component, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facilities of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage is 100 VAC, which is higher than the 24 VAC power supply voltage for the gaming machine. As described above, the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is self-destructed and the short mode is maintained, and a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, thereby causing one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to fail. Is blown. In other words, after the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 become destructive electronic components as a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V that is a commercial power supply voltage. I have. Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630, the electronic components to be destroyed are easily printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so as to be easily identified. It employs silk printing that has different characteristics from the others.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), for the fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that is not destroyed even if the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is a commercial power supply voltage, as shown in FIG. Is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as silk print.

  On the other hand, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components whose power cord plugs are destroyed by mistake as a trace inserted into a commercial power supply voltage of AC100V, are shown in FIG. 158 (b). As described above, the white outline and the region ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLKs 2, 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. That is, the area ad2, which is solid white, is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are respectively soldered to the power supply board 630, support fittings (not shown) are solidly painted white in the area inside the white outline and the periphery of the support fittings. The area ad2 can be visually checked, and the white solid area ad2 corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which is the area inside the white outline, is transparent. It can be surely seen through a transparent glass tube.

  As described above, even when the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, the white color represented as a characteristic pattern among the silk-printed FSLK1-3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. By visually observing the solid area ad2, it is possible to identify which of the same type of electronic components having the same shape is an electronic component that should be watched as compared with other electronic components. It has become. This makes it extremely easy to determine which of the electronic components of the same type having the same shape is the electronic component indicating that the plug of the power cord has been accidentally inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet that is the commercial power supply voltage. Can be specified.

  When the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the clerk of the amusement hall to use the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 by telephone, the white solid area shown as the characteristic pattern is used. By instructing to search for the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 having the ad2, the staff such as the game hall clerk can accurately grasp the positions of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. It becomes easy to communicate with staffs such as clerks.

  Thereby, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff of the game hall such as the clerk of the game hall to use the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the person in charge of the game hall clerk and the person in charge of the service center become the person in charge of the service center. Of the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, the notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be specified. Therefore, out of the plurality of electronic components, the notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be distinguished from the fuse FUSE3 which is another electronic component.

[10-3. Check fuse blowing]
Next, a description will be given of the confirmation of fusing of the same type of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 having the same shape and mounted on the power supply board 630. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (support terminals at both ends are made of metal). Soot adheres to the inside. Among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show a trace in which a plug of a power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, as described above. If the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is a commercial power supply voltage, the power cord is blown. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the silk printing FSLK2, 3 described above is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as silk printing on the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 so that the state of the blown fuse line can be easily checked. As described above, the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 correspond to transparent glass tubes excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 because the solid white area ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern as described above. By visually observing the solid white region ad2 through the transparent glass tube, it is possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of a break in the fuse wire housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2.

  Thereby, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall or a worker who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5) inserts a plug of a power cord for supplying a power supply voltage to the pachinko machine 1 with AC24V which is a power supply voltage for the game machine. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by mistakenly plugging it into an AC 100V power outlet which is a commercial power supply voltage and turning on the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 Of these, the fuse wire housed in one or both of the transparent glass tubes breaks and soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube. Even if the plug is inserted into the power outlet, the power cannot be turned on and it is an initial failure. " Wiring errors), it is so that it can not (can not excuse) to cheat.

  On the other hand, as described above, the silk print FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as the silk print on the fuse FUSE3. In the present embodiment, green color is adopted as the resist for the power supply substrate 630. Further, in the present embodiment, a green resist is solid-painted in a region of the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the silk print FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3. No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 (that is, the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the region, no wiring pattern is formed in this region.) This is because, by visually observing the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 through the transparent glass tube, the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 is visible. In this case, the visibility of the fuse line can be confirmed by improving the visibility of the state.

  Also, in the area of the solid glass green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, even when all the wiring patterns are laid out, the transparent state of the fuse FUSE3 is the same as when no wiring pattern is laid out. The visibility of the state of the fuse line accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 is improved by visually observing the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube through the transparent glass tube. As a result, it is possible to easily check whether or not the fuse wire is disconnected.

  As described above, the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630 is connected to the interface board power supply line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1, and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 has a function of supplying power to a CR unit (not shown) in addition to a function of relaying various signals. The interface board 635 is formed of a fuse FUSE (not shown) (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and a type B blowout specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). 158 (a) is printed on the mounting surface of the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply board 630 described above. The area of the mounting surface of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to the silk printing for the fuse FUSE (not shown) is solid-colored with a green resist. No wiring pattern is laid out in the solid green resist area corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) (that is, the solid pattern corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the green resist region, no wiring pattern is formed in this region.) This is because the area of the solid-colored green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) is visually observed through the transparent glass tube and is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE. The visibility of the state of the fuse line is improved so that the presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse line can be confirmed. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 can be provided in one of AC24VA and AC24V supplied from the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630, or can be provided in both. You can also.

  Also, in the solid-colored green resist region corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown), even if all the wiring patterns are laid out, as in the case where no wiring pattern is laid out, it is not shown. The area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE is visually inspected through the transparent glass tube so that the state of the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE can be checked. The visibility can be improved, and the presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse line can be easily confirmed.

[10-4. Capacitor capacity]
Next, the capacitance of the capacitor BC0 will be described. As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, the capacitor BC0 is connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. Line), DC + 5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 via the Schottky barrier diode D20, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be charged. The power supply supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs when the power supply of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is simultaneously shut off by turning OFF the power supply. The discharge is performed in response to the fact that DC + 5V by the line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. To start.

  Due to the discharge of the capacitor BC0, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), a power failure or the like. When a momentary power failure occurs, backup power is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 as the main VBB so that various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is held. In addition, the backup power supply is supplied as the payout VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, so that various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held. It has become.

  When the operation of the game hall ends, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall turns off the breaker of the game hall, thereby simultaneously turning off the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall. Then, when starting the next business (usually, the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is kept in the ON state), a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall changes the breaker of the game hall. Is turned on, the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is simultaneously turned on. At this time, if the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is small, the discharging of the capacitor BC0 is completed during the period from the end of the business of the gaming hall to the start of the next business, so that the main control board 1310 is provided. Various kinds of information of the main control built-in RAM of the control MPU 1310a and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 cannot be held. With this, when a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall turns on the breaker of the game hall at the time of starting business, when the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are simultaneously turned on, the RAM clear switch is turned on. Regardless of whether the operation is performed or not, the main control MPU provided on the main control board determines a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM in the power-on processing and completely erases the contents of the main control built-in RAM ( Since all the pachinko machines simultaneously execute the RAM clear notification for notifying that the game has been cleared, the RAM clear notification sound flowing from the speakers of all the pachinko machines sounds in the game hall. In this case, in all the pachinko machines, the dispensing control MPU provided on the dispensing control board judges the checksum (sum value) error of the dispensing control built-in RAM in the processing at the time of power-on, and completes the contents of the dispensing control built-in RAM. Erase (clear).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is selected so that the RAM clear notification is not performed even when the game hall is closed and the next business is started. Specifically, the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB for about three days (about 72 hours) after the business of the gaming hall ends. Various kinds of information which are supplied and stored in the main control built-in RAM can be held and supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control section 633a of the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB. Those having a capacity capable of holding various information stored in the RAM are selected. The selection of this capacity depends on the power consumption of the main VBB supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310, and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Is also about 10 times larger than the power consumption of the pay VBB supplied to the power supply. The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Power consumption is large.

[10-5. Discontinued Electronic Components Measures]
Next, a countermeasure for electronic parts whose production is stopped will be described. First, due to the circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, a lead-type electronic component is mounted on a mounting surface, which is a front surface side, of a substrate treated as a main substrate such as a power supply substrate, a main control substrate, and a payout control substrate. It is necessary to solder on the soldering side which is the side. However, lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of game machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and fusion game machines. (What is called an SMD type). For this reason, production may be stopped due to a decrease in the number of production of lead-type electronic components. If a lead-type electronic component obtained from one electronic component manufacturer is discontinued and a search is made for an alternative, there is a high probability that another electronic component manufacturer will also discontinue production. This leads to the use of a lead-type electronic component with a time limit, which makes it difficult to mount the lead-type electronic component on a substrate that will eventually be treated as a main substrate.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the SMD type electronic component can be configured as a lead type electronic component, and the lead type electronic component can be mounted on a mounting surface of a substrate treated as a main substrate. . Here, the Schottky barrier diode D20 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the Schottky barrier diode D20 is located on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a at a position corresponding to the anode D20ca and the cathode D20cb serving as terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are formed at the positions where one ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb corresponding to the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are disposed, and lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb are formed at the positions where the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are arranged. , D20db and wiring patterns D20ga, D20gb for electrically connecting the lead land patterns D20fa, D20fb.

  The SMD land patterns D20da and D20db formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a are arranged and soldered so as to correspond to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cb serving as terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. The anode D20ca, the cathode D20cb and the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are soldered, and one ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb are soldered to the lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb, respectively. Then, the entire surface (mounting surface) and the back surface of the substrate D20a are molded by encasing the entire surface with an epoxy resin to form an SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b and an electronic component body D20h covering one end of the leads D20ea and D20eb. The Schottky barrier diode D20 can be configured as a lead-type electronic component in which two leads D20ea and D20eb protrude from the electronic component body D20h. As shown in FIG. 159 (b), a symbol D20ha indicating the forward direction of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component body D20h. Although not shown, a manufacturer name and a product number (a number listed in a catalog) of the Schottky barrier diode D20 are also printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component body D20h.

  As described above, the SMD type electronic component can be configured as a lead type electronic component. Therefore, even if the production of the lead type electronic component is reduced and the production is stopped and it becomes difficult to obtain it, This can be achieved by using SMD type electronic components used by electric manufacturers.

  In the above-described embodiment, the Schottky barrier diode D20 has been described. However, the present invention can be applied to an SMD type capacitor, an SMD type resistor, an SMD type coil, and the like. Further, the same SMD type electronic components can be arranged in an array in which a plurality of the same SMD type electronic components are arranged in a line, thereby forming a lead type electronic component.

  Next, a countermeasure is taken against a commercial power supply voltage when a plug of a power supply cord for supplying AC power from the island facility in the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is erroneously inserted into a power outlet of a commercial power supply voltage (100 VAC). Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as “configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 shows a configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 160, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 154 (hereinafter, referred to as “commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment”) are denoted by the same reference numerals. expressed.

[Comparison between the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of countermeasures against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the power supply destruction circuit 630g is configured by the FET Q5, the resistors R25 and R24, and the capacitor C22 as described above. When a circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 operates to cause a large current to flow from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are over-driven). When the FET Q5 is destroyed due to the current, the short-circuit state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 conduct is maintained.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit as described above. And the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, the normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. I have.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the AC24V1 and the AC24V2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c and the diode D5, as described above. The signals are input to the anode terminal of D6, respectively, output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, when the AC 24 V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via the power cord (not shown), the fuse FUSE1 , FUSE2 to the input terminals 3, 1 of the power switch 630a. As described above, for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 are mounted on the power supply board 630. Printed on the surface. That is, the area ad2, which is solid white, is represented as a characteristic pattern. As described above, although both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are soldered to the power supply board 630, the support fittings (not shown) are formed in white in the area inside the white outline and the area around the support fittings. The solid-filled area ad2 can be visually checked, and is a solid white area corresponding to a transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which is an area inside the white outline. ad2 can be surely seen through a transparent glass tube.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasures against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, 24 V AC from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). Then, the L side (AC24V1) is input to the input terminal 3 of the power switch 630a via the fuse FUSE1, and the N side (AC24V2) is input directly to the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. Is done. As described above, for the fuse FUSE1, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLK2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. ing. That is, the area ad2, which is solid white, is represented as a characteristic pattern. As described above, although both ends of the fuse FUSE1 are soldered to the power supply board 630, the support fittings (not shown) are solidly painted white in the area inside the white outline and the area around the support fittings. The area ad2, which has been solid-filled in white, is the area inside the white outline and corresponds to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuse FUSE1. It can be surely seen through the glass tube.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the fuse FUSE2 in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment is omitted from the 24 V AC from the island facility of the game hall. Briefly describing this, in the configuration of countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are connected to both power cords (L side (AC24V1), N side ( AC24V2)), but no problem occurred even if one (N side (AC24V2)) was omitted in a test conducted by the applicant. Accordingly, in the configuration of the measure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, one of the AC 24V (N side (AC24V2)) from the island facility of the game hall is connected to the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. The cost can be reduced by inputting it as is.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the same switch as the power switch 630a in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment is employed. In brief, this is because the power switch 630a needs to reliably disconnect / connect both the L side and the N side of 24 VAC from the island facility of the game hall. Thus, the power switch 630a in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment is similar to the power switch 630a in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, and is configured to supply 24 V AC from the island facility in the game hall. Both the L side and the N side can be disconnected / connected at the same time.

  In the configuration of countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the N side of AC24V (AC24V2) from the island facility of the game hall and the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a are connected. It is electrically connected to one of the micro gap type arresters AL1. The other end of the microgap type arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. When a high voltage (referred to as "surge voltage") intrudes into AC24V from the island facility of the game hall due to a lightning strike, the surge voltage is applied to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing as a current to prevent a surge voltage from being applied to the power switch 630a, or a high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated by turning on / off the power switch 630a is supplied to the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing a surge current to the frame ground FG2 to prevent the surge voltage from being applied to the power switch 630a. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, a worker passes by the micro gap type arrester AL1, and the ground terminal ECN2 (island equipment ground) of the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. If the terminal and the ground connection terminal of the island facility of the game hall are electrically connected to each other via the ground wire of the island facility, the electromagnetic wave noise is used as security to secure the N side of AC24V from the island facility of the game hall (AC24V2 ), The noise immunity can be increased.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, the choke coil, L1 and a surge absorber SA1 forming a power supply destruction circuit 630g '. The output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are connected to a common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, a normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and a power supply destruction circuit. 630g ', and input to the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'has a higher reaction speed than the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise suppression circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC (for example, as the surge absorber SA1). One end thereof is electrically connected to the L side of AC 24 V (AC 24 V 1) via the power switch 630 a, and the other end is connected to the N side of AC 24 V via the power switch 630 a. AC24V2), and when a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows and it is destroyed, causing a short circuit and a short mode.

  Although a varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, a silicon surge absorber (also called a semiconductor varistor, VRD, or the like) is used here. The silicon surge absorber is capable of absorbing a surge voltage having a sharp rise compared to a normal varistor, and utilizes an avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a pn junction of silicon. This silicon surge absorber has characteristics that it has a very quick response to a surge, has a very good control voltage characteristic, and has a very small leakage current. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an AC circuit, a bidirectional type is used, and a rated voltage (breakdown voltage) of 47 V which is about twice the input voltage may be selected.

  Further, in the configuration of the measure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are electrically connected to the No. 2 (COM) terminal of the relay RL1. , Is electrically connected to one end of the thermistor TH1. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the third (NO) terminal of the relay RL1, and is also electrically connected to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of the choke coil L2 is electrically connected to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. Four terminals of the relay RL1 are grounded to ground (GND), and a first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to a relay drive circuit 630i described later. As a result, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between the terminals of the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). The thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. The characteristics of the thermistor TH1 are as follows. Therefore, a capacitor having a curve in which the value of the allowable capacitor becomes small and which is not destroyed even when a commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 V is applied is selected.

  The DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improvement circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, and is input to the power source creation circuit 630f and also to the relay drive circuit 630i. When the DC from the smoothing circuit 630e is input, the relay drive circuit 630 generates an operating voltage (+24 V) that can operate the coil of the relay RL1, and supplies the operating voltage (+ 24V) to the first terminal of the relay RL1.

  The rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c respectively is generated when the power switch 630a is turned ON due to insufficient power from the relay drive circuit 630i (relay drive circuit 630i). Since the coil of relay RL1 is not operating (because the power supply by + 24V from 630i is insufficient), relay RL1 cannot be turned on (that is, relay RL1 remains off). The second terminal (COM) and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are inputted to the power factor improving circuit 630d via the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2 without passing through the relay RL1 in a non-conductive state. You. Thus, the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c respectively flows toward the thermistor TH1 only, and when the DC starts to flow into the thermistor TH1, the resistance value Is high and a weak current flows through the load subsequent to the thermistor TH1, but when the temperature of the thermistor TH1 gradually increases due to the current flowing through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 decreases accordingly. Apply a strong current to the load.

  On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned on to switch from a state in which the coil of the relay RL1 does not operate to a state in which the coil of the relay RL1 operates by the power from the relay driving circuit 630i (by power supply at +24 V from the relay driving circuit 630i), the relay RL1 Is turned on, the terminal No. 2 (COM) and the terminal No. 3 of the relay RL1 are brought into conduction, and the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, respectively. In addition to the thermistor TH1, the current is divided between the terminals of the relay RL1 between the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal (that is, between the contacts), and flows therethrough, and is input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2. Is done. As a result, the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c respectively flows between the terminal (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). ), The current to the thermistor TH1 decreases, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 decreases, and the resistance of the thermistor TH1 increases accordingly, so that the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are connected. The current passing between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) increases.

  As described above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises, and the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c respectively. When the current flows to TH1, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 increases and the resistance value decreases, so that the current to the load subsequent to the thermistor TH1 increases. In other words, the current flowing through the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. When this function is used, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine of the island equipment in the game hall, and the power supply of 100 VAC, which is the commercial power voltage higher than the 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine, is used. If the plug is erroneously inserted into the outlet, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 greatly exceeds the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) by the time the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises, and a large current flows through the surge absorber SA1. The absorber SA1 is destroyed, and a short mode can be set.

  In such a state, when the power switch 630a is in the ON state, a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 via the surge absorber SA1 in the short mode in the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 is turned off. It will be blown. Further, when the fuse FUSE1 is blown while the surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, a large current does not continue to flow through the surge absorber SA1. Therefore, the elements of the surge absorber SA1 scatter and the surge absorber SA1 is It can be prevented from being destroyed in the open mode. As a result, only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and even if the power cord is erroneously plugged into a power outlet of 100 V AC which is a commercial power supply voltage, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power supply board 630 is destroyed. This can be reliably prevented.

  In the configuration of the measure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 in the measure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment. The circuit configuration does not become complicated because it is not necessary to provide a FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting a gate signal for a power supply destruction circuit and a CGND terminal for flowing a large current to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island equipment in the game hall, and is erroneously inserted into the power outlet of 100 VAC, which is the commercial power voltage higher than the power supply voltage of 24 VAC for the game machine. When the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'is broken by being inserted, the fuse FUSE1 is replaced with a fuse which has not been blown, and the plug of the power supply cord is replaced with the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility in the gaming hall. Even if it is plugged into a 24V AC power outlet, the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'is already destroyed and the short mode is maintained, so the fuse replaced via the surge absorber SA1 A large current flows through FUSE1 and fuse FUSE1 So that the blown. That is, if the power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 forming the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'has already been destroyed is not replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 forming the power supply destruction circuit 630g' is not destroyed, Even if the plug of the power cord is inserted into a power outlet of 24 VAC, which is a power supply voltage for a gaming machine in an island facility in a game hall, the game cannot be started.

  In the above-described embodiment, the power supply switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor improvement circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply creation circuit 630f, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g are provided on one power supply board 630. Although various electronic components and the like are provided, it may be configured to be provided separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 includes a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, and the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B includes diodes D5 and D6, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor improvement circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply creation circuit 630f, a power supply destruction circuit 630g, and a choke coil L2 shown in FIG. , Fuse FUSE3 and wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A are connected to the wiring on the second power supply board 630B via the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, it is input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and input to the power generation circuit 630f. It will be. Note that various DC voltages such as DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V, which are created in the second power supply board 630 </ b> B, are supplied from the second power supply board 630 </ b> B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply board 630 </ b> A. You.

  In addition, the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 160 can be divided into two substrates, a first power supply substrate 630A and a second power supply substrate 630B. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the micro gap type arrester AL1, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B mainly includes the connector A, and the circuit of the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor improvement circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply creation circuit 630f, the relay drive circuit 630i, and the relay RL1, shown in FIG. It mainly comprises a thermistor TH1, a choke coil L2, a fuse FUSE3, and a wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A are connected to the wiring on the second power supply board 630B via the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. Input to connector B. Note that various DC voltages such as DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V, which are created in the second power supply board 630 </ b> B, are supplied from the second power supply board 630 </ b> B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply board 630 </ b> A. You.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the drive power supply lines (for example, the + 35V power supply line from the power supply board 630 or the + 12V power supply line from the power supply board 630) to the various drive motors provided in the various effect units of the game board 5 In a board (for example, the panel drive board 1720 shown in FIG. 153 (a) and the relay board 3151a shown in FIG. 153 (b)) to which the wiring from the drive motor is directly connected, a fuse (chip fuse) may be used. ) Or a resettable fuse, a polyswitch may be provided, or a power supply board 630 may be provided with a drive switch as a drive power supply line (for example, a + 35V power supply line from the power supply board 630, or a power supply from the power supply board 630). + 12V power line) for fuse (may be chip fuse) or reset It may be provided polyswitches as Fuses.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a power supply unit capable of creating various power supplies required for the gaming machine based on an external power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-008221). In the official gazette (FIG. 2), when a person in charge of a service center of a game machine manufacturer instructs a staff member such as a clerk of a game hall to specify a specific part of the power supply means by telephone, the person in charge of the service center is instructed. In addition, there is a problem that it is difficult to identify a notable component among a plurality of components mounted on the power supply unit.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine including a power supply unit that creates various power supplies based on the power supply from the game island facilities and supplies the power to the board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-083337 (paragraph [0038]). )). The game island facility converts a commercial AC power supply (AC 100 V) into a step-down gaming machine AC power supply (AC 24 V). However, if the power cord for supplying power from the island facilities to the gaming machine is plugged into the AC outlet of the commercial AC power supply instead of the AC power outlet of the gaming machine, the commercial AC power supply Because of the high voltage, abnormal power was output from the power supply means, and there was a risk that various substrates inside the gaming machine would be destroyed.

[11. Circuit of main control board, circuit of payout control board]
Next, the circuits and the like of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 151 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 161 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board, FIG. 162 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board, and FIG. 163 is a perspective view illustrating an outline of wiring to a board treated as a main board. FIG. First, the power supply and input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be described, and the power supply and input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633 and the wiring to the board treated as the main board will be described.

[11-1. Power supply and input signal in circuit of main control board]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with +5 V DC from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 and is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The supplied backup power is supplied as the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

  As shown in FIG. 161, first, the DC +5 V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is input to the main control filter circuit 1310h. The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has a first terminal to which DC +5 V from the power supply generating circuit 630f (630f ′) of the power supply board 630 is applied, and a second terminal electrically connected to ground (GND). A DC +5 V from which a noise component has been removed is output from the third terminal. The DC + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). ) Has been removed and smoothed.

  The DC + 5V output from the third terminal is connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance is 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected to each other, thereby further removing ripples and smoothing. This smoothed DC +5 V is applied to a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, when a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a after the momentary power failure occurs. The voltage is applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). DC + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4, which is electrically connected to ground (GND) at one end. The power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h. Thus, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a via the resistor MR0.

  Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, and a detection signal from the first entrance sensor 2406. The detection signal, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the like are input to the main control input circuit 1310b via the panel relay board 1710, respectively, and The detection signal from the starting port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control input circuit 1310b without passing through the panel relay board 1710.

  A detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, The detection signal from the first entrance sensor 2406 and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 are input to the input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. The input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an empty terminal. The input terminal PA7, which is an empty terminal, is electrically connected to ground (GND) as an empty terminal process.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first starting port sensor 3002 is constituted by two sensors (double sensors) of the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor sub-side 3002b. I have. The detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected to the main control board 1310), whereas the first starting port sensor The detection signal from the slave side 3002b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly electrically connected). The detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the first starting port sensor sub side 3002b. Is input to the input terminal PB2 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  An operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. This input port PB is composed of 8 bits, like the input port PA. Although not shown, a power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB, and detection signals from other sensors are also supplied to the input port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b. The input terminals that are input to the respective predetermined input terminals and become vacant terminals are electrically connected to ground (GND) as vacant terminal processing, similarly to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA.

[11-2. Power supply and input signal in circuit of payout control board]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power supply of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with +5 V DC from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa. The supplied backup power is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 as the power supply VBB.

  As shown in FIG. 162, first, +5 V DC from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is input to the payout control filter circuit 633h. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, +5 V DC from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is applied to the first terminal, and the second terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND). A DC +5 V from which a noise component has been removed is output from the third terminal. DC + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). ) Has been removed and smoothed.

  The DC + 5V output from the third terminal is connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (the capacitance is 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected to each other, thereby further removing ripples and smoothing. The smoothed DC +5 V is applied to a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. In addition, when a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa after the momentary power failure occurs. The voltage is applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 (the capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in the present embodiment) is larger than that of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633. In the embodiment, a value larger than the capacitance (180 microfarads (μF)) is selected. Thereby, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 when a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off. Each of the charged electric charges is applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power failure occurs.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). DC + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. ing. The VSS terminal that is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4 having one end electrically connected to the ground (GND) and via the resistor PR0. The power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h. Thus, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa via the resistor PR0.

  Among the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 194, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a signal from the payment detection sensor 591 The detection signal and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are input to the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 194, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are: The signals are input to the input terminals PA0 to PA5 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. The input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminals PA6 and PA7 are empty terminals. The input terminals PA6 and PA7, which are vacant terminals, are electrically connected to ground (GND) as vacant terminal processing.

  The power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB (not shown) via the payout control input circuit 633ab, and also a detection signal from another sensor. The input terminals which are respectively input to the predetermined input terminals of the input port PB via the payout control input circuit 633ab and become the vacant terminals are the same as the input terminals PA6 and PA7 of the input port PA, and the vacant terminals are ground ( GND).

[11-3. Wiring to board treated as main board]
The board handled as the main board includes a power supply board 630, a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, and the like. If the wiring to the board treated as the main board is fraudulently altered, the operation of the board treated as the main board will be uneasy, and a large amount of game balls will be paid out as prize balls, and the illegal game balls will be illegally When the wiring to each of these boards is illegally modified, it is necessary to find the modified wiring at an early stage because there is a possibility of being acquired by an actor.

  Accordingly, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), wiring to the power supply board 630 is performed using a connector SHG (not shown, but the connector SHG includes a manufacturer name and a product number (a number described in a catalog). The name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as an unauthorized identifier on the covering portion of each wiring connected to ()). More specifically, for example, the connector SHG is a connector having a total of 22 pins from a first pin to a 22nd pin, and the first pin has a manufacturer name: XXX as an unauthorized identifier SLAB on a covering portion of the wiring SCBL1. And the product number: ABC123 (a number published in the catalog) are repeatedly printed, and the second pin has the manufacturer name: XXX as the fraudulent identifier SLAB on the covering portion of the wiring SCBL2, and the product number: ABC123 (the number published in the catalog) Is repeatedly printed. The length of the wiring to the power supply board 630 must be at least as large as the manufacturer's name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) as the fraudulent identifier SLAB in the wiring's coating. Has the length in which the fraudulent identifier SLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

  Note that the covering portion of the wiring SCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and is a color (for example, black) that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion, and is a fraudulent identifier SLAB as a manufacturer name: XXX, and a product number: ABC123 (the number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings SCBL2 to SCBL22 connected to other pins may be of a different color from white (for example, a single color (for example, red or gray) or a plurality of colors). (E.g., red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.), or a color that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (e.g., a single color or a plurality of colors). ), The manufacturer name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (the number published in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the fraudulent identifier SLAB.

  As shown in FIG. 163 (b), wiring to the main control board 1310 is connected to a connector MHG (not shown, but the connector MHG has a manufacturer name and a product number (a number described in a catalog)). On the covering portion of each wiring, the name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number published in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as an unauthorized identifier. Specifically, for example, the connector MHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from a first pin to a thirty pin, and the first pin has a manufacturer name: YYYYY as a fraudulent identifier MLAB on a covering portion of the wiring MCBL1. And the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and on the second pin, the manufacturer name: YYYYY as the fraudulent identifier MLAB on the covering portion of the wiring MCBL2, and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (published in the catalog) Number is repeatedly printed. The length of the wiring to the main control board 1310 should be at least as long as the manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as an unauthorized identifier MLAB in the covering portion of the wiring. Has the length in which the unauthorized identifier MLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

  The covering portion of the wiring MCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and the color of the covering portion is easily visible (for example, black), and the manufacturer name: YYYYY, and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (a number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings MCBL2 to MCBL30 connected to other pins may be of another color (monochrome (for example, red or gray) different from white. Or a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and a color that is easily visible to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) ), And a manufacturer name: YYYYY and a product number: DEFXYZ-1 (a number published in a catalog) are repeatedly printed as an unauthorized identifier MLAB.

  As for wiring to the payout control board 633, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), a connector HHG (not shown, the connector HHG is connected to a manufacturer name and a product number (a number described in a catalog)). On the covering portion of each wiring, the name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number published in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as an unauthorized identifier. Specifically, for example, the connector HHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from a first pin to a thirty pin, and the first pin has a manufacturer name: YYYYY as a fraudulent identifier HLAB on a covering portion of the wiring HCBL1. And the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the second pin has the manufacturer name: YYYYY as the fraudulent identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring HCBL2, and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (published in the catalog) Number is repeatedly printed. The length of the wiring to the payout control board 633 should be at least as long as the manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the fraudulent identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring. Has a length in which the unauthorized identifier HLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

  The covering portion of the wiring HCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and is a color (for example, black) that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion, and is a fraudulent identifier HLAB as a manufacturer name: YYYYY, and a product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings HCBL2 to HCBL30 connected to other pins may be of another color (monochrome (for example, red or gray) different from white. Or a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and a color that is easily visible to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) ), A manufacturer name: YYYYY, and a product number: DEFXYZ-1 (a number published in a catalog) are repeatedly printed as an unauthorized identifier HLAB.

  In this way, even if the wiring to the board treated as the main board is illegally modified, the name of the manufacturer and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the connector and the wiring connected to the connector. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to discovering the modified wiring at an early stage. In addition, as wiring to the board treated as the main board, wiring that is difficult to obtain is preferable even if it is listed in a catalog.

  In the present embodiment, two of the first starting port sensor main sides 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided on the game board 5 are provided. The wiring and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 provided on the game board 5 are respectively connected to the main control board via connectors (not shown). 1310 is directly electrically connected. On the other hand, the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5 is provided on the game board 5. A gate sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting a game ball B received in a special winning opening 2005 provided in the game board 5, and a general winning provided in the game board 5 A general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in the mouth 2001, a first reception sensor 2406 for detecting a game ball B received in a first reception opening 2006 provided in the game board 5, and a game board 5 Two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 are provided through respective connectors. While being aggregated are electrically connected in Le relay board 1710 via one connector, it is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  For this reason, the two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 that constitute the first starting port sensor 3002 are incorrectly transmitted to the main control board 1310. There is a risk of electrical connection. Therefore, in the present embodiment, one of the colors of the covering portions of the two wires from the first starting port sensor 3002 is yellow and the other is pink, and the covering portion of each wire is a Are repeatedly printed, respectively. One of the colors of the covering portions of the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 is white and the other is black. Are printed repeatedly. This allows the manufacturer to identify the two wires from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402, respectively, at the manufacturer. In addition, in the gaming hall, a clerk such as a clerk of the gaming hall identifies the two wirings from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402, respectively. You can do it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310 is used. Is selected, and a connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310. Thus, two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 and two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 correspond to themselves. Since it is possible to have a physical structure that can be electrically connected, in the manufacturer, the worker of the line is required to perform the first starting port sensor 3002 constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 in the manufacturing process. It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error such as incorrect insertion) between two wires from the 3002a and two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402. A clerk such as a clerk of the game hall checks the first starting port sensor 3002 when confirming the presence or absence of impropriety, and when temporarily removing and returning the wiring by maintenance. An operation error (wiring error of incorrect insertion) between two wirings from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402 is reliably prevented. be able to.

  In the present embodiment described above, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 2001. However, these general winning ports 2001 may be individually or divided into a plurality of groups and a plurality of general winning port sensors may be provided. May be used. In this case, the connectors that electrically connect the two wires from the general winning opening sensor to the panel relay board 1710 have the same shape. This is because, although there are a plurality of general winning openings 2001, no matter which general winning opening 2001 receives a game ball, only a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball in accordance with the entering ball, This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or the change of the production. Further, even when a configuration is employed in which two wires from the general winning opening sensor are directly connected to the main control board 1310 directly without passing through the panel relay board 1710, even if the general winning opening sensor is used. A connector having the same shape is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires to the main control board 1310. This is because, as described above, although a plurality of general winning openings 2001 exist, even if a game ball enters any of the general winning openings 2001, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls with the entering ball. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or the effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, and the lower substrate holder 1200 is provided. However, similarly to the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor main side 2402a and the second starting port sensor subside 2402b are arranged at least separated by the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. It may be composed of two sensors (double sensors). In this case, similarly to the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402 including two sensors (double sensors) of the second starting port sensor main side 2402a and the second starting port sensor subside 2402b. , The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 can be reliably detected. In addition, an illegal ball (a game ball, a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as this, or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as this) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. ) Can be detected and reported in the fraud detection process in the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later. It can contribute to what can be discovered.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is first detected by the second starting port sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second starting port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second starting port sensor subordinate side. After passing through 2402b, it is detected by the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b, and then discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. In addition, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected to the main control board 1310), The detection signal from the mouth sensor slave side 2402b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly electrically connected). The detection signal from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor sub side 2402b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  As described above, the panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5 in addition to the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. A first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting one starting port sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B passing through a gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a large winning port 2005 provided on the game board 5 The special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and the first reception provided in the game board 5. A first reception sensor 2406 for detecting the game ball B received at the entrance 2006, and a magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 provided on the game board 5 is detected. The two wires from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 are electrically connected via respective connectors and aggregated, and also electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via one connector. ing.

  Further, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. ing. For this reason, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b to the panel relay board 1710, and the second starting port sensor slave A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the side 2402b to the panel relay board 1710. Thus, the two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the two wires from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b can be electrically connected to their own counterparts. In the manufacturing process, the operator of the line needs two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the second starting port sensor slave side in the manufacturing process. It is possible to reliably prevent a work error of incorrect wiring between the two wirings from 2402b (wiring error of incorrect insertion), and in a game hall, a clerk such as a store clerk of the game hall checks whether there is any fraud. When confirming, when the wiring is temporarily removed and returned by maintenance, two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b Two and wiring al, miswiring that operational error (wiring that insert mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 2001. However, the general winning ports 2001 may be separately configured to use a general winning port sensor. it can. In this case, the shape of the connector that electrically connects each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensor to the panel relay board 1710 may be selected as different. For example, in the case of contributing to the progress of the game or a change in the performance as the ball enters the general winning opening 2001, the shape of the connector of each of the two wires from each of the general winning opening sensors 3001 is made different. You may. By doing so, it is possible to provide a physical structure in which each of the two wirings from each of the general winning opening sensor 3001 can be electrically connected to the corresponding one of itself, so that in the manufacturer, In the manufacturing process, the line operator can reliably prevent a work error (wiring error such as incorrect insertion) due to erroneous wiring of each of the two wirings from each of the general winning opening sensors 3001 and in the game hall. In the case of a clerk such as a clerk at a game hall, when checking for fraud or when temporarily removing and returning wiring due to maintenance, an error in each of the two wirings from each of the general winning opening sensors 3001 is performed. Wiring work errors (wiring errors such as incorrect insertion) can be reliably prevented. In the case where a configuration is adopted in which two wires from each general winning opening sensor 3001 are electrically connected directly to the main control board 1310 without passing through the panel relay board 1710, the shape of the connector is used. Each is different. As described above, this can be a physical structure in which each of the two wirings from each of the general winning opening sensors 3001 can be electrically connected to the corresponding one of itself, In the manufacturer, the line operator can reliably prevent a work error (wiring error such as a wrong insertion) of the two wirings from each of the general winning opening sensors 3001 in the manufacturing process. In the game hall, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall checks the presence or absence of impropriety, and temporarily removes the wiring for maintenance to return to the original state. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent an operation error (wiring error such as incorrect insertion) due to incorrect wiring of the wiring.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2401, but, like the first starting port sensor 3002, the gate sensor main side 2401a and the gate sensor sub side 2401b May be arranged at least in a state where they are separated by at least the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension (double sensor). In this case, as in the case of the first starting port sensor 3002, the gate unit 2003 is configured by adopting the gate sensor 2401 including two sensors (double sensors) of the gate sensor main side 2401a and the gate sensor subside 2401b. The game ball B that has passed through can be reliably detected. In addition, an illegal ball (a game ball, a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as this, or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as this) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. ) Can be detected and reported in the fraud detection process in the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later. It can contribute to what can be discovered.

  In this case, the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 is first detected by the gate sensor main side 2401a by passing through the gate sensor main side 2401a, and is detected by the gate sensor subside 2401b by passing through the gate sensor subside 2401b. Will be done. Further, detection signals from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the gate sensor slave side 2401b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly electrically connected). Has been). The detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2401a is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the gate sensor slave side 2401b is input to the main control input circuit 1310b. Is input to an input terminal PC0 of an input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a (this input port is composed of 8 bits).

  Further, the detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the detection signal from the gate sensor slave side 2401b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. Therefore, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the gate sensor main side 2401a to the panel relay board 1710, and two connectors from the gate sensor slave side 2401b. A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the above wiring to the panel relay board 1710. Accordingly, a physical structure in which two wires from the gate sensor main side 2401a and two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2401b can be electrically connected to their corresponding counterparts. In the manufacturing process, the line operator incorrectly connects two wires from the gate sensor main side 2401a and two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2401b in the manufacturing process. Work mistakes (wiring errors such as incorrect insertion) can be reliably prevented, and in the game hall, staff at the game hall, such as clerks, temporarily remove the wiring for maintenance when checking for fraud. When returning to the original state, two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2401a and two wirings from the gate sensor slave side 2401b are mistaken. Work that line Miss (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector has a 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. Although a connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310, the first starting Four wirings, which are a combination of two wirings from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the mouth sensor 3002 and two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402, are configured as one connector. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which one connector including the four wires is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. In this case, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310, and a connector from the second starting port sensor 2402 Since the connector that electrically connects the wires to the main control board 1310 and the connector that electrically connects the wires to the main control board 1310 can be configured as a single connector composed of four wires without being separated from each other, In the manufacturing process, the worker of the line has two wirings from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 and two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402. In addition to this, it is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes such as incorrect wiring (wiring errors such as incorrect insertion), and in the game hall, clerks such as game hall clerks make sure that there is no fraud. In the case where the wiring is temporarily removed and replaced by maintenance, two wirings from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 It is possible to reliably prevent an operation error of erroneous wiring between the two wirings (wiring error of incorrect insertion).

  Further, by adopting this aspect, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, and the lower substrate holder 1200 is provided. However, similarly to the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor main side 2402a and the second starting port sensor subside 2402b are arranged at least separated by the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. It may be composed of two sensors (double sensors). In this case, similarly to the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402 including two sensors (double sensors) of the second starting port sensor main side 2402a and the second starting port sensor subside 2402b. , The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 can be reliably detected. In addition, an illegal ball (a game ball, a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as this, or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as this) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. ) Can be detected and reported in the fraud detection process in the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later. It can contribute to what can be discovered.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is first detected by the second starting port sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second starting port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second starting port sensor subordinate side. After passing through 2402b, it is detected by the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b, and then discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. Also, two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a forming the first starting port sensor 3002 and two wires from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a forming the second starting port sensor 2402. Are combined into one connector, and one connector composed of the four wires is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The detection signal from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected to the main control board 1310), while the second starting port sensor The detection signal from the slave 2402b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, it is indirectly electrically connected). The detection signal from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor sub side 2402b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  As described above, the panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5 in addition to the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. A first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting one starting port sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B passing through a gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a large winning port 2005 provided on the game board 5 The special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and the first reception provided in the game board 5. A first reception sensor 2406 for detecting the game ball B received at the entrance 2006, and a magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 provided on the game board 5 is detected. The two wires from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 are electrically connected via respective connectors and aggregated, and also electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via one connector. ing.

  Further, by adopting this aspect, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b are transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. Are electrically connected to the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b, and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b are combined into four wires. The connector may be configured as one connector, and one connector including the four wires may be electrically connected to the panel relay board 1710. In this case, a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b forming the first starting port sensor 3002 to the panel relay board 1710 and the second starting port sensor 2402 are formed. A connector for electrically connecting the two wirings from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b to the panel relay board 1710 is not a separate entity, but a single connector composed of four wirings. In the manufacturing process, the manufacturer of the line needs two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and two wires from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b in the manufacturing process. It is possible to reliably prevent a work mistake (wiring error such as incorrect insertion) between a book wiring and a wrong wiring. In order to confirm the presence / absence of fraud, when the wiring is temporarily removed for maintenance and returned, the two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b It is possible to reliably prevent an operation error of erroneous wiring between the two wirings (wiring error of incorrect insertion).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 2001. However, the general winning ports 2001 may be separately configured to use a general winning port sensor. it can. In this case, one connector (single connector) may be configured as a connector for electrically connecting each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensor to the panel relay board 1710. For example, when contributing to the progress of the game or a change in the performance due to the ball entering each of the general winning opening 2001, the wiring obtained by combining the two wirings from each of the general winning opening sensors 3001 into one. The connector may be configured as one connector (single connector), and one connector configured of the integrated wiring may be electrically connected to the panel relay board 1710. By doing so, it is possible to have a physical structure in which each of the two wirings from each of the general winning opening sensors 3001 is a single connector composed of wirings that are integrated into one without being separated. In the manufacturing process, the line operator can surely prevent a work error (wiring error such as incorrect insertion) due to incorrect wiring of each of the two wires from each of the general winning opening sensors 3001 in the manufacturing process. At the same time, in the gaming hall, a clerk such as a clerk of the gaming hall checks the presence or absence of impropriety, and temporarily removes the wiring for maintenance to return to the original state. It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error such as incorrect insertion) due to erroneous wiring of a book. In addition, the combined wiring is configured as one connector (single connector), and one connector configured of the combined wiring is directly connected to the main control board without passing through the panel relay board 1710. A configuration of electrically connecting to 1310 may be employed. Even with such a configuration, as described above, the two wires from each of the general winning opening sensors 3001 do not have to be separate from each other, but are a single connector constituted by a single wire. In the manufacturing process, the line operator can make a mistake in the two wirings from each of the general winning opening sensors 3001 (ie, a wiring error such as a wrong insertion). ) Can be reliably prevented, and in the game hall, staff at the game hall, such as clerks at the game hall, can check the presence or absence of impropriety, and when removing the wiring temporarily for maintenance, It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error such as incorrect insertion) due to erroneous wiring of each of the two wirings from the winning opening sensor 3001.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with various entrances in an advantageous area of a game board, and provided with each sensor (detection means) at each entrance to detect the passage of a game ball ( For example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraphs [0014] to [0016], FIGS. 2 to 4). However, if the wiring from the detecting means passing through the entrance with similar application is erroneously electrically connected, there is no problem in terms of electrical specifications, so damage can be avoided, but the detection signal of the entrance is erroneously received It will affect the progress of the game. However, since the applications are particularly similar, there is a problem that the erroneous connection may not be immediately noticed in some cases.

[12. Decorative boards for door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168. FIG. 164 is a block diagram illustrating electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame. FIG. 165 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit. FIG. FIG. 167 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a decorative substrate including two constant current drive circuits, FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram illustrating an arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuits, and FIG. FIG. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub relay board provided in the door frame 3 will be described, an outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, the decorative board including the LED constant current drive circuit, and the LED constant current A method for arranging the driving circuits will be described.

  First, as described above, the door frame 3 surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, so that the upper left decorative member 271, the upper right decorative member 276, the upper central decorative member 312a, the left side decorative door member 404, The side window decoration part 410b of the window decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are arranged, respectively, and the plate upper left decoration body 271, the plate upper right decoration body 276, and the plate Below the upper center decoration 312a, a lower left dish 281, a lower right decoration 286, and a lower center decoration 312b are arranged, respectively.

  The upper left dish decoration 271 is provided with a left upper decoration board 273 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the upper left dish 271, and is mounted on the upper left decoration board 273 behind the upper left decoration 271. Light-emitting decoration is performed by a full-color LED (six in this embodiment). The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a dish upper right decorative board 278 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the dish upper right decorative body 276 behind the dish upper right decorative board 278. Light-emitting decoration is performed by a full-color LED (five in this embodiment). On the dish center upper decorative body 312a, a dish center upper decorative board 314 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape is arranged along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center upper decorative board is arranged. Light-emission decoration is performed by a plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on the 314.

  The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative body 404 behind the left side upper decorative board 402a and the left side lower decorative board 402b. And a plurality of full-color LEDs (in the present embodiment, left upper decorative board 402a in this embodiment) mounted on left upper decorative board 402a and left lower decorative board 402b. 5 and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has 10). The side window interior decorative portion 410b is provided in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decorative member 412, and a rear side thereof is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the side window interior decorative member 412. The decorative portion decorative board 413 in the window is arranged, and the light emitting decoration is performed by a plurality of full-color LEDs (12 in this embodiment) mounted on the decorative portion decorative substrate 413 in the side window. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419 on the rear side thereof. The upper right side decorative board 418a and the lower right side decorative board 418b are formed. A full-color LED (in the present embodiment, the upper right side decorative substrate 418a is mounted on the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the lower right side decorative substrate 418b). , And the right side lower decorative substrate 418b has 10).

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is provided with a door frame top central decorative board 455 formed in an elongated band shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 at the rear thereof. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the left side portion of the top decorative body 453 is arranged, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. And a door frame top right decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, respectively. Light-emitting decoration by full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 on the door frame top center decorative board 455, 7 on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and 6 on the door frame top right decorative board 457) It is.

  In the lower left dish decoration 281, a lower left dish decoration board 283 formed in an elongated band shape extending left and right along the lower left dish decoration 281 is arranged behind the decoration 281. Light-emitting decoration is performed by a full-color LED (six in this embodiment). The lower right decorative plate 288 is disposed behind the lower right decorative substrate 288 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the lower right decorative body 286. The light-emitting decoration is performed by a plurality of full-color LEDs (six in the present embodiment) mounted on the LCD. The dish center lower decorative body 312b is provided with a dish center lower decorative board 316 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b behind the dish center lower decorative board. Light-emission decoration is performed by a plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on the 316.

  The effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 provided on the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 includes the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 formed in a form in which the ring is divided into front and rear as described above, The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 includes a front decorative substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a front semi-circular shape, and a rear decorative substrate 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having a rear semi-circular shape. , Is composed of. The rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (nine in the present embodiment) mounted on the front decoration board 352a and a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the rear decoration board 352b. In the present embodiment, nine) are illuminated and decorated.

  As described above, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is formed in an elongated strip shape. Thus, by increasing the vertical and horizontal distances of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, and the like can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, or the like can also be provided.

[12-1. Electrical connection between each decorative board and frame door sub relay board]
Plate upper left decorative substrate 273, plate upper right decorative substrate 278, plate center upper decorative substrate 314, left side upper decorative substrate 402a, left side lower decorative substrate 402b, side disposed on various decorative bodies and decorative portions provided in door frame 3 Decorative part decorative board 413 in the window, upper right decorative board 418a, lower right decorative board 418b, door frame top central decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, dish lower left decorative board 283, the lower right decorative plate 288, the lower central decorative substrate 316, the front decorative substrate 352a, the rear decorative substrate 352b, etc., and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. The electrical connection with the provided door frame sub-relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

  The door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is connected to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 146 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The light-emitting data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1, which are the first serial system on the door frame side, and the light-emitting data SDAT2, and the clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are input independently from each other. I have. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power line of the power board 630 shown in FIG. 154 via the interface board 635 to input DC +12 V and to connect the ground ( (GND) line and grounded to ground (GND).

[12-1-1. Door frame side first serial system]
The door frame first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the plate unit relays of the plate unit 200 shown in FIG. The signal is input to the board 214 and is input to the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

  The first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the plate unit relay board 214 are the lower left decorative board 283, the lower right decorative board 288, 70 are input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the lower left plate decorative substrate 283 are input to the upper left plate decorative substrate 273, respectively. That is, the lower left dish plate 283 serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the upper left dish plate 273. The decorative substrate 283 and the upper left decorative substrate 273 are electrically connected in a rosary. The first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the lower left decorative board 283 serving as a bridge board. And an unshown input connector for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the upper left plate 273. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper left decorative plate 283 electrically connected to the lower left decorative substrate 283 (that is, the lower stage decorative substrate 283 is the latter stage and the last stage) is illustrated by the lower left decorative substrate 283. Only the input connector (not shown) to which the first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors not to be input, are provided. .

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the lower right plate decorative substrate 288 are input to the upper right plate decorative plate 278, respectively. That is, the lower right decorative board 288 serves as a bridge board that transmits the first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the upper right decorative board 278 on the door frame side. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the dish upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected in a rosary. The first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the lower right decorative board 288 serving as a bridge board. An input connector (not shown) is provided, and a door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the dish upper right decorative board 278, respectively. No output connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper right decorative plate 278 electrically connected to the lower right decorative substrate 288 (that is, the lower right decorative substrate 288 which is a stage subsequent to the lower right decorative substrate 288) is a lower right decorative substrate. Only the input connector (not shown) to receive the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) which are respectively output from the output connectors 288 (not shown) are provided. ing.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the staging operation unit 300, are provided on the plate center decoration board 314 and the plate. The information is input to the lower center decorative substrate 316 and the front decorative substrate 352a of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, respectively.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the front decorative board 352a are input to the rear decorative board 352b. In other words, the front decorative board 352a serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the rear decorative board 352b. And the rear decoration substrate 352b are electrically connected in a rosary. On the pre-decoration board 352a serving as a bridge board, the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the operation unit relay board 392 of the staging operation unit 300 are respectively provided. An input connector (not shown) for inputting is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the rear decoration board 352b. (Not shown) is provided. On the other hand, an output connector (not shown) of the front decorative board 352a is provided on the rear decorative board 352b which is electrically connected to the front decorative board 352a in a daisy chain (that is, the rear decorative board 352a is a rear stage and a final stage). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), respectively, which are respectively output from the controller, are provided.

  Here, for example, the lower left decorative board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the dish unit relay board 214 will be briefly described. The lower left decorative plate 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat distribution circuit 283c, and six full-color LEDs, sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 283x that can supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting that can set the maximum current of the current flowing to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. And a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x performs control to supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214. As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 283x is a sink (sink) type, it generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 283x can be distributed by part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x by the heat distribution circuit 283c.

  Also, for example, the upper left decorative board 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the lower left dish decorative board 283 are input will be briefly described. The upper left decorative board 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat distribution circuit 273c, and six full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283, and includes a sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 273x that can supply a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6. , And a maximum current setting circuit 273y that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the suLED1 to the suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x controls the supply of a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left decorative board 283. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the suLED1 to the suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x is handled by the heat distribution circuit 273c, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed.

[12-1-2. Door frame side second serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the lower left side decoration of the door frame left side decoration board 402. While being input to the substrate 402b, the decorative portion decorative substrate 413 in the side window, the lower right decorative substrate 418b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. Are entered respectively.

  DC + 12V and ground (GND) input to the lower left side decorative substrate 402b of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are input to the upper left side decorative substrate 402a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are the door frame top right decorative board. 457.

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative board 457 are input to the door frame top center decorative board 455, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is a bridge substrate that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455. Thus, the door frame top right decorative board 457 and the door frame top center decorative board 455 are electrically connected in a daisy chain. The door frame top right decorative board 457 serving as a bridge board includes a door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC + 12V, and ground. (GND) is provided, and an input connector (not shown) is provided. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are connected to the top center of the door frame. An output connector (not shown) for outputting to the decorative board 455 is provided. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is provided after the door frame top right decorative substrate 457). And an input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors, are provided. An output connector (not shown) for outputting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is provided. .

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 are input to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, respectively. ing. In other words, the door frame top center decorative board 455 becomes a bridge board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456. Thus, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are in a state of being electrically connected in a rosary. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 that is electrically connected to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 in a daisy chain (that is, is a stage after the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and the final stage) has a door. Door frame-side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from an output connector (not shown) of the frame top center decorative board 455, are respectively input. Only the connector for the device is provided.

  Here, for example, the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay board 105 are input. The lower left lower decorative substrate 402b will be briefly described. The lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat distribution circuit 402bc, and ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273. And a maximum current setting circuit 402bay that can set the maximum current flowing through the hdLED1 to the hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax supplies a constant current to eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub relay board 105. Perform control.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273. The sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 402bbx, which allows a constant current to flow through the hdLED10 and the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper left side decorative board 402a, and the hdLED9, hdLED10, and left And a maximum current setting circuit 402bby that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through huLED1 to huLED5 of the upper side decorative substrate 402a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, and is used to mount the substrate (left side lower decorative board 402b). Control is performed to supply a constant current to the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5 of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through huLED1 to huLED8. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed by taking part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax by the heat distribution circuit 402bc. Further, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be distributed by the heat distribution circuit 402bc and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative board 402a. ing.

  As described above, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dissipated by only the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted (the lower left side decorative board 402b). On the other hand, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent substrate in addition to the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the substrate on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted (the lower left side decorative substrate 402b). Heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative board 402a.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to pass a constant current to huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left upper decorative board 402a, which is a succeeding substrate, across the board on which it is mounted (the lower left decorative board 402b). Have been. For this reason, an operation for electrically connecting the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a is always involved. The operator who performs this operation may use the finger of the connector of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the connector of the upper left side decorative board 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the lower left side decorative board 402b, or the heat of the upper left side decorative board 402a. In order to touch the distribution circuit 402ac, it is necessary to prevent the lower left decorative board 402b and the upper left decorative board 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat dissipating circuit 402bc of the lower left decorative board 402b and the heat dispersing circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative board 402a have the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, It also has a function that can prevent electronic components from being damaged.

  As described above, the upper left decorative board 402a receives the DC + 12V and the ground (GND) from the lower left decorative board 402b, and also has five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. Lines through which current flows are input. As described above, the upper left side decorative substrate 402a includes the heat dispersing circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat distribution circuit 402ac has a function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx and a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

[12-1-3. Light emission data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for specifying a light emission mode, and include ID information and floor information. Key information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current driving circuits provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation is designated from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127.

[12-2. Overview of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit. Therefore, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided on the lower left dish decorative board 283 will be described here. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets a sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 283x that can supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6, and sets the maximum current of the current flowing to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. And a maximum current setting circuit 283y.

[12-2-1. Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels, and can output a current for each channel. In this embodiment, an output channel LR is provided for an LED element emitting red (R), an LED element emitting green (G), and an LED element emitting blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. , LG, and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. Is available.

  The constant current driving circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit 283xi. It is mainly composed.

[12-2-1a. Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit capable of receiving an input of + 12V DC from a + 12V power supply line and generating and supplying an internal power supply Vreg (in this embodiment, + 5V DC) used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. The internal power supply Vreg generated by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit. 283xi, and a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit 283xi. Is supposed to work.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 154, and independently generates + DC 5V as the internal power supply Vreg and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. I have. This is because if a + 5V power line from the power supply board 630 is used, this + 5V power line is used by routing electric wiring, so that the length of the + 5V power line that supplies DC + 5V becomes longer and noise is reduced. Easy to invade. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the + 5V power supply line and DC + 5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, there is a possibility that the LED may flicker under the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the + 12V power supply line has a very high noise resistance compared to the + 5V power supply line. In the linear power supply 283xa, a configuration in which DC + 5V is independently created as the internal power supply Vreg is adopted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using the internal power supply Vreg only in the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate. Since it can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. This stabilizes the internal power supply Vreg, thereby contributing to preventing flickering of the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 due to external noise. Therefore, it is possible to increase the resistance to external noise. In addition, the input electric wiring and the external transmission electric wiring for the + 5V power supply line are not required, which can contribute to downsizing of the connector.

[12-2-1b. Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb generates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs the signal to the constant current driving circuit 283x, initializes the constant current driving circuit 283x, and operates the constant current driving circuit 283x. It is a so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi start operating.

  For example, the constant current drive circuit 283x does not receive the reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 146, and independently generates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. I have. For example, when a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter, referred to as a “reset signal transmission line”) is used, the reset signal transmission line may be used by routing electric wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal becomes longer, so that noise easily enters. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current driving circuit 283x, the constant current driving circuit 283x is reset by the influence of the external noise and the LED may be turned off. Thus, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the reset signal transmission line is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, and the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently generates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST. did.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external substrate, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current driving circuit 283x to another substrate, and only in the constant current driving circuit 283x. By using this, external noise can be made difficult to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, so that the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. Thus, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, This can contribute to prevention of unexpected turning off and flickering of the LED elements constituting the full-color LED corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it is possible to increase the resistance to external noise. In addition, the need for the input electric wiring and the external transmission electric wiring for the reset signal transmission line is eliminated, which can contribute to downsizing of the connector.

[12-2-1c. buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc transmits a serial data (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) from outside the constant current drive circuit 283x (hereinafter, referred to as a “data line”). Is a circuit capable of shaping the waveform of a signal to which serial data is input and transmitting the serial data and outputting the waveform to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd transmits a clock signal (here, a clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from outside the constant current drive circuit 283x (hereinafter, referred to as a "clock line"). Is a circuit capable of receiving a clock signal, shaping the waveform of the clock signal, and outputting the waveform to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x.

  As described above, the data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards. For this reason, the lengths of both the data line and the clock line are increased, so that noise easily enters. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or the clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x is provided. In such a manner that the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd shape the waveforms so that the signal is not transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent substrate.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when both the data line and the clock line are long, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line that are resistant to noise. As a result, signal transmission resistant to noise can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to increase the resistance to external noise.

[12-2-1d. Address setting section]
The address setting unit 283xe sets 64 addresses as IDs (IDs that can identify an individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa by using three ID resistors (not shown). You can do it.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID that can identify the individual of the constant current drive circuit 283x is preset by the address setting unit 283xe by a hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not set appropriately by receiving data by software.

[12-2-1e. Oscillator, logic processing unit]
The logic processing unit 283xg outputs serial data from the outside of the constant current driving circuit 283x (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd. A shaped clock signal (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) based on the address which is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. In some cases, the gradation information is fetched from the serial data, and the gradation of the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on a signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so that the fetched gradation information is obtained. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in the serial data is not taken in and set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current content.

[12-2-1f. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation) of the LED in each output channel from the unlit state to the lit state (maximum luminance) in a total of 128 levels from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127. That is, gradation is controlled by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown) for one output channel. That is, the PWM unit 283xh individually includes the PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the gradation is set, each of the PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 controls the constant current driving unit 283xi so that a current having the set gradation is passed.

[12-2-1 g. Constant current driver]
The constant current drive unit 283xi has one constant (not shown) for one output channel so that the gradation is set to the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 included in the above-described PWM unit 283xh. The current driver allows a constant current to flow through the LED elements constituting the full-color LED. That is, the constant current driver 283xi includes the constant current drivers 1 to 24 individually (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation controllers 1 to the PWM gradation controller 24.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 include one end of a resistor Rr for setting a maximum current flowing through a red (R) light emitting LED element constituting a full color LED in eight output channels LR1 to LR8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 include one end of a resistor Rg for setting a maximum current flowing through a green (G) light-emitting LED element forming a full-color LED in eight output channels LG1 to LG8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 include one end of a resistor Rb for setting a maximum current flowing through a blue (B) light emitting LED element forming a full color LED in eight output channels LB1 to LB8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to ground (GND).

  The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element which constitute full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line, and receives a direct current of + 12V.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat spreading resistors. 1 to a constant current driver 8) so that a constant current flowing through a red (R) LED element constituting a full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8, respectively. Has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 9 to the constant current driver 16), so that the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current drivers 9 to 16 respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 17 to the constant current driver 24), so that a constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. ing.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively draw constant currents flowing through the individually set red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LED, thereby forming the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LED Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 respectively draw a constant current flowing through the individually set green (G) LED elements forming the full-color LED, and thereby the green (G) LED elements forming the full-color LED Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 respectively absorb the constant current flowing through the individually set full-color LED blue (B) LED elements, thereby forming the full-color LED blue (B) LED elements. Can emit light.

  As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting 24 LED elements, that is, eight full-color LEDs with a individually set constant current. Thus, it is possible to perform turning off, lighting with one gradation, blinking with one gradation, and the like.

[12-2-2. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes the above-described resistor Rr for setting the maximum current flowing through the red (R) LED element constituting the full-color LED in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8, and the output channels LG1 to LR8. A resistor Rg for setting the maximum current flowing through the green (G) light emitting LED element constituting the full-color LED in eight output channels up to LG8, and a full-color LED in eight output channels LB1 to LB8. And a resistor Rb for setting the maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits blue (B) light.

  As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 provided in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). I have. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 included in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). I have. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 included in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND). I have.

[12-3. Decorative board with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a decorative substrate including an LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. Here, a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. The above-described LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is configured as the same circuit. For this reason, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals in FIGS. 165 and 166 for convenience of description.

[12-3-1. Decorative board with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. A distribution circuit 283c is provided.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 as described above. Light emission data SDAT1, which is the first serial system on the door frame side, and a clock signal SCLK1 are input. As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 to receive DC +12 V, and to ground the power supply board 630. (GND) line and grounded to ground (GND).

  As described above, the dish lower left decorative board 283 has the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) of the dish unit 200 from the door frame sub-relay board 105. It is input via the plate unit relay board 214. The DC +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, and constitutes sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, an anode terminal of a red (R) LED element, an anode terminal of a green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. Drivers 1 to 6) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6, respectively. Driver 9 to constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current driving circuit 283a (the above-described constant current, The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 283a starts the light emission data SDAT1. The gradation information is fetched, and the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled and lighted so that the fetched gradation information is obtained.

  As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is of a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is covered by the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6 that constitute the heat dispersion circuit 283c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x).

  Note that the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is decorated on the upper left of the plate via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x). The DC +12 V and the ground (GND) are input to the board upper left decorative board 273 via the dish lower left decorative board 283 while being input to the board 273. This prevents the noise that has invaded the data line or the clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x) from being transmitted to the subsequent upper left dish plate 273 serving as the subsequent substrate. The waveform can be shaped in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd provided in the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x).

  The DC +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and constitutes suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, an anode terminal of a red (R) LED element, an anode terminal of a green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, respectively. Drivers 1 to 6) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistors suRg1 to suRg6, respectively. Driver 9 to constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistors suRb1 to suRb6, respectively. The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a starts from this light emission data SDAT1. The gradation information is fetched, and the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are individually controlled and lighted so that the fetched gradation information is obtained.

  As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the suLED1 to the suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is covered by the heat dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 273c. This makes it possible to disperse heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (accurately, the constant current drive circuit 273x).

  In addition, as a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, in addition to the lower left decorative board 283 and the upper left decorative board 273, a lower right decorative board 288, an upper right decorative board 278, and a top left decorative board 456 are provided. , And a door frame top right decorative board 457.

[12-3-2. Decorative board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative board provided with two LED constant current driving circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. To hdLED10 and a heat distribution circuit 402bc.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 as described above. Light emission data SDAT2 and a clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are input. As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 to receive DC +12 V, and to ground the power supply board 630. (GND) line and grounded to ground (GND).

  As described above, the left side lower decorative board 402b receives the input of the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay board 105. I have. The DC + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and constitutes the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element and the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element. , And blue (B) LED elements.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. It can be controlled. For this reason, among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the light emission mode is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba for the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, and the remaining two LEDs are controlled. The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb controls the light emission mode for the hdLED9 and hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs. Further, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the upper left side decorative substrate 402a, which is a succeeding substrate across the substrate on which it is mounted (that is, the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b). The light emission mode of huLED1 to huLED5 is controlled.

  Of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to sdLED8 are the same as the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, respectively. The heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (the above-described constant current drivers 1 to 8) of the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (the above-described constant current drivers 9 to 16) via the heat dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. And electricity , And the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are output channels LB1 to LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. It is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 described above.

  Among ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10 are different from the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10, respectively. The heat-dissipation resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the constant current driver 1 and the constant current driver 2 described above). The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the above-described constant current driver 9 and constant current driver 1) via heat dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. ), And the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that constitute the full color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are output channels of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. LB1 and LB2 (the constant current driver 17 and the constant current driver 18 described above) are electrically connected.

  Also, for the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the red color configuring the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 ( The cathode terminal of the LED element R) is connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to huRr5b on the upper left side decorative substrate 402a and the heat dispersion resistances huRr1a to huRr5a on the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (the constant current drivers 3 to 7 described above) and constitute the huLED1 to huLED5 that are full-color LEDs are respectively Decoration on left side The output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the above-described constant current drivers 11 to LG7) via the heat dispersion resistances huRg1b to huRg5b in the plate 402a and the heat dispersion resistances huRg1a to huRg5a in the lower left decorative board 402b. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the driver 15) and that constitute huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, are heat dissipating resistances huRb1b to huRb5b and left, respectively, on the upper left side decorative substrate 402a. Electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (the above-described constant current drivers 19 to 23) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors huRb1a to huRb5a in the lower side decorative substrate 402b. To have. The output channels LR8, LG8, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba starts the light emission data SDAT2. Gradation information is fetched, and dimming lighting is performed by individually controlling eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 so that the acquired gradation information is obtained. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emission data) input via the data line buffer 402baxc and the clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402ba constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2), the gradation information is fetched from the light emission data SDAT2, and the gradation information is set so as to be the fetched gradation information. Of the two full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are individually controlled and turned on, and the left side, which is a substrate subsequent to the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, is used. Upper decorative substrate 40 Is the five independent control huLED1~huLED5 a full-color LED of and turned dimming implemented in a.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is of a sink (sink) type, it generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through eight hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. I do. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is covered by the heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, and hdRb1 to hdRb8, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc. As a result, heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) can be dispersed.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is of a sink (sink) type, the constant current flowing through two hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is absorbed by the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb. Heat is generated by sucking a constant current flowing through five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper left side decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the lower side decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is transferred to two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Five heat dispersion resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 402bc, and are mounted on the upper left side decorative substrate 402a which is a substrate subsequent to the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b For the huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, the heat dispersion resistors huRr1a to huRg5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc in the lower left decorative board 402b, and the upper left side The heat dissipating resistors huRr1b to huRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, and huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat dissipating circuit 402ac in the decorative substrate 402a, serve as the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current driving circuit 402bbx). The heat can be dissipated.

  Further, as described above, the heat dissipating circuit 402bc of the lower left decorative board 402b and the heat dispersing circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative board 402a are, as described above, an LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, a constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the device, the device also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  Note that, in addition to the left side lower decorative board 402b, a dish center upper decorative board 314, a dish center lower decorative board 316, a side window decorative section decorative board 413, and a right side There is a lower decorative substrate 418b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

  In addition, as a decorative substrate having no LED constant current drive circuit, there is a right upper decorative substrate 418a in addition to the left upper decorative substrate 402a.

[12-4. Arrangement Method of LED Constant Current Drive Circuit]
Next, an arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit as described above. Here, a description will be given as an electronic component in which the constant current driving circuit constituting the LED constant current driving circuit is integrated on one semiconductor chip. As a type of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit, a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). ), So-called VQFN. Of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuit, one end side is the input side, and the remaining three end sides are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. In FIG. 168, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for the sake of clarity.

  As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in this embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and has one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. There is. Since the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuits on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is substantially the same, here, the left side formed in a vertically elongated strip-shaped plate having two LED constant current drive circuits is provided. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape will be described.

[12-4-1. Decorative board under the left side]
As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba, 402bb, ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb are Are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A connector LDUCN for connecting the upper left decorative board 402a and the electric wiring is mounted on the upper side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b, and the LED is not mounted on the lower left lower decorative board 402b. On the lower end side of the surface 402by, a connector LDLCN for connecting the electric wiring to the door frame sub relay board 105 is mounted.

  A white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In the present embodiment, the reflectivity of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) is generated by the solid color white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Can be enhanced.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the area indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the board management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

  This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b due to the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is reduced by the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged. Is preventing that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the left side lower decorative board 402b on the LED mounting surface 402bx from being lowered due to the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

  The door frame left side decorative body 404 shown in FIG. 91 provided on the door frame 3 is formed in a translucent milky white as described above, but is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. When the player moves the head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face), and the player visually recognizes the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b provided in the door frame left side decorative body 404. Even if it is possible to do so, in the first place, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged. Since the area indicating the position is not printed at all as silk printing, a full-color LE that has no relation to the game for the player at all Corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED are prevented from being viewed by the player and. Therefore, a number specifying the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10) and an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, a full color LED) An area indicating a position where a certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 is arranged) can be made difficult for a player to see.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, a component number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and an area indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN that has no relation to the game and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a housing that is white (also referred to as a natural color, white). Color) that is recognized as the same color as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, the board management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is printed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b by a foil-cut character (that is, a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed). The character is formed as a pattern, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form a blank character). The white character is solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, and the foil-cut character is formed. Covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the board management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is obtained by replacing the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b with the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b by using a foil-cut character (that is, a wiring pattern). May be formed on a layer (copper plane) in which a character is formed by a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil may be removed to form a character. On the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, a character with a foil-cut character (that is, a character is formed by a wiring pattern of copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed). (A blank character formed by removing a copper foil). The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a solid ground, as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is determined by using a foil-cut character (that is, forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) and removing the surrounding copper foil. Instead of a solid character formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx and a solid earth on the LED non-mounting surface 402by, the character is formed as a character with a character cut out on one or both surfaces. May be.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, various dispersions Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed near these areas by silk printing. Each is printed in yellow (or black). Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 168 (a)) as a silk print, and the lower left lower decorative substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 168 (a)) which is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax near and above the area LSLKa is silk-screened. Is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line). A region indicating a position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is printed in yellow by solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 168 (a)). Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are located near and to the right of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 168 (a)) corresponding to and are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. I have.

  On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, a region corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, is a yellow dashed line as silk print. (Or black dashed lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (in FIG. 168 (a), only the full-color LEDs hdLED4, hdLED5 and the corresponding dashed lines LSLK4, LSLK5 are respectively shown), and these areas are also printed. In the vicinity of LSLK1 to LSLK10 and above or below, part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs (FIG. 168 (a) shows LED4 and LED4 which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full-color LEDs Only expressed respectively.) Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

  Note that, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is arranged is shown by a yellow chain line (not shown) as silk printing. (Or a black dashed line), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of a resin having any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectivity due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, (One LED element emitting red (R), an LED element emitting green (G), and an LED element emitting blue (B) constitute one full-color LED.) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is not shown as silk print near the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  In the embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and a connector that does not have a white color, whose reflectance is reduced on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, and an LED that emits the full-color LED Since the reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, the LED was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all. However, of the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED, the area corresponding to the member disposed in front is the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance in the above, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating a position where the electronic component or the connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a yellow chain line (or black chain line) (not shown), and an electronic device is provided near this region. The part number corresponding to the part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a so-called solid earth that grounds a region other than a land pattern and a wiring pattern of electronic components and connectors to the ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). I have.

  As described above, since the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically, as seen from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, The width from the left end 402beg1 to the right end 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width from the left end to the right end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx. For this reason, when the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is extremely short, the wiring pattern will be drawn from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, since the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are limited by the minimum distance, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end side. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The configuration was adopted.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the lower right end of the four ends of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx is input. By arranging it near the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative board 402b so as to be a terminal on the left side, the input side terminal is connected to the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. ), +12 V DC, ground (GND), and the resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby are input, and the lower left side, the upper left side, and the upper right side are mainly the terminals of the output side 1 to the output side, respectively. 166. Terminals of the output side 1 to terminals of the output side 3 are output channels LR1 to LR8 and LG1 shown in FIG. LG8, LB1~LB8, and door frame side second serial line (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) to output the like. Note that the terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, 402bby is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which ground (GND) is input. I have.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being arranged in a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the minimum distance dimension from the respective lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are limited. Also, all the wiring patterns can be drawn out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, a group 1 including four full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED4 among eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current driving circuit 402bax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of the hdLED5 and the hdLED8, when the wiring pattern from the constant current driving circuit 402bax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed, the length thereof is increased. Can be formed uniformly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring patterns to the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened to one of the group 1 and the group 2. Efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in a work can be improved.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is connected to the vertical center portion of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b (the hdLED6 which is a full-color LED in FIG. 167 (a), and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be arranged at the center in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (FIG. 167 (a)). (The portion where the hdLED 6 which is a full-color LED is disposed) is closer to the upper side, and can be disposed above the hdLED 8 which is a full-color LED configured in the group 2 whose emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax. . Thus, a region for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 can be secured on the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx The area for routing the wiring pattern to the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 and the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 provided on the five upper left-side decorative substrates 402a shown in FIG. 402b.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay, 402bby, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are a surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are in a so-called EIA format 0805 (2012 by name, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length: 2.0 mm). : 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are compared with the sizes of the constant current driving circuits 402bax, 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb have one ends in the longitudinal direction on the left side of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The capacitor (not shown) is disposed so as to be parallel to 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2, and has one end in the longitudinal direction perpendicular to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each edge of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx arranged such that the edge of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively, so as to be non-parallel.

  In addition, as described above, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is such that the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is set at 45 degrees with respect to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative board. The door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, which are arranged in a state of being tilted, are almost the same. Unlike the other decorative substrates of the frame 3, when the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged in the door frame top decorative body 453, Since the width from the upper edge to the lower edge is large, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is divided into the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top. It is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper side and lower side of the right decorative substrate 457. That is, in the present embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is non-parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate. And are mixed. In the present embodiment, the door frame top center decorative board 455 includes, in addition to the eleven full color LEDs provided therein, another center decorated board on which five not shown full color LEDs are mounted. Two LED constant current drive circuits (a first LED constant current drive circuit (a first constant current drive circuit, a first maximum current setting circuit), a second LED constant current drive circuit (a second constant current drive circuit, Illustrated by one LED constant current driving circuit (here, a second LED constant current driving circuit (second constant current driving circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)). Not provided with two heat-distribution circuits (a first constant-current drive circuit is a first heat-distribution circuit (heat-distribution resistor), and a second constant-current drive circuit is a second heat-distribution circuit (heat dispersion resistance)) Light emission control directly through the door frame top The left decorative board 456 includes, in addition to the seven full-color LEDs provided therein, another left decorative board on which one full-color LED (not shown) is mounted, and one LED constant current drive circuit (constant) provided therein. The light emission is directly controlled by a current driver circuit and a maximum current setting circuit via one heat dispersing circuit (heat dispersing resistor) included in the self-illustrating device (not shown), and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 includes six full-color LEDs included in itself. In addition, another right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted is connected to oneself (not shown) by one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided for itself. Light emission is controlled directly via one provided heat distribution circuit (heat dispersion resistance). The other central decorative substrate is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative substrate is formed on the left side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other right decorative substrate is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. It is necessary to provide a heat spreading circuit (heat spreading resistor) on each of the other central decorative boards, other left decorative boards, and other right decorative boards. As described above, the heat dispersing circuit (here, the second heat dispersing circuit (heat dissipating resistance)) provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455 itself and the heat dispersing circuits of the other central decorative boards are different from each other. In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (more precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the center decorative substrate 455 itself, it also prevents damage to electronic components due to static electricity. It also has the ability to do so. Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided on the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself and the heat distribution circuit provided on the other left decorative board itself are the LED constant current drive circuit (accurately provided on the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself). Has a function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current drive circuit) and a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity. In addition, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided on the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself and the heat distribution circuit provided on the other right decorative board are the LED constant current drive circuit (accurately provided on the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself). Has a function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current drive circuit) and a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  In addition, the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and ten full-color LEDs are arranged. When viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are closer to the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b and along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are located closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative board 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b. L of lower left side decorative substrate 402b Adopting a configuration of placing the D non-mounting surface 402By. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are of a sink (sink) type, and generate heat by sucking a constant current flowing through each LED element. For this reason, also in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx from the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, Heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less likely to be affected by the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

  In addition, by arranging the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx at a 45-degree angle with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit is provided. One in which the ends of the land patterns 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end and the right end of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top center decorative board 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative) In comparison with the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the decorative substrate in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative substrate is used. Can be further reduced in width from the left end side to the right end side. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to increasing the distance dimension of the game board 5 in the left-right direction.

[12-4-2. Decorative board on plate center]
As shown in FIG. 167 (b), the dish center decoration board 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, ten full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the like. While hLED1 to hLED10, which are ten full-color LEDs, are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, which is the upward side of the rendering operation unit 300, the LED constant current drive circuit 314a , 314b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, which is on the upper side of the effect operation unit 300. When the decorative plate 314 above the dish center shown in FIG. 167 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the decorative substrate 314 above the dish center is actually arranged so as to be along the decorative body 312a above the dish center). On the right side along the upper edge 314eg1 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, a connector HCN for connecting the operation unit relay board 392 and the electric wiring is mounted.

  The white resist is solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314. In this embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is solid-coated with a white resist, so that hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, emit light forward (i.e., toward the upward side of the rendering operation unit 300). Can be increased in reflectance.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and an area indicating a position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, are completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

  This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 due to the emission of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 is reduced by the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged. Is preventing that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish from being reduced due to the light emission of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

  Further, as described above, the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 provided on the door frame 3 is formed in a translucent milky white as described above, but is located in front of the pachinko machine 1. When the player sitting on the head moves his / her head (face), his / her line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). Even when the mounting surface 314x can be visually recognized by the player, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 initially has a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a full-color LED. Is not printed as silk printing at all, and the area indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10 are placed is completely related to the game for the player. It has not full LED with the corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED is prevented from being viewed by the player. Therefore, a number (that is, a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full color LED) that specifies hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full color LED and an auxiliary line that indicates a mounting position of hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full color LED (that is, a full color LED) (A region indicating a position where certain hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged) can be made difficult for a player to visually recognize.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, the part number corresponding to the connector HCN and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector HCN that has no relation to the game for the player and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color; Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the present embodiment, electronic components (not shown) such as resistors and capacitors not shown in white and connectors not having white are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Also, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is a foiled character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. It is formed as a blank character formed by forming a character with a pattern and removing the surrounding copper foil), and the foil-cut character is formed by a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is obtained by replacing the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 with the LED non-mounting face 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 with foil-cut characters (that is, the wiring pattern). May be formed in a layer (copper plane) in which a character is formed by a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil may be removed to form a character. On the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314 on the center of the plate, a character with a foil pattern (that is, a character is formed by a wiring pattern of copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). (A blank character formed by removing a copper foil). The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a solid ground, as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is determined by using a foil-cut character (that is, a character is formed by a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) and the surrounding copper foil is removed. Instead of a solid character formed on the LED mounting surface 314x and a solid earth on the LED non-mounting surface 314y. May be.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersions are provided. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors are arranged are printed by silk printing (not shown) by a solid yellow line (or black solid line), and a part number corresponding to the electronic component is printed near these areas by silk printing. The prints are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown).

  On the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a region corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, is not shown as silk-printed yellow. (Or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively, and a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which is a full-color LED near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 is yellow (or not shown) as silk printing. , Black).

  Note that, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a region indicating a position where the connector HCN to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is arranged is shown by a yellow chain line (not shown) as silk printing. (Or a black dashed line), and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing near this area.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current driving circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the emission of full-color LEDs is reduced.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, (One LED element emitting red (R), an LED element emitting green (G), and an LED element emitting blue (B) constitute one full-color LED.) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is not shown as silk print near the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the content of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a so-called solid earth that grounds an area excluding a land pattern and a wiring pattern of electronic components and connectors to ground (GND). The solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center decoration board 314 and the solid earth formed on the LED non-mounting face 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). I have.

  In this embodiment, the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED is reduced. Electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, emit light by the full-color LED. Since the reflectivity on the LED mounting surface was reduced, the LED mounting surface was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectivity of the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating a position where the electronic component or the connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a yellow chain line (or black chain line) (not shown), and an electronic device is provided near this region. The part number corresponding to the part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  As described above, the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape, and thus the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 shown in FIG. When viewed (that is, the state in which the decorative plate 314 on the center of the dish is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish), the upper edge 314eg1 to the lower edge 314eg2 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the center of the dish. Is only about 1.78 times the width from the left edge to the right edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. For this reason, if the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the land of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 becomes extremely short, let's draw the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, since the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are limited by the minimum distance, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end side. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The configuration was adopted.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration board 314 on the center of the plate, the lower left end of the four ends of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is input. By arranging it near the upper end side 314eg1 of the upper plate 314 on the center of the plate so as to be the terminal on the side, the input side terminal is connected to the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. ), DC +12 V, ground (GND), and the resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left end, the upper right end, and the lower right end are mainly terminals of the output side 1 to the output side, respectively. 3, the output side 1 to the output side 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and The door frame side first serial line (emission data SDAT1, clock signals SCLK1) to output the like. Note that the terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, 314by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which ground (GND) is input. I have.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish center upper decorative board 314. In addition to being arranged in a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the lower end side 314eg2 of the decoration substrate 314 above the center of the dish. As a result, from the respective lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the minimum distance dimension are restricted to the interval between adjacent wiring patterns. Also, all the wiring patterns can be drawn out. Therefore, it is possible to secure an area where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular shape.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, a group 1 including four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 among eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current driving circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 including the hLED5 and the hLED8, when the wiring pattern from the constant current driving circuit 314ax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed, the length thereof is increased. Can be formed uniformly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring patterns to the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened to one of the group 1 and the group 2. Efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in a work can be improved.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, when the decoration board 314 above the plate center shown in FIG. 167 (b) is rotated to the left by 90 degrees (that is, the decoration board 314 above the plate center is In a state where the LED is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a), the constant current drive circuit 314ax is connected to the semi-circular center portion of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (FIG. 167 (b), the constant current drive circuit 314bx can be arranged on the semi-circular center portion (FIG. 167 (b)) of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314. ), Which is closer to the left side than the portion where the hdLED 6 which is a full-color LED is disposed, and whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314ax. It can be arranged on the left of hLED8 a full-color LED configured to 2. Thus, a region for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 can be secured on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and the constant current drive circuit 314bx An area for routing wiring patterns to the two full-color LEDs hLED9 and hLED10 can be secured on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are a surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are in a so-called EIA format 0805 (2012 by name, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length: 2.0 mm). : 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are compared with the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb have one ends in the longitudinal direction at the upper end of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The capacitor (not shown) is disposed so as to be parallel to 314eg1 and the lower side 314eg2, and one end in the longitudinal direction is perpendicular to the upper side 314eg1 and the lower side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each end of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged such that the edge of the land pattern is inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end of the capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 such that they are non-parallel.

  In addition, the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end 314eg1 and the lower end 314eg2 of the upper plate 314, and ten full-color LEDs are provided. When viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, hLED1 to hLED10 are closer to the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative board 314 and formed in a semicircular shape of the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. In contrast, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are located closer to the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish center upper decorative board 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. In this case, a configuration is adopted in which the decorative plate 314 is placed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are of the sink (sink) type, as described above, as in the case of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Fever. For this reason, even in the upper center decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are separated from the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 by separating them. Heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be made less likely to be affected by the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

  In addition, the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged such that the edges of the land patterns are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the upper plate 314. One in which the ends of the land patterns 314ax and 314bx are arranged to be parallel to the left end and the right end of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top center decorative board 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative) Compared with the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the decorative substrate in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative substrate is used. Can be further reduced in width from the left end side to the right end side. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the effect operation unit 300, so that the large effect operation unit 300 can be provided on the door frame 3 and the effect operation unit can be provided. A light emission effect by 300 can be performed.

[12-4-3. Generic pad on the bottom of IC package of constant current drive circuit]
As described above, the IC packages of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the lower left decorative board 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are flat as described above. It is a surface mounting type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the lower left decorative board 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

  A metal pad FP is exposed at the center of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called Exposed Pad (hereinafter referred to as "EPad") is formed. This IC package can be improved in heat dissipation and bonding by being soldered to a substrate.

  In the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, a land pattern EP for EPad having a square shape is provided in addition to each lead pad. The land pattern EP for EPad is electrically connected to the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b. In the area of the EPad land pattern EP, nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a formation lattice. These thermal vias TV electrically connect the land pattern EP for EPad and the solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. For this reason, it is impossible to draw out the wiring pattern from each lead pad into the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through each LED element. In other words, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transmitted from the EPad via the EPad land pattern EP to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. By diffusing, it is possible to dissipate heat in the entire left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  The relationship between the land pattern EP for EPad and the nine thermal vias TV will be briefly described. The junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit is soldered to the land pattern EP for EPad has a constant current. The number and diameter of the thermal vias TV are selected so as to be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit. Thus, the bonding area where the constant current drive circuit EPad (metal pad FP) and the land pattern EP for EPad are soldered is not too large to prevent the occurrence of voids, and the bonding area is not too small and stable. It is possible to obtain an improved bonding strength. The land pattern EP for EPad may be divided into a lattice shape. In this case, too, in order to prevent the generation of voids and obtain a stable bonding strength, as described above, the constant current driving circuit (The metal pad FP) must be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

  Further, in contrast to the case where the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx When the edge of the land pattern is arranged at a 45 degree angle with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the heat dissipation effect of the constant current drive circuit 402bax against heat generation is high. Become. When the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP is similarly set to the left side. In the case where the side edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged in parallel with the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower side decorative substrate 402b so as to be inclined by 45 degrees. , EPad land patterns EP are also arranged in a state inclined at 45 degrees. When the edge of the EPad land pattern EP is arranged in parallel with the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged. The distance dimension between the left end side 402beg1 or the right end side 402beg2 and the distance dimension to the substrate end side are reduced, in other words, the room for heat radiation on the substrate is reduced. . On the other hand, the left side edge 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative board 402b when the edge side of the EPad land pattern EP is arranged at 45 degrees with respect to the left side edge 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Alternatively, the distance dimension between the right end side 402beg2 and the distance between the vertex of the EPad land pattern EP and the substrate side is a shorter portion, but the two sides in contact with the vertex are not parallel to the substrate side. Since the room for heat dissipation on the substrate is large, it can be said that the heat dissipation effect is higher than when the edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the edge of the substrate are parallel.

  As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and has one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In the present embodiment, as an example, as described above, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b provided with two LED constant current driving circuits and formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically, and a semicircle The upper plate center decorative plate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape will be described, and a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged will be described. A part number corresponding to a full-color LED that can prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from decreasing and has no relation to the game for the player at all. And a region indicating where to place a full-color LED has been described in detail that it is taken measures such reflectance decrease that can be prevented from being viewed by the player. Here, FIG. 169 to FIG. 169 to FIGS. 169 to 169 show other configurations of the present invention in which countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance are taken (hereinafter referred to as “configurations for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second to fourth embodiments”). This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 shows a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. FIG. 170 shows a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment. FIG. FIG. 172 is an enlarged view of the D ″ part of FIG. 170 as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface. FIG. 172 shows a configuration for measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 173 shows a D ′ ″ of FIG. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of a part from a non-LED mounting surface. 169 to 173 have the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 167 and 168 (hereinafter, described as a configuration of a measure against a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment). Are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, FIG. 171 omits various electronic components and omits some silk printing for clarity of the drawing. Further, in FIG. 173, various electronic components are omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

[Comparison of configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to the first embodiment with configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to second embodiment]
In the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a full-color LED. The area indicating the positions where the hdLEDs 1 to hdLED 10 that are LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b has the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk-screened near these areas. The prints are printed in yellow (or black), respectively. As described above, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, is silk-screened on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) as printing, the part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas, respectively. Have been.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 has the component numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. And the area indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. And, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center decoration board 314. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) by solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), respectively, and near these areas, component numbers corresponding to the electronic components. Are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. As described above, the area corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, is formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 as described above. The printed parts are printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are silk printed near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has a hdLED1 which is a full-color LED. , The part numbers corresponding to the hdLED10, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed as silk-screen printing, respectively. Specifically, regions indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b with silk solid printing with solid yellow lines LSLK1 to LSLK10, respectively. In the vicinity of the areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, the LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, are yellow on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b as silk print. Each is printed.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (not shown), and a region corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided near this region. Are printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a housing that is white (also referred to as a natural color, white). Color) that is recognized as the same color as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is displayed in yellow near the plurality of check pins as silk print. It is printed in. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 171, the constant current driving circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba and the resistances Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are provided. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistances are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and component numbers corresponding to the electronic components near these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, an area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 171 (a)) as a silk print, and a lower left lower decorative substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 171 (a)) which is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and which is the part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax near and above the area LSLKa is silk-screened. Is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line). The area indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is printed as a silk solid line by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 171 (a)). Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are located near and to the right of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd. , R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 171 (a)) corresponding to and are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in yellow (or black) as silk printing, respectively. I have.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of a resin having any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectivity due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  In the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are solid-coated with white resist. This increases the reflectance of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by emitting white solid resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. You can do it.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. Corresponding part numbers and areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk prints on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 with yellow solid lines HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, in the vicinity of the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 and are printed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 in yellow as silk printing, respectively. Have been.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314 on the center of the plate, a region indicating a position where the connector HCN is arranged is printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (not shown), and a region corresponding to the connector HCN is provided near this region. Are printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color; Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the plate center. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, lighting inspection is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is displayed in yellow near the plurality of check pins as silk print. It is printed in. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the content of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, and the like. Areas indicating the positions where the electronic components are to be arranged are printed as silk printing by solid yellow lines (or black solid lines) (not shown), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are shown as silk printing near these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black).

  In the second embodiment, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current driving circuit 314ax ( 314bx) has a package made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the emission of full-color LEDs is reduced.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration substrate 314 above the plate center are solid-coated with a white resist. Accordingly, the solid color white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 reflects light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs, and the full-color LED. And the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314 above the plate center is a component corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. While the numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment has the left side. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b is -The part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are LEDs, and the area (yellow solid line) indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, are printed as silk printing, respectively. In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, the part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs, and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are provided. An area (a solid yellow line) indicating the position where the image is arranged is different in that the area is printed as silk printing.

  With the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, it is possible to increase the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). It has become. In addition, a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is used to reflect the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the staging operation unit 300). Can be enhanced. For this reason, when the area | region which shows the part number corresponding to a full-color LED, and the position where a full-color LED is arrange | positioned is black-printed as silk printing, the black-printed silk-printing makes the LED by light emission of a full-color LED. The reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, and there is a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face), although it is formed in translucent milky white, the door frame 3 In some cases, the player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates provided on various decorative bodies provided in the game. Then, there arises a problem that the player sees the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed. An auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) is printed on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface by printing in a light yellow color different from black. ) Or a number specifying a full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) can be made difficult.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are silk-printed, and the yellow, which is lighter than black, is different from black. By performing printing, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED.

  The configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment can also provide the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment. In other words, a number specifying the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) are made difficult for the player to see. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the emission of the full-color LED.

  In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged is silk-printed, and is different from black and light-colored). (When printing in yellow), the polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  In the second embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and the connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED. However, the LED was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface was reduced, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED was the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, or connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, a region indicating a position where the electronic component or the connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (not shown), and a part number corresponding to the electronic component or the connector is provided near this region. Is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

[Comparison of configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to the first embodiment with configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to third embodiment]
In the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a full-color LED. The area indicating the positions where the hdLEDs 1 to hdLED 10 that are LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b has the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk-screened near these areas. The prints are printed in yellow (or black), respectively. As described above, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, is silk-screened on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) as printing, the part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas, respectively. Have been.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 has the component numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. And the area indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. And, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center decoration board 314. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) by solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), respectively, and near these areas, component numbers corresponding to the electronic components. Are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. As described above, the area corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, is formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 as described above. The printed parts are printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are silk printed near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170A, the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED is provided on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The component numbers corresponding to .about.hdLED 10 are foil-cut characters (that is, characters formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and removing the surrounding copper foil ( In FIG. 170 (c), only the foil-colored character LED7 is shown as a part number corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED.)) And an area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs are arranged. A foil-cut area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a wiring pattern is formed In the (copper plane), except for each terminal and the wiring pattern, only the foil-leaved region LSLK7 is shown as a region corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED in the region formed by removing the copper foil (FIG. 170 (c)). ))), And the foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are respectively covered with a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Specifically, regions indicating positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b as foil removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, respectively. In the vicinity of the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in the left or upper direction, respectively. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed characters are respectively covered with a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is a foil-cut region (not shown) except for each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). Layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a region where copper foil is removed), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is not shown near this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil).

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a housing that is white (also referred to as a natural color, white). Color) that is recognized as the same color as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided near the plurality of check pins (not shown). In other words, the wiring pattern is a copper foil on the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed. It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil around make. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 171, the constant current driving circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba and the resistances Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are provided. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistances are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and component numbers corresponding to the electronic components near these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, an area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 171 (a)) as a silk print, and a lower left lower decorative substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 171 (a)) which is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and which is the part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax near and above the area LSLKa is silk-screened. Is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line). The area indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is printed as a silk solid line by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 171 (a)). Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are located near and to the right of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd. , R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 171 (a)) corresponding to and are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in yellow (or black) as silk printing, respectively. I have.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of a resin having any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectivity due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  In the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are solid-coated with white resist. This increases the reflectance of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by emitting white solid resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. You can do it.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectivity or the like according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170B, hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, The corresponding part number is formed as a foil-cut character (that is, a cut character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil). In addition, a region indicating a position at which hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is a terminal area (not shown) except a wiring pattern (not shown). And the wiring pattern, excluding the copper foil). WHITE resists areafill to D mounting surface 314x and its foil vent area and the foil outline characters are covered respectively. Specifically, regions indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 as foil removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are formed in the vicinity of the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 to the right and are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 as blank characters, respectively. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed characters are respectively covered with a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative substrate 314. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, an area indicating a position where the connector HCN is arranged is a foil-cut area (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). Layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a region where copper foil is removed), and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is not shown near this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil).

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color; Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, lighting inspection is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided near the plurality of check pins (not shown). In other words, characters are formed on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the content of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, and the like. Areas indicating the positions where the electronic components are to be arranged are printed as silk printing by solid yellow lines (or black solid lines) (not shown), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are shown as silk printing near these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black).

  In the third embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax ( 314bx) has a package made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the emission of full-color LEDs is reduced.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are solid-coated with a white resist. Accordingly, the solid color white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 reflects light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the full-color LED. And the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314 above the plate center is a component corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. While the numbers and the regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment has the left side. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b is -The part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are LEDs, are formed by removing the foil (that is, forming a character using a copper wiring pattern on a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) and removing the surrounding copper foil. In addition, a region where the positions of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is a foil-cut region excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a layer on which the wiring pattern is formed). (Copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, a region formed by extracting the copper foil), and is a white resist solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The foil area and the foil letters are covered by On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314, a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is a character without foil (that is, a character with a copper foil wiring pattern in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed). And a region where the positions of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). (That is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, except for each terminal and the wiring pattern, it is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil). The foil-removed area and the foil-removed character are respectively defined by the white resist solid-coated on the surface 314x. They differ in that they are covered.

  With the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, it is possible to increase the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). It has become. In addition, a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is used to reflect the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the staging operation unit 300). Can be enhanced. For this reason, when the area | region which shows the part number corresponding to a full-color LED, and the position where a full-color LED is arrange | positioned is black-printed as silk printing, the black-printed silk-printing makes the LED by light emission of a full-color LED. The reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, and there is a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face), although it is formed in translucent milky white, the door frame 3 In some cases, the player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates provided on various decorative bodies provided in the game. Then, there arises a problem that the player sees the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the measures such as the reduction of the reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs that have no relation to the game for the player are formed as foil-cut characters, and the game is completely the same as the game for the player. By forming an area indicating a position where a full-color LED having no relationship is arranged as a foil-cut area, and covering the foil-cut character and the foil-cut area with a white resist that is solid-coated on the LED mounting surface, respectively, An LED wiring pattern, a foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged), a number specifying the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED), Is made of copper foil to make the same color, and the white color formed on the LED mounting surface By being covered by the dist, a foil extraction area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) is found, and a number specifying the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) ) Can be difficult to find.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player and a corresponding part number is formed as a foil-cut character, and the game is completely for the player. By forming an area indicating a position where a full-color LED having no relationship is arranged as a foil-cut area, and covering the foil-cut character and the foil-cut area with a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface, respectively, the It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the emission of the LED.

  The configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the third embodiment can provide the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number specifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the foil-cut area that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the emission of the full-color LED.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment, the step of silk printing on the LED mounting surface can be omitted, so that the board cost can be reduced by reducing the printing cost of silk printing and the number of manufacturing steps of the substrate. Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

  Note that, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as the foil-cut area). Alternatively, a polarity mark of a full-color LED may be added to indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  In the third embodiment, the electronic component such as a resistor and a capacitor having no white color and a connector having no white color, whose reflectance is reduced on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED, and the light emitting device of the full color LED emits light of the full color LED. Is not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED. However, in the LED mounting surface by full-color LED emission, the region corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is to be disposed is a foil-cut region (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). ), Except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a copper foil-extracted area), and in the vicinity of this area, a part number corresponding to an electronic component or connector (not shown) is a foil-cut character (not shown). That is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, a character is formed from a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the character is formed as a cut character formed by removing the surrounding copper foil.

[Comparison of configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to the first embodiment with configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a full-color LED. The area indicating the positions where the hdLEDs 1 to hdLED 10 that are LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b has the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk-screened near these areas. The prints are printed in yellow (or black), respectively. As described above, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, is silk-screened on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) as printing, the part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas, respectively. Have been.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 has the component numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. And the area indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. And, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center decoration board 314. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) by solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), respectively, and near these areas, component numbers corresponding to the electronic components. Are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. As described above, the area corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, is formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 as described above. The printed parts are printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are silk printed near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172 (a), the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED is provided on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b.白色 hdLED 10 is a white resist-extracted character using a double-coated white resist (FIG. 172 (c) shows only a white resist-extracted character as a part number corresponding to hdLED7 which is a full-color LED). ), And a region indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be arranged is a white resist-removed region using a twice-coated white resist (FIG. 172 (c) shows a full-color LED hdLED7). And only the white resist removal region LSLK7 is shown as a region corresponding to. It has been made. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is made of a white resist as the first of two coats of white resist, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is made of white resist. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with white resist (that is, as the first of the twice-coated white resists). Then, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an area indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged as the second time of the twice-coated white resist (the arrangement of the predetermined pin numbers is As shown in FIG. 172 (c), in the white resist removal area LSLK7, the fifth pin arrangement of the full color LED hdLED7 is included in the white resist removal area LSLK7 as the area corresponding to the full color LED hdLED7. A notch portion is formed at a position corresponding to the designated notch mark.) Is masked as white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, and near the white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 and leftward. Or hdLED1 to hd, which are full color LEDs, In a state where the ED10 with a corresponding part numbers LED1~LED10 is masked as a white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. Thus, although a two-layer white resist is formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the entire surface is covered by the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist is formed. The entire area is covered except for the area masked by the resist, so that the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are white resist removal areas LSLK1 to LSLK10. While being formed, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are formed as characters without white resist.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are the same. Because of the adoption, shading occurs between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b passes through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the underlayer (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the first layer of white resist looks pale. That is, when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, characters without white resist in the first layer of white resist can be identified. ing.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided near this region. The number is formed as a white resist-cut character (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist is the same as the transmittance of the second-layer white resist. When shading occurs between the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the first layer is formed. The white resist on the eyes will appear pale. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist can be identified. Has become.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist and the second resist are removed. The refractive index of light of the white resist of the layer changes. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  The entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a housing that is white (also referred to as a natural color, white). Color) that is recognized as the same color as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1 (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided near the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 173, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 173, the constant current driving circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba and the resistances Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, An area indicating a position where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are to be arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted area using a twice-coated white resist similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. In addition, in the vicinity of these regions, the component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are formed as white resist removal characters using a twice-coated white resist similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. . Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the twice-coated white resists, and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. The resist is covered with the resist (that is, the white resist is solid-painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the twice-coated white resists). The LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is, for example, a region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is to be disposed (the predetermined pin number arrangement) 173. As shown in FIG. 173, the white resist removal region LSLKa as a region corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax includes a first pin and a 36th pin of the constant current drive circuit 402bax. A notch is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark indicating the arrangement.) Is masked as a white resist cutout area LSLKa, and a constant current is provided near and upward to these white resist cutout areas LSLKa. IC1 (see FIG. 173 (a)) which is a part number corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax is a white resist. In a state that is masked as can characters, the whole of the LED non-mounting surface 402by the left under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, a two-layer white resist is formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in the same manner as the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The entire area is covered with the white resist and the entire area is covered except for the area masked with the second layer of white resist, so that the masked area is depressed as a recess, and corresponds to the constant current drive circuit 402bax. In addition, a white resist removal area LSLKa is formed as an area to be performed, and a part number IC1 corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax is formed as a white resist removal character.

  Note that the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is a white resist (not shown) in which an area indicating a position where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged. In the vicinity of this area, the part numbers corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and white resist removal characters R1, R2, not shown, are shown. Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts such as resistors and capacitors (not shown), which are formed as R3 and are not shown, are formed as white resist removal letters (not shown). On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted region (not shown), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided near this region. It is formed as a character (not shown) without white resist.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are the same. , The shading occurs between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the LED non-mounting surface of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b passes through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the 402-by underlayer (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the first layer of the white resist looks pale. Accordingly, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist formed characters formed on the first layer of white resist can be identified. And a white resist removal area can be identified.

  Further, since the white resist is coated twice on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist, The refractive index of light of the second layer of white resist changes. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of a resin having any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectivity due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are solid-coated with white resist. This increases the reflectance of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by emitting white solid resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. You can do it.

  In the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectivity or the like according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are provided on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a twice-coated white resist, and a region indicating the position where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged uses the double-coated white resist. It is formed as a white resist removal area. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is the first time of the twice-coated white resist, and the entire LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is made of white resist. It is covered (that is, the white resist is solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish substrate 314 on the center of the dish as the first of the twice-coated white resists). The LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an area indicating a position where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be arranged (the arrangement of the predetermined pin numbers is the second time) of the twice-coated white resist. For example, in the white resist removal area HSLK7 as a region corresponding to the hLED7 which is a full-color LED, a notch mark for instructing the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hLED7 which is a full-color LED is included. Notches are formed at corresponding positions.) Are masked as white resist removal areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, and hLED1 which is a full-color LED near these white resist removal areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 and to the right. LED which is a part number corresponding to ~ hLED10 ~LED10 is in a state of being masked as white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the disc center on the decorative substrate 314 is covered by a white resist. Thus, although a two-layer white resist is formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the entire surface is covered with the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist is formed. The entire area is covered except for the area masked by the resist, so that the masked area is depressed as a concave part, and the areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are white resist removal areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. The LED1 to LED10, which are formed and are part numbers corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs, are formed as characters without white resist.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center decoration board 314 are the same. Because of the adoption, shading occurs between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the underlayer, the first layer of white resist looks pale. That is, when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, characters without white resist in the first layer of white resist can be identified. ing.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, a region indicating a position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector HCN is provided near this region. The number is formed as a white resist-cut character (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist is the same as the transmittance of the second-layer white resist. Shading occurs between the white resist of the layer and the white resist of the second layer. When the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the first layer is formed. The white resist on the eyes will appear pale. Thus, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, a white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist can be identified. Has become.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the white resist removal character and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist and the second resist are removed. The refractive index of light of the white resist of the layer changes. Thus, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color; Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, lighting inspection is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided near the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the content of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314, the constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersion resistors not shown. Similarly to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate 314, a region indicating the position at which electronic components are to be disposed is formed as a white resist removal region using a twice-coated white resist. In the vicinity, a component number corresponding to the electronic component is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a twice-coated white resist, similarly to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 are the same. , The shading occurs between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the LED non-mounting surface of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate is passed through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the base of 314y, the white resist of the first layer looks faint. Thereby, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish is seen through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-extracted characters formed on the first layer of white resist can be identified. And a white resist removal area can be identified.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer of white resist, The refractive index of light of the second layer of white resist changes. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current driving circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin. As described above, the electronic components such as the resistor and the capacitor having no white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

  In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are solid-coated with a white resist. Accordingly, the solid color white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 reflects light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the full-color LED. And the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk-screen printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is a component corresponding to the full color LED hLED1 to hLED10. While the numbers and the regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment has the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b is A part number corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 as the LED is formed as a white resist removal character using a twice-coated white resist, and the region indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 as the full color LED are arranged is twice. It is formed as a white resist removal area using a painted white resist, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate is coated twice with the component numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. The white resist is formed as a white resist-exposed character using a white resist, and an area indicating a position where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted area using a twice-coated white resist. Are different in that .

  With the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, it is possible to increase the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). It has become. In addition, a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is used to reflect the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the staging operation unit 300). Can be enhanced. For this reason, when the area | region which shows the part number corresponding to a full-color LED, and the position where a full-color LED is arrange | positioned is black-printed as silk printing, the black-printed silk-printing makes the LED by light emission of a full-color LED. The reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, and there is a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face), although it is formed in translucent milky white, the door frame 3 In some cases, the player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates provided on various decorative bodies provided in the game. Then, there arises a problem that the player sees the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal character using a white resist in which a part number corresponding to a full-color LED having no relation to the game at all and a corresponding part number is applied twice. By forming a region indicating a position where a full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, at all, as a white resist removal region using a twice-coated white resist, the mounting position of the full-color LED is formed. It is difficult to find out a white resist removal area indicating the full color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged) or find a number specifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED). Can be.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-exposed character using a white resist in which a part number corresponding to a full-color LED having no relation to the game for the player and a corresponding part number is applied twice. By forming a region indicating a position where a full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player at all, is arranged as a white resist-extracted region using a twice-coated white resist, the light emission of the full-color LED It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing.

  The configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment can also provide the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment. That is, a number specifying a full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) or a white resist-extracted area using a twice-painted white resist indicating a mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, a position where the full-color LED is arranged) ) Can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED can be prevented from lowering.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, since the steps of silk printing can be omitted on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface, respectively, the printing cost of the silk printing and the manufacture of the substrate can be eliminated. The reduction in the number of steps can contribute to lowering the substrate manufacturing cost.

  In the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and a connector that does not have a white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED. Is not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED. However, in the LED mounting surface by full-color LED emission, the region corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, a region indicating a position where electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor (not shown) to be mounted on the LED mounting surface and a connector are arranged is formed as a terminal (not shown) and a white resist removal region (not shown). In addition, a component number corresponding to an electronic component such as a resistor and a capacitor (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface and a connector is formed as a white resist-free character (not shown).

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist, The entire area is covered except for the area masked by the second layer of white resist, so that the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED and the connector are arranged is formed as a white resist-free area. Although the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LED and the connector are formed as the white resist-exposed characters, the white resist-extracted region and the white resist-extracted characters may be formed by using another method. . For example, after the white resist is solid-coated once or plural times on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, before the white resist is dried, a region indicating a position where a full-color LED or a connector is arranged. A method of forming a white resist removal area by pressing a plate, and forming a white resist removal character by pressing a plate indicating a part number corresponding to a full-color LED or a connector, an LED mounting surface of a decorative board and After the white resist is solid-coated once or more than once on the LED non-mounting surface, the white resist is dried, and then, by laser irradiation, an area indicating a position where a full-color LED or a connector is arranged is defined as a white resist-extracted area. Form the part number corresponding to the full color LED and connector And a method of forming as outline characters.

  In the above-described embodiment, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, and as shown in FIG. 168, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is A configuration is adopted in which the left side edge 402beg1 and the right edge side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees, and a predetermined number of full-color LEDs are divided into groups 1 and 2. Although the configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, the present invention can be applied to a long and thin plate-shaped decorative board provided in the game board 5. Examples of the elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 include a decorative board provided in various effect units of the game board 5.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative board of the door frame 3 controls the light emission by flowing a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs. , Red, green, yellow, orange, blue, green and the like. Monochromatic LEDs can also be used. In this case, a single LED constant current drive circuit can control the emission of up to 24 single-color LEDs.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, DC +12 V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the provided linear power supply (the linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 165) is used for LED lighting within the allowable current range of the linear power supply. May be used. For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the above-described constant current drive circuit, at most one single-color LED (for example, within the allowable current range of the linear power supply for one output channel) (for example, When an LED other than a red LED is electrically connected, an internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5 V) created by a linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the single-color LED, and the single-color LED is The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat spreading resistor of the heat spreading circuit described above. In addition, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the above-described constant current drive circuit, up to two single-color LEDs (for example, within the allowable current range of the linear power supply for one output channel) (for example, When red LEDs are electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by a linear power supply is configured to be input to the anode terminal of the first-stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last-stage LED is connected to the anode terminal of the first-stage LED. It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat spreading resistor of the above-described heat spreading circuit. The decorative board configured as described above can be applied to a decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  In the above-described embodiment, DC +12 V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 of the constant current drive circuit are input. To LG8 and LB1 to LB8, the cathode terminal of the LED element forming one full-color LED is electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the heat dispersion circuit described above. However, a plurality of full-color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is two or three. When it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, instead of using +12 V DC from the power supply board 630, use +35 V DC from the power supply board 630 as a voltage for lighting the LED. May be. The decorative board configured as described above can be applied to a decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are the door frame top center decorative board 455 and the door. When the frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper edge to the lower edge of the decorative board is large. Although the edge of the land pattern is arranged to be parallel to the upper and lower edges of the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, the door Of the frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, any one decorative board and any two decorative boards The end side of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit, may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper side and lower side of the decorative substrate. The door frame top right decorative board 457 directly controls the light emission of, for example, the other right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs are mounted, in addition to the full color LED provided therein, by the LED constant current drive circuit provided therein. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative board 456 may directly connect, in addition to its own full-color LED, another left decorative board on which one full-color LED is mounted, by its own LED constant current drive circuit. Light emission may be controlled.

  In the above-described embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are provided on the door frame 3. Although the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided in each decorative body are solid-coated with white resist, they may be printed by white silk printing instead. In this case, after the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative substrates are entirely printed by white silk printing, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged, are used as silk printing. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the various decorative boards provided in the decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. On the LED non-mounting surface, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates were printed as silk prints with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines), respectively. (I.e., when printing the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed as a silk print with a yellow dashed line (or a black dashed line)), add the polarity mark of the full-color LED to the auxiliary line. It may be configured to specify the mounting orientation.

  By the way, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with various substrates that can be supplied with power from a power supply substrate and control illuminations has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-1921989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, in a gaming machine, a line for transmitting power and a line for transmitting a control signal to various boards are routed, and the length of the lines may cause the various boards to be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a front frame configured to cover a window which is opened forward and backward with a see-through protective plate on a gaming board (for example, JP-A-2006-1921989 (paragraph [0014]). , And FIG. 1)). By the way, by enlarging the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame is reduced, so that the decorative board accommodated in the left and right sides also has a strip shape. In addition, since the display device and the movable body are provided on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board is increased, so that the decorative board provided on the game board also has a strip shape. However, when the light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided on the strip-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure an area for drawing out the wiring from the light emission control means to the light emitting means.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory device which is arranged in a standby manner in front of and below a display screen of an effect display device and operates at the time of an effect (for example, JP-A-2015-058064). Gazette (paragraph [0040], FIG. 4, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9). In the movable accessory device, a decorative substrate on which a light emitting unit facing the back surface of the light emitting unit (lens) on the design surface is mounted. However, there is a risk that the player may visually recognize a number specifying a light emitting unit mounted on a decorative board that has no relation to the game, an auxiliary line indicating a mounting position of the light emitting unit, or the like through the light emitting unit.

  In addition, a game machine to which a decorative board on which a light emitting unit is mounted has been conventionally proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). A variety of effects using the light emitting effect by such light emitting means are provided to the player. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the mounting surface of the decorative board, the reflectance is reduced due to a number specifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative board, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, and the like. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

[13. Decorative boards for game boards]
Next, among the decorative boards provided on the game board 5, a decorative board on which a magnetic pole change detection circuit is mounted will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a decorative substrate including a magnetic type magnetic pole change detection circuit and the like.

  First, among the decorative boards provided on the game board 5, as the decorative board on which the magnetic type magnetic pole change detection circuit is mounted, as described above, the former decorative portion of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 of the back unit 3000 is used. There is a back left upper front decorative board 3311a on which a magnetic back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of 3312 is mounted.

  The back left upper first stage decorative substrate 3311a receives, via the panel drive substrate 1720, the light emission data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1, which are the door frame side serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510, respectively. ing. In addition, the upper left back decorative board 3311a is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 through the panel drive board 1720, and receives + 12V DC, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. ) It is electrically connected to the line. The upper left back decorative board 3311a may be directly electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. You may comprise so that it may be electrically connected directly with a ground (GND) line.

  The back upper left decorative board 3311a includes a back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, an LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac, a heat distribution circuit 3311ad, and eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8).

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is capable of detecting a change in the magnetic pole, and mainly includes a linear power supply 3311aba, a hall element 3311abb, an amplifier circuit 3311abc, a Schmitt circuit 3311abd, an output current limiting circuit 3311abe, and an FET 3311abf. Configured as open drain output.

  The linear power supply 3311aba is a circuit to which DC + 12V is input from a + 12V power supply line to create and supply an internal power supply to be used in the rear upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab. The internal power is supplied to the Hall element 3311abb, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, and the Schmitt circuit 3311abd, and can operate. The source terminals of the linear power supply 3311aba, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, the Schmitt circuit 3311abd, and the FET 3311abf are grounded to a ground (GND) line.

  The Hall element 3311abbb can detect the strength of the magnetic flux density, and outputs an analog signal whose voltage changes according to the strength of the magnetic flux density to the amplifier circuit 3311abc. The amplifier circuit 3311abc amplifies the analog signal from the Hall element 3311abbb and outputs the signal to the Schmitt circuit 3311abd. The Schmitt circuit 3311abd adjusts the waveform of the signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 3311abc and outputs the adjusted signal to the gate terminal of the FET 3311abf that is the final stage. The FET 3311abf outputs the logic of the detection signal ULORG from its drain terminal according to a signal from the Schmitt circuit 3311abd input to its gate terminal. Since the FET 3311abf is used as an open drain output, the drain current to the drain terminal of the FET 3311abf is limited by the output current limiting circuit 3311ab.

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab switches the logic of the detection signal ULORG from HI to LOW when the magnet approaches the Hall element 3311abb and the magnetic flux density in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the Hall element 3311abb becomes larger than the operating point (Bop). When the magnet moves away from the surface of the Hall element 3311abb and the magnetic flux density becomes smaller than the return point (Brp), the logic of the detection signal ULORG is switched from LOW to HI.

  The rear upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is arranged such that its Hall element 3311abb is located in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3312 shown in FIG. Have been.

  In the present embodiment, the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip, and as a type of IC package, the planar shape is a rectangular shape (horizontal length: 2). It is a surface mount type (SMD, height: 1.1 mm) having a height of 0.9 mm and a vertical length of 1.6 mm, and is a so-called SOT. Since the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component, the back left upper front decorative board 3311a of the front decorative section 3312 attached to the right side of the base decorative section 3311 shown in FIG. The distance between the magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3311ab (the surface of the IC package) and the left side of the preceding decorative portion 3312, which is the bottom surface of the triangular pyramid-shaped preceding decorative portion 3312 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the length is about 1.5 mm.) Can be reduced.

  In addition, since the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is a small movable decorative body, it is arranged as a sensor for detecting the preceding decorative section 3312 which is a movable body using a large optical sensor such as a photocoupler. It is structurally difficult to do so.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sensor is used as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the preceding decorative portion 3312, which is a movable body, by using the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab. Although the magnetic sensor has a greater variation in detection than the optical sensor described above, in the present embodiment, the standby position (original position) of the movable decorative body 3312 has a variation. Even if there is a deviation, the deviation is small, and the probability of giving a sense of incongruity to the player is low.

  As described above, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 moves in the left-right direction, moves up and down, or rotates the preceding decorative section 3312. In some cases, light from various light-emitting sources (a plurality of light-emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 may be incident on the LED mounting surface of the rear upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab from multiple directions.

  For this reason, when the above-mentioned optical sensor is mounted on the LED mounting surface of the rear upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, light from various light emitting sources (plural light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 emits disturbance light (multiple light emitting sources). (Light pollution) and erroneous detection.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the magnetic sensor described above is employed for such a reason. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the standby position (original position) of the preceding decorative portion 3312 due to light emitted from various light emitting sources (a plurality of light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5.

  In the present embodiment, the optical sensors included in the various effect units described above are configured such that light from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided on the game board 5 is blocked by other members (or disturbance light). (Weakened to the extent that it does not cause (light pollution)), there is no risk of erroneous detection due to the light.

  The LED constant current driving circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. 165, and supplies a constant current to the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). And a maximum current setting circuit 3311ac that can set the maximum current of the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). It is configured. The constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the constant current drive circuit 283x in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. 165, and the game board side serial system (light emission) from the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1, control is performed to supply a constant current to the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). As described above, the constant current drive circuit 3311ac is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). Therefore, the heat generation of the constant current driving circuit 3311ac can be distributed by part of the heat generated by the constant current driving circuit 3311ac. The heat distribution circuit 3311ad is the same circuit as the heat distribution circuit 283c in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG.

  The light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the above-described light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for specifying a light emission mode, and is composed of ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which one of the LED constant current driving circuits to designate from among the LED constant current driving circuits provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation is designated from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127.

  As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. 165, and therefore, detailed description is omitted here.

  In addition, the rear left upper front decorative board 3311a has eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8) and a rear left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab on the LED mounting surface. The LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac and the like are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface. The back upper left first-stage decorative substrate 3311a includes the above-described configuration for measures such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment, the configuration for the measures such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment, and the reflectance according to the third embodiment. Either of the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reduction and the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment can be adopted.

  In the embodiment described above, the back left upper base decorative board is mounted with a plurality of unillustrated full-color LEDs that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3311 to which the back left upper base decorative board is attached. 3311a has a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa that irradiate light toward the left side of the preceding decorative portion 3312, but a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decorative board have a side view type. The plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a may be selected to be a side view type, or the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back left upper base decorative board may be side-mounted. A plurality of full-color LEs to be mounted on the back upper left front-end decorative board 3311a are selected as well as the view type. The top view type 3311aa may be selected, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back left upper base decorative board may be selected as the top view type and the back left upper front decorative board 3311a may be mounted. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa to be used may be of a top-view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs to be mounted on a back left upper base decorative board may be of a top-view type, and A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the decorative board 3311a may be of a side-view type.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which the production operation of a display device or a decoration device provided on a game board is controlled by a production control device (control means) (for example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraph [ 0071], FIG. 3, and FIG. 22)). By the way, the game board has an environment that is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise. Due to the structure of the game board, the environment affected by the electromagnetic wave noise among various wirings connected to the effect control device (control means) is present. If electromagnetic wave noise enters another wiring via the routed wiring, the effect control device (control means) may malfunction due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise from the other wiring.

  In addition, conventionally, a gaming machine having a movable body on a gaming board has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraph [0067], FIGS. 18 and 19)). The movable body has a protruding detection piece, and the detection piece is detected by an optical detection switch provided separately from the movable body to specify the position of the movable body. By the way, when the movable body is provided with an optical detection switch to detect a specific position of the movable body, the light is emitted by a plurality of light-emitting bodies provided on the game board while the movable body is operating. There is a possibility that disturbance light is incident on the optical detection switch, and the detection switch erroneously detects the light.

[14. Brightness setting of indirect light and direct light]
The light guide plate in the base panel plate 1110 and the display effect unit 2600 includes a plurality of LEDs (a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110; A plurality of LEDs for the first pattern, which are illuminated and decorated by allowing light to enter from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601, and a plurality of LEDs for the second pattern, which are illuminated and decorated by allowing light to enter from the right side of the light guide plate. Hereinafter, there is a double description of “LED used as indirect light”.) Light is incident and indirect light is emitted from the inner surface of the light guide plate.

  Various operation LEDs provided on the door frame side various units such as the effect operation unit 300, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 in FIG. Other LEDs that are provided and that are not used for the light guide plate (hereinafter, may be described as “LEDs used as direct light”) are irradiated as direct light. Therefore, if the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as the direct light are the same, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. The player wants to adjust the current brightness of the various LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 to be dark if the current brightness is too bright, and to adjust the brightness bright if the current brightness is not too dark.

  Incidentally, various LEDs are mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, and one or a plurality of LED constant current drive circuits are mounted thereon. As described above, this LED constant current drive circuit controls the brightness (gradation) of the LED from the extinguishing to the lighting (maximum luminance) in a total of 128 levels from 0 (zero) to 127. Is what you can do.

  Further, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are data for specifying the light emission mode, as described above, and include ID information and gradation information. I have. The ID information is information indicating which one of the LED constant current drive circuits to be designated among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation is designated from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127.

  Also, as described above, the light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for designating a light emission mode, and includes ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which one of the LED constant current driving circuits to designate from among the LED constant current driving circuits provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation is designated from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127.

  The gradient specified in the above-described gradation information is used in the effect operation unit monitoring process in the peripheral control unit steady-state process of the peripheral control unit power-on process described later performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a and the lamp pallet setting process in the received command analysis process. Is set. In this lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on a lamp pallet setting table including a specified luminance value, a normal pallet value, and a special pallet value. , Respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the emission mode generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes a lamp pallet setting process. Then, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and during the demonstration (demonstration performed in a waiting state of the player) or during the progress of the production ( For example, during a predetermined period of a specific effect), the above-described gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be updated by executing the lamp pallet setting process.

  Here, the luminance designation value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value that constitute the lamp pallet setting table will be briefly described. As the specified luminance value, one specified luminance value may be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance specified value which is the minimum luminance (unlit) to the 31st specified luminance value which is the maximum luminance. The normal pallet value and the special pallet value, which will be described later, are preset in correspondence with the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value. The player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to operate the first luminance designated value to have the 31st luminance which becomes the maximum luminance. One specified luminance value can be set up to the specified value.

  For example, a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 clockwise, and the 0th (zero) luminance designation at which the current luminance temporarily becomes the minimum luminance (extinguished). When the brightness is set to the first brightness specification value at which the brightness is next higher than the value, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear formula) from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value which is the maximum brightness is set. Along with the tone curve or the spline curve tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be high, When the clockwise rotation operation is performed and the current luminance is set to the maximum luminance, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, from the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance to the first luminance designated value) Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is determined. In the present embodiment, a case where a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) can set the luminance during a demonstration (a demonstration effect performed in a player waiting state) or an effect is being prepared in advance. At this time, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the demonstration or effect, the first luminance designated value to the By displaying a bar-shaped indicator indicating the position up to the 31 luminance designated value, the desired luminance of the player (or a clerk of a game hall or the like) is visually shown as an image of the desired luminance. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the fourteenth luminance designated value is set as an initial value (default).

  Normally, the pallet value is such that the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side which are directly irradiated as light is set as the above-mentioned gradation information. is there. As the normal palette value, one of 17 levels is selected from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value, in 5% steps, and one of the 17 levels is selected. In a range of 32 levels from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the designated value, a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation is determined by a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve). , Or a spline-like tone curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is a maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance specification in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance specification value to the 31st luminance specification value which is the above-mentioned luminance specification value. (100%) is a value of 20%, and the values (%) described in parentheses of the other pallet values are also 0th (zero) luminance designation values, which are the above-mentioned luminance designation values. Within the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance specification value, the value is the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one luminance specification.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is previously selected as the normal pallet value for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated directly as light. Of the various decorative boards provided on the game board side which are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and are directly irradiated as light, a specific decorative board (not shown) (LED which is dazzling to the player) is set on the pallet. The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the above-mentioned gradation information.

  In the special pallet value, the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light is set as the above-mentioned gradation information. The special pallet value, unlike the normal pallet value, exists in only one step and is one of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (0th) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the above-mentioned luminance designation value. The palette value corresponding to the luminance designation is set as the above-mentioned gradation information along a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve).

  As described above, when the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the luminance of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special pallet value instead of using the normal pallet value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light by setting the first luminance designated value at which the luminance is next to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value which is the minimum luminance (extinguished). The lowest possible luminance is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth luminance designated value when the normal pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%), and ranges from the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. Among them, the palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value is set along a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table including the specified luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light when the player (or a staff such as a clerk of a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 with respect to the luminance of the LED used as the direct light. While being set along the normal pallet value corresponding to the designated value, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of a game hall) controls the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. The value is set in accordance with the special pallet value corresponding to the designated luminance value by the operation of step 303. Accordingly, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is dazzling, and reduces the brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, the LED is used as the direct light. The luminance of the LED used is set to the minimum luminance (that is, the first luminance specification value at the next higher luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance specification value at which the minimum luminance (turns off)), and in conjunction with this, Therefore, the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is also set to the minimum luminance (that is, the first luminance specification value at which the luminance is next to the 0th (zero) luminance specification value that is the minimum luminance (extinguished)). Also, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth luminance designated value when the normal pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side for the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect is set, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side is set. , The normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more effective rendering effect), and other pallet values are set. By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the entire light emitting mode can be changed very easily. In other words, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to change the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance which becomes the maximum luminance. Even if one specified brightness value up to the specified brightness value is set, a small pallet value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one specified brightness value is set for a specific decorative board. Since one luminance designation value and the corresponding maximum pallet value (100%) are set for the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright or dark) is set. ) Can be very easily adjusted without breaking the relationship.

  Furthermore, although the brightness of the indirect light from the light guide plate is more difficult to adjust than the direct light, the LED used as the indirect light has a special pallet value different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value). Can set the luminance. Thereby, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special pallet value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is usually controlled by the pallet value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

  By the way, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a directing member provided on a game board is provided with a light emitting means so that light emitting decoration can be performed by using light of the light emitting means as direct light (for example, JP-A-2006-154676). No. (paragraph [0021], FIGS. 2 and 5). However, when the light from the light emitting means provided on the effect member is used as indirect light, the light emitted from the light emitting means provided on the effect member is darker than when the light is used as direct light. There has been a problem that it is difficult to adjust the brightness between the device and the light emitting device used as direct light.

[15. Game content]
The contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 described above, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner on the front of the door frame 3 to input the adjustment of the striking force. The stored game ball B is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the firing passage 1012 formed by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the firing rail 544 and the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is performed. Be started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a is either in the first game area 5a1 on the left side of the center member 2500 or on the right side of the center member 2500 through the communication passage 5a4 depending on the driving strength. Any one of the certain second game areas 5a2 flows down. Note that the driving strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more the balls are rotated clockwise, the stronger they can be hit. That is, the game ball B can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the first to third game areas 5a1, 5a2, and 5a3 of the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (base panel 1110), When the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail 2007, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail 2007, a windmill 2008 which is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

[15-1. Driving into the first game area]
The game ball B fired with a predetermined firing force (the game ball B jumps over the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and does not reach the communication passage portion 5a4) onto the upper portion of the center member 2500, It rolls on the left side of the step 832a of the surrounding frame 832, and flows down from the first game area 5a1 to the third game area 5a3 while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails 2007. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the first game area 5a1 enters the warp entrance 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage shelf 2503.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage shelf 2503 rolls on the stage shelf 2503 and moves back and forth, from either the top in the center in the left-right direction or the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top. Discharged forward. When the game ball B is discharged into the third game area 5a3 from the top at the center of the stage shelf 2503, the top is located directly above the first start port 2002, so that the first start port 2002 has a high probability. Accepted to. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  When the game balls B rolling on the stage shelf 2503 are discharged from the valleys on the left and right sides of the top into the third game area 5a3, they flow down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game ball B released from the stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 into the third game area 5a3 may be accepted in the first starting port 2002, the general winning opening 2001, or the like.

  When the game ball B flowing down the first game area 5a1 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the side unit 2200, and the general winning opening 2001 or the starting opening of the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that the first start port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the unit 2100 will be accepted. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

[15-2. Winning to the first opening, lottery of special lottery result]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 (the same is true for the second starting port 2004), the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “ A special lottery result that generates a "big hit", a "medium hit", a "small hit", a "probability change (probability change)", and a "time reduction (shortening of time)" is performed. The result is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time.) Note that a special lottery performed by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 is performed. The results include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “15R big hit”, “probable change (probability change)”, “time reduction (time reduction)”, “probable change time reduction” ”,“ Probable change in working hours ”, etc.

  If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state, the special fluctuation time After the elapse, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. In order for the game ball B to enter the special winning opening 2005, it is necessary to drive the game ball B into the second game area 5a2, and therefore, at this stage, drive the game ball B into the second game area 5a2 (so-called “right hit”). ) Is guided by an audio announcement or an image, etc. In this embodiment, which of the emission units 848a and 848b should be right-handed is, for example, referred to as “right-handed left route” or “right-handed right route”. Is specifically guided as follows. This is because the probability of the ball entering the first reception port 2006 and the second reception port differs depending on which of the release units 848a and 848b the game ball B is released to the second game area 5a2. The driving into the second game area 5a2 will be described later.

  When the game ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is provided from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out and the player can be entertained. it can.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). Is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received, or the special winning opening 2005 When one of the conditions of the predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern in which the game balls B cannot be received in the closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for “2R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot” are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed. ("Time savings").

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the special lottery result by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Is done. The maximum number of the reserved special lottery results to be retained is up to four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that the plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image by being indirectly controlled by the peripheral control substrate 1510 based on a control signal from the main control substrate 1310. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is such that the pattern rows composed of a plurality of pictures are displayed side by side in the left and right direction, and each of the pattern rows is fluctuated. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stopped and displayed such that the patterns of the three picture rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three picture rows are stopped and each picture is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  Note that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the final image is changed due to the fluctuation of the picture sequence). (The time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for indicating the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by lottery. A player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate, vibrate, assist the rotation operation, and inhibit the rotation operation by the operation ring drive motor 342. With 367, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each of the decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and each of the decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the display effect unit 2600, the back effect unit 3100, and the like are appropriately used to emit light. And a movable effect can be performed, the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in a player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, when a player makes a mistake in an operation to be performed or does not perform the operation, a correct operation is performed. To the player. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[15-3. Driving into the second game area (right-handed)]
A game ball B fired at a specific firing force (a firing force having a strength jumping over the first game area 5a1) higher than a predetermined firing force onto the upper portion of the center member 2500 forms a tapered corner of the step portion 832a of the enclosure 832. It rides on the upper surface deeper than the portion 832b or rolls while contacting the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force and moves to the back of the communication passage portion 5a4. When the game ball B rides on the upper surface deeper than the tapered corner portion 832b of the step portion 832a of the enclosing frame 832, it rolls on the upper surface of the enclosing frame 832 of the center member 2500 and enters the opening 848bH of the discharge portion 848b. Alternatively, even when the game ball B rolling while contacting the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 is stalled and falls just before the opening 848bH of the discharging portion 848b, the upper surface of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500 is rolled as it is and the discharging portion is rolled. It enters the opening 848bH of 848b. The game ball B that has entered the opening 848bH of the discharge portion 848b is discharged to the left portion 5a2b of the second game area 5a2 through the discharge portion 848b as shown in FIG. As described above, the game ball B released to the left portion 5a2b has a low probability of entering the first entrance 2006 and a high probability of entering the second entrance and passing through the gate unit 2003. It is relatively easy to win a prize in the special winning opening 2005.

  On the other hand, most of the game balls B, which roll while contacting the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force and collide with the stop portion 1006, enter the opening portion 848aH of the discharge portion 848a. As shown in FIG. 132, the game ball B entering the opening 848aH of the discharge portion 848a is discharged to the right side portion 5a2a of the second game area 5a2 through the discharge portion 848a. The game ball B released to the right side portion 5a2a is set such that the probability of entering the first entrance 2006 becomes larger than the probability of entering the second entrance and the probability of passing through the gate portion 2003 as described above. It is set, and can enter the first receiving port 2006 at an early stage and be processed like an out ball.

  Therefore, in the gauge configuration shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, the handle 182 is adjusted to be slightly weaker than the strongest level so that the game ball B strives to enter the discharge portion 848b from the communication passage portion 5a4, and thus the second game region 5a2. Can efficiently and safely reach the special winning opening 2005 via the left side portion 5a2b.

  When the game ball B hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result obtained is “normal hit”, the closed second starting port is closed. 2004 is open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0. 0). 01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. As the normal fluctuation time is shorter, the game ball B in which the "normal hit" is drawn in the gate unit 2003 can be accepted in the second starting port 2004.

  Note that if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period from when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 to when the normal lottery result is suggested, it is not possible to start suggesting the normal lottery result. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of reserves of the ordinary lottery result is limited to four, and if it is more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without suspension. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

[16. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 151 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control-side power-on process. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 175. FIG. 177 is an example of the main control-side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and then, the operation of an initial value updating type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[16-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used in the game control, a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not a big hit game state is generated, and whether or not a reach (reach loss) is generated when the big hit game state is not generated. Reach judgment random numbers to be used for determination and variable display for use in determining a variable display pattern of a special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400. A pattern random number and a jackpot symbol random number for use in determining a jackpot symbol derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot gaming state. And the big hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this big hit symbol random number, A random number for a small hit symbol for use in determining a small hit symbol derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 when it is generated, the random number for the small hit symbol , A random number for determining a small hit initial value for use in determining the initial value, and the like. In addition to these random numbers, a normal symbol hit determination random number for use in determining whether to open or close a movable piece capable of accepting a game ball in the second starting port 2004, and this normal symbol hit determination A random number for determining an initial value of a normal symbol for determination for use in determining an initial value of a random number for use, and a variable display pattern of a normal symbol which is variably displayed on a normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400. Normally, a random number for a symbol variation display pattern is prepared.

  Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the jackpot determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hardware random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value at a high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. After successively extracting other values within the predetermined numerical range, and completing extraction of all values within the predetermined numerical range, once again extracting one value within the predetermined numerical range, the main control Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a big hit determination random number. Is set as

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for symbol determination is usually updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. The counter counts up from the random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is referred to as an “initial value update type counter”. The random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the various information stored in the main controller as a numerical value and calculating the sum is the checksum value stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, for example, when it does not coincide with the (sum value), the random number for initial value determination for symbol hit determination is usually read from the built-in nonvolatile RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. The same fixed value is always taken out of the fixed numerical value range of the counter which takes out the ID code and updates the random number for symbol hit determination based on the taken out ID code. Perform initial value derivation to output a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by the execution of the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated as the random number for determining the initial value for the symbol hit determination. As described above, the value to be set to the random number for determining the initial value for the symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used to store the ID code, and the initial value derivation process is performed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. The second security countermeasure that derives the same fixed value based on the second security countermeasures prevents the analysis by taking two-stage security countermeasures.

  Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for a normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles the same, and obtains an ID code previously stored in a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit judgment value is illegally acquired, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is assigned, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a 'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is useless at all in the other game board 5 ′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1 ′, and thus the ID code is analyzed by being disassembled. Even if a momentary blackout is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 of the gate unit 2300 at each of the predetermined intervals, the movable piece is opened and closed to open the game ball to the second starting port 2004. Cannot generate a game state in which the game can be accepted.

[16-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates the address on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control-side power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. When the main control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets a RAM access permission (step S10). Update of the main control built-in RAM can be performed by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as a “built-in”) built in the main control MPU 1310a to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally. WDT control register ”). The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT is started, time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and a watchdog timer clear register (built-in to the main control MPU 1310a) is provided until the time counted reaches the time set by the timer set value. If the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register" below, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and time measurement is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As described above, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the processing of clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In the power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops. When the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from the time when the power is turned on to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). Have been.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the RAM clear switch 1310f is determined to be operated.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated in the determination in step S16, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, in the determination of step S16, when determining that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to a RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state where a RAM clearing process for initializing a RAM (that is, a main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the game information related to the game such as the probability variation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). This flag indicates whether or not various types of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) are to be deleted. The flag is set to a value of 1 when various types of information are deleted and a value of 0 when various types of information are not deleted. . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that there is an input of a power failure notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the input of the power failure notice signal continues. Thereby, the timer clear setting value is set to the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control-side power-on processing again. It should be noted that a detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when erasing various information and the value 0 when not erasing various information. In step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete various information, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is for calculating the sum of various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM assuming that the values are numerical values.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU 1310a compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off process (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that they match, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains various types of information, game sum information such as a checksum value (sum value) and a value of the backup flag BK-FLG in a main control built-in RAM in a main control side power-off process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. Will be described in detail later.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the main-control-side power-off process has ended normally, A work area is set (step S34). For this setting, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and the power recovery time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" refers to the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is turned off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or a momentary power outage, and illegal means (for example, a person who commits wrongdoing The high-frequency output from the hidden high-frequency output device is applied to the main control board 1310 to reset the main control MPU 1310a itself, and thereafter return to the original state.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, various kinds of information, checksum values (sum values), and the like are changed by performing various kinds of processing thereafter. If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared as described later.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S26, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not the value 0 (the value is 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be deleted, or in the determination of the step S30, When the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0). That is, when it is determined that the main control-side power-off process has not been completed normally, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. The main control MPU 1310a is used when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f instructs RAM clear and erases various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side If the power-off processing has not been completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is extracted, and the random number for symbol-per-symbol determination is updated based on the extracted ID code. Performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter, and uses this fixed value to determine the initial value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination described above. Set to random number for decision.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to a value 0 which is an initial value.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a later-described main control timer interrupt process is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633) and a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310a are described. The transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed and the presence / absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is also used to perform initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs a test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in a testing machine of the gaming machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various kinds of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs activation setting of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state is stored in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a in order to be updated by hardware. In addition to the setting of latching and acquiring a random number, the hard random number setting register is set to start the main control built-in hard random number circuit. When the main random number circuit with built-in main control is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted without duplication based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the predetermined values are determined one after another. When all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted. Are extracted one after another without duplication. Note that the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit when acquiring a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and outputs the main control built-in hardware when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number value as the random number for jackpot determination.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU 1310a performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (power recovery). A power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, which are divided into a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. To memorize. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various kinds of information are read out from the game backup information and various kinds of commands corresponding to the various kinds of information are stored. is there. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given of the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. Is done. The determination in step S54 is made based on the power failure notice signal.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs a non-hit random number updating process (step S56). In the non-hit random number updating process, the above-described reach determination random number, variation display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-hit random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the hit determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. The above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination, random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by the non-hit random number updating process.

  Subsequent to step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. Note that the processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the above-described various information including game information and other information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops the drive signals output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting port solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, and the like (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by assuming that the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, is regarded as a numerical value, and the sum thereof.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting of prohibition of RAM access (step S68). The setting of the RAM access prohibition makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

  Subsequent to step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. When the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control-side power-on processing again. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control-side power-off processing".

  As described above, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot make the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control-side power-off process. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control-side power-off process, and executes the main control-side power-on process again. . That is, since the main control-side power-off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off process immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control-side power-off processing is executed when the power is cut off, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the power is reset by the built-in reset circuit and restarted. The value (sum value) must not match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) in the process of step S38. The Rukoto.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, and performs the main control-side power-on processing by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Then, in step S32, it is determined whether or not the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally. Has been inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether or not the game backup information has been stored due to fraud.

  Here, the point that the determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby processing in step S22 will be described. First, a problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power failure notice signal in step S24, that is, a case where the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby processing in step S22 and the subsequent processing is advanced. Will be described.

  As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The charged electric charge is applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. That is, even when the power from the island facilities of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power outage, the charged electric charge is applied as DC +5 V to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the island of the game hall can be operated. The power-off process on the main control side can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the equipment is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power outage or momentary blackout occurs and an island facility in the game hall is provided. When the power supply from the power supply is shut off, the main control-side power-off processing can be surely completed.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 upon power recovery, a standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment, a system for performing drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (booted). 2.5 seconds is set), and immediately before the standby time is reached, if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, a hardware component such as an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Is charged as DC +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, an interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and thereafter, an interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated by the timer interrupt processing, the main control side power supply is turned on. It may become impossible to complete when processing main control side power-off during the process. For this reason, the main control-side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the value of the calculated checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control-side power-on process is started at the time of the power recovery this time, and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. In step S30, a value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is determined to be the same. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch 1310f is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even when the staff such as the game hall clerk operates the RAM clear switch 1310f and there is no intention to display the RAM clear by the staff such as the game hall clerk. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure notice signal is continuously input. Thereby, the timer clear setting value is set to the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20, but the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since the data is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, the process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step S24). If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby processing in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input. By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. The game information and other information (for example, the value of the main award ball number information output determination counter is not displayed. Various information including the information) can be prevented from being updated, so as never change occurs in the checksum calculation result. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the stored value of the checksum calculation and storage of step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure does not occur is initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs from being initialized.

  Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not interrupted after waiting in the wait time standby process), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the game while the pachinko machine 1 is in progress. Even if the power supply to the main control MPU 1310a is cut off, power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the game information on the progress of the game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) For storing various information including information indicating the value of an information output determination counter). The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a, because the main control MPU 1310a can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68, which is the processing, and the main control-side power-off processing constituted by an infinite loop. When the main control MPU 1310a restarts, the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculation result of the checksum in the backup process (that is, the value stored and calculated in step S64). Therefore, the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a forcibly resets the content of the main control built-in RAM by the main control built-in WDT. Can be restarted again without any updating of the main control side, while immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input, As described above, the main-control-side power-off process can be reliably completed within a "power-supply-securing period during a momentary power failure or power outage" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island facilities of the game hall is interrupted due to a momentary power failure or power failure during the process of turning on the main control side power when the power is restored, and the main control The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, when the main control-side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power-off or power-securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the process immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22 is performed. In step S24, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If the power failure notice signal has been input, it is determined in step S24. As long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated to set the timer clear in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12. By setting the value and clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT and starting the timekeeping again, the main control built-in WDT can forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a.

  The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT by such software, so that the steps subsequent to step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then, in step S52, The content of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) is prevented by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control timer interrupt process described later. Various kinds of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) can be prevented from being updated. When the power supply from the island facilities in the game hall is cut off due to the power outage or the instantaneous power outage, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination And other information including information indicating the value of the counter for the main control) and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and The other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) is divided into two parts: a part covered by hardware so as not to be changed at all. It is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control internal RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of a main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, the power is turned on (power is restored) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. In order to convey, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and the main control is built as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2404 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405. Here, first, a problem when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2404 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405, A problem in the case where the power-on main control return destination command does not reserve the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 will be described.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2405. When a momentary power failure or power outage occurs while the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member, and thereafter the power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs the main control in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, so that the attacker solenoid 2405 starts to be driven to open and close the special winning opening 2005 The state is shifted from the state closed by the member to the state opened.

  However, when an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game state as a game state, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 returns to the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the terminal, the screen can be displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state, and the big hit game state can be returned. It is not possible to display at all which round. That is, for example, a special winning opening 1 count display command for detecting the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 2005 by detecting a gaming ball entering the special winning opening 2005 and being detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403 is a main control board. Even when the peripheral control board 1510 receives and transmits the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it cannot be displayed at all which round (that is, what round) in the jackpot game state.

  In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2405 and ends the big winning opening 2005 by the opening / closing member, for example, when ending the fourth round (the fourth round) of the jackpot game state. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to open the big winning port 2005 from the state closed by the opening and closing member. (That is, the fifth round of the special winning opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the five rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  Also, for example, a screen (for example, a message indicating that the movable piece is open) indicating that the game state is in a game state in which game balls can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player. The main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the image on the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the second starting port is being controlled. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the 2004 is open, and the power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, so that the starting port solenoid 2404 starts driving and the movable piece is closed. So that the transition to the state for closing the second start-up port 2004 by work.

  However, when an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, an instantaneous blackout or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and can return, the game state that the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the game state that is advantageous to the player is obtained. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen to be transmitted in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. There is also a case where the player has forgotten that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state at the time of power restoration is returned to the game state in which game balls can be accepted to the second starting port 2004. Nevertheless, when the power is restored, a screen for instructing a game (that is, a screen for instructing a game to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the game is played. There is also a problem that the player does not know what game to play.

  As described above, in the above two examples, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the power failure or the power failure immediately after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting at the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power outage, and that the pachinko machine has failed. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, the power-on state command is issued). In step S50, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are transmitted in order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process.

  Thereby, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, for example, in the above-described example, in the four rounds of the jackpot game state, When a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and power is restored after that, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2405 is started as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large winning opening 2005 is opened from the state closed by the opening and closing member. Since the transition to the state can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 specifies that the fourth round of the jackpot game state (that is, the screen indicating the number of the round). Cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but in the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2 The screen that informs the user that driving of the 05 has been started and the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member (for example, "Big hit. The special winning opening is open. Insert a game ball into the special winning opening." A screen telling the player to play the game as if it were a ball) is displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine receives a power win 2005 after the power is restored. In the above-described example, for example, in the above-described example, a game state in which game balls can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 is provided, and a game state advantageous to the player is provided. In this state, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and power is subsequently restored, the starting port solenoid 2404 starts driving as a return destination of the main control board 1310 to open the movable piece. Screen that informs the user that the second starting port 2004 has been opened (for example, "The movable piece is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second starting port.") Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine enters a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. It is possible to instruct the player to play the ball.

  Thus, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and power is restored after that, it is possible to instruct the main control board 1310 to return to the peripheral control board 1510 in detail. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting at the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, and that the pachinko machine has failed. Can be prevented.

  Next, in a main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of a production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the power is first turned on after the main control board 1310 is manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 includes the above-described processing of steps S58 to S68 as a backup processing and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, the process proceeds to step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38.

  Thereby, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information classified as power-on. A power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball are generated by creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only three commands, that is, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the main control timer interrupt processing described later, a power-on state command is transmitted first, a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted, and then a power-on main prize ball number is transmitted. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is issued from the main control board 1310 as the first command. This is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, the power-on state command is such that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure). When the RAM is cleared, information indicating the fact and the power-on (including power-on, power-recovery in which power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs in addition to power-on) are described above. Information indicating which state (probability and time-saving state) to return from among the low-probability time-saving state, the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the high-probability non-time-saving state, and the model code of the pachinko machine And the information shown. Here, a description will be given of a problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

  When creating a so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine corresponds to the copyright of the work. What kind of game specification (for example, in addition to the game specification that if the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) ), It is possible to specify whether the game specification (such as a ST machine)) in which a probability variation occurs in the performed state.

  In the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker of the production line determines which one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the movies A, B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F), It is not clear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing on the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is manufactured to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the cartoon F). There is an assumption and misunderstanding that it is flowing on the production line.

  For this reason, when the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of works is mixed at the time of manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the worker of the manufacturing line will It is not possible to confirm which work the copyright of the manufactured main control board 1310 is for, and for any copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, It is not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a game specification (ST type) or a game specification (if a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs).

  Thereby, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 and the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of the works of a plurality of types is mixed. With the mixture of 1310, the game is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery and power recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is used. In step S50, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for output determination of the number of main prize balls is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process.

  Thus, the worker of the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the power of the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection apparatus Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described Max type indicating the model type, the middle type, And a sweet digital type, a series code for specifying which type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if a probability change occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability fluctuation in the state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited By watching the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the main control board 1310 determines which work is the copyright of the work. It is possible to determine which model type (maximum type, middle type, and sweet digital type) for the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or ST machine in which if a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs.

  Accordingly, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. The worker can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by looking at the inspection monitor, and separates the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work for each of the following main control boards 1310. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by an operation of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[16-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 175 and 176.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 177 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the above-described main control side power-on process, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Of the register bank to the register tank. Note that, in the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, the process of saving each register on the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In the timer subtraction process, for example, the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 are turned on according to a special symbol and a variable display pattern determined in the special electric accessory control process described later. The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a), in addition to the time, the time during which the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the ordinary symbol variation display pattern determined by the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing described later. , Such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal that indicates that the various types of commands transmitted by the payout control board 633 have been normally received is input. Perform management. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the ordinary symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. More specifically, the main control MPU 1310a includes, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, and a detection from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting opening sensor 3002. Signal, a detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first starting port sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, a first receiving port sensor The payout control board 633 normally receives the detection signal from the 2406, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 for notifying the Is stored in the input information storage area of the built-in RAM. When the detection signal from the first start-up sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start-up sensor 2402 are read, respectively, a start-up winning command corresponding to the other is transmitted as transmission information to the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the detection signal from the first start-up opening sensor 3002, a start-up winning command corresponding to this detection signal is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. When there is a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402, a starting port winning command corresponding to the detection signal is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, when the switch input processing is started, the state is being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those that have been subjected to the vacant terminal processing). First, each is read as a first time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs), each is read again as a second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there were no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input processing, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those in which the unused terminal processing is performed) is performed for the first to third times. By performing the reading twice, that is, the reading twice for comparison by performing the comparison and the reading twice for comparing the second to fourth times, the erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, or the like can be avoided. Since it is possible to perform the detection, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002, the first The detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the starting port sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, The detection signal from the sensor 2403, the detection signal from the first entrance sensor 2406, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), and the prize transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that notifies that the ball control has been normally received by the payout control board 633.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to the vacant terminal process is performed based on the information obtained in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an unused terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring processing, information obtained in the switch input processing in step S104 as to whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the vacant terminal processing is applied among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW. Perform based on. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal to which the vacant terminal processing has been performed is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a is divided into a notification display for notifying that a failure has occurred in a peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a hit random number update process (step S106). In the hit random number updating process, the above-described random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol initial value, which is updated in the non-hitting random number updating process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 176, And the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control-side main process and the main control-side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the hit determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the hit random number updating process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by the hit random number updating process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for determining a symbol hit is a counter of an initial value update type, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from a minimum value to a maximum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the hit random number updating process updates the initial value determination random number for hit determination. The random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In the present embodiment, the random number for determining a big hit symbol initial value and the random number for determining a small hit symbol initial value are determined in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 176. Although the update is performed in the hit random number update process and the hit random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process of the present routine, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven every time the interrupt timer is generated. If the number of times of execution of the non-hit-hit random number updating process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer of , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56. .

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area to create a prize ball command for paying out game balls based on the input information, or the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the like. Or a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the substrates. Then, the created award ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. Therefore, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey this effect, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, When a payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 633 has normally received the command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. It is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  In the prize ball control process in step S108, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. In this case, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified into other sections, is created to convey that effect, and is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main award ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main award ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read out from the input information storage area described above and based on the input information, that is, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 provided on the game board 5. , A second starting port 2004, a special winning port 2005, and other various winning ports (hereinafter referred to as "various winning ports provided in the game board 5"). The number of game balls to be put out is counted, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control processing in step S108. In the prize ball control processing in step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read out. Is read from the input information storage area described above, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added based on the input information, and the value indicating the added number of balls is 10 Is exceeded (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to convey that effect, and the transmission information The value stored in the output information storage area and the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is used as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter as the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It is adapted to store update.

  Subsequent to step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a frame command receiving process (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to that effect is transmitted to the payout control board 633 and stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Also, the main control MPU 1310a shapes the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancel navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and are stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this cheating detection processing, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a is compared with the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b. If the logic is different, an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball of approximately the same diameter as a game ball or approximately the same as that of a game ball) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. It is determined that an illegal act (hereinafter, referred to as "radiation irradiation goto") by radio wave irradiation using a synthetic resin ball having a diameter is performed, and the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is incremented by 1 (increment). I do. The value of the radio wave goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that the radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process. When the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection processing is performed by the main control timer interrupt processing). A radio wave irradiation goto notification command, which is classified into a notification display that indicates that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, is created and stored as transmission information in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Here, the radio wave irradiation goto will be described briefly. A ball or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as the ball) is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540 to enter the first starting port 2002, Radio wave irradiation is performed in a state where the game ball is stopped in an area for detecting a game ball passing through the mouth sensor (a ball passage detection area of the first starting port sensor). Thus, when the radio wave irradiation is performed in a state where the game ball is parked in the ball passage detection area of the first starting port sensor (that is, when the radio wave irradiation is turned ON), the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor is changed. While the logic that the game ball is not detected is obtained, while the radio wave irradiation is not performed (that is, the radio wave irradiation is turned off), the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor becomes the logic that the game ball is detected. . In other words, while the game ball is parked in the ball passage detection area of the first starting port sensor, the radio wave irradiation is turned on and the radio wave irradiation is turned off, so that the ball passing detection of the first starting port sensor is repeated. A signal indicating that a plurality of game balls have passed through the area can be generated in a pseudo manner and output from the first starting port sensor to the main control board 4100.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor subside 3002b are dimensioned to be larger than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension so that such a radio wave irradiation goto can be found. They are spaced apart by a distance (43 mm in this embodiment). As a result, an illegal ball having a flexible string-like operation line attached thereto is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140, and enters the first starting port 2002. Then, an area for detecting a game ball passing through the first starting port sensor main side 3002a (a ball passing detection area on the first starting port sensor main side 3002a) or a game ball passing the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b Even if a stationary state can be formed in the area where the ball is detected (the ball passing detection area of the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b), the player performing the misconduct turns on the radio wave irradiation or radiates the radio wave. The logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002b always differ by repeatedly turning off and on. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value, a radio wave irradiation goto notification command that is divided into a notification display that indicates that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is created, and the transmission information is described above. It can be stored in the transmission information storage area. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the radio wave irradiation goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a staff such as a clerk of a game hall can discover the radio wave irradiation goto at an early stage. It has become.

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 is input when the game is not in the jackpot game state (the special winning opening). For example, when a game ball enters the ball in 2005), a prize abnormal display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and a random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is used as the main signal. It is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a big hit determination random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) matches the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. (It is determined whether or not a big hit game state is to be generated (referred to as "special lottery")), or the value of a counter for updating the random number for the big hit symbol is taken out, and a certainty hit determination previously stored in the main control built-in ROM is taken out. For example, it is determined whether or not the value matches the value (whether or not to generate a probability change).

  Here, “probability variation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of a probable change) which is set higher than that at a normal time (a low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 is set for the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and is read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value is read for the high probability. 32767 is set, and is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in ROM are stored in advance. When it is determined whether or not the stored big hit determination value matches, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the big hit determination range. It depends on whether it is done.

  When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first starting port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are based on the second starting port sensor 2402. If it is due to the special pattern 2, various commands related to the tuning effect are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern so as to light the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400. (2) Set the output of the lighting signal to the special symbol display 1406 and store it in the output information storage area described above as output information. That. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is set, various commands (big hit opening command, big win opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1 closing display command, big win opening 1 closing display command) (A winning port 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. For example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2405 is operated to open and close the opening and closing member. When the output is set and stored in the output information storage area as the output information, or when the number of times (large round) in which the special winning opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is two, the round display 1408 of the function display unit 1400 Point to the 2 round indicator lamp to turn on the 2 round indicator lamp The output of the signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is 15, the 15 round display lamp of the round display 1408 of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so that the 15 round display lamp is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or the presence or absence of the occurrence of the probability variation is lit in a predetermined color. Is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port based on this determination result, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted and the gate information of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information. The information is stored in the information storage area.

  The gate information storage area is provided with a 0-th section to a third section (four sections), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0-th section, the first section, the second section, and the third section. It has become. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. Store in parcel.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first section and the second section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the normal reservation indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400 is turned on such that the total number of the stored gate information is set as the reservation ball. The output of the lighting signal of the ordinary hold display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned gate information, and stored as output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

  Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and a random number for a symbol hit determination is usually extracted from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is opened and closed is determined based on the result of the determination (the result of the lottery by the normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed in this determination, the movable piece is in the opened state, so that the second starting port 2004 is in a game state in which game balls can be received, and a game state advantageous to the player is achieved. The variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified into the ordinary figure tuning effect-related are created, and the transmission information storage described above as the transmission information is performed. In the area, the output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, The output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Also, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for the normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric winning effect are created and transmitted. While the information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2404 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. When the value of the symbol hit determination random number does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-described ordinary symbol variation display pattern random number. , Create a variety of commands that are related to the general figure synchronizing production related, and store it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined ordinary symbol variation display pattern, and the output information described above as the output information Store in the storage area.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a main payment ACK signal when normally receiving various commands from the payout control board 633 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to an attacker solenoid 2405 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the special winning opening 2005 when the jackpot is in a gaming state, and a driving signal is output to a starting opening solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to this, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2 rounds jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, information output signal during working hours, start opening prize Various information (game information) signals relating to the game such as an information output signal are sent to the payout control board 633. A force to or.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the transmission information is read from the above-described transmission information storage area, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are created in the main-control-side timer interrupt process that is the main routine and that are classified into special figure 1 tuning effects, various commands that are classified in special figure 2 tuning effects, and big hits. (For example, a special winning opening one count display command corresponding to a special winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball entering the special winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands that are classified as power-on, various commands that are generally related to synchronizing effects, various commands that are generally related to directing, various commands that are classified as information displays, and various types that are classified as status displays. Commands, various commands related to tests, and other various commands (for example, the main control board 1310 is The main prize ball number information output signal is output as main prize ball number information each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls on the basis of the game balls entering the various prize holes reaches 10 balls. , A main prize ball number information output command for instructing the hall computer to transmit the information via the external terminal board 558). In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of three bytes. Specifically, the main serial data has a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by assuming the mode as a numerical value, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as DC + 5V. At least the main serial transmission port built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. Is available. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the power is transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176. Power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output counter Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main power serial data includes a power-on state command, a status, a mode, and a sum value in the order of: A status, a mode, and a sum value which are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and subsequently constitute a power-on main control return destination command. Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, various kinds of information are read out from the game backup information, and according to the various kinds of information. In some cases, various commands are stored. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting a timer clear set value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is restarted, so that the main control built-in WDT does not have to forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a.

  Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the above-described backup for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off during the progress of the game. The power can be cut off on the pachinko machine 1 based on the game information on which the backup processing has been executed as a destination to which the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 should be restored when the power is restored, while the processing can be completed. In this routine, a power-on main control return destination command for instructing a drive state of the starting port solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405, which are electric drive sources by the port output process of step S118 in this routine, is output to the peripheral control board 1510. You can do it. That is, in the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176, the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. A power-on state command classified as power-on for notifying that power has been turned on (power recovery) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area. A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, a power-on state command is configured as main serial data. A status, a mode, and a sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the status, a mode, and a sum value. Subsequently, the power supply is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the status, the mode, and the sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls when outputting power.

  Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indicates the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of the power recovery. Can be effected and displayed. With this, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while the player is playing a game, and when power is subsequently restored, the game state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage can be quickly restored after the power is restored. And the effect of the main control board 1310 to return to the progress of the game can be displayed and displayed in the display area of the display unit 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, that is, in a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from being mistaken for a malfunction as seen by the player. Therefore, by returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure immediately after the power recovery, it is possible to prevent a player from being mistaken for a failure.

  Further, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for the inspection, as shown in FIG. At step S38 in the main control-side power-on processing shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared. Thus, in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 176, if the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on The power-on main control return destination command and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only three commands, a status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As a serial data, configure a power-on state command, send to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, then configure a power-on main control return destination command, The status, the mode, and the sum value are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of the status, the mode, and the sum value. The signals are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection step in order. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process forms information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for specifying the type among the max type, the middle type, and the sweet type indicating the model type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification. (For example, in addition to the game specification that when the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of the special symbol changes is limited (ST Machine), etc., and based on the game specification code for identifying the It has become.

[17. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 illustrated in FIG. 151 will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing at the time of power supply of the payout control unit. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing at the time of power supply of the payout control unit in FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[17-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 178 to 180 under the control of the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633. . When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets an interrupt mode (step S500). In this interrupt mode, the priority order of interrupts of the payout control MPU 633aa is set. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, that process is performed with priority.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU 633aa performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU 633aa performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. You. Similarly, during the period from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notification voltage and stabilizes. In the present embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds ( ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 has been operated (step S512). This determination does not indicate that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. While it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to instruct RAM clear. Then, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated.

  When determining in step S512 that the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU 633aa is in a state in which the RAM clearing process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prize ball information storage area). And the state of the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area and the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. This flag indicates whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the existing PRDY signal output setting information) is to be deleted. The flag is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is deleted and a value of 0 when the payout information is not deleted. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 633aa.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting allows access to the payout control built-in RAM, for example, to write (store) or read out payout information.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily indicates a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates the address on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer is returned to the initial address by reading sequentially from the last stack to the first stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not deleted (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the sum of the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM assuming that the payout information is a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (at the time of power-off) described later. (Step S526). If the payout control MPU 633aa determines in step S526 that they match, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and a checksum value has been stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in a power supply cutoff process described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process has been completed normally and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process has not been completed normally.

  In the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the payout control unit power-off process has ended normally, Is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the payout control built-in ROM) built in the payout control MPU 633aa, The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prize stored in the prize ball information storage area) are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information on payout of mismatch counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “power recovery” includes not only a state where the power is turned on after the power is turned off, but also a state where the power is restored after the power failure or the momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not the value 0 (the value is 1), that is, determines that the payout information is to be deleted, or in the determination of the step S526, When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, If it is determined that the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). This clears the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU 633aa performs an interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set at step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). By setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order, the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is transmitted from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Is entered. The determination in step S540 is made based on the power failure notice signal.

  When determining in step S540 that the payout control MPU 633aa determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process which is performed every 2 ms, which will be described later. The value is set to 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and to 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Is set.

  In the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU 633aa returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, and the payout control MPU 633aa receives the power failure notice signal as an input. It is determined whether or not it has been performed.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value of the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to 0 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) relating to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as driving information, awarded ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 633c are stored, and the payout is performed based on the output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the control MPU 633aa, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 as a prize ball number information output signal. And outputs to the terminal plate 558 (in this embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a prize ball information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball information is provided. Is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. Is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the game.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and updated based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing in step S550 described later.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the read value of the read prize ball information output determination counter exceeds the value of 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches ten, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (in this case, the number of balls that have exceeded the number is displayed). The value is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as a value of the award ball number information output determination counter.), And a display signal is output to the error LED display 633c.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit , A BRDY signal and a CR connection signal, and a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing described later have been normally received, as input information. It is stored in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer updating process, when it is determined whether or not the ball discharge state is caused by the discharge blades 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 is transmitted, the ball discharge determination time set as the determination condition; The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the full tank determination time and the detection signal from the ball disconnection detection sensor 574. In addition to performing time management, such as a ball-out determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls that have been paid out and received by the ball container 589b of the payout blade 589, and the actual A determination is made as to whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the payout of game balls inconsistent due to a mismatch between the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 is repeatedly performed. At this time, time management of the mismatch determination counter reset determination time set with the determination condition is performed. For example, when the ball dust determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the ball dust determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball gazing judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. The payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area) Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of PRDY signal output setting information in which the signal logic state is set.

  By this processing, for example, even after a momentary power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, and the like at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary or blackout. With this, even when the payout device 580 performs the payout operation of the game balls, the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or power outage, and the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. As a result, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit and, when paying out the game balls to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202, causes an instantaneous blackout or power outage and the CR unit And the exchange of various signals is interrupted, and even if it becomes impossible to continue paying out game balls, when the power is restored, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. The value is restored to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power outage stored as the payout backup information, Recovery of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit immediately before a power outage or power outage occurs. It is possible to continue from, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous stop or stop when the power is restored, even if the instantaneous stop or stop occurs. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit can be improved.

  Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication processing, upon power recovery, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the read-out PRDY signal output setting information is set to, for example, the logical state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is controlled to be paid out. It outputs to the CR unit from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU 633aa. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM and included in the payout backup information, for example, in a retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH based on the following formula. Is determined, that is, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, As an output setting of the error status to the CR unit, for example, pay the ball rental when not communicating with the CR unit. The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  Thus, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit. As described above, for example, if the operation of paying out the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the instantaneous stop, the state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit, and the payout device 580 is sent to the CR unit. Can be notified that the payout operation of the game ball due to is abnormal. Thus, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on the CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, when the pachinko machine is used. When the power is turned on and the payout control board 633 is electrically connected to the CR unit, PRDY is sent to inform that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is possible. The logic state of the signal is output as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible. To convey the fact is outputted from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU633aa to CR unit logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW. The state of the logic of the EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In the full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether or not the game ball is full, or the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the above-described ball guiding unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Or not. For example, whether or not the lower plate 202 is full of the stored game balls is determined by using the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms in the current full and full ball detection processing from the full tank detection sensor 154. The detection signal is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out of ball check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 changes from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, the timer for the above-described full tank determination time is started in the timer update processing in step S552. When the full tank determination time reaches the value 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the lower plate 202 is full of the stored game balls, and the full tank information for notifying the fact is stored in the above-described state information storage area. I do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information notifying that the lower plate 202 is not full with the stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area.

  The determination of whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number is also performed by using the timer interrupt cycle 2ms, and checking the current full tank and running out of balls. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is turned ON, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch becomes OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 becomes When the state transitions from OFF to ON, the counting of the above-mentioned ball out determination time is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the ball-out determination time reaches a value of 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is ON in this full and ball-out determination processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number, and the ball is informed. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than the predetermined number. The ball breaking information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a command receiving process (step S558). In this command receiving process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When the various commands are normally received, payer ACK information notifying the fact is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when the various commands cannot be received normally, a connection error that indicates that an error has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an error has occurred in the various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, ball lending, ball elimination and ball damage are performed, a retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (award ball stock number) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU 633aa performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 633c of the payout control board 633 is created, and the above-described output information storage area is written as LED display information. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not a predetermined number or more, a corresponding action is taken. The display data (display value 1 (the number “1”) in this embodiment) is created, and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read from the above-described status information storage area, and various commands (frame status 1 command, error cancel navigation command, and frame status 2 command) classified into status display are created based on the various types of information. And sends it to main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on the out-of-ball information, if the number of game balls taken into the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not a predetermined number or more, the frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

  After step S568, the flow returns to step S539 again, where the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether or not a power failure notice signal has been input. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 is performed. Sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, performs port output processing in step S548, performs port input processing in step S550, and performs step S552. The timer is updated in step S5. 4 for performing a CR communication process, performing a full or missing ball check process in a step S556, performing a command reception process in a step S558, performing a command analysis process in a step S560, and performing a main operation setting process in a step S562. LED display data creation processing is performed in S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. Note that the processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 633aa varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa preferentially outputs the payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. I have. As a result, the payout control MPU 633aa secures the processing time so that the other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when it is determined that the power failure notice signal has been input, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-described rewriting of the payout information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control MPU 633aa stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated as the sum of the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM except for the storage area of the value of the checksum calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thus, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU 633aa sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

  Subsequent to step S582, the payout control MPU 633aa enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 633aa is reset, and thereafter, the power-on processing of the payout control unit is performed again. Note that the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “dispensing control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 633aa) is reset when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, and performs a power up process of the payout control unit by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the pay-out backup information stored in the pay-out control built-in RAM is normal. Has been inspected. As described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is double-checked to check whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to fraud.

[17-2. Dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the processing at the time of powering on the payout control unit shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the timer interrupt to prohibition and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 181 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU 633aa switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU 633aa sets interruption permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[18. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 151 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 184 is an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 186 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. . In this embodiment, as the priority of the interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is set highest, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. They are set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

  As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I / O interfaces integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[18-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, as shown in FIG. 182, a process at the time of turning on the power of the peripheral control unit is performed under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process for initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, a process for determining hot start / cold start, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, a process for transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC 1510a is extremely short. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, a command related to control of a game effect output from the main control board 1310. And a state in which various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information specifying the year, month and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are obtained from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Set calendar information and current time information.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a later-described peripheral control unit steady-state process. Is not set, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to transmit a V blank signal indicating that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed in response to the execution. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 0 to initialize the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG once. After setting the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), the process returns to step S1006 again to determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset. ing.

  In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to The value 1 is set (step S1008). This steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is activated, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of times, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the 1ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the effect operation unit 300 are provided. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382. Various information (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotary operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300) obtained by acquiring the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the pressing operation The operation history information of the unit 303 is set based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Monitors operation whether the rotational direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light are based on the above-described lamp pallet setting table including the specified luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. And are set respectively. During the demonstration (demonstration performed in a waiting state of the player) or during the production, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) performs the production operation section 301 (rotation operation). When the user operates the unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to set one specified luminance value from the first specified luminance value to the 31st specified luminance value which is the maximum luminance, the set luminance is set. The above-described gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be updated so as to have the specified value.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, in a display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates the image data on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Thereby, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the VDP drawing capability of the peripheral control IC 1510a, output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. I have. This makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time. However, although a so-called frame drop occurs, the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame by the sound data output processing described later. A mechanism is provided in which various loudspeakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter, referred to as “various loudspeakers”) can prioritize the production of music, sound effects, and the like in accordance with various productions. In this display data output process, the light emission data indicated by the pointer among the light emission data pointed by the pointer among the light emission data arranged in chronological order constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. It outputs to various decorative boards provided and various decorative boards (including a panel drive board 1720) provided on the game board 5.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in a sound data creation process described later, a sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and outputs sound to various speakers from the set output channel. Output. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct what number of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. To update the pointer.

  In the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate the order of the emission data from the first emission data among the emission data arranged in time series that constitute the emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  In the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound command data indicating sound data such as music and sound effects, the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the order of the drive data from the first drive data is set as the output target. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The driving data of the electric driving sources, such as motors and solenoids, arranged in time series and constituting the electric driving source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the motor and the solenoid are driven in accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time its own process is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the drive data is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so as to instruct the drive data that should originally be instructed.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a reception command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the received command analysis processing, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyzes the various commands performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads, from the control ROM 1510b, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like based on the analyzed various commands ( (Extracted) Set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one of the received command analysis processes. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light are based on the above-described lamp pallet setting table including the specified luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. And are set respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the emission mode generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes a lamp pallet setting process. Then, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) operates the rendering operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum luminance from the first luminance designated value. When one specified luminance value up to 31 specified luminance values is set, the above-described gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a so as to have the specified specified luminance value. It has become.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt processing is, for example, a start-up winning command for instructing the start of a start-up winning effect, a normal symbol A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of holds (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of start-retention changes, a special winning opening It analyzes whether or not it is a special winning opening 1 count display command output every time a game ball is accepted in 2005, and recognizes which game state is currently in play.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the received command analysis processing, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Performs analysis of various commands. Various commands are classified into various commands related to Toku-zu 1 entrained production, various commands classified into Toku-zu 2 synchronized production, various commands classified into jackpot-related, various commands classified into power-on, and various commands. Various commands classified in the synchronizing production-related, various commands classified in the normal electric role production-related, various commands classified in the notification display, various commands classified in the status display, various commands classified in the test-related and There are various other commands.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 includes various commands classified into notification display, the display is set to an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read out (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically changed to another abnormal notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is supposed to. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that another abnormality has occurred and one abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality and before resolving the abnormality. Can be.

  Subsequent to step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is read from the control ROM 1510b out of the time-series screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data. It is read (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing of step S1020, and among the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound instruction data indicated by the pointer is updated. It is read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and outputs sound data such as music and sound effects in accordance with the track numbers specified in the sound command data. At the same time, the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation processing, each time the sound data creation processing is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is performed), the sound volume adjustment switch 1510d is controlled based on the sound volume adjustment operation signal from the sound volume adjustment switch 1510d. The slide position is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the sound volume corresponds to the slide position of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and the sound data output process of step S1018 sets the sound data in this sound data creation process. The sound data is output from the output channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matched to various effects are played from various speakers.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the sound volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the sound volume adjustment switch 1510d. The sound source of the control IC 1510a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff such as a store clerk in a game hall slides the volume adjustment switch 1510d and sets the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music and sound effects from various speakers is reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction has occurred or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set at a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent a staff such as a clerk of the game hall from becoming difficult to notice the malfunction or the illegal act of the player by the notification sound. Also, based on the current volume set by the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while the advertising sound is adjusted. It is possible that the screen (image) displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be rendered as more powerful, in addition to music and sound effects, in addition to music and sound effects, or the game state may shift to an advantageous gaming state for the player. You can even tell them you are expensive.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up in a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are copied. The data is copied and backed up in a backup area for regular processing provided in 1510c2.

  Subsequent to step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing (step S1038), and returns to step S1004 again to detect the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value to 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1008 to step S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit regular processing”.

  In the peripheral control unit steady processing, first, in step S1008, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the routine processing is started by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG. , And steps S1014,..., And step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be received from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is transmitted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to the peripheral control IC 1510a. The value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process (to be described later) that is executed in response to an input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[18-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. 183 (step S1045). As described above, this flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 182 is being executed. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not the value 0 (is 1), that is, determines that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, determines that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the CPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB -Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050), and end this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady-state processing is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. When the process is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit is performing the regular processing. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is determined that the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed by the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled halfway and the peripheral control unit regular processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the power-on process (peripheral control unit regular process), the routine control unit sets the value 1 in the regular process flag SP-FLG in step S1008 to indicate that the peripheral control unit regular process is being executed. In step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit regular process) in FIG. 182, the value 0 is set to the steady process flag SP-FLG in the peripheral control unit regular process. Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, and the routine processing flag SP-FLG is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine. It is determined whether or not the value is 0, that is, whether or not execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. To have. In other words, this is a process in a case where the peripheral control unit normal processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, and the processing is aborted.

  Accordingly, in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the next time in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. In a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of this time when the processing has failed is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady-state process. However, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state process that has failed as described above exists, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. Instead, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit regular processing has failed, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is not guaranteed. It does not collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing is not performed, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the effect.

[18-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 182 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33, as shown in FIG. 184 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, and then the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. More specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs first, and the second,..., And 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts are sequentially performed. Will occur.

  In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, that the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is set to the peripheral control unit V Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the first generation of the 1 ms timer interrupt is started. ing.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1-ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the CPU adds the value 1 to the 1-ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding a value of 1 to the number of times of execution of the 1 ms timer interrupt STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process in the process of turning on the peripheral control unit in FIG. 182. The number of times the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit as this routine is executed is increased by one time.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In the motor and solenoid driving process, the pointer is designated by the pointer of the driving data of the electric driving sources such as the motors and the solenoids arranged in time series which constitute the electric driving source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In accordance with the drive data to be driven, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid are driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and the solenoid drive process are executed. I do. Thus, an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a (for example, an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 and an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5) ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors included in various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby obtaining history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, original information). Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, based on the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5. The movable position is grasped by setting the position and acquiring the movable position.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in effect operation unit 300 have been input, and thereby history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit) The rotation (rotation direction) history information of the 302 and the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303 are created, and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. From the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the rotation direction of the rotary operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be obtained.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a backup process (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are copied. The data is copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In the present embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are set to different areas, and the SDRAM 1510c1 , 1510c2, and a backup area for steady-state processing provided in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are set to different areas.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 182, various processes related to the effects of steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. I have. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt will After the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt is performed. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the effect.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[18-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a transmits the main peripheral serial data to the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a by one byte (8 bits). ) Is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is allocated as the first byte, the mode is allocated as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte, and the total is obtained. Is calculated.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the one-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 185 (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer sets a period during which one-byte (8-bit) information of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

  In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, the 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. If it is determined that it is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment). Step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data is set. When the value is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially transmitted from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been removed.

  In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the reception counter SRXC has a value other than 3, that is, the mode in which the status is the first byte of the main serial data and is still the second byte of the main serial data. If it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has not been sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main serial data, When it is determined that a certain mode and the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, an initial value 0 is set in a reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). This calculation is performed by regarding the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, already taken out of the reception buffer in step S1202 as numerical values, and sums them (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facilities of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. It is under the environment that is easy to receive.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are regarded as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Has been determined. Accordingly, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data has changed to a non-regular main circumference serial data under the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

  In the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a matches the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 with the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined that the status has been received, the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a (step S1216). ), End this routine.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, the 1-byte (8-bit) of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the time period has elapsed since the information can be received, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. If it is determined that the sum does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine ends.

[18-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing executed when the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first activates a 2-microsecond timer as shown in FIG. 186 (step S1300), and determines whether the power failure notice signal is input. Is determined (step S1302). In the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notice signal has not been input, the CPU ends this routine as it is.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has not elapsed for two macroseconds, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If it is determined, the routine is terminated as it is, while if it is determined that the power failure notice signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing of this routine is started.

  In the determination of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notification signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing of this routine is started, the CPU performs the power saving processing. Performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motor and the solenoid provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a period during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can operate.

  Subsequent to step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a command reception waiting process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least a period of 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control IC 1510a can receive the command being transmitted. It is designed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is copied and backed up to a regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, the CPU performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notification signal is not input, or returns to step S1312 again after step S1314, and determines whether the power failure notification signal is input. Is determined. That is, it is determined infinitely whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely as described above, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a cannot output a clear signal to the external WDT when it determines that the power failure notice signal has not been input in the determination of step S1312, While the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1312 that the power failure notice signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 182 is restarted.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notice signal continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. So that they do n’t. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. Has become. Thus, even if the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the present routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure notice signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination at S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset because the WDT clear processing of step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting and returning.

[19. Technical means, effects, etc.]
In addition, as described below, the above-described embodiment includes many technical means for solving the problem and the background art with Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-29741 as a prior patent document.

[Background Art]
A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board having a game area in which a game is performed, and a door frame having a door window which closes a front side of the game board and makes the game area visible from the front. In the game area seen through the door window, the player can enjoy the game by playing the game.

  This type of gaming machine includes a storage plate for storing game media for playing a game, and a bulging portion bulging forward from below the door window on the front surface of the door frame, and a bulging portion. And a decorative body attached to the upper surface have been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1). According to the technique of the prior patent document, the appearance of the upper surface of the bulging portion can be improved by the decorative body.

  However, in the technology of the prior patent document, since the decorative body is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion, the decorative body becomes difficult to see when viewing the gaming machine from the front or side, so that the decoration in the entire gaming machine is difficult. The decoration effect by the body was weak, and the appeal to the player was insufficient. Further, when the player puts his hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his hand on the storage dish, a part of the decorative body is hidden by the player's hand. In such a case, it becomes difficult for the player to notice the light-emitting decoration, and there is a possibility that some players may lose their interest in the game because they do not notice the light-emitting decoration and feel bad.

[Solution]
In view of the above circumstances, there is provided a gaming machine which has a high appealing power to a player and which can suppress a decrease in interest of the player in a game by luminous decoration.

[Technical means for solving the problem]
Means 1: In a gaming machine,
"A gaming board having a game area where a game is played,
A body frame holding the game board detachably from the front,
A door frame base that has a door window that closes the front side of the main body frame so as to be openable and closable and allows the game area to be viewed from the front;
A bulging portion bulging forward from a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base and having a storage plate capable of storing a game medium for performing a game in the game area; ,
The front end of the storage pan is attached to the bulging portion, and the front end extends forward from the front surface of the door frame base to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the entire width of the door frame base. A projecting decorative body,
And a decorative body light emitting means for performing decorative decoration of the decorative body in accordance with a game state changed by playing a game in the game area. "

  Here, as the "game", "the player inputs a game medium aiming at a specific reception where a special lottery for generating an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous is performed, and the game medium is supplied to the specific reception. When a special lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state occurs due to acceptance is drawn, a specific reception port for paying out a predetermined number of game media by receiving the game medium is opened, so that the game medium is aimed at a specific reception port. `` Game to drive '', `` game to drive the game medium aiming at the entrance where the privilege including the payout of the game medium is given '', `` multiple games each having a plurality of symbols After rotating the torso, a game in which the rotation of each torso is stopped so as to be a combination of symbols to which a privilege including a payout of a game medium is given is provided. Examples of the above-mentioned "game medium" include "sphere-shaped ones (game balls)" and "disk-shaped ones (medals)".

  The “game area” in which a game is performed has a plurality of entrances in which a game medium is driven in by a player's operation and a privilege including a payout of the game medium is given in accordance with the acceptance of the game medium. Area '', `` each has a plurality of symbols, each of which is rotated by the player's start operation triggered by the insertion of the game medium, and the combination of symbols stopped by the player's stop operation A region where a plurality of torso bodies to which a privilege including payout of a game medium is provided in accordance therewith is provided.

  The “body frame” includes “a frame that can be opened and closed (hinge rotatable) with respect to a frame-shaped outer frame that is mounted on an island facility of a game hall where a gaming machine is installed”, A device that is directly attached to an island facility of a game hall to be installed, a device that includes a payout device for a game medium for playing a game, and the like.

  Further, as the “bulging portion”, in addition to the storage plate, “a device provided with an operation unit operated by a player to play a game”, “a storage plate for storing a game medium for performing a game” What is provided "," What is provided with an effect operation unit that can accept operation of the player when the player participation type effect is executed "," Lending operation unit that rents out game media for playing games " Which is provided with ".

  In addition, examples of the “storage dish” include “one provided with a plurality of vertically separated”, “one provided with only one”, and the like.

  Further, as the “decorative body”, “the imitation of a predetermined item in accordance with the concept of a gaming machine”, “the imitation of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of a gaming machine”, “the imitation of a concept in accordance with the concept of a gaming machine” That imitates a predetermined scene ". The reason why the distance from the front surface of the door frame base to the front end of the decorative body is within the range of 1/3 to 2/3 of the entire width of the door frame base is that if the distance is shorter than 1/3 of the full width, This is because the amount of protrusion forward is about the same as that of a conventional gaming machine, and the appeal to the player cannot be sufficiently increased. If the distance is longer than 2/3 of the entire width, the decorative body will protrude too far forward. This may disturb the player and make it difficult to select the gaming machine as a game machine.

  In addition, “according to the game state” includes “games to a reception port (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, a grand winning opening, a special winning opening, a V winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area”. "In response to receiving a medium", "in response to a game medium flowing in the game area passing through a specific area (for example, a gate, a warp passage, a stage shelf, etc.)" and "disposed in the game area." According to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game medium into the reception port (for example, the starting port), "the lottery is performed by receiving the game medium into the reception port (for example, the starting port) arranged in the game area" Depending on the type of production (for example, reach production, big hit production, losing production, etc.) to suggest the special lottery result, "a plurality of symbols each having a plurality of symbols are provided with the introduction of game media." According to the rotation of the torso of the The game media to be driven into the game area according to the combination of the symbols of the stopped torso after rotating a plurality of the torso each provided with a plurality of symbols in response to the insertion of "According to the driving amount of the game medium", "according to the length of the driving blank of the game medium to be driven into the game area", and the like.

  The “decorative body light emitting means” includes “full-color LED”, “monochromatic LED”, “high-brightness LED”, “organic EL”, “incandescent sphere”, “neon sphere”, “cold-cathode tube”, and the like. No.

  According to the structure of the means 1, the gaming machine has a gaming area in which a game is played, a main body frame detachably holding the gaming board from the front, and a front side of the main body frame can be opened and closed. And a door frame base having a door window that allows the game area to be viewed from the front, and a portion swelling forward from a portion below the door window on the front of the door frame base, A bulging portion provided with a storage plate capable of storing a game medium for playing a game in the area, and attached to the bulging portion, forward from the front end of the storage plate, and forward from the front of the door frame base. A decorative body whose front end protrudes to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the entire width of the door frame base, and a light emitting decoration according to a game state that is changed by playing the decorative body in the game area. And a decorative body light emitting means to be provided.

  As a result, a swelling portion provided with a storage plate capable of storing the game medium swells forward in a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that closes the main body frame so that the main body frame can be opened and closed. In addition, the bulging portion has a decorative body having a length of 1/3 to 2/3 of the entire width of the door frame base and a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base. Thereby, when the gaming machine is attached to the island facilities of the gaming hall, the decorative body protrudes greatly below the door window where the inside of the game area can be visually recognized, so that the decorative body stands out more than other gaming machines. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, to enhance the appeal to the player, and to easily select the gaming machine as a gaming machine to play a game. In addition, since the front end of the decorative body is greatly projected forward below the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage dish, and the length of the decorative body in the left-right direction is longer than before. Can be longer. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his hand on the storage dish, it is possible to reduce the portion hidden by the player's hand with respect to the entire decorative body, When the luminous decoration is performed by the decorative body light emitting means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to be aware of the luminous decoration of the decorative body, to prevent the player from feeling bad and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Can be done.

  Also, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward below the door window, when the player sits in front of the gaming machine, the front end of the decorative body is as close as possible to the player. Therefore, when the decorative body is illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the game state, the light irradiates the player from below, and the luminous decoration of the decorative body directs the player's line of sight to the decorative body By directing the player's line of sight to the lower decorative body, the player can keep the inside of the game area provided in front away from the player's field of view, making it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area. . Therefore, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the effect image changes, when the movable body moves, or when the variable winning opening (second starting opening, large winning opening, bonus winning opening, etc.) opens and closes. In the case of, for example, by decorating the decorative body with the decorative body light emitting means, the player can pay attention to the decorative body below the game area, and then, when the player returns his / her eyes to the game area, With the effect images and movable bodies changing, it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, entertain the player, and have something good for the player It is possible to make the player think that there is no interest in the game.

  Furthermore, as described above, the decorative body is illuminated and decorated according to the game state, so that the player can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area in the gap. The player can be informed of the arrival of a chance (for example, occurrence of an advantageous game state (“big hit game”) in which the player has an advantage) by the light-emitting decoration of. As a result, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the luminous decoration of the decorative body, so that the player can be excited and excited by whether or not the decorative body performs the luminous decoration, so that the player can be entertained and entertained. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the decorative body is largely projected forward, when the player tries to see the entire decorative body, he or she sees away from the gaming machine, so that the entire gaming machine including the game area is easy to see. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if he / she has set one tempo, and it is possible to relax the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  The decorative body may be smoothly curved and project forward. As a result, since the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is smoothly curved, there is no danger of injuring the player even if the decorative body comes into contact with the player. Therefore, the player can recognize at a glance that the decorative body is not a dangerous thing that may cause injury, and can select the present gaming machine with confidence as a gaming machine to play. It is possible to entertain a game with the present gaming machine and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, it is desirable to attach the decorative body to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction. As a result, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized to strongly attract the player's interest, and the appeal to the player can be increased, and the present gaming machine can be easily selected as a gaming machine for playing. Also, when the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is easy to extend both hands of the player forward, so that an operating unit (handle) for driving the game medium into the game area is provided. It is possible to facilitate operations, handling of the game media stored in the storage dish, and the like, so that it is difficult to apply stress to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the decorative body may include a first decorative portion extending in a semi-circular shape so as to bulge outward in a semi-circular cross-sectional shape. Thereby, since the first decorative portion of the decorative body is configured such that half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player, The player can play the game in a calm mood, and can dedicate the player to the game to suppress the decrease in interest, and it is hard to be injured even if the player touches at first glance It is possible to make the player aware that the game is safe, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by relieving the player. Further, when the decorative body is provided with a semi-donut-shaped first decorative portion, if the entire first decorative portion is illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the game state, it is like an annular fluorescent lamp. A light emitting decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.At the time of the light emitting decoration, for example, when the light emitting decoration is made so that light flows from one side, the inside of the donut is Since the player can see a luminous effect as if the light is moving and rotating, the player can be surprised and think that there is something good, raising expectations for the game. By doing so, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, when the decorative body is provided with a semi-donut-shaped first decorative portion, it is disposed below the first decorative portion such that the front end is located behind the first decorative portion, and has a semi-circular cross section. A second decorative portion extending in a semi-annular shape so as to bulge outward in shape may be further provided. Thereby, in the first decorative part and the second decorative part, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which half donut is vertically arranged, and to improve the appearance of the bulging part provided with the storage plate. Since the front end of the second decorative portion is located behind the front end of the first decorative portion, the second decorative portion can emphasize the perspective and make the decorative body look larger, Gaming machine with a strong appeal that attracts the interest of the player. Further, in this case, since the semi-donut-shaped first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are arranged vertically, the decorative body light emitting means appropriately emits and emits light, so that the light rotates such that the light rotates. It is possible to show the player a luminous effect in which the light moves up and down, so that the player can be entertained. It is difficult to make it difficult to reduce the interest.

  Further, an effect operation unit that can receive an operation of the player according to the game state may be provided behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body. With this, when the operation of the staging operation unit can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type effect is executed), the player operates the staging operation unit, and the player participation type The effect can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed. At this time, the decoration body is illuminated and decorated by the decoration body light emitting means, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the decoration body to which the effect operation unit is attached, and thus the player operating the effect operation unit When the participatory effect is executed, the decorative body is illuminated and decorated, so that the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (the effect operation unit), and the operation of the effect operation unit can be encouraged. By operating the section, it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type effect and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the effect operation unit is mounted behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body, it is possible to prevent a part of a player's body, clothing, and the like from contacting the effect operation unit by the decorative body. Therefore, it is possible to reduce erroneous operation of the effect operation unit, and to surely enjoy the player-participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, if the effect operation unit is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the effect operation unit looks large and can give a strong impact to the player. In addition to making it easy to select the game machine, the player can increase the expectation for the player-participation-type effect by operating the staging operation unit, and proceed with the game so that the player-partition-type effect can be executed early (for example, a game medium). (A game ball) driving operation, the start of rotation of a rotating body by the insertion of a game medium (medal), and the like can be encouraged, and a player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, in the case where the effect operation unit is provided behind the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body, the effect operation unit includes an annular rotation operation unit that can be rotated by the player, and an inside of the rotation operation unit. It is desirable to provide a pressing operation section in which the player can perform a pressing operation. With this configuration, since the rotation operation unit that can be rotated and the pressing operation unit that can be pressed are provided as the production operation unit, the rotation operation can be performed in the player participation type production in which the operation of the production operation unit can be accepted. And the pressing operation can be appropriately combined and made to be operated by the player, and it is possible to cope with an effect requiring a more complicated input (operation of the player). It can be presented to a player, can entertain the player, can make it difficult for the player to get tired, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Further, in this case, since the decorative body having the rotating operation unit and the pressing operation unit attached to the upper surface can be illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, when the player participation type effect is executed, the decorative body is removed. By illuminating and decorating, the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (the production operation unit such as the rotary operation unit and the pressing operation unit), and the operation of the production operation unit can be promoted, and the production operation unit can be operated by the player. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the player's participation-type production and to suppress a decrease in interest. At this time, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit or the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit can be prompted to the player by the light emission mode of the decorative body, the rotation operation unit or the pressing operation can be performed for the player. The operation unit can be operated accurately, and it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, as an effect operation unit on the upper surface of the decorative body, an annular rotation operation unit, and a pressing operation unit disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit, if it is provided, the pressing operation The part may be movable between a retreat position that protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotary operation part and a protruding position that protrudes above the retreat position in accordance with a game state. good. Thereby, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position in accordance with the game state, the pressing operation unit is protruded upward from the rotation operation unit, so that the upper surface of the decorative body is enlarged together with the rotation operation unit. Because it looks like it swells upward, it can give a strong impact to the player by showing the surroundings of the decoration large and enhance the appeal to the player more than other gaming machines by making the decoration stand out And the pressing operation portion protrudes greatly upwards, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pressing operation portion, thereby increasing the expectation for the operation of the pressing operation portion and suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be done.

  Further, when the pressing operation portion in the ring of the rotating operation portion attached to the upper surface of the decorative body is movable between the retracted position and the protruding position, when the player operates the pressing operation portion at the protruding position, A cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion that can be pressed, and a cylindrical center that is disposed in the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and that can be pressed by the player at any of the retreat position and the protruding position. You may make it comprise with a pressing operation part. Thereby, on the upper surface of the decorative body protruding greatly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit and the rotating operation unit are arranged concentrically around the center pressing operation unit, so that it is possible to increase the apparent impact. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and to increase the player's expectation for the player-participation type effect of operating each operation unit, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player. Can be. Further, in this case, the decorative body is made to emit light so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the decorative body, and eventually the rotation operation section, the outer periphery pressing operation section, and the center pressing operation section, and the operation is promoted. It is possible to entertain a player-participating effect and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the case where the effect operation unit is provided on the upper surface of the decorative body, it is desirable to include an operation unit light emitting unit that makes the effect operation unit emit light according to the playing state. Thereby, the effect operation unit can be light-emission-decorated by the operation unit light-emitting means according to the game state, so that the light-emission decoration of the effect operation unit and the light-emission decoration of the ornament by the decorative object light-emission means are simultaneously executed. The entirety of the bulging portion bulging forward below the door window can be illuminated and decorated, and the bulging portion can be made to stand out to strongly attract the player's interest, and the whole luminous decoration By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. Further, in this case, the effect of the player can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit by illuminating the effect operation unit with the operation unit light emitting means, so that the player participation type operation of operating the effect operation unit is realized. When it is executed, by illuminating the staging operation unit, it is possible to direct the player's interest to the staging operation unit and prompt the operation, and by allowing the player to operate the staging operation unit, a player participation type effect And a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, a peripheral decorative body that is continuous with the decorative body attached to the bulging portion and that extends around the outer periphery of the door frame may be further provided on the front surface of the door frame base. This makes it possible to decorate the entire outer periphery of the gaming area, improve the appearance of the gaming machine, and increase the appeal to the player. Further, in this case, it is preferable to provide a peripheral decoration body light emitting means for light-emitting decoration of the peripheral decoration body, and the decoration of the bulging portion and the peripheral decoration body are each illuminated and decorated, so that the outer periphery of the game area is illuminated and decorated. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area, and the player can enjoy the game in the game area, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, an effect display means capable of displaying an effect image may be provided at the center of the game area in front view. Thereby, in addition to the game performed in the game area, the player can be entertained by the effect image displayed on the effect display means, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player. Also, during the display of the effect image by the effect display means, when the effect image is switched, the decorative body is caused to emit light so that the player's line of sight is directed toward the decorative body below the game area, thereby making it difficult to notice the effect image switching. can do. Then, when the player turns his or her eyes to the effect display means after the effect image is switched, it can be surprised that the effect image has changed, and the effect image can be more enjoyed, and the effect can be produced at any time. By switching the images, it is possible to make the player think that something is good, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 2: In the structure of the means 1,
"The decorative body is
And smoothly projecting forward. "

  According to the configuration of the means 2, the decorative body is smoothly curved and projected forward.

  As a result, since the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is smoothly curved, there is no danger of injuring the player even if the decorative body comes into contact with the player. Therefore, the player can recognize at a glance that the decorative body is not a dangerous thing that may cause injury, and can select the present gaming machine with confidence as a gaming machine to play. It is possible to entertain a game with the present gaming machine and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 3: In the structure of the means 1 or 2,
"The decorative body is
It is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction. "

  According to the configuration of the means 3, the decorative body is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction.

  As a result, since the decorative body that protrudes largely forward is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized to attract the player's interest and appeal to the player. This gaming machine can be easily selected as a gaming machine that plays with increased power. Also, since the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, both hands of the player can be easily extended forward, so that an operating unit (a handle for driving the game medium into the game area) ), Handling of the game media stored in the storage dish, and the like can be easily performed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be stressed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Means 4: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 3,
"The decorative body is
A semicircular cross-sectional shape, and a first decorative portion extending in a semi-circular shape so as to bulge outward ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, the decorative body is provided with the first decorative portion extending in a semi-annular shape so as to bulge outward with a semi-circular cross-sectional shape.

  Accordingly, since the first decorative portion of the decorative body is formed so that the semicircular arc-shaped cross section extends in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward, half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward. It is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player because it is in a form that allows the player to play the game with a calm mood, so that the player can concentrate on the game It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game, and to make the player aware that it is a safe thing that is unlikely to be injured even if the player touches it at a glance, and to make the player feel safe Can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since the first decorative portion is formed in a semi-doughnut shape, the entire decorative portion light-emitting means is illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the playing state. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When performing luminous decoration, for example, if luminous decoration is performed so that light flows from one side, it is possible to show the player a luminous effect in which light is moving and rotating inside the donut, so that the player It can be surprised and made to think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 5: In the structure of the means 4,
"The decorative body is
The front end is arranged below the first decorative portion so as to be located behind the first decorative portion, and extends in a semi-annular shape so as to bulge outward in a semi-circular cross-sectional shape. It further comprises a second decorative portion. "

  According to the configuration of the means 5, the decorative body is disposed below the first decorative portion such that the front end is located behind the first decorative portion, and swells outward with a semicircular cross-sectional shape. A second decorative portion extending in a semi-circular shape is further provided.

  Thereby, in the first decorative part and the second decorative part, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which half donut is vertically arranged, and to improve the appearance of the bulging part provided with the storage plate. Since the front end of the second decorative portion is located behind the front end of the first decorative portion, the second decorative portion can emphasize the perspective and make the decorative body look larger, Gaming machine with a strong appeal that attracts the interest of the player.

  In addition, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are arranged vertically, by appropriately emitting and decorating each by the decorative body light emitting means, a light emission effect such that light rotates, A luminous effect in which light moves up and down can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained, and a variety of luminous effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 6: In any one of the structures from the means 1 to the means 5,
`` It is further provided with a rendering operation unit which is attached to the rear side of the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body and which can accept a player's operation according to the game state ''. I do.

  Here, the “production operation unit” includes a “rotation operation unit capable of rotating operation”, a “press operation unit capable of pressing operation”, a “touch operation unit capable of touch operation”, and a “slide operation unit capable of sliding operation”. , A “stick operation unit capable of performing a stick operation”, a “composite operation unit capable of performing a rotation operation and a pressing operation”, and the like. Further, the “production operation unit” may be in contact with the upper surface of the decorative body, or may be one that protrudes from the upper surface of the decorative body.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the gaming machine further includes a staging operation unit which is attached to the back of the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body so as to be able to accept a player's operation in accordance with a gaming state. is there.

  Thereby, since the effect operation unit is provided on the upper surface of the decorative body, when the operation of the effect operation unit can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type effect is executed), the player By operating the effect operation unit, it is possible to entertain a player-participatory effect, and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game. At this time, the decoration body is illuminated and decorated by the decoration body light emitting means, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the decoration body to which the effect operation unit is attached, and thus the player operating the effect operation unit When the participatory effect is executed, the decorative body is illuminated and decorated, so that the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (the effect operation unit), and the operation of the effect operation unit can be encouraged. By operating the section, it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type effect and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit is attached behind the front end of the decorative body, it is possible to prevent a part of the player's body, clothing, etc. from coming into contact with the effect operation unit by the decorative body, It is possible to reduce erroneous operation of the effect operation unit, and to surely entertain the player-participatory effect of operating the effect operation unit, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect operation unit is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the effect operation unit can be seen large, giving a strong impact to the player, and this gaming machine is selected as the gaming machine to play. In addition to making it easier to perform the game, the player can increase the expectation for the player-participation-type production by operating the production operation unit, and execute the game so that the player-participation-type production is performed early (for example, a game medium (game ball)). ), Start of rotation of the rotating body by insertion of a game medium (medal), etc.) can be encouraged, so that a player can be entertained and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the decoration body is provided behind the front end on the upper surface of the decoration body, the decoration body decorates the outside of the production operation section, so that the appearance of the production operation section can be improved. Thus, the effect operation unit can be made more conspicuous, and the gaming machine can attract the player's attention.

Means 7: In the structure of the means 6,
"The effect operation unit is
An annular rotary operation unit that can be rotated by a player,
And a pressing operation unit that can be pressed by a player in the ring of the rotating operation unit. "

  Here, examples of the “rotation operation unit” include “a unit that can be rotated by driving a motor in addition to a rotation operation of a player”, “a unit that can be rotated only by a rotation operation of a player”, and the like.

  The “pressing operation unit” includes a “cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit along the inner periphery of the rotating operation unit, and a cylindrical center pressing operating unit provided in the outer peripheral pressing operation unit. "," One columnar one "," one equipped with a cross key or an arrow key ", and the like. Further, examples of the "pressing operation unit" include "a unit that can move up and down between the retreat position and the protruding position" and "a unit that cannot move up and down".

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the effect operation unit includes an annular rotation operation unit that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player in the ring of the rotation operation unit. It was done.

  With this configuration, since the rotation operation unit that can be rotated and the pressing operation unit that can be pressed are provided as the production operation unit, the rotation operation can be performed in the player participation type production in which the operation of the production operation unit can be accepted. And the pressing operation can be appropriately combined and made to be operated by the player, and it is possible to cope with an effect requiring a more complicated input (operation of the player). It can be presented to a player, can entertain the player, can make it difficult for the player to get tired, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since the decorative body having the rotating operation unit and the pressing operation unit attached to the upper surface can be light-emission-decorated by the decoration light-emitting means, when the player participation type effect is executed, the decoration is light-emission-decorated. In this way, the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (the production operation unit such as the rotary operation unit and the pressing operation unit), and the operation of the production operation unit can be prompted. By having the player operate the production operation unit, It is possible to entertain the player-participation-type effects and to suppress a decrease in interest. At this time, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit or the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit can be prompted to the player by the light emission mode of the decorative body, the rotation operation unit or the pressing operation can be performed for the player. The operation unit can be operated accurately, and it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, it is desirable that the diameter of the rotary operation unit is larger than the distance of the storage dish in the front-back direction. As a result, the front end side of the rotary operation part projects greatly forward from the storage dish, so that the rotary operation part can be made to stand out greatly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and at a glance It is possible to recognize that the game machine is different from other game machines, and to easily select the game machine as a game machine to play a game. In addition, when the diameter of the rotary operation unit is increased, the player can immediately recognize that the rotary operation unit is for rotating operation, and when the player participation type effect is executed, This can make it easier for the player to participate in the effect, increase the sense of expectation for the execution of the player-participation type effect, and suppress a decrease in interest of the player. In addition, when the diameter (outer diameter) of the ring-shaped rotary operation portion is increased, the inner diameter of the rotary operation portion can be increased to increase the press operation portion in the ring. It is possible to make the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit entertainable, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Means 8: In the structure of the means 7,
"The pressing operation unit is
It is movable between a retreat position that protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotary operation unit and a protruding position that protrudes above the retreat position according to the gaming state. " It is characterized by being.

  Here, as the "pressing operation unit" movable between the retreat position and the protruding position, "the pressing operation unit which can be moved to the retreat position when the player presses at the protruding position", "the player when the protruding position is at the protruding position" Cannot be moved to the retracted position even if the user performs a pressing operation. "

  According to the configuration of the means 8, the pressing operation unit is moved between the retreat position where it protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotary operation unit according to the game state and the protruding position where it protrudes above the retreat position. , Which can be moved.

  With this, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position according to the game state, the pressing operation unit is protruded upward from the rotation operation unit, so that the upper surface of the decorative body is enlarged together with the rotation operation unit. Because it looks like it swells upward, it can give a strong impact to the player by showing the surroundings of the decorative body large, and makes the decorative body stand out and enhances the appeal to the player more than other gaming machines In addition to the fact that the pressing operation portion protrudes largely upward, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the expectation for the operation of the pressing operation portion can be increased to suppress a decrease in interest. be able to.

  In addition, since the pressing operation unit is movable between the retreat position and the protruding position, the player's interest can be directed to the rotation operation unit at the retreat position, and the player's interest at the protruding position. Since the player can be directed to the pressing operation unit, by moving the pressing operation unit according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation unit to be operated, This allows the player to accurately operate the rotary operation unit and the pressing operation unit, thereby allowing the player to participate in the effect.

Means 9: In the structure of the means 8,
"The pressing operation unit is
A cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit that allows the player to perform a pressing operation at the protruding position,
A cylindrical central pressing operation portion that is disposed in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and that can be pressed by the player at any of the retreat position and the protruding position. '' There is a feature.

  According to the configuration of the means 9, the pressing operation portion is provided with a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion that can be pressed by the player when in the protruding position, and is disposed in the outer peripheral pressing operation portion of the cylinder. And a column-shaped central pressing operation portion that can be pressed by the player at any of the positions.

  Thereby, on the upper surface of the decorative body protruding greatly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit and the rotating operation unit are arranged concentrically around the center pressing operation unit, so that it is possible to increase the apparent impact. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and to increase the player's expectation for the player-participation type effect of operating each operation unit, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player. Can be. Also, by decorating the decorative body with light emission, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the decorative body, and eventually the rotation operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and the center pressing operation unit, and the operation thereof can be prompted, It is possible to entertain the player-participation-type effects and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  When the pressing operation portion inside the rotation operation portion is set to the retreat position, the center pressing operation portion, the outer circumference pressing operation portion, and the rotation operation portion have the same height as each other, and the rotation operation portion and the center pressing operation When the pressing portion is operable and the pressing operation portion is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position, the center pressing operation portion and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion are in a state of protruding above the rotating operation portion, and the center pressing operation portion, The outer peripheral pressing operation unit and the rotation operation unit can be operated. Therefore, according to the content of the player participation type production, the operation unit that can be operated by the player can be properly used, and it is possible to correspond to more various productions, and to make the player enjoy various operations. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, in a state where the pressing operation portion is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion becomes visible, so that it is possible to give an illusion to the player that the outer peripheral pressing operation portion can be rotated. it can. Thereby, when the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit is executed, even if the illusioned player attempts to rotate the outer periphery pressing operation unit, the outer periphery pressing operation unit does not rotate. The player can be irritated, giving the player a sense of tension in the flow of the performance, and entertaining the player.

Means 10: In any one of the structures from means 6 to means 9,
It is characterized in that it further comprises an operation section light emitting means for decorating the effect operation section with light emission according to the gaming state.

  Here, the “operation unit light-emitting means” includes “full-color LED”, “monochrome LED”, “high-brightness LED”, “organic EL”, “incandescent bulb”, “neon bulb”, “cold-cathode tube”, etc. Is mentioned.

  According to the configuration of the means 10, the gaming machine further includes an operation section light emitting means for decorating the effect operation section with light emission according to the game state.

  Thereby, the effect operation unit can be light-emission-decorated by the operation unit light-emitting means according to the game state, so that the light-emission decoration of the effect operation unit and the light-emission decoration of the ornament by the decorative object light-emission means are simultaneously executed. The entirety of the bulging portion bulging forward below the door window can be illuminated and decorated, and the bulging portion can be made to stand out to strongly attract the player's interest, and the whole luminous decoration By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, by making the effect operation unit emit light decoration by the operation unit light emitting means, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player to the effect operation unit. Therefore, a player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit is executed. Occasionally, by illuminating the staging operation unit, the player's interest can be directed to the staging operation unit to prompt the operation, and the player can operate the staging operation unit to entertain the player's participation-type staging. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 11: In a gaming machine,
"A gaming board having a game area where a game is played,
A body frame holding the game board detachably from the front,
A door frame base that has a door window that closes the front side of the main body frame so as to be openable and closable and allows the game area to be viewed from the front;
A bulging portion bulging forward from a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base and having a storage plate capable of storing a game medium for performing a game in the game area; ,
The door frame is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, extends in a semi-circular shape so as to bulge outward in a semi-circular cross-sectional shape, and has a front end forward of the front end of the storage dish and the door frame. A first decorative portion protruding forward from a front surface of the base to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the entire width of the door frame base, and a front end located rearward of the first decorative portion. A decorative body including a second decorative portion that is arranged below the first decorative portion and extends in a semi-annular shape so as to bulge outward with a semicircular cross-sectional shape,
A decorative body light emitting means for performing decorative decoration of the decorative body according to a game state that is changed by performing a game in the game area;
An annular rotary operation unit attached to the upper surface of the decorative body behind the front end and rotatable by a player, and in the ring of the rotary operation unit, the upper surface of the rotary operation unit according to the playing state. A cylinder that is movable between a retreat position that protrudes slightly above and a protruding position that protrudes above the retreat position, and that allows the player to perform a pressing operation at the protruding position. An outer peripheral pressing operation portion, and a cylindrical central pressing operating portion which is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and can be pressed by the player at any of the retreat position and the protruding position. A staging operation unit comprising a pressing operation unit, wherein an operation of the player can be accepted according to the game state;
And an operation unit light emitting means for decorating the effect operation unit with light emission according to the gaming state. "

  According to the configuration of the means 11, the gaming machine has a gaming area in which a game is played, a main body frame detachably holding the gaming board from the front, and a front side of the main body frame can be opened and closed. The door frame base has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front, and the front side of the door frame base swells forward from a portion below the door window, A bulging portion provided with a storage plate capable of storing a game medium for playing a game in the region, and attached to the center in the left-right direction of the bulging portion, and bulging outward in a semicircular cross-sectional shape. And the front end projects forward from the front of the door frame base forward of the front end of the storage dish to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the entire width of the door frame base. One decoration part, and the first decoration so that the front end is located behind the first decoration part And a decoration body having a second decoration portion extending in a semi-circular shape so as to bulge outwardly in a semi-circular cross-sectional shape, and a game in the game area with the decoration body. A decorative body light emitting means for emitting and decorating according to a game state which is changed by being performed; an annular rotating operation unit which is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body behind the front end and which can be rotated by the player; and a rotating operation. In the ring of the section, it is possible to move between a retreating position slightly protruding above the upper surface of the rotary operation section and a protruding position protruding above the retreating position according to a game state. , A cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion that can be pressed by the player when in the protruding position, and a pressing operation that can be performed by the player in any of the retracted position and the protruding position that is disposed in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion Such as a simple cylindrical central pressing operation part A press operation unit, and an effect operation unit that can receive an operation of the player according to the game state, and an operation unit light emitting unit that makes the effect operation unit emit light according to the game state. It was done.

  As a result, a swelling portion provided with a storage plate capable of storing game media is swelled forward at a position below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that closes the main body frame so that the main body frame can be opened and closed. And a swelling portion provided with a decorative body whose length is 1/3 to 2/3 of the entire width of the door frame base and whose front end projects forward from the front surface of the door frame base. A central pressing operation portion, an outer circumference pressing operation portion, and a rotation operation portion which are arranged concentrically on the upper surface of the device. Thereby, when the gaming machine is attached to the island facilities of the gaming hall, the decorative body having the effect operation unit attached to the upper surface protrudes greatly below the door window where the inside of the gaming area can be visually recognized, It is possible to make the decorative body stand out more than other gaming machines, attract the interest of the player strongly, increase the appeal to the player, and select this gaming machine as a gaming machine to play. It can be easier. In addition, since the front end of the decorative body is greatly projected forward below the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage dish, and the length of the decorative body in the left-right direction is longer than before. Can be longer. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his hand on the storage dish, it is possible to reduce the portion hidden by the player's hand with respect to the entire decorative body, When the luminous decoration is performed by the decorative body light emitting means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to be aware of the luminous decoration of the decorative body, to prevent the player from feeling bad and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Can be done.

  Also, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward below the door window, when the player sits in front of the gaming machine, the front end of the decorative body is as close as possible to the player. Therefore, if the decorative body is illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the game state, or if the effect operation unit is illuminated and decorated by the operation unit light emitting means, the light will irradiate the player from below, The luminous decoration of the decorative body and the effect operation unit can direct the player's line of sight to the lower decorative body and effect operation unit, and the player's line of sight can be directed downward, thereby providing the game provided in front of the player. It is possible to keep the inside of the game area away from the field of view of the player and make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area. Therefore, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the effect image changes, when the movable body moves, or when the variable winning opening (second starting opening, large winning opening, bonus winning opening, etc.) opens and closes. In the case of, for example, the decorative body or the effect operation unit is illuminated and decorated, so that the player is directed to the lower side of the game area, and then when the player returns his / her gaze to the inside of the game area, the effect image or the movable body Change, etc., can surprise and give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and make the player think that there is something good It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, as described above, the decorative body is illuminated and decorated according to the game state, so that the player can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area in the gap. The player can be informed of the arrival of a chance (for example, occurrence of an advantageous game state (“big hit game”) in which the player has an advantage) by the light-emitting decoration of. As a result, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the luminous decoration of the decorative body, so that the player can be excited and excited by whether or not the decorative body performs the luminous decoration, so that the player can be entertained and entertained. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the decorative body is largely projected forward, when the player tries to see the entire decorative body, he or she sees away from the gaming machine, so that the entire gaming machine including the game area is easy to see. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if he / she has set one tempo, and it is possible to relax the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized to attract the player's interest and appeal to the player. Can be easily selected as the gaming machine that plays the game by increasing the game machine. Also, since the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, both hands of the player can be easily extended forward, so that an operating unit (a handle for driving the game medium into the game area) ), Handling of the game media stored in the storage dish, and the like can be easily performed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be stressed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion arranged above and below the decorative body are formed so that the semicircular arc-shaped cross section extends semicircularly so as to bulge outward, Since the shape of the tube-shaped donut is projected forward, it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player, and to make the player play the game in a calm mood It is possible to deter the player from losing interest by focusing on the game, and to recognize that the player is safe and hardly injured even if the player touches at first glance, By relieving the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, by simultaneously illuminating and decorating the decorative body and the effect operation unit attached to the upper surface of the decorative body, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the entire bulging portion that bulges forward and below the door window. Therefore, the bulging portion can be made to stand out to attract the interest of the player, and the entire luminous decoration can make the player think that something is good, The player's interest can be directed to the effect operation unit to prompt the operation, and by causing the player to operate the effect operation unit, the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, since the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion have a semi-donut shape, the entire first decorative portion and the second decorative portion can be illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the game state. In addition, it is possible to show a light-emitting decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp to a player, and to strongly attract the player's interest. When performing luminous decoration, for example, if luminous decoration is performed so that light flows from one side, it is possible to show the player a luminous effect in which light moves and rotates inside the donut to the player, so that the player You can be surprised and think that there is something good, and rotate the rotating operation unit attached to the upper surface of the decorative body in the direction in which the light of the first decorative unit and the second decorative unit is rotating The player can be urged to perform the rotation operation in the same direction. Alternatively, by alternately emitting and decorating the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion arranged vertically, a light emission effect in which light moves up and down can be shown to the player, and The moving light can prompt the player to press the outer peripheral pressing operation unit or the center pressing operation unit. Accordingly, by appropriately illuminating and decorating the first decoration portion and the second decoration portion, the player can be prompted to rotate the rotation operation portion or to press the pressing operation portion. In this case, the rotation operation unit or the pressing operation unit can be operated accurately, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, on the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit and the rotating operation unit are arranged concentrically around the center pressing operation unit, so that the apparent impact can be increased. In addition to being able to strongly attract the interest of the player, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the player-participation-type effect of operating each operation unit, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest. it can.

  When the pressing operation portion inside the rotation operation portion is set to the retreat position, the center pressing operation portion, the outer circumference pressing operation portion, and the rotation operation portion have the same height as each other, and the rotation operation portion and the center pressing operation When the pressing portion is operable and the pressing operation portion is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position, the center pressing operation portion and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion are in a state of protruding above the rotating operation portion, and the center pressing operation portion, The outer peripheral pressing operation unit and the rotation operation unit can be operated. Therefore, according to the content of the player participation type production, the operation unit that can be operated by the player can be properly used, and it is possible to correspond to more various productions, and to make the player enjoy various operations. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, in a state where the pressing operation portion is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion becomes visible, so that it is possible to give an illusion to the player that the outer peripheral pressing operation portion can be rotated. it can. Thereby, when the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit is executed, even if the illusioned player attempts to rotate the outer periphery pressing operation unit, the outer periphery pressing operation unit does not rotate. The player can be irritated, giving the player a sense of tension in the flow of the performance, and entertaining the player.

Means 12: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 11,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of reception ports that are arranged in the game area and can receive game media,
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the reception of game media into the reception port.

  Here, the “accepting entrance” includes “a general winning opening that is always open in the game area”, and “an open gaming state that is always open in the gaming area, and an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by receiving game media. The winning prize port (starting port) in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate the game media, and the game medium is received at a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area, so that the game medium Normal winning lottery that can be accepted when the game media passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium is set to a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, character winning opening, etc.) at which the game medium can be received, and a specific area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area. Through In accordance with the result of the normal lottery to be selected by lottery, it is possible to receive the game medium, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not the reception of the game medium will generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage. Mouth (variable starting port) "," V winning opening which generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage when the game medium received in the bonus winning opening is distributed and received by the distribution means "," Game " As the advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous, there are a large winning opening and a bonus winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to receive a game medium.

  In addition, as the “pachinko machine”, “a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous game state in which a player is advantageous by receiving a game medium into the starting port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means Special lottery result display means for displaying a special lottery result by displaying a special lottery by a combination of the special symbols displayed stopped, and then displaying a special game, and displaying the advantageous game state in a special lottery result display means. (A so-called digi-pachi machine) comprising a special game state generating means for generating a special game state by opening and closing a special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when a special lottery result to be generated is displayed. A distribution means for distributing the game medium received in the mouth, and, when the game medium distributed by the distribution means is received in the V winning opening, the accessory winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. (A so-called "floating machine") having an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which a player is advantageous, and "a game medium having a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening, and a starting medium. Opening and closing the special winning opening or the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern in accordance with the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game, and the gaming media received in the special winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special winning opening Or a device provided with an advantageous game state generating means for opening and closing a special winning opening in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous game state in which a player is advantageous (a so-called multifunction device).

  According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is provided with a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of reception ports arranged in the game area, which can receive the game medium, and a game to the reception port. And a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the reception of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, the operation and effect of any of the above-described means can be obtained.

  In addition, it is desirable to execute the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light-emitting means when the game medium driven into the game area is received in the reception port. Thereby, when the game media is received in the reception, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and the decorative body is illuminated and decorated. Can be easily continued, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, when a special lottery is performed to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting the game medium into the starting port, the special lottery result is presented to the player when the lottery result is suggested to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, the decorative body may be made to emit light by the decorative body light emitting means. With this, the decorative body performs luminous decoration, so that a strong impact can be given to the player by the above-described operation and effect, so that the special lottery result drawn to the player can It can be assumed that an advantageous gaming state occurs (for example, a "big hit"), and a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be increased to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since the movable effect having a higher effect can be shown to the player by illuminating the decorative body, the effect for indicating the special lottery result to the player (for example, The present invention can be suitably used for the “reach effect”, and it is possible to entertain a player and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 13: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 11,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of torso each having a plurality of designs,
A starting operation unit that rotates a plurality of the rotating bodies by being operated by the player after the insertion of the game medium,
A plurality of stop operation units for respectively stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A slot machine including a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating bodies that have been rotated and stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation units. There is a feature.

  Here, as the “slot machine”, “one in which the number of active lines for determining the combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game”, “ An internal lottery is executed with the start of rotation, and a bonus that gives the player an advantage in accordance with the combination of stopped symbols and the result of the internal lottery that has been drawn is provided, and the activated line for determining the combination of stopped symbols is fixed. Has been done. " The “privileges” include “big bonus (BB)”, “regular bonus (RB)”, “cherry rush bonus (CRB)”, “replay”, “long replay time (LRT)”, “assist time ( AT) ".

  According to the configuration of the means 13, the gaming machine has a plurality of rotating bodies each having a plurality of symbols, and a starting operation unit that rotates the plurality of rotating bodies by operating the player after the game medium is inserted. According to a combination of a plurality of stop operation units for stopping rotation of the plurality of torso bodies, and a stop symbol by all the torso bodies that have been rotationally stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation units, respectively. And a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachislo machine, the operation and effect of any of the above-described means can be obtained.

  In addition, the luminous decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light emitting means is performed when the combination of the symbols stopped rotating except for one on the active line satisfies the combination of the winning combination symbols (so-called reach). Alternatively, as one of the effects presented to the player, a plurality of decorative bodies may be rotated by the driving means. Thereby, the decorative body is illuminated and decorated, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to be a winning combination. In addition, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the decorative body may be illuminated and decorated, and since the decorative body is illuminated and decorated, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, By stopping at a specific symbol combination, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage occurs (for example, “BB”), thereby increasing the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since the movable effect having a higher effect can be shown to the player by illuminating the decorative body, it is suitable for the effect to suggest the internal lottery to the player. It can be used to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 14: In any one of the structures from the means 1 to the means 11,
The gaming machine is
It is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

  Here, the “fusing machine” in which the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine are fused is a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols according to the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operating lever) after a plurality of game media are inserted. Is displayed in a variable manner, and thereafter, the variation of the symbol row is stopped in response to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), and the payout of the game medium is performed in accordance with the combination of the stopped symbols, and a privilege (eg, , An advantageous gaming state). If the stop operation unit is not operated after the lapse of the predetermined time, the variable display of the symbol row may be stopped in response to the lapse of the predetermined time.

  According to the configuration of the means 14, the gaming machine is a fusing machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Thus, in the multifunction machine in which the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine are merged, any one of the above-described means can be achieved.

  In addition, the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light-emitting means is performed when the combination of the symbols stopped rotating except the one on the activated line satisfies the combination of the winning combination symbols (so-called reach). In addition, as one of the effects presented to the player, the decorative body may be made to emit light by the decorative body light emitting means, or the lottery result of the internal lottery may be made to make the decorative body emit light at the time of the winning combination. Alternatively, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[effect]
As described above, according to the above technical means, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a high appealing power to the player and can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the light-emitting decoration.

[Relationship between the above embodiment and the above technical means]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is a bulging portion of the present invention, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in the present embodiment are storage tanks of the present invention, and the effect operating unit cover unit in the effect operating unit 300 of the present embodiment. The unit lower cover 311 and the unit front cover 312 of the present embodiment are the decorative body of the present invention, the unit front cover 312 of the present embodiment is the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the present invention, and the unit front cover 312 of the present embodiment. The decorative plate 312b below the center of the plate is the second decorative portion of the present invention, the decorative substrate 314 above the plate center and the decorative substrate 316 below the plate in the present embodiment are the decorative body light emitting means of the present invention, and the effect operation ring decoration in the present embodiment. The board 352, the center button decoration board 376, and the outer periphery button decoration board 377 correspond to the operation unit light emitting means of the present invention, respectively.

[Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed at a position below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 that closes the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The plate unit 200 including the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 capable of storing is swelled forward, and the plate unit 200 has a front end with a length of about に 対 し て with respect to the entire width of the door frame base 101. A center operation unit 303a, which is provided concentrically on the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and has an effect operation unit cover unit 310 protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base 101; 303b, and a rotation operation unit 302. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 having the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the upper surface below the door window 101a that allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a is opened. Since it protrudes greatly forward, the plate unit 200 (the effect operation unit cover unit 310) can be made more conspicuous than the other pachinko machines 1, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and appeal to the player. The power can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played. In addition, since the front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is greatly protruded forward below the door frame 3, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 must be moved forward from the front end of the upper plate 201. And the length of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in the left-right direction can be made longer than before. Therefore, even if the player places his hand on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 or puts his hand on the upper plate 201, the portion of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 that is hidden by the hand of the player is reduced. Therefore, when the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is illuminated and decorated by the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316, the light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312 is given to the player. Can be easily noticed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bad and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward below the door window 101a, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is provided. The front end of the unit is as close as possible to the player, so that the unit front cover 312 is illuminated and decorated by the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316 according to the playing state, and a staging operation. When the effect operation unit 301 is illuminated and decorated by the ring decoration substrate 352, the center button decoration substrate 376, and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, the light irradiates the player from below, and the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 The player's line of sight is directed to the lower unit front cover 312 and the staging operation unit 301 by the luminous decoration of It is possible to, by directing the line of sight of the player downwards, can be difficult away within the game area 5a provided in the front from the player's field of vision, it is visible within the game area 5a. Therefore, in the game area 5a, for example, when the scene of the effect image by the effect display device 1600 changes, when the movable body moves, when the second starting port 2004 or the special winning opening 2005 opens and closes, etc. Then, by making the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 emit light, the player is directed downward of the game area 5a. Thereafter, when the player returns his / her eyes to the inside of the game area 5a, the effect image and the movable Changes in the body etc. can surprise the player and give a strong impact, entertain the player and make the player think that there is something good It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, the unit front cover 312 can be noticed by illuminating and decorating the unit front cover 312 in accordance with the game state, and the player can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area 5a in the gap. In addition, the luminous decoration of the unit front cover 312 can indicate to the player that a chance has come (for example, occurrence of an advantageous game state (“big hit game”) in which the player has an advantage). Thereby, a premium feeling can be given to the light-emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312, so that the player can be excitedly excited by whether or not the unit front cover 312 performs light-emitting decoration, and the player can enjoy the game. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the unit front cover 312 protrudes greatly forward, when the player tries to view the entire unit front cover 312, he or she will look away from the pachinko machine 1, so that the entire game machine including the game area Is easy to see. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if he / she has set one tempo, and it is possible to relax the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310, which protrudes greatly forward, is attached to the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, the presence of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is emphasized, and the interest of the player is strongly attracted. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played with enhanced appeal to the player. Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, both hands of the player can be easily extended forward, so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. For example, the operation of the handle 182 and the handling of the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 can be facilitated, so that it is difficult to apply stress to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, which are arranged above and below the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, have a semicircular arc-shaped cross section bulging outward. Since it is formed to extend in a semi-annular shape, a half of a cylindrical tube-shaped donut is projected forward, so that it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to a player, The player can play the game in a calm mood, and can dedicate the player to the game to suppress the decrease in interest, and it is hard to be injured even if the player touches at first glance It is possible to make the player aware that the game is safe, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by relieving the player.

  Further, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 projecting from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 are simultaneously illuminated and decorated, so that the plate unit 200 swelling forward below the door window 101a. Can be made to illuminate the whole, so that the dish unit 200 can be made to stand out and strongly attract the interest of the player, and the whole luminous decoration does not have anything good for the player. It is possible to make the player think that the player is interested in the staging operation unit 301 to prompt the player to operate the staging operation unit 301. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, since the dish upper decorative body 312a and the dish lower decorative body 312b are formed in a semi-donut shape, the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316 can be used in accordance with the game state. When the decoration 312a and the decoration 312b under the center of the plate are illuminated as a whole, the luminous decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp can be shown to the player, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. When performing luminous decoration, for example, if luminous decoration is performed so that light flows from one side, it is possible to show the player a luminous effect in which light is moving and rotating inside the donut, so that the player Surprisingly, it is possible to think that there is something good, and the rotation operation unit 302 attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312a. The player can be urged to rotate in the same direction in which the light of 312b is rotating. Alternatively, a light emitting effect in which light moves up and down can be shown to the player by alternately emitting and decorating the upper plate center decorative body 312a and the lower plate center decorative body 312b arranged vertically. At the same time, the light that moves up and down can prompt the player to press the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating and decorating the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the player is prompted to rotate the rotating operation unit 302 or to push the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the player can accurately operate the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, and entertainer-type effects can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the pachinko machine 1 extends forward from the side (outside of the right side) of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3. A side window in which three side window decorative portions 410b extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction of the side window decorative member 412 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction on the flat door frame right side unit 410. In the normal state, the LEDs of the decorative board 413 in the side window decorating portion 413 for emitting and decorating the decorative portions 410b in the side window are turned off, so that the three side windows in the side window 410a are turned off. The player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side (the end of the island facility) of the pachinko machine 1 through the space between the decorative portions 410b. Therefore, a player who is searching for the present pachinko machine 1 (the main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not need to move to the front of the present pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities to easily operate the present pachinko machine 1. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game in the present pachinko machine 1 and to suppress a decrease in interest. Thereafter, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player can satisfactorily view the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. In addition, the player can play the game in the game area 5a, and can enjoy the game for the player, and can know the current game state by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600.

  At this time, in the door frame 3 whose left side with respect to the main body frame 4 is hingedly mounted by a hinge pin 122 above the door frame and a hinge pin 126 below the door frame, the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a in the left and right directions. Since the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outside far from the hinge axis, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame right side unit 410 includes the side window interior decoration part 410b. Can block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity, so that the entire player area 5a can be difficult to see from other players, as seen by other players. By making the player less likely to feel the game, the player can play the game without hesitation. Then, when the game progresses in the game area 5a and changes to a predetermined game state, the LEDs in the side window decorative portion decorative board 413 cause the three side window decorative portions 410b to emit light, and the light causes the side window decorative portions 410b to emit light. By making the inside of 410a dazzling, the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light can be radiated in a band shape and radially, and the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzled, making it difficult to visually recognize the opposite side from between. In addition to the side window 410a, the light emission of the side window interior decoration portion 410b allows the player's line of sight to be directed to the side window interior decoration portion 410b. Visibility through 410a can be reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as the next to look inside the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600.

  More specifically, in the gaming state, for example, in a gaming state (scene) that suggests the arrival of a chance for the player to be advantageous, the three side window decorative portions 410b emit light, and the glare causes The visibility through the window 410a is reduced. This makes it difficult for another player, such as an adjacent player, to recognize that a chance has arrived at the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that the other player pays attention to the pachinko machine 1. You can avoid discomfort, and if you get attention, you may feel discomfort because other players are worried that you can not concentrate on the game, or you may feel sick by inducing mistakes Can be prevented, the game can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another player from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a in a game state such as the arrival of a chance, so that the player can concentrate on the game and play the game. It is possible to entertain more and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the side window 410a, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, the angle at which the side window 410a is viewed from the side changes. Also, since the three side window decorative portions 410b do not appear to overlap, when the side window decorative portions 410b do not emit light, the opposite side of the side window 410a passes between the three side window decorative portions 410b. (In the game area 5a), a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing moves to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. Without this, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily found.

  Also, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, when the side window decorative portions 410b of a certain height emit light, a portion of the same height in the game area 5a Can be made difficult for other players to visually recognize through the side window 410a, so that the specific side window decorative portion 410b of the three side window decorative portions 410b emits light in accordance with the game state, It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a specific area (part) in the height direction in the game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to know the arrival of a chance or the like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another player from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a in a game state such as the arrival of a chance, so that the player can concentrate on the game and play the game. It is possible to entertain more and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the door frame right side unit 410 extending long forward has the side windows 410a penetrating to the left and right, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off, and the side windows 410a are turned off. In the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is kept visible, the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a. From the end of the game area 5a, it is easy to detect that an illegal act has been performed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is extended forward from the right outer side farther than the left side attached to the main body frame 4 rotatably from the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame 3. Therefore, the door frame 3 can be opened by 90 degrees or more with respect to the main body frame 4. Therefore, when performing operations such as maintenance and replacement of the game board 5 by opening the door frame 3, the door frame 3 can be hardly obstructed by opening the door frame 3 widely, thereby preventing deterioration in workability. can do.

  Further, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are caused to emit light in accordance with the game state, there is a possibility that an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game) in which the player is advantageous (so-called “big hit” game) may occur. Depending on (expected value), the decorative portion 410b in the side window may be turned on or off. More specifically, for example, during execution of a reach effect, a reach development effect, or the like, when the expected value is low, the decorative portion 410b in the side window is made to emit light to make it difficult for other players to look in, so that an advantageous gaming state occurs. When the game is not performed (at the time of "losing"), it is possible to avoid an unpleasant atmosphere with other players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Alternatively, when the expected value is high, the decorative portion 410b in the side window is not turned on or off, so that an advantageous gaming state occurs even in a state where it can be easily seen from other players ("big hit"). ) Does not create an unpleasant atmosphere and can suppress a decrease in interest, and can also create an atmosphere in which other players are cheering, thereby enhancing the interest of the player in the game. You can enjoy the game more.

  Furthermore, since the three side window decorations 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that an advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous (so-called "big hit" game) may occur. Depending on the expected value), the three side window decorative portions 410b emit light in order (for example, from bottom to top, from top to bottom, from the center to both the upper and lower sides, etc.), and among the three side window decorative portions 410b. Or the specific side window interior decoration portion 410b may emit light. More specifically, for example, during execution of a reach effect, a reach development effect, or the like, as the expected value becomes higher, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b emit light in order from the bottom or from the top, and so on. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to be peeped, and to suggest an expected value, thereby increasing a player's expectation for the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  The light emission modes of the three side window interior decoration portions 410b as described above include, in addition to light emission (lighting) and light off, a blinking pattern, a difference in light emission color, and a change in light emission color (for example, from a cold blue to a hot blue). A change in feeling to red, a change in blue-yellow red imitating a traffic light, etc.) or a change in brightness (brightness) may be achieved, and the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved. With the three side window interior decoration portions 410b, the decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power that can strongly attract the interest of the player can be provided.

  From the above, conversely, during execution of the reach effect, the reach development effect, and the like, the light emitting mode such as the presence or absence of light emission and the light emission pattern of the three side window interior decoration portions 410b provides an advantageous gaming state for the player. Can be suggested, so that the player can be excited depending on whether or not the three side window decorative portions 410b emit light during the performance of the effect. -It is possible to be excited, and it is possible to increase the expectation of the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the operation of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 may allow the three side window interior decoration portions 410b to arbitrarily emit light or turn off the light. . Thus, for example, when a reach effect or a reach development effect, etc., when the possibility (in a so-called expected value) of an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game) in which the player is advantageous is low, the effect operation is performed. By operating the unit 301 to emit the light in the side window decoration unit 410b, it is possible to prevent the player from being peeped out by other players, so that the advantageous gaming state does not occur (when "losing"). In addition, it is possible to avoid an unpleasant atmosphere due to being seen by another player, and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game. Alternatively, when the possibility (expected value) of the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is high (or when a hot effect is being performed), the effect operation unit 301 is operated so that the decorative portion 410b in the side window does not emit light. (Or by turning off the side window decoration portion 410b), even if the player is peeped by another player, the advantageous game state occurs, and the unpleasant atmosphere is not generated, and the decrease in interest is reduced. In addition to being able to suppress, it is possible to make the atmosphere that other players are cheering on, so that the interest of the player in the game is enhanced and the game can be more enjoyed.

  Further, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the timing and the light emission mode of the three side window interior decoration units 410b may be set. Thus, in the preset default state, the timing peculiar to the player who does not want to be peeped from other players is not set. However, since it is possible to customize according to the player's preference by operating the staging operation unit 301, the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the dispensing device 580 of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4, the ball removal lever 593 is lowered (locked) to make the ball removal movable piece 592 unrotatable and the ball removal passage. When the 580b is closed (first state), the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a from the upstream is not allowed to flow to the ball removal passage 580b by the ball removal movable piece 592. It will continue to flow downstream of the payout passage 580a, and can be sent to the payout blade 589 via the payout passage 580a. On the other hand, when the ball removing lever 593 is raised (unlocked) to bring the ball removing movable piece 592 into a rotatable state (second state), the game balls B flowing down the payout passage 580a from the upstream are dispensed. Instead of flowing to the downstream side of 580a, the ball passes through the ball removal movable piece 592 to the ball removal passage 580b, and can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility side via the ball removal passage 580b. it can. Since the discharge blade 589 is provided on the downstream side of the discharge passage 580a, the ball removal lever 593 makes the ball removal movable piece 592 unrotatable (first state) in a normal state. On the upstream side of the payout blade 589, the game balls B are stopped in a continuous state like a rosary.

  When the payout blade 589 is rotationally driven in this normal state, the game ball B upstream of the payout blade 589 flows downstream, and the ball movable piece 592 guides the game ball B to the payout blade 589 side. And the payout blade 589 pays out the game balls B one by one, so that the speed at which the game balls B flow upstream of the payout blade 589 becomes relatively slow. Since the force acting on the ball-moving movable piece 592 due to the contact is relatively weak, and the opposite side of the ball-moving piece 592 in contact with the game ball B is near the center of the ball-pulling passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 is provided. Is not sandwiched between the wall of the ball passage 580b and the game ball B, and the ball movable piece 592 is not damaged. From this, it is possible to reduce the damage to the ball-moving movable piece 592 during the game, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage to the ball-moving movable piece 592 and giving the player discomfort. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, at the time of exchanging the pachinko machine 1 (or the game board 5), performing maintenance, or the like, when ejecting the game balls B from the payout passage 580a, the ball ejection lever 593 is raised and the ball ejection movable piece 592 can be rotated. In the state (second state), the game ball B, which has been in a rosary-like state upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592, flows down the ball removal passage 580b side beyond the ball removal movable piece 592. Become. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight and straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flow straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as suppressing the flow of the game ball B like the payout blade 589. Will also flow down quickly. As described above, in a state where the ball-moving movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-pulling passage 580b, so that the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-pulling passage 580b. Game ball B abuts vigorously against the lower end of the payout device, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it is possible to move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the contacting force causes the ball removal movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball is not sandwiched between the wall of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force is not applied to the movable ball 592 by the game ball B, and the ball is movable by the collision of the game ball B. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed. Because of this, the ball-moving movable piece 592 can be hardly damaged, so that more game balls B can be discharged to the island facility side downstream of the ball-pulling passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  When the ball-moving movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes through a space between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a at a smaller interval than the game ball B, and the ball removing passage 580b. When the game ball B comes into contact with the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-pulling passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 moves between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a. When moving outward through the gap, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B is spaced more than the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward. The movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable piece 592 is caused by the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable piece 592, so that the movable piece 592 can be hardly damaged and the main body side guide is provided. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball passage 580b.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 can be opened and closed around an axis extending vertically on the left side with respect to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Is closed so as to close the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2, and the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 (axial center) on the left side with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame 3 attached to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) around the center is closed, the front surface of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 extend parallel to each other while facing each other. Connection connecting the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like on the frame 4 side, and the ball feeding unit 140, the handle unit 180, the production operation unit 300, and the like on the door frame 3 side. cable Numeral 03 extends toward the axis from a portion of the cable attachment recess 501h that is recessed rearward on the front surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and away from the axis, and is attached to the cable attachment recess 501h to attach the body frame 4. After being held by the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502 extending in parallel with the front surface and the rear surface of the door frame 3, the cable body further extends to the vicinity of the axis, and then turns back and extends in a direction away from the axis to form the door frame. 3 is held by the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 at a position closer to the axis than the distal end of the connection cable guide member 502 and connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side. Have been.

  When the door frame 3 that closes (closes) the front side of the body frame 4 is hinged about the axis on the left side so as to open from the body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 becomes Since the part of the connection cable 503 extending from the door frame 3 moves forward away from the main body frame 4 because the connection cable 503 moves away from the front surface of the frame 4, the folded connection cable 503 is deformed to open, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates (rotates) about the mounting shaft 502c away from the axis so that the connection cable guide member 502 is inclined with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 with the deformation of the connection cable 503. As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 near the axis protrudes into the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. The connection cable 503 guided by the member 502 passes near the axis, so that the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are hardly obstructed.

  In other words, since the connection cable guide member 502 has its distal end extending from the mounting shaft 502c rotatably mounted to the shaft center side, the base end of the guide member can be moved like a conventional pachinko machine. Compared to the case where the connection cable 503 is extended in the direction away from the axis, the folded portion of the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the door frame. The position is close to the lower hinge pin 126, and the folded portion of the connection cable 503 can be set as a position that is hardly obstructed.

  On the other hand, when closing the door frame 3 that is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 moves so as to approach the front surface of the main body frame 4. Moves in the opposite direction to the above, and the connection cable 503 is held (guided) by the connection cable guide member 502, so that the door frame 3 is not sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Can be closed. Therefore, at the time of maintenance such as opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not hinder the maintenance, the maintenance can be performed smoothly, and the maintenance is interrupted. It is possible to reduce the increase in the interruption time of the playing game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  Also, the connection cable 503 that extends from the end of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the axis and then turns back and extends in the direction away from the axis is positioned closer to the axis than the end of the connection cable guide 502. Since it is held on the door frame 3 side by the cable holder 103a, the rotation angle of the connection cable guide member 502 with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 (cable mounting recess 501h) becomes a circle passing through the cable holder 103a around the axis. A tangent line passing through the center of the mounting shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is smaller than an angle at which the connection cable guide member 502 intersects the rear surface of the door frame 3. The rear surface can be prevented from forming an angle close to a right angle. Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502, so that the door frame is When closing 3, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be pulled toward the shaft center by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a.

  From these facts, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated so as to return to the original state, and the door frame 3 does not close or the connection cable guide does not move. It is possible to prevent such a problem that the end of the member 502 abuts on the door frame 3 and the connection cable 503 is disconnected. Therefore, when a trouble that the door frame 3 needs to be opened and closed to perform maintenance occurs during the game, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not hinder the maintenance work, and the maintenance is performed. The game can be smoothly performed, the increase in the interruption time of the game can be reduced, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. Thus, when the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back by 180 degrees changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force for closing the connection cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the folding habit, and to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving. The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

  In the door frame 3 opposite to the main body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 when closed (the axis is lower than the cable holder 103a). (A position close to the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 in the speaker duct 103) by which the connection cable 503 can be pressed toward the body frame 4 side on which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted. Which protrudes rearward on the side). Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. In addition, a tangent line passing through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502 and contacting a circle passing through the pressing portion about the central axis (axis) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 The crossing angle is configured to be 45 degrees or less. Accordingly, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less. 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, since the frame 502b is provided on each of two long sides of the guide main body 502a in the connection cable guide member 502, the rigidity of the flat guide main body 502a is increased and it is difficult to bend. In addition, the connection cable 503 can be guided in the longitudinal direction by the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operation and effect can be reliably realized.

  Further, as described above, since the rigidity of the connection cable guide member 502 is increased, even when the connection cable 503 is a heavy connection cable 503 including many electric wires, the connection cable guide member 502 is bent and distorted. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated about the mounting shaft 502c, and the connection cable 503 can be guided in a good state, and more electric wires can be guided. As a result, the electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be centralized in one place, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  In a state where the connection cable 503 is attached between the pair of frame pieces 502b of the guide main body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is connected to the connection cable 503 through the through-holes 502d on both sides of the connection cable 503. By winding the cable guide member 502 and the binding band 504 together, the connection cable 503 can be held by the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, the work of holding the connection cable 503 by the connection cable guide member 502 can be easily performed. be able to. Further, by holding the connection cable 503 by the binding band 504 passing through the through hole 502d of the connection cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 can be prevented from coming off from the guide member 502. The connection cable 503 can be securely held, and the connection cable 503 is caught between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed by detaching the connection cable 503 from the connection cable guide member 502. Can be avoided, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the space on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame 4 is provided below the outer frame constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 via the connection portion 621c and the connection tube portion 43a. Since the space between the port member 47 and the connection tube portion 43a in the assembly 40 (the inner space 40a of the curtain plate) is communicated, the main frame speaker is formed by the space in the speaker unit 620a and the space on the outer frame 2 side. Since the volume of the enclosure 624 of the 622 can be sufficiently ensured, heavy bass can be output from the main frame speaker 622, and the sound of the heavy bass can delight the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Can be. Therefore, by providing the cable attachment concave portion 501h for attaching the connection cable guide member 502 to the main body frame 4, even if the volume in the speaker unit 620a is reduced, a heavy bass sound can be output from the main frame speaker 622. Since it is possible, the main frame 4 can be provided with the cable mounting concave portion 501h which is recessed rearward below the main frame speaker 622, and the connection cable guide member 502 having the above-described operational effects can be mounted on the main frame 4 side. In addition, since the connection cable guide member 502 holding a part of the connection cable 503 is attached to the inside of the cable attachment recess 501h that is recessed rearward in the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. When closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is housed in the cable attachment recess 501h, so that the protrusion from the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be suppressed as much as possible, and interference with the rear surface of the door frame 3 can be prevented. The door frame 3 can be reliably closed by avoiding it.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main frame of the main frame 4 passes through the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3. The game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the game board insertion slot 501b of the base 501 can be viewed from the front (from the player side), and the lower side of the outer window 2 is formed below the door window 101a. The front end of the port member 47 is opened near the right end in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the front surface of the curtain plate front member 42 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and the port member is formed at the lower part of the front surface of the door frame 3. A speaker port 211b of the dish base unit 210 is opened near the left end on the opposite side to the left-right direction from 47. The speaker unit 620a communicates with the front side of the body frame speaker 622 attached below the game board insertion port 501b of the body frame 4 while covering the rear side of the body frame speaker 622. The internal space of the (speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623) communicates with the inside of the port member 47 via the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 and the connection tube 43a of the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. In this state, when the main frame speaker 622 attached to the speaker unit 620a is driven, the sound output from the main frame speaker 622, such as sound, music, and sound effects, is output to the speaker mounting portion of the speaker cover 621. The light is radiated toward the player through the speaker port 621a and the speaker port 211b of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the sound output backward from the main frame speaker 622 passes through the connection portion 621c and the connection tube portion 43a and enters the interior of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43. Is transmitted to the front player side from the port member 47. At this time, the space (enclosure 624) on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622 is constituted by the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40. The volume can be made as large as possible, and a sound that is extended in the low range from the main frame speaker 622 can be output. Further, since the connection tubular portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame 2 is opened toward the center side (upward) in the frame, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 (the speaker unit 620a ), The width in the depth direction (front-back direction) at the connection portion with the speaker unit 620a can be made larger than in the past, so that the width of the connection tube part 43a and the connection part 621c in the front-rear direction is increased. Attenuation of the sound from the space to the side of the curtain frame inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 can be reduced as much as possible. Further, since the port member 47 has a cylindrical shape on the outer frame 2 side, Helmholtz resonance occurs in the port member 47, so that the bass range can be amplified and the phase can be inverted, and the port member 47 can be inverted. 47 can output a sound whose bass is amplified. The sound output forward from the main frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 interfere with each other in front of the pachinko machine 1 and are synthesized, so that the sound volume is further increased. In addition, it is possible to make the player hear richer low-pitched sound, and to make the player enjoy sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear is inverted at the port member 47 and radiated forward (constituting a so-called bass reflex speaker). If the sound output forward from the frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 overlap, their phases are the same, so that the amplitude of the sound wave increases and the volume of the sound increases. As compared with the case where the passive radiator is used, the sound output can be increased with a simple configuration.

  Further, since the speaker unit 620a and the outer frame lower assembly 40 are arranged below the game board insertion slot 501b in which the game board 5 is held, the vertical dimension of the speaker unit 620a and the outer frame lower assembly can be increased, and the main body frame speaker 622 can be provided. Of the enclosure 624 can be increased. More specifically, in general, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the position (height) of the player's eyes is positioned higher than the vertical center of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the center of the game area 5a in which the game is played is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, it is relatively easy to secure a space below the pachinko machine 1, so that it is lower than the game board insertion slot 501b in the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the main frame 4 constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2. Since the vertical dimension on the side can be relatively large, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 can be increased by increasing the vertical dimension of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the speaker unit 620a. In addition, it is possible to output a sound in which the bass is richer, to allow the player to enjoy the sound, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since the connecting tube 43a and the connecting portion 621c are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, simply closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 causes the connecting portion 621c to come into contact with the connecting tube 43a and to be mutually connected. It is possible to achieve the same operation and effect as described above, and there is no sliding resistance between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability during maintenance or the like.

  Furthermore, since the sealing member 48 seals the space between the connection cylinder 43a and the connection 621c, it is possible to prevent the sound leakage in the enclosure 624 between the connection cylinder 43a and the connection 621c. The pachinko machine 1 can surely exert the above-described effects.

  In addition, since a part of the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 can be secured in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a can be made smaller. A game board 5 having a larger game area 5a can be provided by enlarging the insertion port 501b, so that the player can be more entertained by the wide game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous by seeing, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided.

  Further, the port member 47 is arranged near the right end in the left and right direction in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, and the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker unit 620a, that is, the main frame speaker 622 is arranged near the left end on the opposite side. Since the main frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 are separated in the left and right direction, the sound output forward from the main frame speaker 622 and the sound output front from the port member 47 are separated by the outer frame. 2 (pachinko machine 1) and interfere with each other at a certain distance in front of the player, the sound can be amplified near the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and, as described above, You can hear rich low-pitched sound.

  Further, as described above, the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 to the front is amplified by causing interference near the player and amplified. Unamplified sound will reach the player. Thereby, when a sound that indicates the arrival of a chance is output, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can hear a sound with a large volume and a rich bass, thereby increasing a sense of expectation for the game. Can be done. On the other hand, it is difficult for a player playing with another pachinko machine to hear the sound from the present pachinko machine 1, so that it is difficult to recognize that a chance or the like has been suggested in the present pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of another player peeping into the pachinko machine 1, thereby causing discomfort to the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 and lowering the interest. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the position of the connection tubular portion 43a of the outer frame 2 is set at the center in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the speaker unit 620a on the main body frame 4 side connected to the connection tubular portion 43a. Is located at the center in the left-right direction, the length of the speaker unit 620a in the left-right direction can be from the vicinity of the left end where the speaker mounting portion 621a is formed to the center. In FIG. 4, a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center therebetween. Therefore, in the main body frame 4, another member is disposed in a space secured on the opposite side to the speaker unit 620a with the center in the left-right direction therebetween, or the other member is enlarged so as to spread in the space. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by other members, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, as described above, since a space can be secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the center of the lower side of the outer frame 2 in the left-right direction therebetween, the game balls B are discharged to the space. Base unit 620b including a ball guiding unit 627 and an ejected ball receiving unit 628, and a ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into a game area 5a of a game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. , A power supply board 630 for controlling the power supply of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of the game medium balls, and the like, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely be provided with them. .

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the plate unit 200 bulging forward in front of and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is played is provided with the central pressing operation part 303a projecting upward from the upper surface. An annular outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b surrounding the outer periphery of the central pressing operating section 303a and having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201; and an annular rotating operating section surrounding the outer periphery of the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b. 302 are arranged so that the front end side of the upper surface is lower, the upper surfaces of the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are the heads of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The (face) faces in a certain direction, so that the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotating operation unit 302 can be easily seen, and are arranged concentrically. The large operation unit (the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302) can be shown to the player, giving a strong impact to the player, and the operation unit provided in the conventional pachinko machine. Can clearly recognize at a glance that the operation unit is provided in a clearly different form, and can differentiate the pachinko machine 1 from other pachinko machines and strongly attract the interest of the player. it can. In addition, since the center pressing operation section 303a, the outer circumference pressing operation section 303b, and the rotation operation section 302 are conspicuous, a game in which the player operates the center pressing operation section 303a, the outer circumference pressing operation section 303b, and the rotation operation section 302 is performed. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the player-participated effect, and to advance the game so as to be in a game state in which the player-participated effect is executed (here, a large number of game balls B are driven into the game area 5a). ), And when the player participation type effect is executed, it is possible to make it easier to participate in the effect, so that the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are slightly protruded from the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 by a lifting mechanism including an operation button lifting drive motor 367 or the like in accordance with a game state. ) And a protruding position (elevated position) projecting upward from the retracted position, and in the retracted position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed by the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371. When the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in the retracted positions, the player can clearly recognize that the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is not accepted. Therefore, it is possible to reliably press the center pressing operation section 303a, and to enjoy the player participation type effect, thereby reducing the interest. It is possible to control.

  Further, in the retracted position state, the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b is in a non-pressable state, so that there is an immovable outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b between the central pressing operation section 303a and the rotation operating section 302. Therefore, an erroneous operation such as pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a to the momentum of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 or rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the momentum of pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a is performed. Can be made hard to occur, and it is possible to surely entertain the player-participation-type production and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Then, by moving to the protruding position, the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are greatly protruded upward on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, so that the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b can be made to stand out, a strong impact can be given to the player, and a premium feeling can be given to the pressing operation of the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, and there is something good. It is possible to raise the sense of expectation for the game by assuming that the game is not the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to participate in the player-participation-type effect in which the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b and the center pressing operation part 303a are pressed, and it is possible to entertain the player participation-type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the state of this protruding position, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b can be newly pressed, and the center pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotating operation unit 302 are arranged concentrically. When the central pressing operation unit 303a has to be pressed, the outer pressing unit 303b is pressed, or both the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer pressing unit 303b are pressed, or When the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b must be pressed, the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, or both the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are pressed. When the operation unit 302 is rotated or when the rotation operation unit 302 needs to be rotated, the outer periphery pressing operation is performed. Or accidentally pushes the section 303b, and an outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a can be induced to or accidentally pressed. This allows the player to perform a pressing operation or a rotating operation while paying attention to the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed or the rotating operation unit 302 to be rotated when performing the pressing operation or the rotating operation. , It is possible to give a sense of tension to the pressing operation and the rotating operation, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of, and to enjoy the player participation type performing the pressing operation and the rotating operation. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game of the player.

  Further, a notifying unit such as the vibration speaker 354 and the effect display device 1600 is provided, and in the player participation type effect, the player presses the center pressing operation in a protruding position where the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b can be pressed. If only the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b is pressed by mistake when the part 303a is to be pressed, the notification means notifies the user that the center pressing operation part 303a is to be pressed, so that the pressing operation is performed again to perform the pressing operation. The center pressing operation section 303a to be pressed can be reliably pressed, and the player can enjoy the player participation type effect, and the mistake of the pressing operation is corrected, so that the player is damaged by a mistake. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling unpleasant, to entertain the player-participatory effect, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the player is supposed that he / she is correctly performing the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a, the reaction (change) of the player participation type effect despite the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a. Is different from desired, and if the center pressing operation unit 303a is out of order, the player may have an illusion and the interest may be reduced. On the other hand, as described above, since the notifying means notifies the mistake of the pressing operation, the belief of the player can be corrected, and the center pressing operation section 303a can be correctly pressed to perform the player participation. You can entertain the type production.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 for storing game balls B for swelling forward in front of and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where the game is performed. The rotating unit 302 includes an annular rotating operation unit 302 having an outer peripheral side surface, an upper surface, and an inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside and rotatable around a vertically extended axis. A pressing operation unit 303 including a center pressing operation unit 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is arranged, and the rotation operation unit 302 is changed according to a game state that changes when a game is performed in the game area 5a. A player participation type effect of performing a rotation operation and a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is executed by the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the player participation type effect is performed, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in an appropriate direction or presses the pressing operation unit 303 to perform the rotation operation or the pressing operation. Since the effect changes, the player can participate in the effect, entertaining the player, and suppressing a decrease in interest. When rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the player touches any of the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface that is exposed to the outside, and performs the operation. Since the rotation operation can be performed by touching a distant position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with relatively small force, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed. Further, when the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 is touched and rotated, the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated at a high speed by operating the outer peripheral side surface to be rubbed in one direction by a player's hand. it can. Therefore, even when a player participation type effect that requires the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate at a high speed is executed, as described above, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a high speed. , The effect can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small (light) force, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is frequently rotated, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be tired at an early stage. A player-participatory effect in which the operation unit 302 is rotated can be continuously enjoyed, and a decrease in interest of the player in the game can be suppressed. In addition, as described above, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated quickly or rotated with a light force, in the player participation type effect, various rotation operations are requested to the player, Different rotation operations can be requested in each of them, and more and more various types of player participation-type effects can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be.

  Further, the outer peripheral side surface of the operation cover (configured by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337) that the player touches and rotates is rotatably attached to the dish unit 200. Since it protrudes in an arc shape outward (in the direction opposite to the rotation center) from the rotating base 332, even if the rotating operation is performed to rub the outer peripheral side surface, the plate unit 200 does not interfere. Since the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated and the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 is rounded, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated from a direction other than right beside the rotation operation unit 302 (a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis). When rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the player can operate the rotary operation unit 302 without worrying about the position and orientation of the external side surface. It can be, it is possible to enhance the operability of the rotation operating part 302. Therefore, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated by rubbing the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (operation cover), the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a higher speed in the player participation type effect. In addition, it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is increased, the rotation operation at a small rotation angle can be easily performed and the rotation operation can be easily performed as compared with a rotation operation unit having a small diameter such as a conventional pachinko machine. In this case, it is possible to make the player more aware that the rotary operation unit 302 is being rotated, and the rotation operation unit is used in the player participation type effect. The rotation operation of 302 can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape. The player can touch and rotate a part such as the inner side surface or the like according to the preference or situation of the player, so that the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be further improved and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be performed. It is possible to make the participatory-type production more enjoyable and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, even if the rotation operation unit 302 includes the pressing operation unit 303 in the ring, The operation unit 303 does not hinder the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 comfortably, so that both the rotation operation and the pressing operation can be sufficiently enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be done.

  Further, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, and the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped by the player. The appearance of the part 302 can be completely different from the appearance of a steering wheel of an automobile, a control stick of an airplane, or the like. Thus, for example, when the rotary operation unit is configured as a steering wheel of an automobile, it is assumed that the player grasps and operates the rotary operation unit at the moment when the player sees the rotary operation unit. Since the player can only perform operations like the handle judgment of a player, when a player participation type effect requiring various rotation operations is executed, a rotation operation different from the handle judgment cannot be performed, and the player participation type effect There is a possibility that the enjoyment of the game may be reduced and the interest in the game may be reduced. However, in the present embodiment, since the appearance of the rotary operation unit 302 is completely different from the appearance of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control stick of an airplane, and the like, the player is given a prejudice regarding how to operate the rotary operation unit 302. Wiping can be performed, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated as desired by the player, and a player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, even when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotary operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside. Thus, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 does not interfere, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated comfortably, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 for storing a game ball B for swelling forward and in front of and below a game area 5a in which a game is played on the game board 5. On the upper surface of the plate unit 200 provided with a rotary operating unit 302 having a rotating shaft extending vertically, a center pressing operating unit 303a and an outer circumferential pressing operating unit 303b are provided in the ring of the rotating operating unit 302. A pressing operation unit 303 is arranged, and when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 via the ring gear 332 a of the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates around the axis, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 rotate the transmission detection gear member 345. For detecting the rotation by detecting a known piece 345b, it is possible to detect a rotating operation of the rotary operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, unlike the conventional rotation operation unit, there is no need to provide a detection piece for detecting rotation on the lower side over the entire circumference. Further, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 345 via the ring gear 332a, a portion (the operation ring transmission gear 350) for transmitting the rotation from the ring gear 332a to the transmission detection gear member 345. Is only a part of the entire circumference of the rotary operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space below the rotation operation unit 302, and to produce an effect in which a sufficient number of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape at a height between the rotation operation unit 302 and the transmission detection gear member 345. The operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be arranged. Then, in accordance with the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a and the rotation detection of the rotation operation unit 302 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the rendering operation ring decorative board The entirety of the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 constituting the rotation operation unit 302 can be sufficiently (uniformly) light-embellished by appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs 352. Thus, the rotary operation unit 302 can be made to stand out, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted.

  Further, since the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 via the transmission detection gear member 345, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 At the same direction and at the same speed, a plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be sequentially lit (lighted on / off). As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a state in which specific portions of the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 are decorated with light emission. It is possible to give an illusion that an LED is provided inside the rotation operation unit 302, and it is possible to enjoy rotation (rotation operation) of the rotation operation unit 302 and suppress a decrease in interest. Alternatively, when a player participation type effect requesting a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is executed according to a game state, a plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are rotated. By sequentially emitting light in the direction to be operated, it is possible to encourage the player to perform the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and to enjoy a player-participatory effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the rotation direction and the rotation speed (rpm) of the rotation operation unit 302 are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and are arranged in a ring shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. The plurality of LEDs can be sequentially turned on so as to have the same rotation speed as the rotation operation unit 302. This allows the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate together with the rotation operation unit 302 in a state where a certain portion of the rotation operation unit 302 emits light, even though the player is performing the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, to give a premium feeling by the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the luminous decoration, and to think that there is something good for the player. As a result, the sense of expectation for the game can be raised, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, the plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are sequentially emitted, and the light emitting decoration in which the light rotates in the rotation operation unit 302 can be shown to the player. On the other hand, it is possible to immediately recognize that the circular rotary operation unit 302 is for performing a rotary operation, and to facilitate the participation of the player when the player participation type effect is executed. In addition to this, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect, and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  Further, the transmission detection gear member 345 is mounted rotatably around an axis orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302, and when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the rotation surface of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation detection gear member 345 is rotated. The transmission detection gear member 345 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the projection range of the unit 302, and the configuration related to the rotation operation unit 302 in the plate unit 200 (the production operation unit 300 or the rotation drive unit 340). , The diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 can be relatively increased, and the rotary operation unit 302 can be made more conspicuous to attract the player's interest.

  Further, an operation ring drive motor 342 for driving the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345 in accordance with the game state is provided. Since the operation unit 302 can be rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342 in addition to the rotation operation of the player, the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 is rotated around according to the game state, By decorating, the rotation operation unit 302 can be made to stand out below and in front of the game area 5a, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302.

  In addition, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348, when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation is performed. By rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the same direction as the operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be assisted, and the operational feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be reduced. . Alternatively, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring driving motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation operation by the player, and the operational feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be increased. Can be heavier. Further, in response to the rotation operation by the player, by applying a rotational force to the rotation operation unit 302 in a direction in which the rotation is stopped by the operation ring drive motor 342 at every predetermined rotation angle, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed. Click feeling can be imparted. Further, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 reciprocally within a predetermined angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 can be vibrated. As described above, since various operation feelings can be given to the rotary operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to cope with a wider variety of player participation-type effects, so that a variety of effects can be applied to the game. It is possible to make the player hard to get tired of, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, since the operation operation ring decoration board 352 is provided, when giving the operational feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, the plurality of LEDs of the operation operation ring decoration board 352 are turned on in the same manner as the rotation operation. By sequentially emitting light in a direction or sequentially emitting light in a direction opposite to the rotation operation, the operation feeling can be assisted by light, so that the player can enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, since the diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, a space below the rotary operation unit 302 is easily secured, and a larger number of LEDs are mounted. Since the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be arranged, the rotation operation unit 302 can be more uniformly and brightly illuminated, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a are illuminated in a favorable state by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and the center button decoration substrate 376. Therefore, by appropriately emitting light, only the rotation operation unit 302 can be illuminated and decorated, only the pressing operation unit 303 can be illuminated and decorated, only the center pressing operation unit 303a can be illuminated, and the outer periphery pressing operation can be performed. Only the part 303b can be illuminated and decorated, so that the player can easily recognize the operation part desired to be operated, and can enjoy the player participation type effect.

  In addition, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape on the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, by emitting them sequentially, a light emission effect such as turning light can be performed. An effect in which the effect by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the effect by the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 in the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b can be performed. Specifically, for example, when prompting the player to perform the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, both the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are sequentially emitted. , To perform luminous decoration in which light is rotated in two rows. Alternatively, while the player is rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the LED (outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b) of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 also rotates light in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, On the other hand, when it is desired to prompt the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 in the opposite direction, the LED on the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 performs light emission decoration such as rotating the light in the opposite direction. In this way, the effect of various light emission can be shown to the player, so that the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, a rendering operation ring decoration board 352, an outer circumference button decoration board 377, and a center button decoration board 376 for emitting and decorating the rotary operation section 302, the outer circumference pressing operation section 303b, and the center pressing operation section 303a, respectively, are arranged concentrically. For example, the rotation operation unit 302 emits the respective LEDs in the order of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the center button decoration board 376, or emits the light in the reverse order. It is possible to show an effect of light that concentrates on the center pressing operation unit 303a from the center and an effect of light that diffuses from the center pressing operation unit 303a to the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, a variety of light-emitting decorations can be shown to the player, the player can be entertained, and the player's interest can be directed to the central pressing operation unit 303a or the rotation operation unit 302. The operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302 can be encouraged, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which a game is played is detachably mounted on the main body frame 4 from the front, and the front face of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed. On the door frame base 101 of the closed door frame 3, a door window 101a that allows the game area 5a to be viewed from the front is formed, and a glass unit 160 having a transparent flat glass plate 162 is attached to the door window 101a. Is mounted on the door frame 3 (door frame base 101) so as to close the door plate, and an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 for storing game balls B for playing games are provided below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101. The provided dish unit 200 is attached.

  On the upper surface of the plate unit 200, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and a cylindrical shape arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotary operation unit 302. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the pressing operation portion 303 including a columnar central pressing operation portion 303a are attached, and a semicircular donut shape similar to the rotation operation portion 302 below the rotation operation portion 302. And two large upper plate center decorations 312a and lower center plate decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other and connected to both ends of the upper plate center decoration 312a and lower center plate decoration 312b. The door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame Door frame top decorative body 453 of Puyunitto 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Accordingly, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two upper plate center decorations 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b are vertically arranged with three donut-shaped members. Since the operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made more conspicuous, and can be operated by a player. The rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby increasing the interest. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, the rotary operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b have a donut shape in which a similar cylindrical shape (tube) is formed in an annular shape, and are provided below the rotary operation unit 302. The left side decorative body 404, the right side decorative body 419, and the top decorative body 453 of the semi-cylindrical door frame surround the outer circumference of the game area 5a so as to be continuous with the upper plate center decorative body 312a. Therefore, a decoration in which the outer periphery of the game area 5a is surrounded by a cylindrical tube can be shown to the player, and a sense of unity can be given to the decoration on the front of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 The appearance can be improved, and the interest of the player can be directed to the inside (the game area 5a and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) surrounded by the cylindrical tube. Determined force can be enhanced, it is possible to easily this pachinko machine 1 is selected let increase the expectation as a pachinko machine for a game on the game in the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 is rotatably mounted on an upper surface of the plate unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be located forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotary operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the state is inclined so as to be lower, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made easily visible, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The rotation of the operation unit 302 can be performed, and the player's participation-type effects can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameter of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower plate decoration 312b is larger than that of the rotary operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotating operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b protrude forward more than the upper plate 201, and the plate center 200 Since the decorative body 312a and the lower plate center decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b can be largely conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from the other pachinko machines at a glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to appeal to the player. And the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  Further, since the rotary operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape having a circular cylindrical shape, the upper surface, the outer side surface, the inner side surface, and the like of the rotary operation unit 302 are compared with a flat disk shape. Since the fingers are easily applied, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated as desired by the player. In addition, since the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b are formed larger than the rotary operation unit 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b are larger than the rotation operation unit 302. Since it protrudes outward, it is possible to place an arm or put a finger on the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b, and the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 in a comfortable posture. And the presence of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protruding forward from the rotary operation unit 302 can prevent the player from being too close to the rotary operation unit 302. Thus, it is possible to easily secure a space around the rotary operation unit 302 in which an arm or a finger moves for a player to operate, thereby improving the operability of the rotary operation unit 302. Can. As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is easy to perform, when the player participation type effect is executed, it is possible for the player to think about the operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the player A participatory effect can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a inside the rotation operation unit 302 can be moved between a retreat position (down position) and a protruding position (up position). Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the ascending position, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes greatly above the rotation operation unit 302, so that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 may appear larger. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and to strongly attract the player's interest, and to increase the sense of expectation for the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be done.

  Also, when the pressing operation unit 303 is at the lowered position, the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is relatively more conspicuous than the pressing operation unit 303, so that the player's interest is directed to the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 is more conspicuous than the rotating operation unit 302, so that the player's interest can be directed to the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, by moving the pressing operation unit 303 between the descending position and the ascending position in accordance with the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, the effect operation unit 301 to be operated by the player is prompted. Thus, the player can accurately operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to enjoy the player participation type effect.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 inside the rotation operation unit 302 is at the lowered position, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a have the same height, and the rotation operation is performed. When the pressing unit 303 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the outer pressing unit 303b and the center pressing unit 303a protrude upward from the rotary operating unit 302. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a become operable. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately use the staging operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player in accordance with the contents of the player participation type staging, thereby enabling a variety of stagings to be supported and allowing the player to enjoy various operations. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the effect operation ring decorative board 352, the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316, the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side decorative of the door frame right side unit 410 Since the substrate 418, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are provided, the rotary operation unit 302 and the dish center upper decorative body 312 a are provided. The decoration of the pachinko machine 1 as a whole is improved by illuminating the decoration below the center of the dish 312b, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal by attracting the player's attention. In addition, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light as appropriate. By decorating, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight from within the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302), or from the effect operation unit 301 into the game area 5a. Depending on the state, it is possible to cause the player to operate the staging operation unit 301 or to play a game in the game area 5a, so that it is difficult for the player to get bored, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 has been described with reference to a preferred embodiment. However, the pachinko machine 1 can be variously improved and the design can be changed.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above embodiment, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b (the outer peripheral button cover 380) is pressed to the lower end in a state where the pressing operation section 303 is moved to the raised position, the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b is detected. Although not shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to detect the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. Thus, even with the same pressing operation, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are changed to different effects, or when the outer pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, the pressing operation of the center pressing operating unit 303a is prompted. It is possible to perform a more versatile player participation type effect, and entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In the above embodiment, when the pressing operation unit 303 (the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is moved to the rising position, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 303 moves to the descending position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in the state of the raised position, the downward movement may be restricted after slightly moving from the raised position.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the rotating unit 302 is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 bulging forward. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotating unit is disposed inside the plate unit. At the same time, the outer peripheral side surface of the rotary operation unit may be exposed to the outside on the front surface of the plate unit. This also allows the player to enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit in the same manner as described above, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the speaker unit 620a that is communicated with the curtain plate inner space 40a (port member 47) via the connection cylinder portion 43a is provided in the main body frame 4, but is not limited thereto. Instead, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose inside communicates with the port member 47, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

The pachinko machines described so far include the following technical ideas.
A game area having a game area in which a shot game ball can flow down, a first game area in which a game ball fired at a predetermined firing force can flow down, and In a gaming machine having a second game area in which a game ball fired with a specific firing force stronger than a firing force can flow down,
A communication passage portion that can pass before the game ball fired with the specific firing force enters the second game area,
The communication passage portion is provided with a plurality of discharge portions for discharging the passed game balls to the second game region so as to make different places where the passed game balls enter the second game region, A branching portion is provided to separate the passages so that a plurality of spherical passages are formed in the vertical direction on the upstream side of the plurality of discharge portions,
A first ball passage of the plurality of ball passages formed by the branch portion communicates with a first discharge portion of the plurality of discharge portions, and a first ball passage of the plurality of ball passages formed by the branch portion A gaming machine, wherein the second ball passage is configured to communicate with a second discharge unit of the plurality of discharge units. "

  Such a gaming machine is provided with a plurality of ball passages of the communication passage portion and a plurality of discharge portions communicating with the ball passages, and the location of entry into the second game area differs depending on which ball passage passes, and as a result, The falling modes in the two game areas are different. If the fall mode in the second game area is different, the probability of entering the ball will also be different, so that the player must carefully operate the steering wheel, and by grasping the aimed ball path, many If a game ball can be acquired, a sufficient sense of achievement and satisfaction can be obtained. Therefore, since the consciousness is concentrated on firing the game ball toward the second game area, the interest of the game is increased.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, a drop port connecting the first ball passage and the second ball passage is provided in a part of the branch portion of the communication passage portion, and a part of the game ball flowing in the first ball passage is provided in the second ball passage. And may fall from the second release unit to a specific location in the second game area.
In this way, in order to aim at the first discharge portion connected to the first ball passage, it is necessary to satisfy both the firing direction and the firing force, so that the driver operates the steering wheel with more careful concentration.

[20. Another form of pachinko machine 1]
Next, a pachinko machine 1 of another embodiment 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 1 according to the other embodiment 1 is obtained by changing the game board 5 and the handle unit 180 mainly of the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the description thereof is omitted in principle except for those related to them. Therefore, in FIGS. 187 to 212 and FIGS. 1 to 186, components denoted by the same reference numerals are components having the same or the same function in principle.

[Game board]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 199, the gaming panel 5 of the other embodiment 1 has a gaming panel 1100 having a gaming area 5a on the front, a center member 2500 attached to the gaming panel 1100, and the gaming panel 1100. And an effect unit 814 attached to the rear side.

[Game panel]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 199, the game panel 1100 includes a base panel 1110 made of an opaque plywood, a back side decorative member 817 for providing a background decoration 816, a game area 5a and a center member 2500. And a front component 1000 that surrounds.

[Base panel]
The base panel 1110 is formed of a plywood as described above, and a synthetic resin cell serving as a first decorative surface 819 is attached to the entire front surface thereof. The decoration 820a (in this other embodiment 1, a random arrangement of boy faces) is printed. In addition, a large through hole 1112 for attaching the center member 2500 is provided at a position substantially at the center of the upper side of the base panel 1110.

[Back side decorative member]
As shown in the perspective view of FIG. 201, the exploded perspective view of FIG. 202, and the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 195 and 196, the back side decorative member 817 for applying the decoration 816 for the background is produced by a production unit 814 described later. It is disposed on the back surface of the base panel 1110 via the support frame 852 (specifically, since it is screwed to the front surface of the effect support frame 852, it is formally integrated with the effect support frame 852). The background decoration 816 (for example, the decoration 820a of the first decoration surface 819 and the decoration 820a of the first decoration surface 819) having the sameness as the decoration 820a of the first decoration surface 819 on the front surface (including not only the uniformity in appearance, but also the conceptual uniformity). Connected to form one character.) Is formed. Note that the second decorative surface 822 also imparts a perspective perspective to the decoration 816 itself by arranging several pieces of plate pieces 822p in front and rear directions.
The rear decorative member 817 includes an upper decorative member 817a, a lower decorative member 817b, a right decorative member 817c, and a left decorative member so as to correspond to four sides of the through hole 1112 for mounting the center member 2500 of the base panel 1110. 817d, and the second decorative surfaces 822 of the upper decorative member 817a, the lower decorative member 817b, and the right decorative member 817c are arranged so as to face the inside of the through hole 1112, while the left decorative member 817d is The second decorative surface 822 is arranged so as to face the back surface of the base panel 1110 as shown in FIG. In addition, since the second decorative surface 822 of the left decorative member 817d is disposed opposite to the back surface of the opaque base panel 1110 as described above, it does not enter the field of view of the player in a normal state, but is illustrated in FIG. When viewed obliquely, a part can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling that the decoration 816 for the background spreads to the invisible depth of the base panel 1110, so that the three-dimensional effect can be further enhanced.

In the game area 5a surrounded by the front component 1000 of the base panel 1110, as described above, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, not shown. Windmills, obstacle nails, and the like that change the drop of the game ball are provided as appropriate according to the content of the game, and an out ball port 1008 for collecting the out ball is provided at the lowest place.
Most of these members are made of a transparent synthetic resin, and therefore, the background decoration 820a of the first decoration surface 819 is hardly hidden.

[Front component]
As shown in FIG. 200, the front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that divides the game area 5a and the upper outside of the center member 2500, and an inner rail that divides the game area 5a and the side and the lower part of the center member 2500. And a game ball fired from a firing rail 544 passes through a firing passage 1012 between an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 and is located above the game area 5a or above the center member 2500. You will be guided.
The front component 1000 is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and its surface can be seen through when installed on the base panel 1110. On the other hand, as described above, the base panel 1110 of Embodiment 1 has the decoration 820a for the background on the entire front surface, so that the front component 1000 is almost inconspicuous when camouflaged with the decoration 820a for the background. It looks as if the entire front surface of the base panel 1110 is a large game area 5a. Therefore, as compared with a conventional pachinko machine surrounded by an opaque front component, a visual effect can be obtained as if the entire game panel 1100 was enlarged to the game area 5a.
In the first embodiment, the decoration 820a for the background inside and outside of the game area 5a is unified in design (including not only the uniformity in appearance but also the unification of idea) to visually enlarge the game area 5a. However, the background decoration 820a of the portion corresponding to the game area 5a and the front component 1000 may have a different design without uniformity. In such a case, since the decoration of the front component 1000 can be covered by the printing of the first decorative surface 819, it is not necessary to decorate the front component 1000 itself, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The game panel 1100 of the present other embodiment 1 is configured as described above, and has a difference in the depth between the first decorative surface 819 on the surface of the game panel 1100 and the second decorative surface 822 on the back of the game panel 1100, and is used for the background. Since the decorations 816 and 20 have a three-dimensional effect, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

[Center member]
The center member 2500 has a mounting flange 830 having a profile slightly larger than the profile of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110, and protrudes from the rear side of the mounting flange 830 so as to be able to be loosely fitted into the through hole 1112. It has an inner frame portion 831 and an enclosing frame 832 protruding from the front side of the mounting flange portion 830 so as to prevent the inflow of game balls from the game area 5a. It is formed with.
An inclined tapered portion 833 that becomes thinner toward the base panel 1110 is formed on the peripheral edge of the mounting flange portion 830 of the center member 2500. In the other embodiment 1, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 193, at least a tapered portion 833 of a portion (for example, the mounting flange portion 830 in the upper half portion of the center member 2500) that can enter the field of view of the player playing the game has the through hole. The engagement between the mounting flange portion 830 and the base panel 1110 is set to be shallower than in the related art so as to catch on the edge of the hole 1112. By doing so, the light illuminating the inside of the through hole 1112 changes like a prism through the tapered portion 833 of the mounting flange 830 and leaks to the outside, so that the light leaking from the through hole 1112 around the center member 2500 Can be easily and effectively decorated.

  In addition, the center member 2500 has a plate having an effect area 834 facing a drum 854 described later of the effect unit 814 and a decorative surface 835 having a height substantially flush with the gaming area 5a inside the enclosing frame 832. And a decorative member 836 in the shape of a letter.

[Direction area-light guide plate unit]
In the effect area 834 of the center member 2500, a light guide plate unit 837 for protecting and decorating the front surface of a drum unit 855 described later is provided. As shown in FIG. 197, the light guide plate unit 837 has a light guide plate 842 fitted in a frame-shaped display window 841 including a vertical frame 839 containing a light emitting device 838 and a horizontal frame 840. Light is emitted from the light emitting device 838 of the horizontal frame 840 and the light guide incident end face of the light guide plate 842 to display a predetermined image in a staging manner.
The light guide plate 842 is fitted into the display window 841 in a state in which the display window 841 has a backlash of about several mm (for example, 3 mm). By doing so, even if the light guide plate 842 is thermally expanded, stress is less likely to be applied, so that the risk of deformation or breakage of the light guide plate 842 due to thermal stress can be reduced. In addition, the light guide plate 842 may be attached with some of the four sides fixed with screws (not shown) or the like, and the other sides can be moved without restriction, for the same purpose.

[Decoration members]
The decorative member 836 of the center member 2500 is a transparent synthetic resin plate protruding from the inside of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500 toward the vertical frame 839 and the horizontal frame 840 of the display window 841. The decorative surface 835 has a height substantially equal to that of the decorative surface 5a. As shown in FIG. 198, the decorative surface 835 has the same consistency as the background decoration 820b applied to the first decorative surface 819 of the base panel 1110 (including not only the external appearance but also the idea). ) Is drawn, and as shown in FIG. 197, the difference in position and size between the effect area 834 and the through hole 1112 shown by imaginary lines in FIG. Part) can be filled in in a natural way. In other words, the background decoration 820 b applied to the first decoration surface 819 digs into the center member 2500 in a natural manner. In addition, although the uniformity is achieved by the decoration, the light-emitting decorative body may be arranged so as to straddle the outside and the inside of the center member 2500.
Therefore, by adjusting the size of the decorative member 836 according to the size of the effect area 834, it is possible to cope with many models with a minimum design change while maintaining the outer shape of the center member 2500.
In addition, the decoration 843 drawn on the decoration surface 835 of the other embodiment 1 is drawn with an ink having excellent light-shielding properties, and therefore, the second decoration surface 822 seen through the non-decoration portion of the transparent decoration member 836. By contrasting with the decoration 816, the stereoscopic effect is further increased. Further, there is also an advantage that the light illuminated from the inside of the through-hole 1112 is reduced indirectly by the light-shielding property of the decoration 843.
In the first embodiment, a decorative lamp 844H for decoration is provided on the front upper portion of the effect support frame 852 described later and above the drum 854 described later, and overlaps the decorative lamp 844H of the decorative member 836. A notch 845 is formed at the position to avoid polymerization. Accordingly, since there is no possibility that the light of the decoration lamp 844H is reflected on the decoration member 836 and becomes difficult to see, the sharpness of the decoration lamp 844H is improved.

[Accessories attached to the center member]
As shown in FIG. 190 and FIG. 191, the center member 2500 enters from the game area 5a into a stage shelf 2503 for dropping the game ball into the game area 5a while moving the game ball in the left and right direction below the outer frame 832. And a warp passage 847 for guiding the game ball B to the stage shelf 2503. In addition, the first starting port 2002 is disposed just below the stage shelf 2503 in the game area 5a as described above, and when a game ball falls from the center of the stage shelf 2503, it is possible to win with a high probability.

  In the upper right outer half of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500, there is provided a discharge portion 848 for guiding a game ball jumping over the upper portion thereof along the outer rail 1001 to a lower right side of the game area 5a. Have been. The discharge portion 848 has a size substantially equal to one game ball, and is formed with staggered convex ribs 849 protruding alternately at substantially equal pitches on the right inner wall and the left inner wall as viewed from the front in the passage. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the discharge portion 848 touches a large number of obstacle ridges 849 while meandering, and spends an appropriate amount of time in a state where it falls as if colliding with the obstacle nail in the game area 5a. It is led to the lower right side of the game area 5a.

  Further, in the lower right outer half of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500, a second starting port 2004 in which a winning opening is opened and closed by the rotation of the opening / closing piece 850 is provided, and the second starting port 2004 and the discharging section are provided. A pass-through gate portion 2003 is provided at the middle in the vertical direction of 848. The gate portion 2003 is installed on an extended portion 830a extending in a horizontal peninsula shape from the mounting flange portion 830 of the center member 2500, and a rear portion thereof is aligned with the extended portion 830a of the center member 2500 to form a base panel 1110. In the bay-shaped notch 1112a formed in the through hole 1112. The gate portion 2003 (the other winning ports are the same) is installed on the extension portion 830a protruding in a peninsula shape from the mounting flange portion 830 in this way, and this is cut into the through hole 1112 to form a bay-shaped cut portion 1112a. The mounting space is not required because the mounting flange portion on the side of the center member 2500 is not required as compared with a case where the gate portion 2003 or the like having a unique mounting flange portion in the surroundings in an independent form is separately installed. And the area of the plywood of the base panel 1110 in the portion where the game balls flow can be increased accordingly. Note that the plywood has features such as easy driving and adjustment of nails and difficulty in pulling out the nails even after long-term use. Therefore, it is preferable to use a plywood as much as possible for parts where obstacle nails are provided. The game balls that have entered the discharge portion 848 are once guided to the area of the synthetic resin plate of the center member 2500, but when the game balls are discharged to the outside of the center member 2500, they are discharged to the area of the plywood on which the obstacle nail is provided. That's what it means.

[Direction unit]
The effect unit 814 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and includes, for example, a display device 851 that can display, as game information, a result of a lottery regarding a big hit started by detection of a game ball by the first starting port 2002. , A frame-shaped effect support frame 852 that supports the display device 851, and a rear cover 853 that is attached to the rear surface of the effect support frame 852 and covers the rear surface of the display device 851.

[Display device]
The display device 851 may be either an image display type using the above-described liquid crystal display device or the like, or a production type that can display the game information by a change such as mechanical rotation / stop of a movable object. 1, the latter production type is used.
As shown in FIG. 203 to FIG. 207, a specific production type display device 851 includes a plurality of drum units 855 that can rotate and vertically move a drum 854 as a movable object in a horizontal row. (Set) side-by-side and fixedly connected at the top and bottom with a connection plate 856.

[Drum unit]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 205, each of the drum units 855 includes a drum 854 having a cylindrical shape in a horizontal direction, a rotation driving device 857 for rotating the drum 854 in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. It is roughly composed of a movement driving device 858 for moving the entire unit vertically, and an illumination member 859 for illuminating the drum 854 from the inside to clarify the game information.

The drum 854 is formed of a thin sheet made of a synthetic resin, and a plurality of characters and designs are displayed in a predetermined arrangement on a peripheral surface.
A rotation driving device 857 for rotating the drum 854 is provided with a rim-shaped ring member 860 fixed to one opening edge of the drum 854, and is provided at the center of the drum 854 and gradually expands in diameter toward the ring member 860. In addition, a frustum-shaped cylindrical central member 861 that opens outward on the ring member 860 side, a coupling member 862 that radially connects the ring member 860 and the central member 861, and an electric motor directly connected to the central member 861 The central member 861, the connecting member 862, the ring member 860, and the drum 854 are integrally rotated or stopped by rotating or stopping the drive shaft of the electric motor 863.

  Note that the rotation drive device 857 is provided with an air cooling unit that cools the inside of the drum 854 by passing air. That is, the air cooling means includes a sirocco fan-shaped intake blade piece 864 formed on the peripheral wall of the center member 861 and a propeller fan-shaped exhaust blade piece 865 formed on the connecting member 862. The rotation in the indicated direction sucks air from the opening of the center member 861 in the manner of a sirocco fan and discharges the air into the space between the outside of the center member 861 and the inside of the drum 854. Is discharged to the outside of the drum 854 from between the connecting members 862. Therefore, a U-turn-shaped airflow in which the intake and the exhaust are opposite to each other is generated inside and outside the center member 861 of the drum 854, so that the inside of the drum 854 is efficiently cooled.

A moving driving device 858 that moves the drum 854 in the vertical direction together with the rotary driving device 857 is capable of vertically sliding the disc-shaped support substrate 866 that supports the electric motor 863 of the drum unit 855 and the lighting member 859. 867, a male screw drive shaft 868 erected in parallel with the guide shaft 867, upper and lower bearing stands 869 supporting the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867, and an upper bearing stand And an elevating motor 870 for the drive shaft 868 attached to the upper part of the 869.
Therefore, when the drive shaft 868 is rotated by the elevating motor 870, the support substrate 866 moves up or down along the spiral of the drive shaft 868, whereby the drum 854 moves up together with the rotary drive device 857 as shown by the solid line in FIG. Or it descends like the imaginary line in the same figure. In addition, the drum 854 is normally stopped at a substantially middle position (hereinafter, referred to as a “reference position”) of the movable range, and from this state, all the drums 854 may be moved up and down at the same time. May be moved up and down independently. When the drum 854 is at the highest position or the lowest position, as shown in FIG. 207, a part of the drum 854 comes off the display window 841 and becomes invisible. It exists within the frame of the display window 841.

  By the way, the movement driving device 858 according to the first embodiment can move the drum 854 only in the vertical direction. For example, another combination of the driving shaft 868, the guide shaft 867, the bearing base 869, and the support substrate 866 is used. The set is additionally rotated so that the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 become horizontal, and the two are added between the original support board 866 and the electric motor 863, that is, the two added to the original support board 866. The drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 are laterally inserted by fixing the bearing stand 869 side by side, and the electric motor 863 is mounted on a new support substrate 866 supported by the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867. Good. By doing so, each of the drums 854 can be freely moved up and down and back and forth, so that the variation of the effect by the drum 854 is markedly improved, and a member that hinders the up and down movement is temporarily avoided by the back and forth movement. Also becomes possible.

  Further, in the display device 851 of the other embodiment 1, linear illuminations 871a to 871d each having a vertical rod shape in a front view are provided between the drums 854 of the plurality of drum units 855. The linear illuminations 871a to 871d are luminous bodies such as cold cathode tubes, and are formed so as to be curved in an arc shape (bow) toward the front surface (player). The degree of bending of the located linear lights 871a and 871d is set to be gentler than the degree of bending of the linear lights 871b and 871c provided between the drums 854, and further, the frontmost part of the linear lights 871b and 871c between the drums 854. Are provided so as to protrude toward the player from the linear lights 871a and 871d located at both ends of the drum 854. Thus, in a state where the linear illuminations 871a to 871d are turned on, a curved three-dimensional effect can be given to the front surface of the drum 854.

  The display device 851 is attached to the game board 5 from the rear side by the effect support frame 852 described in detail below, and all the drums 854 located at the reference position in front view within the frame of the display window 841 of the center member 2500. Is set to fit. That is, the upper and lower widths of the display window 841 are larger than the upper and lower widths (diameter of the drum 854) of the movable drum 854, and thus the display window 841 displays the game information on the front of the stopped drum 854. (A lottery result is indicated by a combination of numbers or symbols in this portion.) In addition, at least one of the upper and lower contours of the drum 854 is visible to the player. By seeing at least one of the upper and lower contours of the drum 854 from the display window 841, the player can feel as if the drum 854 is in the air without any support.

Since the display device 851 is configured as described above, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 as described above, the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the game ball is hit. Is performed, and the result of the lottery is determined by a combination of symbols of the drum 854 stopped within the frame of the display window 841 through an effect operation for a certain period of time due to a mechanical change obtained by appropriately combining the rotation of the drum 854 and the vertical movement. Is displayed with. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, there is an advantage that a large amount of prizes in the special winning opening 2005 can be easily made within a predetermined condition. Of course, the rendering operation of the display device 851 may be any operation.
In the first embodiment, at the timing when a large amount of prizes can be made in the special winning opening 2005 (preferably before the special winning opening 2005 is opened), it is necessary to make a right-hand, that is, a strong hitting of the game ball. Indicate that the level should be set to the right side of the game area 5a (for example, switch the display panel 2005p shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 187 from OFF to ON and write a character such as "Please right-click." It is displayed or a voice gives a guidance such as "Please right-click.") A hitting instruction means is provided so that the profit of the player can be maximized. I have.

[Direction support frame]
The effect support frame 852 has a frame shape having an opening-shaped installation portion 872 for mounting the display device 851, and is fixedly attached to the back surface of the base panel 1110 with screws or the like. In addition to the display device 851, the back side decorative member 817 having the second decorative surface 822 is attached to the effect support frame 852 so as to surround four sides of the display device 851 as described above. The effect support frame 852 is provided with a decorative lamp 844H for decoration positioned above the drum 854 on the upper front surface as described above. Is provided. By blinking the upper and lower decorative lamps 844H and 844L at the same time, for example, a noticeable target among the plurality of drums 854 can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Rear cover]
The rear cover 853 is attached to the rear surface of the effect support frame 852 to cover the rear surface of the display device 851, and as shown in FIG. Also, a ventilation hole 874 for heat dissipation is provided on the rear surface. Further, at the top and bottom of the rear cover 853, effect lighting 875 for irradiating light toward the drum 854 of the display device 851 is provided, and the contour of the drum 854 is illuminated by illumination from the rear side. I have. Note that at least the inner surface of the rear cover 853 is dark (specifically, black) in order to enhance the effect of producing the light by the effect illumination 875. The effect lighting 875 is attached to the outside of the rear cover 853 so that a light-emitting body 876 such as an LED can face the rear cover 853 from there. Further, a half mirror 877 is provided in a portion corresponding to the effect light 875 in the rear cover 853, and the rear surface of the drum 854 can be seen on the mirror surface when the effect light 875 is OFF. Thereby, the rear side of the drum 854 is also gorgeously produced.

The above-described other embodiment 1 includes the following technical idea.
[Technical Thought 1]
A game panel having a game area in which game balls can flow down,
A gaming machine comprising:
A gaming machine comprising a decorative member having a decorative surface substantially flush with the game area inside the center frame of the center member.

[Technical Thought 2]
A display device for displaying game information by moving a movable object,
A display window that allows recognition of the presence of the display device,
A gaming machine that allows a player to recognize game information by the movable body that can be recognized through the display window,
The gaming machine, wherein the display window is formed in a state where at least one of the upper and lower contours of the movable object can be seen by a player, in addition to a portion showing game information of the movable object.

[Technical Thought 3]
A game machine having a game panel having a game area in which a game ball can flow down,
A first decorative surface for applying a decoration for a background formed on a front surface of the gaming panel,
A gaming machine, comprising: a second decorative surface formed at a position deeper than a front surface of the gaming panel for decorating a background.

[Technical Thought 4]
In a gaming machine having an operation medium for a game operation on a front surface of a door frame disposed at a position facing a player,
A gaming machine, wherein a hand cover portion is provided on a front surface of the door frame so as to surround an outer periphery of a player's hand operating the operation medium.

[Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 of the door frame 3 of the other embodiment 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. Note that the basic configuration for adjusting the firing force of the handle unit 180 is substantially the same as that described in the above paragraphs [0244] to [0259] and [FIG. 54]. Refer to FIG. 54 for a description of components not shown.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100), and controls the ball launching device 540 by a player's manual rotation operation to control the game ball B in the upper plate 201. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and a front end side of the handle 182. The cover base 183 is attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the front of the handle base 181. A handle cap 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183 as described above, and a hand cover 195 provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 so as to surround the vicinity of the outer periphery of the player's hand operating the handle 182.

  Also, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 behind the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 to the outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187 (see FIG. 54), and a detection shaft 189a integrally rotating with the transmission gear 188 (FIG. 54) And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 (see FIG. 54) sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to an initial rotation position (a rotation start end in a counterclockwise direction in front view). The energizing handle return spring 190 has one end attached to the inner base 186 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 (see FIG. 54) biased in the direction.

  Also, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 (see FIG. 54) attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end thereof extends outward from the left side in front view of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181. A single-button 193 (see FIG. 54) protruding and whose base end is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a pressing operation of the single-button 193 are detected. A single-button operation sensor 194 (see FIG. 54) attached to the handle base 181.

[Handle base]
The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a cup-shaped front end 181b provided at the front end of the base 181a, and an inward recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c (see FIG. 54) extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. The three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.
A bowl-shaped screen member 196 colored in white color is provided around the base 181a of the handle base 181 in a state that the bowl-shaped screen member 196 is fixed to the handle mounting portion 102. The light of the full-color LED emitted from the end of the frame right side unit 410 toward the screen member 196 can be reflected with substantially the same color.

[handle]
The handle 182 is based on a disk having a diameter and thickness suitable for the player to hold with one hand, and protrudes from the outer peripheral surface to a height at least as high as a height at which one finger can be inserted in the circumferential direction. A substantially point-symmetric position with respect to the rotation center (shaft member 187), that is, four finger hooks 182g to 182j projecting at equal intervals (90 degrees), and a circle around the rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a member projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e and locking the other end of the handle return spring 190. And a stop projection 182f (see FIG. 54).

  Further, the handle 182 is integrally provided with a decorative handle 1820 which is an annular decorative member concentric with the handle 182 via the finger hooks 182g to 182j. The decorative handle 1820 has a front surface covered with a translucent decorative cover 1821 and an outer peripheral surface covered with a conductive touch cover 1822 serving as a sensing unit of the handle touch sensor 192, and is disposed inside a hollow space. With the large number of light emitting LEDs 1823 and the light emitting LEDs 182L provided in the front of the finger hooks 182g to 182j in a dot-like manner, it is possible to perform an appropriate full-color effect by light.

In addition, as an example of the effect of the light by the light emitting LED 182L of the decorative handle 1820, the decorative handle 1820 visually appears as if the clockwise rotation is performed by the change of the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting LEDs 182L, and the right hand should be right now. Indicating that it is the timing, that is, using as the hitting instruction means described above. Further, preferably, a full-color LED of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 is used to produce a clockwise clockwise light flow in the entire door frame 3. Can be instructed to right-hand. For example, the full-color LED of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 is changed to “lower left → left → upper left → up left → up middle → up right → up right → middle → Light is emitted in the order of “lower right” to produce a light flowing clockwise (clockwise), and the light emitting LED 1823 of the decorative handle 1820 is clockwise emitted in a form that inherits the light flow. In particular, when light is emitted from the light-emitting LED 1823 that is closest to the full-color LED located at the lowermost part of the door frame right side unit 410, a more interlocked (integrated) effect can be achieved. In this case, the method of hitting is instructed by the two lighting modes of the door frame 3 and the decorative handle 1820. Therefore, even if a failure occurs in one of the LEDs, the player is hit without any trouble. Can be directed.
As described above, as an example of the effect of the light, the one that indicates that it is the right-handed timing has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is needless to say that the present invention can be executed in other effects than the above. . For example, in the case of instructing left-handing from the right-handing state, a series of effects reverse to the effect of light in right-handing (for example, by turning the light emitting LED 1823 on the decorative handle 1820 side counterclockwise decoratively). After turning, the full color LED of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 is lower right → middle right → upper right → upper right → upper middle → upper left → upper left → middle left → The effect of emitting light in the lower left) is not performed, or the instruction is not given. Perform an effect associated with it before an effect with a high level is executed, and so on. In addition, the interlocking referred to here is an interlocking effect of the above-described light effect instructing how to hit, for example, an effect in which light flows downward from above the pachinko machine 1 (the full-color LED of the door frame top unit 450). , Then the upper left and the upper right are illuminated, then the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 are illuminated from upper to middle to lower, and finally the light emitting LED 1823 of the decorative handle 1820 To emit light).
When the light emitting LED 182L of the decorative handle 1820 is used as the hitting instruction means, the light emission timing may be, for example, the same as the lighting of the display panel 2005p, which is another hitting instruction means, or may be applied to the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display device). It may be the same as the right-handed instruction displayed, or before or after it, but it is better to perform it at least before a large amount of prizes can be entered into the special winning opening 2005 (before opening the special winning opening 2005). , To protect the interests of the player.

  Further, as an example of the effect of the light of the light-emitting LEDs 182L provided in the front of the finger hooks 182g to 182j in a dot shape, changing the lighting pattern according to the emission intensity of the ball emission device 540 can be mentioned. For example, if the emission intensity is "weak", the color is blue, and if the emission intensity is "medium", the color is green. In the general pachinko machine 1, since the right-handed state in which the firing intensity is set to “strong” is an advantageous game state such as a big hit or a probable change, when the firing intensity is set to “strong”, psychological excitement is stimulated. It may be lit in red, which is said to have an effect.

When the handle 182 is at the initial rotation position, the four finger hooks 182g to 182j are both horizontal and the two finger hooks 182h and 182j are vertical. The cross shape is set so that when the player grips the handle 182 in the normal grip style, the right thumb naturally engages with the lower side of the finger hook 182g located on the left peripheral surface from the rotation center. It has become. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the finger hook 182g is a finger hook for normal operation. In addition, in the normal grip style, fingers other than the thumb are put on the handle 182 so as to sandwich the upper finger hook 182h.
On the other hand, the finger hook 182j provided on the peripheral surface below the center of rotation of the handle 182 hardly touches any finger in the normal grip style described above. When the finger such as the index finger is hooked on the finger hook portion 182j away from the handle 182j, the handle 182 can be rotated clockwise in a front view by an irregular operation of moving the finger to the left. In the other embodiment 1, the hitting instruction means (display panel 2005p) for instructing that the player should right-hand as described above is provided, and the hitting instruction means should be hit on the right side of the game area. In response to the instruction, a force in a direction opposite to the instruction (force in the left direction in front view) may be applied to the finger hook 182j of the handle 182.
Alternatively, the finger may be hung on the finger hooks 182h and 182i other than the finger hooks 182g and 182j, and the handle 182 may be rotated by a pulling force upward or downward.

[Cover base]
The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes a plurality of mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The mounting boss 183a penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and is mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cap 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 is restricted. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees from the initial stop position.

[Handle cap]
The handle cap 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and round, and has a light-transmitting center portion. Inside the handle cap 185, there is provided a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cap 185 can produce an effect by light by appropriately emitting light from the LED 184L on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

[Handle rotation detection sensor]
The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated clockwise in front view, the detection axis 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is transmitted via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. Rotates. The internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540 changes according to the internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189, The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. Note that, in the present other embodiment 1, when the handle 182 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, the firing force of the game ball is set to be strong.

[Handle touch sensor]
The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182, the finger hooks 182g to 182j, or the touch cover 1822 of the decorative handle 1820, the game is performed. By detecting static electricity acting from a player, contact of the player with the handle 182 or the like is detected. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 adjusted (input) by the player is received. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the game ball B, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. For this reason, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and cannot hit the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the handle control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 operates the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the operation before the operation of the single-shot button 193 is performed by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

[Handle mounting member]
The handle unit 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined such that the right end side is located behind the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the outside also inclines outwardly in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 can be easily gripped, and the player can perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

[Hand cover]
A substantially cylindrical hand cover portion 195 surrounding the outer periphery of the player's hand operating the handle 182 is attached to the front surface of the door frame 3 so as to surround the outside of the handle attachment portion 102, as shown in FIG. The front opening 195h is substantially aligned with the rear surface of the decorative handle 1820 as shown in FIG. Further, the joint portion of the hand cover portion 195 and the decorative handle 1820 is formed by a slidable fitting of a joint ring 1824 protruding from the rear surface of the decorative handle 1820 and an annular slit 195 a formed on the front surface of the hand cover portion 195. They are connected seamlessly.
The hand cover 195 can also be provided for the handle 182 where the decorative handle 1820 is not provided. In this case, the front opening 195h of the hand cover 195 is extended almost to the outer peripheral position of the handle 182. It may be extended and the same decorative means as the decorative handle 1820 may be applied to the front opening 195h.

In the hand cover portion 195 of this other embodiment 1, a window opening 195w communicating with the outside is opened in a part of the body portion. The window opening 195w allows moisture in the hand cover portion 195, smoke of cigarettes, or intentional or The present invention prevents beverages and the like that have flowed in due to negligence from staying, and also prevents fraud by improving the visibility inside.
Note that the handle 182 may be detachable as shown in FIG. 212 to facilitate cleaning of the inside of the hand cover 195 and wiping of the flowed beverage. Specifically, engaging / disengaging means 197 composed of, for example, a combination of a claw piece 197a and an elastically deformable receiving piece 197b is provided on each of the base 181a of the handle base 181 and the screen member 196 fixed to the handle mounting portion 102 side. By engaging and disengaging (see the solid line in the enlarged view of FIG. 212) and disengaging (see the imaginary line in the enlarged view of FIG. 212) the handle 182 and the handle base 181 together with the handle base 181 as shown in FIG. You may make it detachable from 102 side. By doing so, the handle 182 can be detached from the handle mounting portion 102, and the front opening 195h of the hand cover 195 can be fully opened, so that the inside can be easily cleaned and spilled beverages can be wiped off. Further, preferably, if the release operation of the engagement / disengagement means 197 is performed by a dedicated release member (not shown) (for example, insertion of a thumbtack type pin), there is no possibility that the handle 182 is pulled out due to mischief or the like.

By providing the hand cover portion 195 outside the handle 182 as described above, the hand (finger) of the player operating the handle 182 enters the hand cover portion 195, that is, into the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to more strongly realize that the pachinko machine 1 is being operated.
Further, if air is blown by connecting the air blowing means (not shown) to the hand cover portion 195, most of the air escapes from the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195, so that the wind can be reliably applied to the hand of the player. Can be. Therefore, for example, when the expectation of a big hit is high, or when the expectation of an advantageous hit (probability change or a large number of hits) is high, the wind is sent in a predetermined effect (for example, in a state like an air cannon), When a game state is controlled (for example, during probable change, during working hours, or during latents), the wind is blown at a regular timing, for example, every 5 seconds, or a predetermined lottery is performed, and then the lottery is performed. Directing, such as sending wind when winning, can be performed effectively. Of course, the wind may always be sent.
Although not shown, a game speaker (preferably a vibration speaker) may be provided inside the hand cover 195. In such a case, since the sound of the speaker is removed from the front opening 195h of the hand cover 195, the vibration of the sound can be effectively felt by the player's hand.

The above-mentioned other embodiment 1 includes the following technical idea.
[Technical Thought 5]
A ball launching device for driving game balls into a game area of a game board,
A handle for adjusting the firing force of the ball firing device by a manual rotation operation,
The handle is
A finger grip for normal operation, which is provided on the peripheral surface on the left side of the rotation center of the user and can be engaged with the thumb of a hand operated in a normal grip style,
A finger hook that is provided on a peripheral surface below the center of rotation of the handle separately from the finger hook and that can be engaged with at least one finger of a player's hand and that can be operated irregularly. A gaming machine characterized by that:
In such a gaming machine,
Equipped with a hitting instruction means for instructing a player how to hit a game ball according to a game situation,
On the other hand, the handle is set so that the firing force is increased by clockwise rotation in front view,
When the hitting instruction means instructs that the player should hit the right side of the game area, it can be handled by an operation of applying a leftward force in front view to the finger hook for the irregular operation of the handle. It may be.

  Although the other embodiments of the pachinko machine have been described above, the other embodiments can of course be appropriately modified. For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine. However, the present invention can be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrangement ball machine. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates a reel.

  In the above-described embodiment, the electric motor 863 of the rotary driving device 857 and the raising / lowering motor 870 of the moving driving device 858 are arranged in different directions, specifically, the electric motor 863 has an output shaft whose horizontal axis is the same as the rotation axis of the drum 854. , On the other hand, the elevating motor 870 has a different direction, such as a direction in which its output shaft is the same vertical as the driving shaft 868 of the drum unit 855, but the directions of the electric motor 863 and the elevating motor 870 are different. Can be the same. However, in the case where the electric motor 863 and the elevating motor 870 are set in different directions as in the above-described embodiment, identification and handling of a motor that causes a trouble in any of the rotation operation and the elevating operation of the drum 854 are performed. Is excellent in that it can be performed quickly.

In the above embodiment, the opaque base panel 1110 has been described as an example. However, the base panel 1110 may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.
In the above-described embodiment, the decorations 816, 820a, 820b, and 843 for the background are printed or the like, but may be decorations using a light-emitting body such as an LED.

  In the above-described embodiment, the handle cap 185 is fixed to the handle base 181 so that the handle 182 rotates between the two. However, the handle cap 185 is fixed to the handle 182 and rotates integrally with the handle 182. It may be obtained.

  In the above-described embodiment, the handle 182, the decorative handle 1820, and the hand cover 195 are combined. However, merely providing the decorative handle 1820 on the outside of the handle 182 does not sufficiently produce the effect of making the handle 182 look large and stand out. You can enjoy.

[Other pachinko machines]
Next, another pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. The other pachinko machines 1 are different from the pachinko machines 1 of FIGS. 187 to 212 mainly in the number, arrangement, and structure of the handle units 180, and therefore, in principle, except for those related to them. Description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 213, the pachinko machine 1 includes a handle unit 180 as a game input medium on both sides of a front swelling structure including the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and the effect operation unit 300. It has two. In FIG. 213, the right handle unit (hereinafter, also referred to as “right handle unit”) 180 (R) adjusts the strength of the hit ball of the ball firing device 540 as described above. On the other hand, the left handle unit (hereinafter, also referred to as “left handle unit”) 180 (L) is used as an input unit for the player in the above-described player participation type effect.

  Each of the handle units 180 (L) and (R) includes the operation unit including the handle 182, the decoration handle 1820, and the finger hooks 182 g to 182 j as described above. And rotate (operate).

  In each of the handle units 180 (L) and (R), the outer diameter of the decorative handle 1820 around the handle 182 is formed smaller than the inner diameter of the front opening 195 h of the hand cover 195, and the base 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed. It is slidably supported by the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and thus the entire unit can linearly move in the front-back direction within the hand cover portion 195. The handle units 180 (L) and (R) are directed toward the player by a spring 4001 of a handle position control unit 4000 described below, which is loaded in a compressed state in the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Always energized.

[Right handle unit]
The right handle unit 180 (R) adjusts the hitting force of the ball firing device 540 by turning the handle 182 as described above. In a normal state, as shown in FIG. Is located substantially flush with the front opening 195h (hereinafter referred to as “front position”), and is locked (fixed) by the handle position control means 4000 at this front position.

[Handle position control means of right handle unit]
The handle position control means 4000 of the right handle unit 180 (R) (hereinafter, also referred to as "right handle position control means") 4000 includes a swingable lock arm 4004 having a roller 4003 at the tip, and a lock arm 4004. The solenoid 4005 changes between a horizontal locking posture (see the solid line in FIG. 218) and a releasing posture in which the roller 4003 is flipped up (see the imaginary line in FIG. 218).
When the lock arm 4004 is in the horizontal locking position, the lock arm 4004 protrudes between the handle base 181 of the right handle unit 180 (R) and the handle mounting member 102 to lie on the right handle unit 180 (R). When the lock is at the forward position and the plunger 4006 of the solenoid 4005 is pulled up from this state and the lock arm 4004 is swung to the release position, the roller 4003 comes off the handle base 181 (the lock arm 4004 comes off). The lock of the right handle unit 180 (R) is released, and as shown in FIG. 219, the right handle unit 180 (R) can linearly move to the back of the hand cover unit 195 (hereinafter, referred to as “rear position”).
Note that the lock arm 4004 is biased by, for example, a torsion coil spring (not shown) from the release position to the lock position, and thus the right handle unit 180 (R) is moved forward with the solenoid 4005 turned off. When returned to the position, it automatically returns to the locked position.

  The right handle unit 180 (R) may be used as an input means for appropriately detecting an operation of moving the entire unit from the locked state with a sensor and issuing an input signal to the player participation type effect (that is, one unit). With the handle unit 180, the input for the hitting force of the ball firing device 540 and the input of the player participation type effect can be performed.) In the embodiment, the hitting force of the ball firing device 540 is adjusted by an operation of moving the entire unit from a stopped state. It is used as a second input means for performing the operation.

  Specifically, when the operation of pushing in the right handle unit 180 (R) is performed in a state where the lock of the right handle position control means 4000 is released, the hitting force of the ball firing device 540 is increased in proportion to the linear movement displacement. In the form of taking over the previous hitting force due to the rotation of 182 (meaning that the hitting force temporarily decreases at the point where the operation subject switches), the hitting force of the game ball is increased when the ball is pushed to the rearward position. The level changes to the level and the right-hand drive is performed (see paragraph [1615]), and the right handle unit 180 (R) is returned from the rear position to the front position (the pushing force to the right handle unit 180 (R) is relaxed). For example, the spring returns naturally due to the bias of the spring 4001), and returns to the batting force based on the rotation angle of the handle 182 (normally, the batting force at the time of the immediately preceding game). There.

  Alternatively, when the operation of pushing the right handle unit 180 (R) is performed, a control signal of the striking force is immediately sent so that the striking force of the ball firing device 540 becomes a high level, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 immediately before is transmitted. At a stroke from the batting force based on the steering wheel 182, and when the right handle unit 180 (R) is returned to the front position, the batting force due to the rotation of the handle 182 (usually the batting force immediately before) may be returned at once. Good.

  In short, the right handle unit 180 (R) includes two movable elements that can be displaced in different plane directions, and adjusts the hitting force of the ball firing device 540 with the displacement of one movable element. In addition to enabling adjustment of the impact force of the ball firing device 540 by displacement of the movable element, when the impact force adjustment by the other movable element is completed, the control returns to the impact force adjustment by the one movable element. And has two movable elements, for example, a handle 182 rotatably supported and the entire handle unit 180 supported movably in a different plane direction, and the ball firing device 540 is provided by the rotational displacement of the handle 182. While the hitting force adjustment is being performed, the hitting force of the ball firing device 540 can be adjusted by the movement displacement of the entire handle unit 180, and the handle When the hitting force adjustment by the movement displacement of the entire knit 182 is completed, the control returns to the hitting force adjustment by the handle 182. As a result, the normal game is performed by the hitting force adjustment by one movable element, and the special game is performed. The strong hitting force required when the game state changes to a so-called interrupted state can be performed by the displacement of the other movable element, while, when the special game state ends, the hitting force by the other movable element can be reduced. It is possible to simply and accurately return to the normal game state simply by ending the force adjustment.

  The right handle unit 180 (R) is configured as described above. In a normal game, the right handle unit 180 (R) is located at the front position of the hand cover portion 195 as shown in FIG. Locked. Therefore, similarly to the pachinko machine 1 of FIGS. 187 to 212, the hitting force of the ball firing device 540 can be adjusted by rotating the handle 182 together with the decorative handle 1820.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 changes to, for example, a special game state due to the progress of the game, the solenoid 4005 of the right handle position control means 4000 is turned ON, and the lock arm 4004 changes to the release posture in which the roller 4003 jumps up the roller 4003. The lock of the right handle unit 180 (R) is released. Then, characters such as "Please push the right handle inward." Are displayed or sound is played from the hitting instruction means of the pachinko machine 1 to the player, and the entire right handle unit 180 (R) is played. The user is instructed to input by moving. In response to this, the player pushes the entire unit to the rear position against the bias of the spring 4001 without changing the grip of the handle 182 during the operation, and the operation is detected and the hitting force up to now is detected. The striking force continuously changes to a strong level in a form in which a new striking force is added. This places the player in a right-handed state, and the player gains more special game benefits.

  Then, when the special game state is ended, at the same time, the solenoid 4005 of the right handle position control means 4000 is turned off by the control of the main control unit 1300, and the player is given a "right handle" by the hitting instruction means. Please return to the front. " When the player releases the force pushing the right handle unit 180 (R) according to the instruction, the right handle unit 180 (R) returns to the front position by the bias of the spring 4001. Then, the lock arm 4004 changes to a horizontal lock position by the urging of a not-shown torsion coil spring, and lies between the handle base 181 of the right handle unit 180 (R) and the handle mounting member 102 in a rod-like manner to support the right handle. Lock unit 180 (R) in the forward position.

  As a result, the pachinko machine 1 returns to the normal game state. At this time, the grip condition (rotation angle) of the handle 182 of the right handle unit 180 (R) is maintained by the player himself in a state immediately before the start of the special game. Therefore, the normal game is restarted with the hitting force immediately before the change to the special game state. By the way, in the conventional handle unit, since the hitting force is adjusted by operating one handle, it is necessary to search for the optimal hitting force again when returning from the right-handed state to the normal game state, and the game ball hit during that time It may be wasted.

[Left handle unit]
The left handle unit 180 (L) is used as an input means for a player of the player participation type effect as described above. The left handle unit 180 (L) has a structure which is substantially symmetrical with respect to the vertical axis passing substantially through the center of the door frame 3 with respect to the right handle unit 180 (R). The control means 4000 is unique by a cam mechanism.

[Handle position control means (left)]
The handle position control means 4000 of the left handle unit 180 (L) (hereinafter, also referred to as “left handle position control means”) 4000 is formed by the cam mechanism as described above, and is provided on the base 181 a of the handle base 181. A rotatable follower roller 4007, an elongated hole 4008 formed in the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 for passing the follower roller 4007, and a cylindrical cam rotatably fitted outside the cylindrical portion 102a. 4009, a cam portion 4010 provided on the cylindrical cam 4009, and a motor (not shown) for transmitting a rotational force to a gear 4011 provided at an end of the cylindrical cam 4009.

The cam portion 4010 has a first cam surface 4012 formed in parallel with the end surface (rear end surface) of the cylindrical cam 4009 opposite to the gear 4011 and an end surface (front end surface) on the gear 4011 side. A second cam surface 4013 is formed at a position closer to the end surface in parallel with the end surface, and an inclined third cam surface 4014 connecting the second cam surface 4013 and the first cam surface 4012 is formed.
As described above, the left handle unit 180 (L) is slidably supported by the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and is constantly urged toward the player by the spring 4001 loaded in the tubular portion 102a. However, the position is controlled by the engagement between the follower roller 4007 provided on the left handle unit 180 (L) and the cam portion 4010.

That is, the left handle unit 180 (L) is at the rear position with the follower roller 4007 abutting on the first cam surface 4012 of the cam portion 4010 as shown in FIG. The left handle unit 180 (R) is in the forward position with the roller 4007 abutting on the second cam surface 4013 of the cam portion 4010.
Therefore, when the cylindrical cam 4009 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 213 with the left handle unit 180 (L) in the rear position as shown in FIG. 221, the follower roller 4007 moves from the first cam surface 4012 to the third position. After reaching the second cam surface 4013 through the inclination of the cam surface 4014, the left handle unit 180 (L) moves integrally with the follower roller 4007 to the front position as shown in FIG. Note that the cam portion 4010 has an open space at the rear so that the follower roller 4007 can be freely moved rearward. Therefore, the left handle unit 180 (L) at the front position is spring-loaded. When pushed in against the urging of 4001, it sinks to the rear position in the hand cover portion 195, and when the force is released, it returns to the front position by the urging of the spring 4001. Therefore, the left handle unit 180 (L) at the front position can freely move linearly in the front-rear direction by controlling the force of the player.
If the cylindrical cam 4009 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 213 in the state where the left handle unit 180 (L) is at the front position, the follower roller 4007 is moved from the second cam surface 4013 to the third position. After returning to the first cam surface 4012 through the cam surface 4014, the left handle unit 180 (L) returns to the rear position in this state as shown in FIG.

  The left handle unit 180 (L) is configured as described above, and is located at a rear position in the hand cover 195 during a normal game as shown in FIG. The left handle unit 180 (L) at the rear position is hidden by the front swelling structure composed of the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the effect operation unit 300 and the like, and is less noticeable by the player. In addition, since it is surrounded by the hand cover portion 195 and the protrusion to the outside can be suppressed to a minimum, it is difficult to receive an external impact that may cause damage, and the risk of injury due to contact is reduced. By the way, at present, large levers and the like are used as input means for players in player participation type production, but if they are always protruding near the hands and knees of the player, they may receive shocks that may lead to damage. It is easy and the player may be injured by contact.

Then, in the scene where the player participation type effect is executed from the progress of the game and the player's input is required, the cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000 is first rotated by the control of the main control unit 1300, Due to the rotation of the cam portion 4010 and the bias of the spring 4001, the left handle unit 180 (L) moves linearly toward the player together with the follower roller 4007 and stops at the forward position. In this state, since the left handle unit 180 (L) appears to the player as if it appeared, the handle 182 of the left handle unit 180 (L) can be seen from the pachinko machine 1 at the timing of attracting the player's attention. , Or a push operation of the left handle unit 180 (L) is requested by display, voice, or the like. When the player rotates the handle 182 of the left handle unit 180 (L) or presses the left handle unit 180 (L) in response to this, the operation is detected and the effect shifts to the next scene. After that, the effect further proceeds and ends as appropriate.
In the handle unit 180 of the embodiment, since the periphery of the grasped hand is surrounded by the decorative handle 1820, the finger does not contact the hand cover part 195 even when the rotation or the pushing operation is performed. Low risk of injury. Thus, the decorative handle 1820 that surrounds the grasped hand and can rotate or move with the hand can also be referred to substantially as an "outer ring" that can protect the operating finger.

  Next, when the above effect is completed, the cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000 rotates in the reverse direction, and the cam portion 4010 abutting on the follower roller 4007 is moved from the second cam surface 4013 to the third cam surface 4014 through the third cam surface 4014. It changes to one cam surface 4012. In the meantime, the follower roller 4007 is pushed backward along the inclination of the third cam surface 4014, so that the left handle unit 180 (L) retreats from the front position against the bias of the spring 4001, and When the 4007 comes into contact with the first cam surface 4012, it reaches the rear position. The cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000 stops here, and the left handle unit 180 (L) waits at the rear position until the next effect is executed.

Note that, as is clear from the above description, the left handle unit 180 (L) is capable of performing motion effects and input substantially equivalent to the effect operation unit 301.
For this reason, for example, if the left handle unit 180 (L) and the effect operation unit 301 are moved under the same control, and inputs from both sensors are received, both the left handle unit 180 (L) and the effect operation unit 301 can be used. .
In this case, for example, a player who considers the operation of operating the effect operation unit 301 to be large and embarrassing can operate the left handle unit 180 (L) in advance with the minimum movement that is difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to easily participate in the player-participation type production, so that interest is increased.
In addition, whether the operation unit used in the player participation type effect is the left handle unit 180 (L) or the effect operation unit 301 is determined in advance by, for example, providing a selection switch on a part of the front bulging structure. A player may be allowed to choose.

  As described above, other pachinko machines have been described, but of course, the pachinko machines are not limited to the above. For example, a handle unit having the same structure as that of the right handle unit 180 (R) of the embodiment is installed at the place where the left handle unit 180 (L) is installed, and may be used as input means for a player in a player participation type effect. Conversely, on the contrary, a handle unit having the same structure as the left handle unit 180 (L) of the embodiment is installed at the installation location of the right handle unit 180 (R), and it is used to adjust the hitting force of the ball firing device 540. Input means.

Although two handle units 180 are provided in the above description, one handle unit 180 may be provided.
In the above description, the handle 182 is provided on the handle unit 180. However, the input for a game may be performed only by the linear movement operation of the handle unit 180 without providing the handle 182.

  In the above description, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine. However, the present invention can be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arranged ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (turning drums or reels) using a game medal. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates a). When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, one or two handle units 180 may be used as input means for a player participation type effect.

[Other Embodiment 2-1]
Next, another embodiment 2-1 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS.
In the pachinko machine 1 of the other embodiment 2-1, the above-described door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 can also be provided on, for example, the upper part of the game board 5 instead of the door frame 3 (for details, This is the front top unit 4500, and other configurations are the same as those described above, and thus description thereof is omitted.
Further, the configuration of the front top unit 4500 is a modification of the above-described door frame top unit 450 as appropriate, and thus the configuration of the door frame top unit 450 except for those described below as the front top unit 4500 Applies as it is.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the other embodiment 2-1 has a window portion (same as the above-described door window 101a closed with a glass plate 162 in the pachinko machine 1) that covers the game area 5a where a game is played from the front. An eaves-shaped front top unit 4500 corresponding to the above-described door frame top unit 450 (see FIGS. 88 to 90) is provided so as to protrude above the window 1010a.

The front top unit 4500 has, for example, a top formed by integrally molding a top upper cover 452 and a top lower cover 465 of FIG. 89 with a translucent and preferably opaque synthetic resin (eg, milky white synthetic resin). A main body cover 4520 is provided, and a space 4520S is formed inside without the central speaker box 461 and the door frame top bottom plate 454 of the door frame top unit 450.
The top body cover 4520 has an upper opening 452a formed on the upper surface thereof, which communicates with the space 4520S and is largely cut forward from the rear end. The opening 452a aligns with the opening. It is closed by a front top plate 4680 which is a shape opening / closing lid.

The front top plate 4680 is pivotally attached to the top main body cover 4520 by a rotation shaft 4680c provided on the rear end side, and has a closed position (see the broken line in FIG. 228) that closes the opening 452a. It is rotatable to an upright posture (see FIG. 225) in which the end side is flipped up to open the opening 452a and to be visible from the outside, and further controls driving means such as a motor (not shown) and the like. By linking with the peripheral control board 1510, the closed posture and the standing posture can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game or at a predetermined timing determined separately from the progress of the game.
In addition, the front top top plate 4680 is provided with an appropriate decoration (not shown) on the outer surface 4680a facing outward in the closed position, while the inner surface 4680b facing the space 4520S in the closed position has improved light reflection performance. It is processed into an excellent screen.

  As shown in FIGS. 225 to 228, the front top top plate 4680 may be formed into a single panel structure. It may be connected at 4680c to form a hinge shape, or as shown in FIG. 229, a plurality of elements may be connected by hinges 4680p to form a foldable structure. With the latter folding structure, the front top plate 4680 can be deployed in an upright posture, and the decoration of light can be effectively performed at a higher place and for a player. Also, if the first stage of the folding structure is made to be gate-shaped or transparent so as not to block the rear view, the data display of the island facility (the game provided on the curtain plate above the pachinko machine 1) (A display device that shows the progress of the game (such as the number of occurrences of big hit games)).

Further, the front top unit 4500 is provided with an illumination base 8000 at the inner edge of the space 4520S on the player side, and the illumination base 8000 swings a bar-shaped light emitting means 8002 in which a plurality of light emitting LEDs 8001 are arranged in a horizontal line. It is freely pivoted.
The light emitting means 8002 is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 like the front top board 4680, so that the light irradiation direction and the light emitting pattern can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game. Specifically, when the front top board 4680 is in the upright posture, the light emitting means 8002 is turned upward so as to irradiate light to the inner surface 4680b facing the player, while the closed posture of the front top board 4680 is set. In response to the change, the switch is switched downward so that light can be emitted to the lower side, that is, the bottom of the top body cover 4520.
In the other embodiment 2-1, the bottom of the top main body cover 4520 is formed of a translucent and opaque synthetic resin, so that only the light effect by the light emitting means 8002 is visible to the player. Moreover, since the light emitting means 8002 for irradiating the front top plate 4680 with light can be used for producing the light, there is almost no extra cost.
The light emitting means 8002 may be of an illumination type that irradiates colored light to the inner surface 4680b of the front top table 4680, or may be a video projection type that projects a character or the like onto the inner surface 4680b of the front top table 4680.

[Other mode 2-2]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the other embodiment 2-2, as shown in FIG. 230, the front end of the front top top plate 4680 is pivotally mounted on the top body cover 4520, and the light emitting means 8002 is attached to the top body cover 4520. It is provided on the inner edge of the space 4520S on the side opposite to the player, and the other configuration is the same as that of the other embodiment 2-1. In this case, since the front top top plate 4680 needs to transmit the light of the light emitting means 8002 from the inner surface 4680b (rear side) to the outer surface 4680a side (front side), it has the same translucency as the top main body cover 4520 and Preferably, it is formed of an opaque synthetic resin (for example, a milky white synthetic resin).
According to such a structure, the front top board 4680 stands up at a position close to the player, so that the player can feel more powerful and more prominent outside.

  Since the pachinko machines 1 of the other modes 2-1 and 2-2 are configured as described above, during the execution of the reach effect, the reach development effect, or the like, or during the result of the lottery regarding the jackpot or the execution of the jackpot, The light is emitted by the light emitting means 8002 to the front top top plate 4680 which is swung or the standing top posture is set, or the front top cover 4680 is set to the closed posture and the light emitting means 8002 is used to cover the top main body. Various effects can be performed by irradiating the bottom of the 4520 with light or the like.

When the front top top plate 4680 (opening / closing lid) of the front top unit 4500 is opened, heat is released to the outside from the opening 452a, so that heat is hardly trapped in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for example, with the light emitting unit 8002 turned off, the front top top plate 4680 is switched at appropriate intervals to open and close the opening 452a, and when the device is standing up several times, the effect is immediately displayed on the effect display device 1600. By setting the effect pattern to be set, the opening / closing operation of the front top board 4680 is incorporated in a part of the game to increase the interest of the player, and to radiate heat from the opening 452a without being noticed by the player. it can.
Also, the front top table 4680 of the front top unit 4500 opens and closes the opening 452a by switching between the closed position and the standing position in a demonstration manner irrespective of the progress of the game, that is, regardless of the progress of the game. You may make it.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is not performing the effect of raising the front top top plate 4680, the opening 452a is closed by the front top top plate 4680 in the closed posture. Even when dust, dust, cigarette tar, etc. do not enter the space 4520S, and the front top top plate 4680 is in the standing posture, the air heated in the pachinko machine 1 rises and the front top unit 4500 Since the airflow flowing upward from the opening 452a is generated, dust, dirt, tar, and the like hardly enter the space 4520S.

Although the pachinko machines 1 of the other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2 have been described above, the pachinko machine 1 is, of course, not limited to the other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2. For example, in the other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2, a flip-up type in which the front top plate 4680 (opening / closing lid) can flip up the free end side around the rotating shaft 4680c to open the opening 452a is adopted. Alternatively, the front top plate 4680 may have a sliding shutter structure.
Further, the front top plates 4680 of the other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2 may be provided separately on the pachinko machine 1 before and after.
The front top plate 4680 does not need to be fully opened at all times, and may be, for example, partially opened. It is preferable that the front top plate 4680 is in a mode in which it is difficult for the player to notice that the front top plate 4680 is opened and closed for the purpose of heat dissipation.
In the other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2, the light emitting means 8002 is formed to be swingable. However, the light emitting means 8002 may be further moved up and down to irradiate light from a high place of the pachinko machine 1. .

  In the other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2, the front top unit 4500 is provided on the door frame 3, but instead of the door frame 3, for example, the upper end of the game board 5 in FIG. A front panel unit 4500 is attached to the mounting unit of the top unit 4500, and the game board 5 provided with the front top unit 4500 is mounted on the main body frame 4, or the game panel 5 is provided as shown in FIG. On the other hand, a mounting portion for the front top unit 4500 may be provided above the main body frame 4 and mounted there. In this case, the door frame 3 is integrally provided with a transparent bulging portion that can cover other than the upper surface of the front top unit 4500 that projects upward and forward from the window 1010a.

Further, in the other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2, the portion of the front top board 4680 which is decorated with the light has a planar shape, but may have a three-dimensional shape imitating a character or the like, for example. In that case, the light emitting means 8002 may be a video projection type, and more realistic decoration may be applied to a three-dimensional shape by a projection mapping method. This increases the visual difference between when the front top plate 4680 is in the closed position and when it is in the upright position. The security effect against 452a also increases.
Further, in the other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2, the front top top plate 4680 and the light emitting unit 8002 are formed separately at front and rear positions, but the light emitting unit 8002 is incorporated inside the front top top plate 4680. You may.
Further, it is also possible to irradiate the curtain plate of the island facility with light by using the light emitting means 8002 of the other embodiment 2-1 so that the decoration and the effect of the light are performed in a state of protruding from the pachinko machine 1.
In the other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2, a pachinko machine is illustrated as a gaming machine, but the present invention is applicable to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arranged ball machine. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates a plurality of drums (a drum or a reel). In this case, a portion provided with a drum or the like that can be seen from a window portion that can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine corresponds to a game area where a game is played.

[Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. Note that the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment is obtained by changing the game board 5 mainly of the pachinko machine 1, and thus the description thereof is omitted except for the game board 5 in principle. Therefore, in FIG. 231 to FIG. 249 and other drawings, components denoted by the same reference numerals are, in principle, components having the same or the same function.

[Game board]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 234, the gaming panel 5 of the embodiment includes a gaming panel 1100 having a gaming area 5a into which a gaming ball is hit by a player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, It comprises a back box 3010 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 so as to surround the lower part of the back box 3010.

[Game panel]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 234, the game panel 1100 includes a base panel 1110 having a predetermined thickness, a front component 1000 surrounding the game area 5a, and a game element group (detailed description) constituting the substance of the game. Will be described later).

[Base panel]
The base panel 1110 of the embodiment is formed of an opaque plywood, and has large and small through holes 1112 corresponding to the gaming element groups.
The base panel 1110 may be a transparent synthetic resin plate or an opaque synthetic resin plate other than an opaque plywood plate.
In FIG. 234, reference numeral 1110t denotes a back gutter member for game balls attached to the rear surface of the base panel 1110.

[Back box, substrate holder]
As shown in FIG. 234, the back box 3010 has a box shape with an open front, and is attached so as to cover the rear side of an upper layer gaming zone 4823, a lower layer gaming zone 4825, and a right-handed gaming zone 4824, which will be described later. The substrate holder 1200 is attached so as to cover the lower outside of the back box 3010. On the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, a main control unit having a main control board 1310 (see a block diagram in FIG. 249) for performing various game controls based on a detection state of a game ball in the game area 5a is attached. In addition, a peripheral control unit having a peripheral control board 1510 for controlling various effects based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 is attached to a rear surface of the back box 3010.
The top plate of the back box 3010 is provided with an interference avoiding unit 3010a penetrating into the box at a position where it intersects with the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. In this case, there is an effect that the height of the top plate of the back box 3010 is set high while avoiding the interference of the back box 3010, that is, it is possible to easily cope with a large effect device.

[Gaming element group]
As shown in the front view of FIG. 231 and the block diagram of FIG.
A function display unit 1400 that displays a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side;
A plurality of obstacle nails 2007 which are implanted on the base panel 1110 and randomly change the falling direction of the game ball;
A windmill 2008 that rotates upon contact of a game ball,
A general winning opening 4801 in which a privilege is set so that a predetermined number of gaming balls are released when a game ball enters (general winning opening sensor 4872 in the block diagram of FIG. 249 in terms of control configuration; hereafter <>) Inside is the block diagram of FIG. 249.)
A ball can be switched between entering and not entering with an electric first shutter plate 4802 <starting port solenoid 4873> that slides in the front-rear direction (a game ball that falls in a forward state and falls in a retreat state). Is passed as it is and the ball is not entered) Electric start winning port 4871 <Electric start port sensor 4874>,
A plurality of start gates 4803 <gate sensor 4875> for starting a lottery regarding opening and closing of the first shutter plate 4802 of the electric start winning port 4871;
An effect ordinary symbol display device 4804 for displaying, for the effect, a lottery result of a per-lot drawing by the starting gate 4803,
An effect normal symbol hold display device 4805 that displays the number of holds corresponding to an ordinary hold indicator described later for the effect,
Like the first shutter plate 4802, the second shutter plate 4806 (first large winning opening solenoid 4876), which is electrically driven, can be used to switch between entering and non-entering the ball. Close the winning opening and do not enter the ball) 1st big winning opening 4807,
A rotating ball receiving member 4808 <V-rotating solenoid 4877> provided in the first big winning opening 4807;
A V winning opening 4810 <V winning opening sensor 4878> in which only game balls placed in the ball receiving recess 4809 of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 can enter the ball,
A general prize port 4801 <general prize port sensor 4872> in which a game ball placed on a tapered peripheral surface inclined downward and backward of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 enters;
A second large winning opening 4812 which can open and close the opening / closing plate 4811 <second large winning opening solenoid 4879> in an upwardly opening window type to allow many game balls to enter in an open state;
A fixed starting winning opening 4813 <fixed starting opening sensor 4880> provided on a vertical center line of the game area 5a for starting a lottery relating to opening and closing of the first big winning opening 4807;
A first display device 4815 formed by a group of display lamps 4814 for effecting and displaying various lottery games associated with the ball entry into the fixed start winning port 4813 and the electric start winning port 4871;
A group (three in the present embodiment) of symbol display members 4816 showing the first stage when displaying the results of various lottery games accompanying the ball entry into the fixed start winning opening 4813 and the electric start winning opening 4871 in a stepwise manner. A second display device 4817 formed,
A second (final) display in which the results of various lottery games provided in the upper part of the vertical center line of the game area 5a on the fixed start winning opening 4813 and the electric start winning opening 4871 are displayed stepwise. A) a third display device 4818 indicating the stages;
A fourth symbol display lamp 4819 that complementarily displays a display of results of various lottery games accompanying a ball entering the fixed start winning port 4813 or the electric start winning port 4871;
A special design holding display device 4820 for displaying the number of reserved balls on the first special holding number display or the second special holding number display, which will be described later,
A decorative light emitting member 4821 provided as appropriate,
An announcement unit 4822 that displays a message image such as “right-handed”;
A plurality of out guiding units 1003 (out ball sensors 4881) for finally collecting game balls on the back of the machine;
Timer seg 4882 for staging with a segment display capable of displaying 5-digit numbers,
It is roughly constituted from. The details of the required game element group will be described later.

  Here, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The fixed starting port sensor 4880 and the electric starting port sensor 4874 are directly input to the main control board 1310. The respective detection signals from the fixed starting port sensor 4880 and the electric starting port sensor 4874 input to the main control board 1310 are input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. I have. On the other hand, various sensors such as a gate sensor 4875, a general winning opening sensor 4872, a V winning opening sensor 4878, an out ball sensor 4881, a dive sensor 4831, a first ball sensor 4870a, a second ball sensor 4870b, and a magnetic sensor 3003. Is indirectly input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710. The detection signals from the various sensors input to the main control board 1310 are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. The sensor directly or indirectly input to the main control board 1310 described above can be appropriately configured as the double sensor described above.

  The respective detection signals from the sensors directly or indirectly input to the main control board 1310 are transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a by the main control MPU 1310a in the switch processing in step S104 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Various signals input to the input terminal of the port are read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the input information described above.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with the reset function based on these detection signals, so that the main control output circuit with the reset function drives the main control solenoid. By outputting a control signal to the circuit 1310d, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d sends various kinds of solenoids, such as a starting port solenoid 4873, a V-rotating solenoid 4877, a first winning port solenoid 4876, and a second winning port solenoid 4879, respectively. Is output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit having the reset function. From the main control output circuit to the normal design display 480 , Directing each drive signal to various display devices such as a normal design holding display device 4805 for production, and a special design holding display device 4820 for production and the fourth symbol display lamp 4819, without passing through another substrate, that is, directly, Output. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, so that the main control output circuit with the reset function can perform various sort stepping motor voltage switching circuits to be described later, By outputting a control signal to the various distribution stepping motor drive ICs, drive signals to various stepping motors such as the first distribution motor 4908, the second distribution motor 4909, and the drive motor 4860 are transmitted via the panel relay board 1710. In other words, it outputs indirectly.

  Each drive signal output from the main control board 1310 is output in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and the main control MPU 1310a stores the output information storage area And outputs various signals from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information.

  The peripheral control unit 1500 can be configured by mounting an air-cooling fan FAN. The peripheral control board 1510 includes the peripheral control IIC 1510a and the like as described above. Detection signals from various detection sensors and the like provided on the game board 5 are input to the panel drive board 1720 and various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit.

  The detection signals from the various detection sensors and the like input to the peripheral control board 1510 described above are used by the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the movable body information acquisition processing in step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Reads the various signals input to the input terminals of the various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and determines whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors have been input, thereby detecting the detection signals from the various sensors and the like. (For example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.), and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 reads various data for outputting drive signals to various display devices such as the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. A command is transmitted as a command from various serial I / O ports to various substrates provided in various display devices such as the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818 via the panel drive substrate 1720. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 emits a light signal, a blink signal, or a gradation light signal to a full-color LED, a single-color LED, or the like provided on various decorative boards of the game board 5 to emit light on the game board. Data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands from various serial I / O ports to various decorative boards of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720. The CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 reads game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to various drive motors provided on the game board 5 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and drives the panel from various serial I / O ports as commands. It is transmitted to the substrate 1720.

  Of the respective drive signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 described above, for various display devices and various decorative boards of the game board 5, the display of step S1016 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. The output is executed in the data output process, and the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 points to the pointer of the light emission data arranged in chronological order constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In accordance with the light emission data, the data is output to various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative substrates (including the panel driving substrate 1720) provided on the game board 5. Of the respective drive signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 described above, for the various drive motors of the game board 5, the motor and solenoid drive processing in step S1104 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs the driving data of the electric driving sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series which constitute the electric driving source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In accordance with the drive data designated by the pointer, the motor and the electric drive source such as the solenoid are driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. Each time, the pointer is updated.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to draw drawing data for drawing an image on the liquid crystal display device as a dummy even when the gaming board 5 is not provided with a liquid crystal display device. When the image data is generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and the screen data defining the screen configuration can be accepted, a V blank signal is output to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the peripheral blank shown in FIG. Peripheral control unit regular processing in control unit power-on processing may be executed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not use the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a and counts the number of executions of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 184 when the game panel 5 does not have a liquid crystal display device. Then, when a predetermined value (the number of executions of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is 32), the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 182 may be executed. This determination is made in place of the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 182. In this case, among the display data output processing of step S1016 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 182, the processing relating to the VDP, the display data creation processing of step S1030, and the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing shown in FIG. 183. Etc. are not performed.

Here, an example of the game content by the above-mentioned game element group will be described.
The function display unit 1400 provided on the upper left of the game board 5 includes, for example, a first special symbol display including eight LEDs, a second special symbol display including another eight LEDs, and the like. In the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display, a lottery game (special symbol change game) in which the respective special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are changed and displayed is performed. The first and second special symbols are symbols for deriving a lottery result indicating a result of the determination of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss (hit lottery). In the present embodiment, in the lottery game, a symbol change in which each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is changed and displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is used. The process from the start to the stop is executed as one lottery game. Hereinafter, the lottery game related to the first special symbol performed on the first special symbol display may be referred to as “first lottery game”, and the lottery game related to the second special symbol performed on the second special symbol display may be referred to as a “lottery game”. It may be indicated as "second lottery game".

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the lottery game is started, which of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is used to determine which one of the special symbols is used to win the lottery. Is to be selected. Specifically, based on the game ball entering the fixed start winning port 4813, a lottery game (first lottery game) related to the first special symbol played on the first special symbol display is selected, and A lottery game (second lottery game) related to a second special symbol performed on the second special symbol display is selected based on the game ball entering the starting winning port 4871. Then, when a winning lottery using the special symbol on the selected side is performed, based on the result of the corresponding lottery, a symbol that blinks eight LEDs on a symbol display corresponding to the special symbol on the selected side. Control for starting the fluctuation is performed (main control board 1310). In the symbol fluctuation started in this way, after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the winning lottery, a big hit symbol (big hit display result) which is a special symbol stopping mode capable of recognizing the big hit, and One of a small hit symbol (small hit display result), which is a stop mode of a special symbol capable of recognizing a hit, and a slip symbol (slack display result), which is a stop mode of a special symbol capable of recognizing a slip, appears. By turning on the eight LEDs in the symbol display in a predetermined combination mode (symbol variation stops), the player can determine whether the winning has been a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (miss). You will be able to recognize. When the big hit symbol is stopped, the main control board 1310 executes a big hit game in which a player can obtain a game ball (prize ball) as a prize. The big hit game is a game that continues until the opening / closing plate 4811 of the second big winning opening 4812 is opened and closed 15 times, and a large number of prize balls can be given to the player. In the case where the small hit symbol appears and stops, the main control board 1310 executes a small hit game in which the player can acquire a prize ball. The small hit game is a game in which a big hit game can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a small hit game alone cannot obtain a prize ball as large as a big hit game.

  Here, the small hit game will be described. In the present embodiment, a plurality of small hit symbols are provided, and depending on the type of the small hit symbol determined in the symbol lottery performed at the same time as the hit lottery, a plurality of execution modes of the subsequent small hit game are executed. It is set to one of the modes. Specifically, the small hit game is a game in which the second shutter plate 4806 of the first big winning opening 4807 is operated to allow a game ball to enter the first big winning opening 4807, and is executed this time. The opening / closing pattern of the entrance opening by the second shutter plate 4806 and the execution mode such as the opening time when opening are set differently depending on which of the plurality of small hit symbols is the small hit symbol resulting from the small hit game. Therefore, the possibility of entering the game ball into the first big winning opening 4807 differs depending on the execution mode. In other words, the execution mode of the small hit game in which the second shutter plate 4806 is moved backward for a relatively long time (for example, 1.5) is performed for a relatively short time (for example, 0.5 second). It is easier to enter the game ball into the first big winning opening 4807 than in the execution mode of the small hitting game in which the game is retreated.

  Next, in the small hit game, all the game balls that have entered the first big winning opening 4807 reach the rotating ball receiving member 4808 inside the first big winning opening 4807, and the playing ball is the rotating ball receiving member 4808. When the ball is received by the ball receiving concave portion 4809 of the rotary ball receiving member 4808, the game ball guided to the V winning opening 4810 side by the rotating operation of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 and not received by the ball receiving concave portion 4809 is The ball rolls on the tapered peripheral surface inclined downward and enters the general winning opening 4801. When the game ball guided to the V winning opening 4810 by the rotation of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 enters the V winning opening 4810 as described above, the opening and closing plate 4811 of the second winning opening 4812 is opened as a privilege. A jackpot game for opening and closing until the maximum number of opening and closing is reached is executed.

  Although details will be described later, the first to third display devices 4815, 4817, and 4818 have a display area larger than any of the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display. The main result is to display the result of the hit lottery of hitting or missing in a state that is easier for the player to recognize than the special symbols described above, and to produce a lively game. Thereby, the player can more easily recognize whether the player has won the big hit, the small hit, or lost (missed) by checking the first to third display devices 4815, 4817, and 4818. Will be able to do it.

  Although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special reserved number display including two LEDs for displaying the reserved number relating to the acceptance of game balls to the fixed starting winning port 4813, and an electric start winning prize. A second special number-of-reservation indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the reception of game balls in the mouth 4871, and a fourth display for displaying a lottery result per general map determined by the passage of the game balls to the starting gate 4803. A normal symbol display including two LEDs and a normal hold display including two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings relating to the passage of the game ball to the starting gate 4803 are provided.

  Here, the first special reserved number display notifies the player of the stored number of hit lotteries (hereinafter, also referred to as the first reserved stored number) of the first special symbol held in an unexecuted state. Things. The first reserved storage number is incremented by "1" when a game ball wins in the fixed start winning port 4813, and decremented by "1" when the first lottery game is started. Therefore, when a game ball is received in the fixed start winning port 4813 during the period in which the first lottery game is being performed, the first reserved storage number is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (first upper limit number, In the embodiment, it is accumulated up to “4”).

  In addition, the second special reserved number display notifies the player of the number of stored lotteries (hereinafter, also referred to as the second reserved stored number) of the second special symbol held in an unexecuted state. It is. The second reserved storage number is increased by “1” when a game ball wins in the electric start winning port 4871, and is decreased by “1” when the second lottery game is started. Therefore, when a game ball is received in the electric start winning port 4871 during the period in which the second lottery game is being performed, the second number of retained memories is further added and the predetermined upper limit number (the second upper limit number, In the embodiment, it is accumulated up to “2”).

  Also, in the ordinary symbol display, when a determination is made as to whether or not an ordinary winning has been made (a general drawing per lottery), an ordinary symbol variation for changing a plurality of types of ordinary symbols based on the result of the ordinary per lot drawing is performed. Will be This normal symbol change is a normal hit symbol (normal hit display result), which is a normal symbol stop mode in which a normal hit can be recognized after maintaining a change state for a change time selected based on the result of the normal hit lottery. Is stopped in a form in which one of a normal symbol and a normal symbol that can be recognized as a normal deviation (a loss display result) appears. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not it has been lost. Note that, when the game is stopped in a manner in which a normal hit symbol appears, the first shutter plate 4802 of the electric start winning port 4871 moves forward to enter a ball-enterable state.

  In addition, the ordinary hold display informs the player of the number of lotteries stored per ordinary map which is suspended in a non-executed state (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of stored regular maps). The number of stored ordinary figures is incremented by "1" when a game ball is received by the starting gate 4803 provided on the game board 5, and decremented by "1" when a normal symbol change is started. Therefore, when a game ball is accepted by the starting gate 4803 during the period in which the ordinary symbol change is performed, the number of stored ordinary figures is further added and the predetermined upper limit number (the upper limit number of ordinary figures, in the present embodiment, "4").

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are configured not to be executed at the same time, and the symbol change using the special symbol (the first lottery game or the second lottery game) is completed. When both the first number of reserved memories and the second number of reserved memories are equal to or more than "1", the second lottery game based on the second number of retained memories is preferentially executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol change using the special symbol (the first lottery game or the second lottery game) and the normal symbol change can be executed simultaneously.

  The example of the game content by the game element group according to the embodiment has been described above. However, various variations such as a big hit, a middle hit, and a small hit may be added.

[Details of game area and game element group]
In the game area 5a of the embodiment, the above-mentioned game element groups are arranged in three game zones so that the interest of the game is maximized.
In other words, the gaming area 5a includes an upper layer gaming zone 4823 corresponding to the above-described first gaming area 5a1 in FIG. 131, a right-handed gaming zone 4824 corresponding to the second gaming area 5a2 in FIG. 131, and a third gaming area in FIG. It is divided into a lower game zone 4825 corresponding to the area 5a3.

[Upper game zone]
The upper layer game zone 4823 includes the above-mentioned obstacle nail 2007 of the game element group, a windmill 2008, a general winning opening 4801, a second display device 4817, and a third display device 4818.
At the lower edge of the upper game zone 4823, a shelf-shaped boundary rail 4826 is provided between the lower game zone 4825 and the lower game zone 4825 so that game balls do not fall into the lower game zone 4825. A dive portion 4827 provided in the middle of the 4826 (on the vertical center line of the game area 5a) communicates with the lower game zone 4825 in the size of one game ball. The details of the dive portion 4827 will be described in the section of the lower game zone 4825.
In addition, the boundary rail 4826 is provided with a gradient that is inclined in the left-right direction with the dive portion 4827 as the apex, and the out guide portions 1003 are provided at both ends that have been completely lowered.

  Also, at the lower corner of the upper game zone 4823 on the inner rail 1002 side (the left side in FIGS. 231 and 232), an out guiding portion 1003 of the lower game zone 4825 passes between the inner rail 1002 and the lower game zone 4825. The upper end of the out bypass 4828 leading to the opening is open, and even if the game balls exceeding the discharge capacity are temporarily concentrated on the out guiding portion 1003 on the inner rail 1002 side of the boundary rail 4826, the overflowing game balls are out bypass 4828. Through to the out guiding section 1003 of the lower game zone 4825. The so-called out ball, which has no possibility of entering the ball, can give the player a negative emotion, so that the player can collect it quickly and make the game comfortable by shortening the time that the player can see it. Can be made.

[Second display device]
The second display device 4817 is formed by three circular symbol display members 4816 arranged side by side on the rear side of the boundary rail 4826. As described above, the lottery for the lottery accompanying the ball entry into the fixed start winning opening 4813 is performed. This shows the first step in the case of displaying the results step by step, and when proceeding to the display by the third display device 4818, the symbol “GO” is displayed on all of the three symbol display members 4816. When the process ends in the first stage, a symbol “x” is displayed on at least one of the three symbol display members 4816.

  This second display device 4817 is attached to the front surface of the base panel 1110 in a state where the front surface of the symbol display member 4816 covers a part of the through-hole 1112, and includes a transparent cover plate 4883 integrated with the boundary rail 4826. Even if the game ball frequently passes over the front surface of the symbol display member 4816, there is no possibility that the display surface will be damaged. In the embodiment, although not shown, an appropriate pattern is applied to the front surface of the cover plate 4883 by printing, a seal, or the like, and a pattern related to the pattern on the front surface of the cover plate 4883 is provided behind the cover plate 4883. Are formed upright at appropriate intervals (preferably within the thickness of the through-hole 1112 of the base panel 1110). By doing so, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the game area 5a, for example, by drawing a plant pattern on the front and back decorative plates of the cover plate 4883 to give a visual depth to the background.

[Third display device]
The third display device 4818 is provided at the upper part of the vertical center line of the game area 5a, and displays the result of the lottery accompanying the ball entry to the fixed start winning opening 4813 in a stepwise manner as described above. This shows the second (final) stage.
The third display device 4818 is roughly composed of a 7-segment display member 4884 corresponding to a single-digit number, and a display frame 4885 serving as a mounting base for the display member 4884, and the entirety thereof passes through the base panel 1110. It is attached to the effect back cover 4886 covering the rear surface of the hole 1112 so as to be vertically movable, and can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through a frame-shaped center member 2500 that borders the front side of the through hole 1112.

[Display member]
As shown in FIG. 237, the display member 4884 of the third display device 4818 includes a cylindrical segment partitioning frame 4884a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and forms the contour of each segment of the seven-segment display. A plurality of light emitting elements 4884c are provided in the front of the segment partition frame 4884a (including two upper and lower frames surrounded by seven segments), and a front opening of the segment partition frame 4884a is provided. The lens 4884d is attached to the portion. As a result, an effective effect can be produced using not only a single digit number but also the entire portion surrounded by seven segments. Note that this display member 4884 may be an image display such as a liquid crystal or an organic EL.

[Display frame]
The display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 has a substantially hemispherical frame main body 4887 bulging forward, and an arm which protrudes from the left and right sides of substantially the center of the frame main body 4887 and holds a fist downward. A first movable portion (hereinafter, also referred to as an arm-shaped movable portion) 4888 having a shape, and protruding from the lower left and right sides of the frame main body 4887 in a direction (angle) of about 7:25 to open. And a colored transparent sunglasses-shaped display cover portion 4890 attached to the display frame 4885 so as to cover a part of the display of the display member 4884. And a spherical bomb-type character shape that is anthropomorphic as a whole.

[First movable part (arm-shaped movable part)]
The arm-shaped movable portion 4888 is formed by connecting left and right arm members 4888a, which are resin molded products, with an arm shaft 4888c to which a driven gear 4888b is fixed, and attaches the arm shaft 4888c inside the display frame 4885. The arm member 4888a is rotatable in a rotatable manner on the arm support plate 4891 so that the arm member 4888a is rotatable in both the vast direction and the return direction.

[Second movable part (footprint movable part)]
The foot-shaped movable portion 4889 is a resin molded product as a whole, and left and right foot members 4889a are rotatably mounted on respective joint shaft holes 4889b so as to freely swing through foot joint shafts 4892 projecting from the display frame 4885. Further, by engaging the sector gears 4889c provided at the ends of each other, the left and right foot members 4889a swing symmetrically with respect to the vertical center line.

[Arm-shaped movable part + foot-shaped movable part]
The arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are connected to each other via an elevating slider 4893 which is rollably supported vertically inside the display frame 4885 so as to simultaneously advance.
That is, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 is such that the driven gear 4888b of the arm shaft 4888c meshes with the rack gear 4894 formed on the elevating slider 4893, while the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 is provided at the upper end of the foot member 4889a on the right side as viewed from the front. A connecting pin 4895 protruding from the elevating slider 4893 is loosely fitted in the elongated hole 4889d.
Then, with the arm-shaped movable part 4888 holding the fist downward and the foot-shaped movable part 4889 opened in the direction of about 7:25, the elevating slider 4893 is at the highest position, and the elevating slider 4893 is at the highest position. The ascending position is maintained by the weight (balance) of the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889. Accordingly, when an external force against this own weight is applied to forcibly push the elevating slider 4893 straight down, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 is rotated by the engagement of the driven gear 4888b and the rack gear 4894 to change the arm member 4888a in the direction of the tens of thousands. At the same time, the one foot member 4889a having the long hole 4889d is rotated about the joint shaft hole 4889b by the lowering of the connecting pin 4895 of the lifting slider 4893, and the foot movable portion 4889 is meshed with the sector gear 4889c. The other leg member 4889a is also rotated around the joint shaft hole 4889b, and as a whole, a spherical bomb type character raises a fist and flips both feet in a direction of about 8:20 as shown in FIG. Changes to Thereafter, when the external force applied to the elevating slider 4893 is removed, all of the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 move in the opposite directions due to their own weights, and return to the original position (posture) in FIG.

[Display cover]
The sunglass-shaped display cover portion 4890 is fixedly attached to the frame main body 4887 so as to cover a part of the display of the display member 4884 as described above. Since the color of the display cover portion 4890 is very light, there is no possibility that the display of the display member 4884 will be hindered. Note that, by making the color of the display cover portion 4890 darker or opaque, a part of the display of the display member 4884 is intentionally made difficult to see, and after the display change stops, the display cover portion 4890 is turned upward with, for example, sunglasses. The display on the display member 4884 may be completely displayed by rotating the display member 48 or switching it electrically transparent. By doing so, a part of the display member 4884 is hidden, and, for example, first, the player's expectation is increased by not knowing whether the display is “0” or “8”, and the display of the display member 4884 is displayed. The joy is exploded at the moment when the whole picture is seen, so that the head of the result display can be increased and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

[Director back cover]
The effect back cover 4886 covers the rear surface of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110, and as shown in the exploded perspective views of FIGS. 242 and 243, the back cover main body 4896 positioned at the front and the back cover thereof. And a lifting device 4897 attached to the rear surface of the main body 4896.

[Back cover body]
The back cover main body 4896 is in the form of a front open box surrounding the rear surface of the through hole 1112 corresponding to the center member 2500, and forms a presentation space 4898 communicating with the opening of the center member 2500. This back cover main body 4896 has a curved shape in which the bottom part descends from the front to the back as shown in the central vertical cross-sectional view of FIG. 237 in order to secure a sufficient vertical width (height) behind the effect space 4898. Has become. In addition, a plurality of ridges 4899 extending in the front-rear direction are formed side by side at the bottom of the back cover main body 4896. This ridge 4899 is for expressing the sea waves. For example, when an employee opens the door frame 3 to cope with a trouble, even if a player accidentally drops a game ball into the staging space 4898, The game ball can be easily taken out by rolling along the ridge 4899. By the way, if there is no longitudinal ridge 4899 (a streak guiding portion for scraping out game balls) at the bottom of the back cover body 4896, the game balls roll freely in the horizontal direction, and it takes time to catch them. Note that arranging the ridges 4899 in the lateral direction and arranging the grooves in the lateral direction are merely differences in expression and are substantially synonymous.

[lift device]
The elevating device 4897 is for moving the third display device 4818 up and down in the production back cover 4886, and as shown in the exploded perspective views of FIGS. 242 and 243, the rear surface of the rear wall 4896r of the back cover main body 4896. A lifting base 4900 fixed to the base, a lifting panel 4901 mounted on the lifting guide shaft 4918 erected between the lifting base 4900 and the back cover main body 4896, and a lifting panel 4901 on the rear surface of the lifting panel 4901. An elevating motor 4904 for raising and lowering the elevating panel 4901 by meshing a pinion gear 4903 with the elevating rack gear 4902 formed.

[Third display device and lifting device]
The display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 is integrally joined with the lifting panel 4901 of the lifting device 4897. Specifically, a connecting rod 4905 protruding from the rear surface of the display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 is screwed to the elevating panel 4901 through a communication port 4896w opened in the rear wall 4896r of the back cover main body 4896. Have been. Accordingly, the third display device 4818 raises the elevation panel 4901 together with the elevation panel 4901 by driving the elevation motor 4904, as shown in FIG. 240, and conversely, as shown in FIG. Descends with. Note that the lifting device 4897 is provided with a tension spring 4906 that pulls the lifting panel 4901 upward, and supports the weight of the lifting panel 4901 and the third display device 4818 with tensile elasticity to reduce the load on the lifting motor 4904. It has become.

The elevating device 4897 also functions as a unit for applying an external force necessary to move the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 of the third display device 4818.
That is, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 242, a key-shaped pressing member 4907 having a fuse-wire-shaped front surface is provided on the lifting base 4900 as a fixing element of the lifting device 4897 so as to protrude forward from the upper end of the center. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 237, the lower end of the holding member 4907 has an appropriate gap at the top of the vertically movable lifting slider 4893 connected to the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889. They face each other in the provided state.
Therefore, when the third display device 4818 is raised by the lifting device 4897, both the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are initially set until the top of the lifting slider 4893 comes into contact with the lower end of the holding member 4907, that is, until it rises by the gap. When the third display device 4818 continues to ascend, the top of the ascending / descending slider 4893 abuts on the lower end of the pressing member 4907 to prevent the ascending / descending slider 4893 from ascending further. As the lifting slider 4893 is forcibly depressed, the spherical bomb-shaped character jumps up with his fist raised and jumps both feet in the direction of about 8:20 as shown in FIG. Changes to In this way, the third display device 4818 is linked to the ascending and descending by the elevating device 4897, raising the fist, and at the same time behaving as if jumping up with both feet open.
On the other hand, when the third display device 4818 is turned from the raised position in FIG. 241 to the lowered position, the external force applied to the lifting / lowering slider 4893 is removed by the lowering, so that the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion are removed. The lifting slider 4893 relatively rises due to its own weight of 4889, and finally the position and posture of the third display device 4818 return to the state shown in FIG.

  When the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 in the stationary state in FIG. 240 are changed to the jump state in FIG. 241, the lifting slider 4893 in the stationary state is raised, and the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion are moved. Since a large force is required to start the swinging of the portion 4889 at the same time, in the embodiment, as described above, a small amount of force is applied between the top of the lifting wire slider 4893 and the fuse-shaped holding member 4907 on the lifting device 4897 side. First, only the elevating slider 4893 is raised, and a time difference corresponding to the gap is provided to swing the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889. Thus, the load applied to the lifting motor 4904 of the lifting device 4897 can be dispersed and reduced.

  Further, the rack gear 4894 is provided not on the fixed element of the back cover main body 4896 but on the elevating slider 4893 so that when the third display device 4818 is completely lowered, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are raised and lowered by the reaction. A slight bounce along with the slider 4893 (appearance of the arms and legs slightly swings a few degrees) causes a slight movement due to the bounce to make the movement of the character that tends to be mechanical tends to be human. be able to.

  Also, the center member 2500 surrounding the periphery of the third display device 4818 has a warp entrance 2501 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in front view so that game balls in the upper layer game zone 4823 can enter the ball, A warp exit 2502 opened in the frame so that the game ball B entering the warp entrance 2501 can be released, and a game ball released from the warp exit 2502 is rolled in the left-right direction and then to the upper layer game zone 4823. A releasable stage shelf 2503 is provided, and a game ball falling from the center of the stage shelf 2503 can enter the dive portion 4827 with a high probability.

[Lower game zone]
As shown in FIGS. 232, 237, 238, and 244 to 247, the lower game zone 4825 includes the first display device 4815 of the game element group, the start gate 4803, and the normal symbol display device 4804. , A fixed start winning port 4813, and a game ball entering the lower game zone 4825 from the dive portion 4827 of the upper game zone 4823 passes through a plurality of (three in the embodiment) distribution portions 4829 a to 4829 c described later. After that, the ball enters the fixed starting winning port 4813, is collected by the out guiding unit 1003 through the starting gate 4803, or is collected by the out guiding unit 1003 without obtaining any privilege. Can be

[Dive]
As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 237, the dive portion 4827 includes a dive pocket 4830 that opens upward below the upper game zone 4823, a pass-type dive sensor 4831 provided in the dive pocket 4830, and a dive pocket 4830. A side surface for moving the game ball in the front-rear direction from the front to the rear and from the rear to the front, such as rolling the game ball entering the 4830 once to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then rolling forward to the front position of the game panel 1100. And a front-rear bent passage 4832 having a lateral V-shape when viewed.

[First sorter]
The first distributing part 4829a among the distributing parts 4829a to 4829c includes a ball passage 4834 that crosses the end of the front-rear bent passage 4832 in the left-right direction via a step part 4833 for substantially one ball, and the step part A first electric distribution piece 4835 <first distribution motor 4908> that always swings in a wiper shape provided on the 4833, and the game ball that has dropped to the step portion 4833 through the front-rear bending passage 4832 is the first electric distribution. According to the swing timing of the piece 4835, the ball 4834 can be divided into a right course flowing to the right and a left course flowing to the left when viewed from the front of the ball passage 4834. The right path of the ball path 4834 is directly connected to a third distribution section 4829c described later via a spirally descending screw path 4836, while the left path is indirectly connected to the second distribution section 4829b. It is connected to the third distribution unit 4829c.

  As will be described later, the third sorting unit 4829c is the final stage in which a ball can be expected to enter the target fixed starting winning port 4813, and therefore, is sorted to the right course directly connected to the third sorting unit 4829c. Is what the player wants. Therefore, the player tries to enter the diving section 4827 aiming at the timing to be distributed to the right course, but the diving section 4827 is directed to the diving section 4827 with respect to the first allocating section 4829a. Since it is configured to bend in the front-rear direction by the front-rear bending passage 4832 and reach the first electric distribution piece 4835, it is difficult for the player in front of the vehicle to recognize the change in the front-rear direction and the timing is accordingly reduced. It is hard to catch. Therefore, it is difficult to match the ball entry timing of the dive portion 4827 with the movement of the first electric distribution piece 4835, so that the inherent luck / unluck factor of the game is improved, and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Second sorting unit]
The second sorting portion 4829b, which is connected to the leftward path of the ball passage 4834 of the first sorting portion 4829a, includes a shallow cup-shaped circular turning portion 4837 connected to the left end of the ball passage 4834, and a circular turning portion 4837 thereof. A plurality of (three in the embodiment) ball drop openings 4838 penetrating through the central area of the game panel, and a front inclined gutter 4839 that receives a game ball falling from the ball drop port 4838 and guides it to a position substantially in front of the game panel 1100. The second electric distribution piece 4840 <second distribution motor 4909> provided below the front end of the front inclined gutter 4839 and always swinging like a wiper, and the second electric distribution piece 4840 is tilted to the left in FIG. The first distribution section 4829a includes a right rear passage 4841 that is sometimes communicated, and a left front passage 4842 that is communicated when the second electric distribution piece 4840 stands. Game balls distributed to the left path is further adapted to be distributed to the right rear channel 4841 and the front left channel 4842 by the swinging timing of the second electric distribution piece 4840. The right rear passage 4841 is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c, while the left front passage 4842 is connected to the starting gate 4803.

  Here, the first electric distribution piece 4835 of the first distribution part 4829a and the second electric distribution piece 4840 of the second distribution part 4829b always swing, but both swing at different periods. Is set to Specifically, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is set so as to slowly swing with a cycle of slightly less than twice the first electric distribution piece 4835 so that a deviation occurs in the swing timing between the two. Is set. By doing so, when the first distribution unit 4829a and the second distribution unit 4829b synchronize and move from the first distribution unit 4829a to the second distribution unit 4829b, the distribution direction can be generally understood. Can be prevented from significantly lowering the existence value of the distribution unit 4829b.

[Third sorting unit]
The third sorting unit 4829c is a ball-turning type generally referred to as a "crown", which is located below the lower game zone 4825 and is centered on the vertical center line of the game area 5a similarly to the dive unit 4827. It comprises a distribution device 4843 and a distribution base 4844 provided immediately below the distribution device 4843.

[Sorting device]
The sorting device 4843 includes a ball rolling member 4845 that vigorously rolls the game ball and turns by inertia, a rotating member 4846 that can rotate around a vertical axis passing through the center of the ball rolling member 4845, and the rotating member 4846. , And a driving device 4847 that supports and rotates at a low speed in a certain direction.

[Ball rolling member]
The ball rolling member 4845 has a bottom wall 4849 having a circular hole 4848 at the center and gently inclining down toward the center of the circle like a shallow cup, and a short cylindrical shape surrounding the outer periphery of the bottom wall 4849. 238 is provided with a spherical flow path that is formed into an annular shape and includes a peripheral wall portion 4850, and game balls are inserted into the spherical flow path inside the peripheral wall portion 4850 and in a substantially tangential direction as shown in FIG. 238. The obtained gutters 4851a and 4851b are provided at two front and rear positions.
Then, a screw passage 4836 leading to the rightward path of the ball passage 4834 of the above-mentioned first distribution portion 4829a is connected to the input gutter 4851a in front of the ball rolling member 4845, while the input gutter 4851b in the rear is connected to the screw gutter 4851b in the rear. The right rear passage 4841 of the second distribution unit 4829b is connected to the ball rolling member 4845 from the front entrance gutter 4851a through the right traveling path and the screw passage 4836 from the first distribution unit 4829a. The game ball and the game ball thrown from the first sorting unit 4829a to the ball rolling member 4845 from the rear throw-in gutter 4851b through the left path and the right rear passageway 4841 of the second sorting unit 4829b, and the peripheral wall portion 4850 238 turns clockwise in FIG. 238 by inertia while applying centrifugal force toward the side. Further, since the rotating game ball gradually loses the centrifugal force as the speed decreases, the game ball gradually descends toward the circular hole 4848 by the downward inclination of the bottom wall portion 4849.

  In addition, although the game ball is thrown into the ball rolling member 4845 from the two throw gutters 4851a and 4851b as described above, in the embodiment, the game thrown from the throw gutter 4851a connected to the screw passage 4836 having a large head is provided. The speed of the ball is higher than that of the game ball thrown in from the throw gutter 4851b, and therefore, depending on the throw timing, there is a possibility that one game ball collides with the other game ball and develops unexpectedly. In this way, by providing a plurality of throwing gutters on one ball rolling member 4845 and throwing game balls at different design speeds (distances and angles of inclination), the contingency of the game is increased and the interest is effectively increased. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 246, the ball rolling member 4845 of the embodiment contacts the lower side of the center of the game ball placed on the bottom wall portion 4849 and guides the game ball to a position slightly away from the peripheral wall portion 4850. And a ball guiding section 4852 for obtaining the same. This ball guiding portion 4852 has a wedge-shaped projection shape which is inclined downward (about 20 ° with respect to a horizontal line) toward a contact point with the bottom wall portion 4849 of the game ball, as shown in FIG. 247. The inclination of the bottom wall portion 4849 may be made halfway.

[Rotating member]
The rotating member 4846 includes a distribution disk 4853 provided at a height slightly smaller than the circular hole 4848 of the ball rolling member 4845 and substantially the same as or slightly lower than the circular hole 4848, and an edge of the distribution disk 4853. A plurality of (four in the embodiment) are provided at positions that are point-symmetric with respect to the center of the sorting disk 4853 (= the center of the bottom wall portion 4849), and the hanging cylinder portion 4854 protruding downward along the axis. A game ball receiving port 4855 and a game ball that falls under the receiving port 4855 covering the lower side of the receiving port 4855 so as to make one of the receiving ports 4855 a specific receiving port 4855v are provided outside the hanging cylinder 4854. Gutter 4856 that traverses the container, a partition wall 4857 in a plan view cross shape that partitions adjacent ones of all the receiving ports 4855 including the specific receiving port 4855v, and a driving device 4847 described later. A bushing 4859 for inserting the shaft 4858, schematically composed.

[Drive device]
As shown in FIGS. 244 and 245, the driving device 4847 includes a driving motor 4860 provided on the lower surface of the distribution base 4844, a driving shaft 4858 projecting upward from the upper surface of the distribution base 4844, and a distribution base 4858. A gear group 4861 for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 4860 to the drive shaft 4858 inside the base 4844, and the drive shaft 4858 is inserted through a bearing cylinder 4859 of the rotary member 4846 from below to thereby rotate the rotary member 4846. Are supported in an umbrella shape and the rotating member 4846 is rotated at a low speed in a fixed direction (in the embodiment, a counterclockwise direction opposite to the turning direction of the game ball in the ball rolling member 4845).

[Distribution base]
The distribution base 4844 is fixedly attached to the lower part of the lower game zone 4825, and has a pocket-shaped fixed starting winning opening 4813 as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. It has a winning passage 4862 communicating with the fixed start winning opening 4813, and furthermore, an outflow passage 4863 communicating with the out guiding portion 1003 of the lower game zone 4825 is formed on both sides of the winning passage 4862 on the front surface.
In addition, a separation sorting passage 4864 that receives a game ball that has entered a reception port 4855 other than the special reception port 4855v of the rotating member 4846 of the sorting device 4843 and guides the game ball to the separation passage 4863 is provided above the distribution base 4844. A prize sorting passage 4865 that receives a game ball entering the special reception port 4855v of the member 4846 and guides the game ball to the prize passage 4862, and a game ball that jumps out of the ball rolling member 4845 in the sorting device 4843 and falls to the game hall side. And a fall recovery passage 4866 for recovery.

[Outer sorting passage]
As shown in FIG. 244 to FIG. 246, the out-sorting passage 4864 is provided at a height protruding from the upper surface of the sorting base 4844 to a height close to the hanging cylinder 4854 of the rotating member 4846 of the sorting device 4843. It is formed of a substantially U-shaped surrounding frame 4867 having a curved portion having substantially the same diameter as the member 4846, enters a receiving port 4855 other than the special receiving port 4855 v of the rotating member 4846, and straightens the inside of the hanging cylinder 4854. A falling game ball is received and guided to the escape passage 4863.

[Award sorting passage]
As shown in FIGS. 244 to 246, the prize sorting passage 4865 is formed by a corridor gutter 4868 attached to the upper surface of the sorting base 4844 so as to surround the periphery of the rotating member 4846. The game ball which enters the special receiving port 4855v of the member 4846 and is laterally fed to the outside of the hanging tube part 4854 by the lateral feed gutter 4856 is guided to the winning prize passage 4862 in front. When a game ball enters the special reception port 4855v at the timing when the special reception port 4855v of the rotating member 4846 is located above the winning passage 4862 as shown in FIG. Directly into the prize passage 4862.

[Fall collection path]
The fall recovery passage 4866 is composed of an upper surface of a distribution base 4844 inclined backward and downward, and a gutter-shaped step portion 4869 provided at the rear of the distribution base 4844. The game balls that jumped out and fell are collected in the gutter-shaped steps 4869 and collected together with the out balls and the like at the game hall side.

[Countermeasures for the sorting device]
When the game ball rotating on the bottom wall approaches the specific receiving port, the ball hits the front of the pachinko machine strongly and vibrates the pachinko machine with the impact, By changing the trajectory of the game ball from the turning direction to the radial direction by vibration, the game ball is made to enter a specific reception port aimed at.
On the other hand, the ball rolling member 4845 of the sorting device 4843 of the embodiment is slightly separated from the peripheral wall portion 4850 by the ball guiding portion 4852 when the game ball rolls on the bottom wall portion 4849 by inertia while receiving the action of the centrifugal force. Since the game ball is guided to the position, even when the game ball is closest to the peripheral wall portion 4850, there is a slight gap as shown in FIG. 246 (a).
Therefore, the player who is struggling with the beats applies a shock to the pachinko machine 1 as shown by an arrow F in FIG. 246 (b) to vibrate the ball rolling member 4845 in the front-rear direction, and hits the game ball with the peripheral wall portion 4850. Even if the trajectory is changed in the radial direction, the movement of the peripheral wall portion 4850 is not immediately transmitted to the game ball because there is a gap between the peripheral wall portion 4850 and the game ball. In addition, the ball guiding portion 4852 that is in contact with the game ball hits obliquely below the center of the game ball, dives under the game ball by vibration, and moves the game ball as indicated by arrow M in FIG. 246 (b). Attempts to move the wrong person in a different direction than intended. Therefore, it is possible to substantially make it harder.

[Others]
In addition, the lower layer game zone 4825c includes a pass-type first ball sensor 4870a for detecting a game ball passing a right path to the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution unit 4829a, and a right inner passage 4841 of the second distribution unit 4829b. A second ball sensor 4870b of a passing type for detecting a game ball passing through is provided, and the first and second ball sensors 4870a and 4870b detect the game ball, and the distribution device of the third distribution unit 4829c. The number of balls that have entered 4843 can be managed. Then, the number of balls entering the sorting device 4843 and the number of balls detected by the starting gate 4803 through the left front passage 4842 of the second sorting unit 4829b are summed up and detected by the dive sensor 4831 of the dive unit 4827. By comparing the number of balls that have entered the lower game zone 4825, it is possible to know that there is a game ball that does not leave the lower game zone 4825, and thereby warns that any wrongdoing is suspected. Can be issued to the administrator.

  In the embodiment, the flow path from the dive portion 4827 to the fixed start winning port 4813 is long, and the residence time of the game ball is long. It is difficult to perform a so-called hitting, which temporarily stops the launching of the camera. Therefore, there is an effect that the hitting which is disadvantageous for the game hall can be effectively prevented.

[Right-handed game zone]
The right-handed game zone 4824 includes the above-mentioned obstacle nail 2007 of the game element group, the starting gate 4803, the electric start winning port 4871, the first big winning port 4807, and the rotating ball receiving member 4808 in the order of the flow of the game ball. A general winning opening 4801, a V winning opening 4810, a general winning opening 4801, a second winning opening 4812, into which a game ball placed on the tapered peripheral surface of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 inclined backward and downwards enters; , And the out guidance unit 1003 is shared with the lower game zone 4825.

  The right-handed game zone 4824 is connected to the upper-layer game zone 4823 by a communication passage portion 5a4 through which a game ball fired with a specific strong firing force can pass, as in FIGS. The details of the communication passage portion 5a4 are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 139 and FIG.

In the right-handed game zone 4824, a right-handed ball flow path surrounding the above game element group is provided.
This right-handed ball channel
An upper free fall area 4910 formed immediately below an exit portion of the communication passage portion 5a4 and having a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 and a starting gate 4803;
A first gutter 4911 that opens upward at the lower end of the free fall area 4910 and receives game balls that have passed through the starting gate 4803 and game balls that have just passed by the side without passing through the starting game gate 4803;
A branch area 4912 in which four obstacle nails 2007 are planted in the shape of a corner post, which are continuous with the end of the first gutter 4911, and in which the first shutter plate 4802 of the electric start winning port 4871 is straightly dropped.
A second gutter 4913 that opens to the left in FIG. 231 of the branch area 4912 to detour outside the electric start winning port 4871 in a horizontal U-shape, and joins the flow path of the branch area 4912 in the direction of falling straight;
A third gutter 4914 which is continuous from the second gutter 4913 and includes the upper surface of the first shutter plate 4802 of the first big winning opening 4807 as a part of the flow path;
The lower free fall area 4915 having a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 and a general prize port 4801 is located between the second grand prize port 4812 and immediately below the exit of the third gutter 4914.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 231 and FIG. 248, the right-handed ball flow path is provided on the inner side of a boundary wall 4916 that separates the upper-layer game zone 4823 and the lower-layer game zone 4825, as shown in FIGS. A lighting board 4917 for directing illumination is provided. Depending on the position and the orientation of the lighting board 4917, the front end face or the back face of the opaque board can be seen exclusively from the player side, and it is difficult for the light of the light emitting LED which is the light source to directly enter the field of view. Glare can be suppressed while brightly illuminating.
In the right-handed game zone 4824, a timer segment 4882 with a segment display capable of displaying a five-digit number is provided near the end of the third gutter 4914. The entertainment of games is enhanced by giving notice.

The pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and the outline of the game is as described above. However, to further supplement the description, the player first hits the game ball into the upper layer game zone 4823 and jumps in. Aim to enter the field 4827. Of course, only a part of the ball enters the dive section 4827 as intended, and some enter the general winning opening 4801, while others enter the out guide section 1003 immediately and end the game.
In the upper layer game zone 4823, the ball enters the dive section 4827, enters the lower layer game zone 4825, and enters the fixed starting winning port 4801 through the above-described plurality of distributions, when the ball enters the fixed starting winning port 4801, the first special symbol display. The lottery game (first lottery game) related to the first special symbol performed in is performed, and in this first lottery game, the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818 are used in a stepwise manner. By the effect display, the player is expected to hit the big hit game or the small hit game described above. That is, based on the progress of the lottery game, first, the display lamps 4814 of the first display device 4815 are turned on in order from bottom to top, so that the start of the lottery is displayed as if the fire of the squib is burning. Then, the lottery result of the first stage is displayed on the contents of three symbols (for example, three “GO” indications are displayed side by side) displayed on the second display device 4817, and finally the final lottery is displayed on the third display device 4818. (Specifically, a single-digit number is displayed on a large segment display, and a jumping operation of a spherical bomb type character is performed by the display frame 4885, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888, and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889), and a big hit or a small hit is made. Hit and let the player recognize the departure.

Further, among the game balls launched into the upper layer game zone 4823, some of the game balls that have entered the dive portion 4827 but have not entered the fixed start winning port 4801 pass through the second distribution portion 4829b. When the game ball passes through the start gate 4803, the signal is detected by the gate sensor 4875, and the above-described ordinary symbol lottery relating to the operation of the first shutter plate 4802 is performed.
Then, when the winning is achieved in the ordinary symbol lottery (1/10), the first shutter plate 4802 of the right-handed game zone 4824 advances by an amount corresponding to the lottery result, and it is possible to enter the electric start winning port 4871. After that time, the first shutter plate 4802 retreats, and it is impossible to enter the electric start winning port 4871.
The result of the lottery is displayed on the effect normal symbol display device 4804 (specifically, a one-digit number is displayed on a segment display).

  In addition, after the end of the big hit game, the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol lottery is set to a shortened time (for example, 1 second) shorter than the fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds) in the normal game state. By directly aiming at the starting gate 4803 of the right-handed game zone 4824 instead of the dive section 4827, the lottery game (second lottery game) related to the second special symbol performed on the second special symbol display is mainly performed. It is possible to advance the game. The time-saving gaming state ends under a predetermined ending condition (for example, a special symbol is displayed ten times), and returns to the normal gaming state.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is, of course, not limited to the above embodiments. For example, in the embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but the present invention can be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arranged ball machine. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates a reel.

In the embodiment, the game area 5a is formed by three game zones, but may be configured by two game zones or a single game area 5a.
In the embodiment, the ball rolling member 4845 has been described as a part of the sorting device 4843. However, the ball rolling member 4845 rolls the game ball in a state where the ball can be visually recognized by the player in the game area 5a. However, the present invention is not limited to the sorting device 4843.

By the way, conventionally, a pachinko machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, has a gaming area surrounded by rails and covered with a window at the front, and a game ball is provided above the gaming area by a player. When a player hits the ball and enters a specific entrance or the like in the process of flowing down, a predetermined number of game balls are provided (released) to the player as a prize of the entering ball, while entering the specific entrance. The game balls that did not ball are collected at the game hall through the out ball opening.
By the way, some players apply a strong external force to the pachinko machine (specifically, hitting or pulling the ball plate strongly) to vibrate the entire machine, and the vibration forces the trajectory of the game ball There are those who change the ball into a specific entrance and try to get the prize illegally (hereinafter, such a fraudulent misconduct is simply referred to as "dokkigot").
For example, as an accessory of a pachinko machine that is easily damaged by the above-mentioned crushing, there is a ball-turning sorter generally called a “crown”.
This sorting device is provided with a spherical flow path composed of a bottom wall gently inclined downward toward the center of a circle like a shallow cup, and a peripheral wall surrounding the outer periphery of the bottom wall. A ball rolling member for turning a ball on a bottom wall while applying a centrifugal force toward the peripheral wall by throwing a game ball inside the peripheral wall and in a direction substantially tangential to the road; and A plurality of (for example, 2 to 4) entrances for game balls are provided at positions symmetrical with respect to the center of the section, and one of the entrances is provided with a privilege for entering the ball. The game ball that is inserted into the ball flow path of the ball rolling member and turns along the peripheral wall portion by the initial centrifugal force gradually loses momentum, and the center of the bottom wall portion Gradually descends to the side and finally decides on which of the entrances including the specific entrance It is an element.
Such a ball-turning type sorting device has a crushing device that applies an external force, for example, by strongly hitting the front of the pachinko machine at the timing when the game ball turning on the bottom wall approaches the specific reception port, and the impact is applied by the impact. The pachinko machine is caused to vibrate, and the trajectory of the game ball is changed from the turning direction to the radial direction by the vibration, and the game ball is made to enter a specific reception port aimed at.
Conventional measures against such a pounding problem include, for example, installing a vibration sensor in a pachinko machine as described in the literature (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-229209), and using a vibration detected by the vibration sensor to measure the vibration. It is determined whether or not this is the case, and based on the result of the determination, the game arcade takes necessary measures.
The conventional vibration sensor measures against pounding only by detecting abnormal vibration of the pachinko machine and presuming that the pounding has been performed.Even if the ball enters the specific entrance immediately after abnormal vibration, the ball It was difficult to prove the causal relationship between the vibration and the abnormal vibration, and it was not possible to prevent the actual damage caused by the noise.

[Angular position of D-cut surface formed on rotation axis of stepping motor]
Next, the rotating shaft of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 that always swings the first electric distribution piece 4835 in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end). The second electric distribution piece 4840 is always in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the upright (hereinafter referred to as “vertically inverted”) mechanical end). The angular positions of the rotating shaft of the oscillating second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the D-cut surfaces formed on the respective rotation axes will be described. FIG. 250 is a diagram illustrating D-cut angle positions formed on the rotation shafts of the first and second distribution stepping motors. Here, since the arrangement method of the angular position of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation axis of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 is the same, the rotation axes of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are the same. In the description of the method of arranging the angular position of the D-cut surface formed in FIG. 7, the reference numeral for the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is followed by the reference numeral for the second distribution stepping motor 4909 in parentheses.

  The first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are unipolar type stepping motors having phases of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2, and a rotating shaft is press-fitted into a rotor. The rotation of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 is press-fitted into the rotor so that the rotation position of the rotation shaft is determined according to the number of steps from the reference excitation phase. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, the position of the rotating shaft can be almost grasped without providing a rotating angle sensor such as a rotary encoder for accurately measuring the angle of the rotating shaft.

  As shown in FIG. 250A, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) has mounting holes 4908b (4909b) formed on the left and right sides of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a). The left mounting hole 4908b (4909b), the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a), and the right mounting hole 4908b (4909b) are arranged on the same straight line and serve as the horizontal center line of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). ing. A straight line that intersects vertically with the horizontal center line and passes through the rotation axis 4908a (4909a) is the vertical center line of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). The diameter of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) is 4 mm (φ4).

  The rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) has a D-cut surface formed in advance, and when the φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the D-cut surface is rotated. The cut surface is press-fitted into the rotor so as to be at a position rotated counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the horizontal center line. Accordingly, when φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) is horizontal in the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). The position is rotated counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the center line of the direction, and becomes a D-cut angle position that is an absolute position.

  The first electric distribution piece 4835 in the first distribution unit 4829a swings like a wiper that constantly reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end. When the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is distributed to the right traveling path flowing rightward as viewed from the front of the spherical path 4834, and is passed through the screw path 4836 descending spirally. When the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings to reach the right mechanical end position while being connected to the distribution section 4829c, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is distributed to the left traveling path flowing to the left side in front of the ball passage 4834 and the second path. Is connected to the distribution unit 4829b. In the present embodiment, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 is at the left mechanical end position, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 °) and is designed in advance to be a D-cut angle position. In addition, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 sets the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 that swings in a wiper shape by energizing (ON) φ1 and φ2 that are set to the reference excitation phase, so that the left mechanical end Or the position of the right mechanical end. A detailed description of this point will be described later.

  The second electric distribution piece 4845 in the second distribution part 4829b connected to the leftward traveling path of the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution part 4829a constantly reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end. Swing like a moving wiper. When the second electric distribution piece 4840 oscillates and reaches the position of the mechanical end which is vertically inverted, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is connected to the starting gate 4803 via the left-handed passage 4842. Swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left, it is connected to the third sorting part 4829c via the right inner passage 4841. In the present embodiment, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 is at the left mechanical end position, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 °), and is designed in advance to be a D-cut angle position. Note that, when φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the rotation position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 that swings in a wiper shape is changed to the left mechanical end by the second distribution stepping motor 4909. Or the position of the mechanical end that is inverted in the vertical direction. A detailed description of this point will be described later.

  As described above, the third distribution unit 4829c is the final stage in which a ball can be expected to enter the target fixed start winning opening 4813, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings to reach the left mechanical end position. When it reaches, it is distributed to the right traveling path flowing to the right of the front of the ball passage 4834 and is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the screw passage 4836 descending in a spiral shape. The distribution to the right course directly connected to 4829c is desired by the player, and is a distribution to an area that is advantageous for the player. When the second electric distribution piece 4845 in the second distribution section 4829b connected to the left traveling path of the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution section 4829a swings to reach the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the right rear passage 4841 is formed. Is connected to the third distributing unit 4829c via the third distributing unit 4829c, so that the distributing operation connected to the third distributing unit 4829c is desired by the player, and is distributed to an area which is advantageous to the player. It has become.

  On the other hand, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is distributed to the left traveling path flowing leftward as viewed from the front of the ball passage 4834 and connected to the second distribution section 4829b. Therefore, in the second sorting unit 4829b, an opportunity of sorting connected to the three sorting units 4829c can be obtained, but compared with the above-described right traveling path directly connected to the three sorting units 4829c. The connection to the third distribution unit 4829c is interposed by the distribution by the second distribution unit 4829b, and the distribution to the area that is advantageous to the player due to the reduced probability of being connected to the third distribution unit 4829c. Hard to say. Further, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 swings to reach the position of the mechanical end which is vertically inverted, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is connected to the starting gate 4803 through the left hand passageway 4842, It is not connected to the distribution unit 4829c at all, and is not distributed to an area that is advantageous for the player.

  The connector 4908c (4909c) of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is provided at a position rotated by 135 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) clockwise from the horizontal center line, as shown in FIG. As shown, / φ2 is assigned to the first pin, / φ1 is assigned to the second pin, φ2C (common) is assigned to the third pin, φ1C (common) is assigned to the fourth pin, and the fifth pin is assigned. Φ2 is assigned to the pin and φ1 is assigned to the sixth pin. Various voltages (operating voltage described later, stopping voltage described later) are applied to φ2C (common) allocated to the third pin, and are directed toward / φ2 allocated to the first pin or φ2 allocated to the fifth pin. Electric current flows. Various voltages (an operation voltage described later, a stop voltage described later) are applied to φ1C (common) allocated to the fourth pin, and toward / φ1 allocated to the second pin or φ1 allocated to the sixth pin. Electric current flows.

  The first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) switches between an operating voltage and a stop voltage according to the rotation state of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) as excitation to φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2. Have been.

  As described above, when φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) changes the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a). The position is rotated counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the horizontal center line, and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) has eight types of excitation combinations (φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2, which will be described later), as excitation combinations of phases φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2. Excludes those that are not all excited.) The rotational position of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined by the combination of these eight types of excitation. Has become.

  As described above, the combination of excitation of each phase of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the rotation position of the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) (excluding the position of each mechanical end). If no correspondence is formed, for example, a sensor is provided so that the first electric distribution piece 4835 is detected at the position of the left mechanical end, and the rotation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is performed. When the shaft 4908a is rotated to perform a pushing operation for moving the first electric distribution piece 4835 to the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and detected by the sensor, the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the first electric distribution are performed. There is a disadvantage that it is necessary to grasp the correspondence between the left mechanical end of the piece 4835 and the position of the mechanical end. A sensor is provided so as to be detected when the distribution piece 4840 is at the position of the left mechanical end, and the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is rotated to move the second electric distribution piece 4840 to the position of the left mechanical end. A drawback that, when the moving push-in operation is performed and detected by the sensor, the correspondence between the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the position of the mechanical end on the left side of the second electric distribution piece 4840 needs to be grasped. There is.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), when φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), as described above, rotates the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a). The angle of the D-cut surface formed in (1) is structurally determined to be a position rotated by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) counterclockwise from the center line in the horizontal direction to be a D-cut angle position, and The eight kinds of excitation combinations of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), and the rotational position of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) (excluding the position of each mechanical end). Is electrically determined, the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the first electric distribution are performed without performing the pushing operation at all. 4835 and (. Excluding the position of each mechanical end) rotation position of the (4840), and is capable of determining.

  In addition, at the time of power recovery, when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, the first excitation controls the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) to rotate the first electric distribution piece 4835 (4840). Even if the position is different from the assumed rotation position, the first excitation stepping motor 4908 (4909) is controlled by the next excitation to adjust the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 (4840) to the intended rotation position. Therefore, recovery can be easily performed. This can be applied to the case where the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) loses synchronism due to the current excitation. The first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is controlled by the next excitation to control the first electric distribution. Since the rotational position of the piece 4835 (4840) can be adjusted to the intended rotational position, recovery from the step-out of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) can be easily performed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is used as an electric drive source that always swings in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end). An electric drive that employs a stepping motor and swings the second electric distribution piece 4840 in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the left mechanical end position and the vertically inverted mechanical end position). The reason why the stepping motor is used as the source will be briefly described.

  The first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 distribute game balls in accordance with a distribution ratio, and are required to have accuracy. For this reason, when a solenoid is adopted as the electric drive source, there is a difference between the plunger moving speed when the excitation driving of the solenoid is started and the plunger moving speed returned by the restoring force of the spring when the excitation driving of the solenoid is stopped. . In addition, the plunger moving speed is not always constant because the plunger returns due to the restoring force of the spring, and the plunger moving speed due to the variation of the spring also differs depending on the solenoid. In addition, since the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 always swing in a wiper shape as described above, if a solenoid is adopted as an electric drive source, the solenoid has no durability, Since the spring has deteriorated over time, it is difficult to continue the distribution operation by the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 according to the distribution ratio set at the time of design. As described above, when the solenoid is used as the electric drive source, it is difficult to accurately control the distribution operation by the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840, and to finely control the distribution operation. It is difficult.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, an electric drive that is durable, has little aging deterioration, has small variations in performance between individuals, can accurately control the distribution operation, and can finely control the distribution operation. As a source, a first distribution stepping motor 4908, which is a stepping motor, was used for the first electric distribution piece 4835, and a second distribution stepping motor 4909, which was a stepping motor, was used for the second electric distribution piece 4840.

  In the present embodiment, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is formed on the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) when φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON) as described above. The angle of the D-cut surface is structurally determined to be a position rotated by 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 °) to be a D-cut angle position. Correspondence relationship between the eight combinations of excitation of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the rotational position (excluding the position of each mechanical end) of the rotary shaft 4908a (4909a). Is electrically determined, the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the first electric distribution piece 483 are performed without performing the pushing operation described above at all. The rotation position (excluding the position of each mechanical end) of (4840) has been configured to be able to be determined. However, such a mechanism is applied to another effect device provided with a movable body operated by a stepping motor. Can be used. Such another effect device may be provided on the game board 5 or on the door frame 3. When another rendering device is controlled by the main control board 1310, the stepping motor that operates the movable body is drive-controlled by the main control board 1310, and when the other rendering device is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, it is movable. The driving of the stepping motor for operating the body is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

[Voltage switching circuit]
Next, in accordance with the rotation state of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), the excitation voltage to φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 is mutually converted between the operating voltage and the stop voltage. A voltage switching circuit that can be switched to is described. FIG. 251 is a circuit diagram of the voltage switching circuit.

  The first distribution stepping motor 4908 always swings the first electric distribution piece 4835 like a wiper, and the second distribution stepping motor 4909 always swings the second electric distribution piece 4840 like a wiper. , The second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 must be constantly driven. However, when the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are constantly driven, the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 generate excessive heat, and the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 have problems. Or failure may occur. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress heat generation even when the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are constantly driven.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are driven to swing the first and second electric distribution pieces 4835 and 4840 in a wiper shape, an operating voltage is used. On the other hand, when the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are driven to stop the first and second electric distribution pieces 4835 and 4840, a voltage switching circuit that uses a stop voltage is controlled. Has been realized.

  First, as shown in FIG. 251, the main control board 1310 can switch between an operation voltage and a stop voltage as voltages to be applied to the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909, respectively. It includes two distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p, and first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q that can drive the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909.

  Here, the first and second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p have the same circuit configuration, and the first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q have the same circuit configuration. In the description of the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p and the description of the first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q, reference numerals relating to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 are followed by reference numerals relating to the second distribution stepping motor 4909. In parentheses.

  The first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) mainly includes a transistor MTR50 (MTR60), a field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60), a diode M50 (M60), and a polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) as a resettable fuse. Have been. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR50 (MR60), and is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR51 (MR61) whose one end is electrically connected to ground (GND). It is connected to the. The other end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) is a first electric distribution piece voltage switching D-type flip-flop (not shown as a line for transmitting a signal of voltage switching 2). It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the distribution piece voltage switching D-type flip-flop). The input terminal of this first electric distribution piece voltage switching D-type flip-flop (the second electric distribution piece voltage switching D-type flip-flop) is connected to the first electric distribution piece voltage switching output of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to a terminal (a second electric distribution piece voltage switching output terminal).

  The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via the resistor MR52. It is connected to the. The gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via the resistor MR53 (MR63). The source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line. The drain terminal D of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60), which is a rectifier diode, and is also electrically connected to one end of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60). . The anode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60) is electrically connected to a + 5V power supply line. The other end of the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60) is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes MD51, MD52 (MD61, MD62), respectively, and supplies power to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). U (+ 12V-D) is electrically connected to a terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 252) as a power supply line.

  The first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) includes four chipped NPN-type Darlington transistors and four diodes in a single package. Among the four elements of the NPN-type Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor is The base terminal 8 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR55 (MR65), and the base terminal 8 of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR56 (MR66). The terminal 12 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR57 (MR67).

  The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor serves as a Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line) through which a current for exciting φ1 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows, and is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 252). The collector terminal 4 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor is connected to a connector 1310z (D / φ1 line) as a U / φ1 line (D / φ1 line) through which a current for exciting / φ1 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows. The collector terminal 9 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which a current for exciting φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows. ) As a connector 1310z (see FIG. 252). ), The collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is connected to a U / φ2 line (D / φ2 line) through which a current for exciting / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows. ) Are electrically connected to terminals of a connector 1310z (see FIG. 252).

  The other end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor, has the other end PD0 (PD4) instructing the start or stop of the excitation of φ1 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908. ) Is electrically connected to the output terminal of a φ1 D-type flip-flop (not shown, φ1 D-type flip-flop of a second distribution stepping motor 4909) of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (not shown). I have. The input terminal of the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution stepping motor 4909) is connected to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the output terminal for φ1 (the output terminal for φ1 of the second distribution stepping motor 4909).

  The other end of the resistor MR55 (MR65), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor, has the other end PD1 (instructing start / stop of excitation of / φ1 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908. PD5) is electrically connected to an output terminal of a / φ1 D-type flip-flop of a first distribution stepping motor 4908 (not shown) (/ D1 flip-flop of / φ1 of a second distribution stepping motor 4909 not shown) as a line for transmitting a signal PD5). It is connected. The input terminal of the / φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (/ φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution stepping motor 4909) is connected to the first distribution stepping motor of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. 4908 (/ φ1 output terminal of the second distribution stepping motor 4909).

  One end of the resistor MR56 (MR66), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor, has the other end connected to PD2 (PD6) for instructing the start and stop of the excitation of φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908. ) Is electrically connected to an output terminal of a φ2 D-type flip-flop (not shown) of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (not shown). I have. The input terminal of the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution stepping motor 4909) is connected to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the output terminal for φ2 (the output terminal for φ2 of the second distribution stepping motor 4909).

  One end of the resistor MR57 (MR67), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor, has the other end connected to PD3 () which instructs start / stop of excitation of / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908. PD7) is electrically connected to an output terminal of a D-type flip-flop for / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (not shown) (a D-type flip-flop for / φ2 of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 not shown) as a line for transmitting a signal PD7). It is connected. The input terminal of the / φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (/ φ2 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution stepping motor 4909) is connected to the first distribution stepping motor of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. 4908 is electrically connected to the / φ2 output terminal of the second distribution stepping motor 4909.

  The emitter terminal of the first NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to ground (GND).

  The emitter terminal of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to ground (GND).

  The first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) has four diodes built-in, and the first and second diodes are arranged in a pair in the package, and the third and fourth diodes are arranged in a pair. And it is placed in the package.

  The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected inside the package to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor, and the anode terminal of the second diode is connected to the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor. And the cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. Have been. The cathode terminal 3 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD51 (MD61).

  The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is connected to the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor. And the cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. Have been. The cathode terminal 10 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD52 (MD62).

  The first to fourth diodes convert the back electromotive force generated when the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) stops excitation to φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 into heat and remove it. This protects the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors.

  A power supply line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) for supplying power to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is connected to a terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 252) and a wiring (not shown). 4908 (4909) is electrically connected to the third pin φ2C (common) and the fourth pin φ1C (common) of the connector 4908c (4909c). The Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line), through which the current for exciting φ1 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows, is connected to the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 252) and the wiring (not shown). 4909) is electrically connected to the sixth pin φ1 of the connector 4908c (4909c). The U / φ1 line (D / φ1 line) through which the current for exciting / φ1 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is connected to the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 252) and the first via the wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to the second pin / φ1 of the connector 4908c (4909c) of the distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). The Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which the current for exciting φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is connected to the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 252) and the wiring (not shown) to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). 4909) is electrically connected to the fifth pin φ2 of the connector 4908c (4909c). A U / φ2 line (D / φ2 line) through which a current for exciting / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is connected to a terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 252) and a first wiring via a wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to / φ2 of the first pin of the connector 4908c (4909c) of the distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909).

  PD0 to PD3 for instructing start / stop of excitation of φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of first distribution stepping motor 4908, and excitation of φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of second distribution stepping motor 4909. When the swing control data PD0 to PD7, which are 8-bit information including PD4 to PD7 for instructing the start and stop of the operation, are output from the main control MPU 1310a, the corresponding D-type flip-flop and the resistors Are input to the base terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 of the first distribution stepping motor driving IC 1310n and the base terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 of the second distribution stepping motor driving IC 1310q. The first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is operated by the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) according to the swing drive data PD0 to PD3 (PD4 to PD7) from the main control MPU 1310a. A current that excites φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows at the voltage switched to the stop voltage.

  Here, the operation of the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) will be briefly described. When the logic of the signal of voltage switching 1 (voltage switching 2) from the main control MPU 1310a is output as the operating voltage logic The transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned off, and the voltage of the power supply line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) for supplying power to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is raised to + 12V by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60). As a result, + 12V is supplied to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) as a power supply line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) via the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60). Note that power is not supplied from the power supply line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) to the +5 power supply line via the diode MD50 (MD60).

  On the other hand, when the logic of the signal of voltage switching 1 (voltage switching 2) from the main control MPU 1310a is output as the stop voltage logic obtained by inverting the logic of the operating voltage logic, the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned on. Then, the voltage of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D), which supplies power to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) when + 12V is cut off by the field-effect transistor MF50 (MF60), is applied to the diode MD50 (MD60). Is supplied to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) via the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) as a power supply line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D). Is done.

  Here, the difference in temperature rise between the power consumption of the operating voltage and the power consumption of the stop voltage will be briefly described. The power consumption W can be calculated by Ohm's law: voltage V × voltage V ÷ resistance R. The power consumption Wo by the operating voltage +12 V is 144 / resistance R, and the power consumption Ws by the stop voltage +5 V is 25 / resistance R. Then, the power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage +12 V is 5 times or more (5.76 = 144/25) as compared with the power consumption Ws due to the stop voltage +5 V, and the temperature rise is also about 5 times or more. Becomes This is the same for the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q).

  In other words, even if the temperature rise becomes a problem due to the single (continuous) drive with the operating voltage of +12 V, the temperature rise can be suppressed to about one fifth or less by the drive with the stop voltage of +5 V.

  The package of the first distribution stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) includes heat generated by the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors that excite φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). The first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) absorbs the heat generated by the first to fourth diodes that convert the back electromotive force from φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 into heat, and absorbs the absorbed heat to the outside air. (Around the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q)). Since the island facilities of the game hall are lined up with other pachinko machines, the temperature inside the island facilities of the game hall is increased by heat generated from a power supply board, various control boards, and the like of the pachinko machine.

  Therefore, even if the package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) absorbs the heat generated by the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors and the first to fourth diodes, the first distribution stepping motor drive When the temperature around the IC 1310n (1310q), that is, when the temperature of the outside air is high, the efficiency of releasing the absorbed heat to the outside air decreases, so that heat is stored in the package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q). It will be. Then, when the temperature of the package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) rises and the junction temperature of the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors rises to the junction temperature, the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington The transistor may fail.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is driven to rotate the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise), the first Excitation of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) to the φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is performed as continuously as possible. The number of times the excitation is stopped is reduced, and the back electromotive force generated when the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) stops the excitation to φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 is reduced to the first to fourth. The number of times of conversion into heat and removal by the diode can be reduced. Accordingly, heat generated by the first to fourth diodes can be suppressed to a small extent, which can contribute to a reduction in the temperature rise of the package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q). Therefore, failure of the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors due to heat can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, a semiconductor field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60) is used for the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) without using a relay. This is because a time lag occurs in the relay and the variation in performance among individuals is large, so that it is difficult to accurately control the distribution operation.
[Polyswitch]

  Here, a polyswitch will be described as a resettable fuse. FIG. 252 is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of the polyswitch.

  The operation voltage or the stop voltage is supplied to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) as a power line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) via the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60). In the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature and the main body generates heat, and the heat reduces the conductivity and cuts off the current. When cooled, the conductivity returns and returns, and by using this, the current flowing to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), which is a load, is restricted to restrict the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), which is a load. ) Can be protected. A fuse may be used to limit the current to the load. This fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by fusing when an overcurrent flows, but it is necessary to replace the fuse itself with a new one.

  However, as in the case of the pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to prevent an important main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game from being illegally modified to obtain an illegal game ball. Therefore, the main control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302, as shown in FIG. Are caulked by a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303. The caulking portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and includes a plurality. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then the main control board box 1320 is opened. Need to destroy its sealing mechanism. That is, the cover 1301 cannot be removed from the base 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Then, a fuse is mounted on the main control board 1310, and if the fuse is blown, the swaging portion 1303 must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the caulking portion 1303 of the main control board box 1320 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be broken, so that the fuse cannot be replaced and the game is performed. You will not be able to do so.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a polyswitch is employed as an element for limiting overcurrent similarly to the fuse. Thus, when an overcurrent flows through the polyswitch, the current flowing to the load can be limited to protect the load by specifying the polyswitch. That is, unlike the fuse, the polyswitch itself is not destroyed due to an overcurrent, and there is no need to replace the polyswitch. Thus, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), which is a load, can be protected, and the caulking portion 1303 needs to be destroyed. There is no.

  The polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) is a lead line in which the main body has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and two leads protrude downward from the bottom surface. As described above, in the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature and the main body generates heat. When shut off and the body cools, the conductivity returns and returns. Therefore, in order to efficiently cool the heat generated by the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), the thickness of the body of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) is reduced by arranging the two leads of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) in the vertical direction. The smaller surface can be in the vertical direction, so that the heat generated by the main body of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) is easily convected upward.

  Also, since a large current flows through the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), a terminal for supplying power to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), and each phase (φ1, / φ1) of the power supply first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). , Φ2, / φ2) are arranged in the vicinity of a connector 1310z having a terminal for exciting the same. Accordingly, it is possible to contribute to reducing the influence of noise due to the current on the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) with respect to other electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310.

  Also, since the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) can limit the current flowing to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), it is possible to protect the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) from overheating.

  In the present embodiment, one polyswitch MPS50 is provided for the first distribution stepping motor 4908 exclusively for the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310, and for the second distribution stepping motor 4909. Although one polyswitch MPS60 is provided exclusively for the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310, instead of this, the collector terminals 2 of the first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q are provided. It is also possible to provide a dedicated polyswitch between each of the 4, 9 and 11 and the corresponding terminals of the connectors 4908c and 4909c of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909. Good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one polyswitch MPS50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution stepping motor 4908 in the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310, and for the second distribution stepping motor 4909. Although one polyswitch MPS60 is provided exclusively for the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310, it is supplied to the first and second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p, respectively. One common poly switch may be provided for each of the +12 V and +5 V motor power supplies to be performed, or the common poly switches may be provided to the first and second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310 m and 1310 p, respectively. Model of + 12V Common poly switch only for data source may be configured to provide one dedicated.

  For example, when another stepping motor is driven together with the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven by the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n, and the other stepping motor is another stepping motor drive IC). ), The first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the motor power supplied to the other stepping motors can be switched by the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m. In this case, a common polyswitch for the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and another stepping motor is a polyswitch MPS50, and a motor power supply of + 12V or + 5V is supplied to the other stepping motor together with the first distribution stepping motor 4908 via the polyswitch MPS50. Each is supplied to the motor.

  In this embodiment, a unipolar stepping motor is used as the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909, but a bipolar stepping motor may be used instead. In this case, each terminal to which the motor power of +12 V and +5 V is supplied to the bipolar type stepping motor is provided with one poly switch exclusively.

  In the present embodiment, the polyswitch adopted as the resettable fuse is a PPTC (Polymer Positive Temperature Coefficient) element, such as a polymer-based PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) thermistor. (Positive Temperature Coefficien) Even if an element or a bimetal is employed, the same effect as that of the above-described polyswitch can be obtained.

[Drive management block of first and second distribution stepping motors]
Next, a drive management block of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 will be described. FIG. 253 is a table illustrating a drive management block of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, and FIG. 254 is a table illustrating a drive management block of the second distribution stepping motor 4909. The drive management blocks of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a executes the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908, 4908 according to the drive management block in the port output processing of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177 repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms). As the drive control of the 4909, the swing drive data PD0 to PD7 are output to the first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q, and the voltage switching control of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 is performed by the first and second distribution stepping motors. Signals of voltage switching 1, 2 whose logic is set are output to the two distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m, 1310p.

  As described above, when φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 have the D-cut surfaces formed on the rotating shafts 4908a and 4909a. The angle is a position rotated by 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 °), which is the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, eight combinations (excitation combinations of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 described later) of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 as excitation combinations of phases φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 are described below. Excludes those that do not excite all the phases.) The rotation positions of the rotating shafts 4908a and 4909a can be determined by the combination of the eight types of excitation of each phase.

  In the present embodiment, as the eight combinations of the excitation of each phase of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909, a combination 1: φ1, φ2 excitation (ON), Combination 2: Excitation of φ2 only (ON), Combination 3: Excitation of φ2, / φ1 (ON), Combination 4: Excitation of / φ1 only (ON), Combination 5: Excitation of / φ1, / φ2, Combination 7: / Excitation (ON) only for φ2, combination 8: / φ2, φ1 excitation (ON).

  In the present embodiment, the rotation direction and the rotation position of the rotating shafts 4908a and 4909a are defined as a drive management block composed of eight combinations of the excitation of each phase, and the main control board 1310 is controlled according to the drive management block. The main control MPU 1310a instructs PD0 to PD3 to start or stop the excitation of φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, φ1, / φ1, φ2, and the second distribution stepping motor 4909. Of the oscillating drive data PD0 to PD7, which are 8-bit information including PD4 to PD7 for instructing start / stop of excitation for / φ2, PD0 to PD3 are output to the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n. Then, PD4 to PD7 are transferred to the second distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310q. Output. At this time, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets and outputs the signal logic of voltage switching 1 to the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m according to the drive management block, and outputs the second distribution stepping motor voltage. By setting the logic of the signal of voltage switching 2 to the switching circuit 1310p and outputting the same, the voltages that have been switched to the operating voltage or the stop voltage are used as the φ1, / φ1, φ2, and φ1 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908. / Φ2 is supplied, and the rotating shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is rotated clockwise, counterclockwise, or stopped, and the rotation of the first distribution stepping motor 4909 is controlled by φ1 of the second distribution stepping motor 4909. , / Φ1, φ2, and / φ2 are supplied with a current to excite the second distribution stepping motor 4 909 rotates clockwise, counterclockwise, or stops rotating. As a result, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 swings the first electric distribution piece 4835 in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end). While moving, the second distribution stepping motor 4909 swings the second electric distribution piece 4840 to form a wiper (a wiper that constantly moves between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end). (Shape).

[Drive management block of first distribution stepping motor]
As shown in FIG. 253, the drive management block of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 includes a management number (No.) of the drive management block, a rotation direction, the number of steps, a pulse width (millisecond (ms)), and an excitation time (millimeter). Second (ms)), the excitation mode, the voltage (V), and the excitation phase designation. As the management number, No. 1 to No. Up to 20 are specified.

  Management number No. 1, the rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none ("-" symbol in the figure), pulse width (ms): none ("-" symbol in the figure), excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 Phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage, described as “12” in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) Excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 (in the figure, the phase to be excited is indicated by “○”, the same applies hereinafter). Stipulated. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 1, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the right mechanical end position and is distributed to the left traveling path flowing leftward as viewed from the front of the ball passage 4834, and the second distribution is performed. Unit 4829b.

  When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), as described above, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a moves counterclockwise from the horizontal center line. The position is rotated by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °), and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 is at the left mechanical end position, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 °) and is designed in advance to be a D-cut angle position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotation position (excluding the position of each mechanical end) of the first electric distribution piece 4835 can be determined. Therefore, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), so that the first electric distribution piece 4835 is turned on. When the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the right mechanical end position while 4835 is the left mechanical end position, φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is positioned at the right mechanical end.

  Management number No. 2, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), Excitation phase designation: φ2 is specified. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 2, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 has a rotation position of CW (clockwise) for one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is rotated by the gear mechanism (FIG. 237, FIG. (See FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 moves from the position of the right mechanical end toward the position of the left mechanical end by an angle corresponding to one step ( That is, it rotates CCW (counterclockwise). Management number No. 1 to the management number No. When the step proceeds to 2, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Management number No. 3, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to Step 3, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 has a rotation position of CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is controlled by the gear mechanism (FIG. 237, FIG. (See FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. The first motor-driven distribution piece 4835 rotated by 2 rotates by an angle corresponding to one step toward the left mechanical end position (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Management number No. 2 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 3, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  Management number No. 4, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), Excitation phase designation: / φ1. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with Step 4, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 assumes a rotation position of CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is controlled by a gear mechanism (FIG. 237, FIG. (See FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. The first motor-driven distribution piece 4835 rotated by 3 rotates by an angle corresponding to one step toward the left mechanical end position (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Management number No. 3 to the management number No. When the step proceeds to 4, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Management number No. 5, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 0 (zero), excitation mode: two phases, voltage (V): +12 ( Operating voltage), and excitation phase designation: / φ1, / φ2. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with No. 5, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 assumes a rotation position of CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is controlled by a gear mechanism (FIG. 237, FIG. (See FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. 4 rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 4 toward the left mechanical end position (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) corresponding to one step. Management number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 5 is a position in the middle of the range from the position of the left mechanical end to the position of the right mechanical end, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 is vertically inverted. State. Management number No. 4 to the management number No. When the step proceeds to 5, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 switches from one phase to two phases.

  Management number No. 5, the excitation time (ms) is defined as 0 (zero). This is because when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the left mechanical end position, the inertia of the first electric distribution piece 4835 is small, so that the first electric distribution piece 4835 is vertically inverted. Immediately before, by reducing the torque of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the control number No. This is to prevent the first electric distribution piece 4835 from rotating further than the position defined by 5, and to ensure the followability.

  Specifically, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 is rotated toward the left mechanical end position by the measurement with the high-speed camera, the control number No. described later is used. Before the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with the condition specified in No. 9, the result that the first electric distribution piece 4835 has reached the left mechanical end position is obtained, and the control number and the first electric distribution piece 4835 are obtained. The fact that the correspondence with the rotational position has been broken has been confirmed. Therefore, immediately before the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes in a state of inverting in the vertical direction, that is, the management number No. In step 5, the excitation time (ms) is set to 0 (zero) to reduce the torque of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 to prevent the correspondence between the management number and the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 from being broken. Figured out the technology that can do it.

  Management number No. 6, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), Excitation phase designation: / φ2. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with No. 6, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 assumes a rotation position of CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is rotated by the gear mechanism (FIG. 237, FIG. (See FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. 5 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated toward the left mechanical end position by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Management number No. 5 to the management number No. When the step proceeds to 6, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Management number No. 7, a rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with No. 7, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 has a rotation position of CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 237, FIG. (See FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. 6, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is rotated toward the left mechanical end position by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Management number No. 6 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to step 7, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  Management number No. 8, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), Excitation phase designation: φ1 is specified. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with No. 8, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 has a rotation position of CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is controlled by the gear mechanism (FIG. 237, FIG. (See FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. 7 rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 7 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. 7 to the management number No. When the step proceeds to 8, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 9 indicates the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: two phases, the voltage (V): +12 (the operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 are specified. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 9, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 has a rotation position of CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is controlled by the gear mechanism (FIG. 237, FIG. (See FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. 8, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is rotated toward the left mechanical end position by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, is distributed to the right traveling path flowing rightward toward the front of the spherical path 4834, and passes through the screw path 4836 descending in a helical manner. Unit 4829c. Management number No. 8 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 9, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), as described above, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a becomes 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line. A position rotated by (tolerance ± 3 °) becomes a D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 is at the left mechanical end position, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 °) and is designed in advance to be a D-cut angle position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotation position (excluding the position of each mechanical end) of the first electric distribution piece 4835 can be determined. Therefore, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), so that the first electric distribution piece 4835 is turned on. When the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the right mechanical end position while 4835 is the left mechanical end position, φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is positioned at the right mechanical end. Management number No. 8 to the management number No. 9, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a becomes 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 °). ) And the D-cut angle position.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 10 indicates rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 8, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to the control number No. 9, the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated is maintained. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side and remains stopped. The state of being connected to the third sorting unit 4829c via the third sorting unit 4829c is maintained. Management number No. 9 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 10, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is continuously maintained at two phases.

  Management number No. 11, a rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ1. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with No. 11, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 assumes a rotation position of CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is controlled by a gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , FIG. 244, and FIG. 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. 10 (management number No. 9), the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated from the left mechanical end position toward the right mechanical end position by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). )Rotate. Management number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by No. 11 is indicated by the management number No. 8 is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated. Management number No. 10 to the management number No. When the step proceeds to 11, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Management number No. 12, a rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with No. 12, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 assumes a rotation position of one step CCW (counterclockwise), and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is controlled by a gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , And FIG. 244 and FIG. 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835. 11 rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 11 toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side (that is, CW (clockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by No. 12 is indicated by the management number No. 7, the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated. Management number No. 11 to the management number No. Upon proceeding to 12, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  Management number No. 13, a rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with No. 13, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 assumes a rotation position of CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is controlled by the gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , FIG. 244, and FIG. 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. Then, the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 12 rotates by an angle corresponding to one step toward the right mechanical end position (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by the control number 13 is indicated by the management number No. 6 is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated. Management number No. 12 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 13, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Management number No. 14, the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 0 (zero), the excitation mode: two phases, the voltage (V): +12 (Operation voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1, / φ2. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with No. 14, the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 assumes a rotation position of one step CCW (counterclockwise), and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is controlled by a gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , And FIG. 244 and FIG. 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835. The first motor-driven distribution piece 4835 rotated by 13 rotates by an angle corresponding to one step toward the right mechanical end position (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by No. 14 is indicated by the management number No. 5 is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 5 and is a position in the middle of the range from the position of the right mechanical end to the position of the left mechanical end, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 is vertically inverted. State. Management number No. 13 to the management number No. Upon proceeding to 14, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 switches from one phase to two phases.

  Management number No. 14 stipulates that the excitation time (ms) is 0 (zero). This is because when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the right mechanical end position, the inertia of the first electric distribution piece 4835 is small, so that the first electric distribution piece 4835 is inverted in the vertical direction. Immediately before, by reducing the torque of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the control number No. This is for preventing further rotation from the position defined by 14 and for ensuring follow-up performance.

  More specifically, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the right mechanical end position based on the measurement by the high-speed camera, the control number No. Before the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to the conditions specified in No. 18, the result that the first electric distribution piece 4835 has reached the position of the right mechanical end is obtained, and the control number and the first electric distribution piece 4835 are obtained. The fact that the correspondence with the rotational position has been broken has been confirmed. Therefore, immediately before the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes in a state of inverting in the vertical direction, that is, the management number No. In step 14, the excitation time (ms) is set to 0 (zero) to reduce the torque of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, thereby preventing the correspondence between the management number and the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 from being broken. Figured out the technology that can do it.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 15 indicates the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 1 phase, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation). Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 15, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 assumes a rotation position of one step CCW (counterclockwise), and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is controlled by a gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , And FIG. 244 and FIG. 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835. From the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 14, the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the right mechanical end position by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by No. 15 is indicated by the management number No. 4 is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated. Management number No. 14 to the management number No. Upon proceeding to 15, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 switches from two phases to one phase.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 16 denotes a rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, a pulse width (ms): 4, an excitation time (ms): 4, an excitation mode: two phases, and a voltage (V): +12 (for operation). Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 16, the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 assumes a rotation position of one step CCW (counterclockwise), and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is controlled by a gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , FIG. 244, and FIG. 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. From the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by No. 15, it rotates toward the right mechanical end position by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by No. 16 is indicated by the management number No. 3 is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated. Management number No. 15 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 16, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 17 indicates the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 1 phase, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with No. 17, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 assumes a rotation position of one step CCW (counterclockwise), and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is changed to a gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , FIG. 244, and FIG. 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. Then, the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 16 rotates by an angle corresponding to one step toward the right mechanical end position (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by No. 17 is the control number No. The position becomes the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 2. Management number No. 16 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to step S17, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 18 denotes a rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, a pulse width (ms): 4, an excitation time (ms): 4, an excitation mode: two phases, and a voltage (V): +12 (for operation). Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 are specified. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with No. 18, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 assumes a rotation position of one step CCW (counterclockwise), and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is controlled by a gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , And FIG. 244 and FIG. 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835. 17, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is rotated from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 to the position of the right mechanical end (that is, CW (clockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by No. 18 is indicated by the management number No. 1 is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated. Thereby, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side, is distributed to the left traveling path flowing to the left as viewed from the front of the ball passage 4834, and is connected to the second distribution section 4829b. Management number No. 17 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 18, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), as described above, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a becomes 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line. A position rotated by (tolerance ± 3 °) becomes a D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 is at the left mechanical end position, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 °) and is designed in advance to be a D-cut angle position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotation position (excluding the position of each mechanical end) of the first electric distribution piece 4835 can be determined. Therefore, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), so that the first electric distribution piece 4835 is turned on. When the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the right mechanical end position while 4835 is the left mechanical end position, φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is positioned at the right mechanical end. Management number No. 17 to the management number No. 18, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the mechanical end on the right side. 1 is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated.

  Management number No. 19, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to the control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 18 is maintained. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side and remains stopped, is distributed to the left traveling path flowing leftward as viewed from the front of the ball passage 4834, and is connected to the second distribution section 4829b. Is maintained. Management number No. 18 to the management number No. In step 19, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is continuously maintained in two phases.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 20 indicates the rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 324, excitation mode: two phases, voltage (V): +5 (stop voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Management number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to the control number No. 19 (management number 18), the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated is maintained. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side and remains stopped, is distributed to the left traveling path flowing leftward as viewed from the front of the ball passage 4834, and is connected to the second distribution section 4829b. Is maintained. Management number No. 19 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 20, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is continuously maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched from +12 V as the operating voltage to +5 V as the stop voltage.

  Management number No. 20, the management number No. In 19, the rotation direction: stop, the excitation mode: two phases are maintained, respectively, while the voltage is switched from +12 V (operating voltage) to +5 V (stop voltage). In addition, the management number No. 19, the excitation time (ms): 12, whereas the control number No. In the case of No. 20, the excitation time (ms) is 324. That is, the management number No. 20, the management number No. The voltage is as small as about 42% of the voltage specified in 19, the excitation time is 27 times longer, and the stop time is longer. Accordingly, even if the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is constantly driven, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the first distribution stepping motor 4908 from excessively generating heat. This can be prevented from occurring.

  The management number No. After the management number No. 20, the management number No. 1 and the management number No. No. 1 to management number No. The first distribution stepping motor 4908 is repeatedly driven in accordance with the conditions specified in 20, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings like a wiper that constantly reciprocates between the left mechanical end position and the right mechanical end position. Move. The time at which the first electric distribution piece 4835 stops at the mechanical end position on the right side is determined by the management number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in No. 19: 12, control number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in No. 20: 324, and control number No. In contrast to the excitation time (ms) defined by the first time (ms): 348 ms obtained by adding 12, the time of stopping at the mechanical end position on the left side is determined by the management number No. 1. The excitation time (ms) specified in 10 is only 8 and only 8 ms, and the stop time at the left and right mechanical end positions is different. The operating voltage is switched from + 12V to the stop voltage + 5V.

  In addition, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is stopped (that is, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped), and the management number No. 1, management number No. 10, management number No. 19, and the management number No. In the excitation mode of No. 20, two phases are defined. 1, management number No. 10, management number No. 19, and the management number No. In the designation of the excitation phase of No. 20, φ1 and φ2 are specified. 1, management number No. 10, and the management number No. The voltage of the control number No. 19 is defined as +12 V. + 5V is specified for the voltage of 20. That is, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 is stopped (when the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped), the excitation mode is always two phases and the excitation phase is independent of the magnitude of the voltage. As specified, φ1 and φ2 are set, and the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven.

  Also, in addition to the power-on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the management number No. No. 1 to management number No. 20, among the management numbers No. 20 that are defined as rotation directions: stop. 1, management number No. 10, management number No. 19, and the management number No. Except for the management number No. 20, starting from one management number. The first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven one by one in accordance with the conditions specified in the management number. Then, the management number No. After the management number No. 20, 1, management number No. ,..., The first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with the conditions specified in the management number immediately before the one management number, and the management number No. No. 1 to management number No. The first distribution stepping motor 4908 is repeatedly driven in accordance with the conditions specified in 20. The “one management number” may be set in advance as an initial value (default), or a random number is obtained at the time of power recovery, and a predetermined calculation is performed in accordance with the obtained random number or the obtained random number. The determination may be made based on the result obtained by executing, or a unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a may be extracted, and the determination may be made based on the extracted ID code.

  Note that the management number immediately before the power-off of the pachinko machine 1 (including a power failure and a momentary power failure) may be included in the above-mentioned game backup information. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the management number from the game backup information at the time of power recovery, and starts driving the first distribution stepping motor 4908 according to the condition specified by the read out management number.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is rotating in the CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise) direction, the φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 are rotated. Excitation to φ2 is performed as so-called 1-2 phase excitation, but may be performed by 1-1 phase excitation or 2-2 phase excitation. For example, in the case of performing 1-1 phase excitation in CW (clockwise), if excitation is performed in the order of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2, the first to fourth of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n The order in which the back electromotive force from the φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is converted into heat is as follows: the first diode, the third diode, the second diode, and the fourth diode. Diode. Thereby, as described above, the chip in which the first diode and the second diode are paired and the chip in which the third diode and the fourth diode are paired can generate heat alternately. This can contribute to a reduction in the temperature rise of the package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n. Therefore, failure of the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors due to heat can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the positions of the mechanical ends overlap in the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835. , The excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 may be determined. For example, when the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven, as described above, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is moved through the first mechanism via the gear mechanism (see FIGS. 237, 244, and 245). In this gear mechanism, the gear ratio (current gear ratio) in the above-described embodiment is changed to reduce the number of steps, so that the position of each mechanical end is not duplicated. The range in which the first electric distribution piece 4835 always swings in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end) is excited by the first distribution stepping motor 4908. And the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 can be determined. Only it can be defined driving management block of the stepping motor 4908.

[Drive management block of the second distribution stepping motor]
As shown in FIG. 254, the drive management block of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 includes the drive management block management number (No.), rotation direction, number of steps, pulse width (millisecond (ms)), and excitation time (millimeter). Second (ms)), the excitation mode, the voltage (V), and the excitation phase designation. As the management number, No. 1 to No. Up to 21 are defined.

  Management number No. 1, the rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none ("-" symbol in the figure), pulse width (ms): none ("-" symbol in the figure), excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 Phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage, described as “12” in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) Excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 (in the figure, the phase to be excited is indicated by “○”, the same applies hereinafter). Stipulated. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 1, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end which is vertically inverted, and is connected to the starting gate 4803 via the left hand passageway 4842. As a result, the right rear passage 4841 connected to the third sorting unit 4829c is closed.

  When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), as described above, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a moves counterclockwise from the horizontal center line. The position is rotated by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °), and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 is at the left mechanical end position, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 °), and is designed in advance to be a D-cut angle position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotation position (excluding the position of each mechanical end) of the second electric distribution piece 4840 can be determined. Therefore, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), so that the second electric distribution piece 4840 is rotated. When the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the inverted mechanical end position in the vertical direction, while φ4 and φ2 are set to the left mechanical end position, φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited. By turning on (ON), the second electric distribution piece 4840 is at the mechanical end position where it is inverted in the vertical direction.

  Management number No. 2, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), Excitation phase designation: φ2 is specified. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 2, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is in a rotation position of CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 238). To the second electric distribution piece 4840 through the second electric distribution piece 4840, and from the position of the mechanical end where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is inverted vertically to the position of the mechanical end on the left side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Clockwise)) rotate. Management number No. 1 to the management number No. When the step proceeds to 2, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 switches from two phases to one phase.

  Management number No. 3, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with Step 3, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 has a rotation position of CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) To the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. The second motor-driven distribution piece 4840 rotated by 2 rotates by an angle corresponding to one step toward the left mechanical end position (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Management number No. 2 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 3, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 switches from one phase to two phases.

  Management number No. 4, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), Excitation phase designation: / φ1. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to Step 4, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is in a rotation position of CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is controlled by the gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) To the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 3 rotates toward the left mechanical end position (ie, CCW (counterclockwise)) from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 3 toward the left mechanical end position. Management number No. 3 to the management number No. When the step proceeds to 4, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Management number No. 5, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage ), Excitation phase designation: / φ1, / φ2 are specified. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with No. 5, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 assumes a rotation position of CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is controlled by a gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) To the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 4 rotates toward the left mechanical end position (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 4. Management number No. 4 to the management number No. When the step proceeds to 5, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 switches from one phase to two phases.

  Management number No. 6, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), Excitation phase designation: / φ2. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 6, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 assumes a rotation position of CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is controlled by a gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) To the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 5 rotates toward the left mechanical end position (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 5. Management number No. 5 to the management number No. When the step proceeds to 6, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Management number No. 7, a rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with No. 7, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 assumes a rotation position of CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is controlled by the gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) To the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 6 rotates toward the left mechanical end position (ie, CCW (counterclockwise)) from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 6 toward the left mechanical end position. Management number No. 6 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 7, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  Management number No. 8, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), Excitation phase designation: φ1 is specified. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with No. 8, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 becomes a rotation position of CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is controlled by the gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) To the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 7 rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 7 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. 7 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 8, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 switches from two phases to one phase.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 9 indicates the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: two phases, the voltage (V): +12 (the operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 are specified. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with No. 9, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 assumes a rotation position of CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is controlled by a gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) To the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 8 rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 8 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Thus, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and is connected to the third distribution part 4829c via the right inner passage 4841. That is, the right rear passage 4841 connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is opened. Management number No. 8 to the management number No. When the step proceeds to 9, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 switches from one phase to two phases.

  When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), as described above, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a becomes 10 ° counterclockwise from the center line in the horizontal direction. A position rotated by (tolerance ± 3 °) becomes a D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 is at the left mechanical end position, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 °), and is designed in advance to be a D-cut angle position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotation position (excluding the position of each mechanical end) of the second electric distribution piece 4840 can be determined. Therefore, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), so that the second electric distribution piece 4840 is rotated. When the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the inverted mechanical end position in the vertical direction, while φ4 and φ2 are set to the left mechanical end position, φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited. By turning on (ON), the second electric distribution piece 4840 is at the mechanical end position where it is inverted in the vertical direction. Management number No. 8 to the management number No. 9, the second electric distribution piece 4840 becomes the left mechanical end position, and the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 °). ) And the D-cut angle position.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 10 indicates rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to the control number No. 9, the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated is maintained. Thereby, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side and remains stopped, and is connected to the third distribution part 4829c via the right inner passage 4841 (that is, the third distribution part 4829c). The right rear passage 4841 connected to the distribution unit 4829c is opened). Management number No. 9 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 10, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained at two phases.

  Management number No. 11, the rotation direction: stop, the number of steps: none, the pulse width (ms): none, the excitation time (ms): 32, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +5 (voltage for stop), the excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to the control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 10 (management number No. 9) is maintained. Thereby, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side and remains stopped, and is connected to the third distribution part 4829c via the right inner passage 4841 (that is, the third distribution part 4829c). The right rear passage 4841 connected to the distribution unit 4829c is opened). Management number No. 10 to the management number No. When the step proceeds to 11, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched from + 12V as the operating voltage to + 5V as the stopping voltage.

  Management number No. 11, the management number No. The rotation direction at 10: stop, excitation mode: two phases are maintained, respectively, while the voltage is switched from + 12V (operating voltage) to + 5V (stop voltage). In addition, the management number No. 10, the excitation time (ms): 12, whereas the control number No. In No. 11, the excitation time (ms) is 32. That is, the management number No. 11, the management number No. The voltage is as small as about 42% of the voltage specified in 10, the excitation time is about 2.7 times longer, and the stop time is longer. Accordingly, even if the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is constantly driven, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the second distribution stepping motor 4909 from excessively generating heat. This can be prevented from occurring.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 12 indicates rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to the control number No. 11 (management number No. 10, management number No. 9), the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated is maintained. Thereby, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side and remains stopped, and is connected to the third distribution part 4829c via the right inner passage 4841 (that is, the third distribution part 4829c). The right rear passage 4841 connected to the distribution unit 4829c is opened). Management number No. 11 to the management number No. When the step proceeds to 12, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched again from the stop voltage +5 V to the operation voltage +12 V.

  The reason why the voltage is switched again from the stop voltage of +5 V to the operation voltage of +12 V is that the second electric distribution piece 4840 has a larger size and a larger inertia than the first electric distribution piece 4835. When starting rotation of the second electric distribution piece 4840 from the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, the state where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is inclined obliquely) to the position of the mechanical end which is vertically inverted, a strong torque is required. The management number No. At 12, the voltage is switched from + 5V which is the stop voltage to + 12V which is the operating voltage in preparation for the preparation.

  Management number No. 13, a rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, a pulse width (ms): 8, an excitation time (ms): 8, an excitation mode: two phases, a voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with No. 13, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 assumes a rotation position of CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is controlled by a gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) To the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. Then, from the position of the left electric end, which is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by the rotation of the motor 12, it rotates toward the position of the inverted mechanical end by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. 13, the position of the first electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by the control number No. No. 8 but not the management number No. 7, the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated. Management number No. 12 to the management number No. Upon proceeding to 13, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases.

  This is because, as described above, the second electric distribution piece 4840 has a larger size and a larger inertia than the first electric distribution piece 4835, so that the second electric distribution piece 4840 is moved to the position of the left mechanical end (that is, This is because a strong torque is required when starting rotation from the second electric distribution piece 4840 to the position of the mechanical end which is vertically inverted from the state where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is inclined obliquely. 12 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 13, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases, and a strong torque can be obtained when rotation starts. Then, the management number No. 8, the excitation time (ms): 4, and the control number No. The excitation time (ms): 8 is obtained by adding the excitation time (ms): 4 specified in the control number No. 7 to the control number No. 7. 13, the management number No. 13, the position of the first electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by the control number No. No. 8 but not the management number No. 7, the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated.

  Management number No. 14, the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 8, the excitation time (ms): 8, the excitation mode: one phase, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with No. 14, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 assumes a rotation position of one step CCW (counterclockwise), and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is controlled by the gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) To the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. Then, from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 13, it rotates toward the position of the inverted mechanical end in the vertical direction by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated according to the control number No. 6 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated. Management number No. 13 to the management number No. Upon proceeding to 14, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 switches from two phases to one phase.

  Management number No. 14, the excitation time (ms): 8 is defined. This is a mode in which the second electric distribution piece 4840 gradually rotates from the state of being inclined obliquely to the position of the mechanical end that is vertically inverted. By the creation, the state of being connected to the third distribution unit 4829c via the right rear passage 4841 (that is, the right rear passage 4841 connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is opened) is gradually closed. This is because it is possible to realize a mode in which the state shifts to a certain state.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 15 indicates the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 8, the excitation time (ms): 8, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1, / φ2. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with No. 15, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 assumes a rotation position of one step CCW (counterclockwise), and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is controlled by a gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) To the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. From the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 14, it rotates toward the position of the inverted mechanical end in the vertical direction by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated according to the control number No. 5 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated. Management number No. 14 to the management number No. Upon proceeding to 15, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 switches from one phase to two phases.

  Management number No. 15, the management number No. The same excitation time (ms): 8 specified in 14 is defined as the position of the mechanical end in which the second electric distribution piece 4840 is vertically inclined from the state in which the second electric distribution piece 4840 is inclined as described above. By creating a mode of gradually rotating toward, the right rear passage 4841 connected to the third distribution portion 4829c is opened via the right rear passage 4841 (that is, the right rear passage 4841 connected to the third distribution portion 4829c is opened). This is because a state in which the state is gradually closed is realized.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 16 denotes a rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 16, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 assumes a rotation position of one step CCW (counterclockwise), and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is controlled by the gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) To the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. From the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by No. 15, it rotates toward the position of the inverted mechanical end in the vertical direction by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by No. 16 is indicated by the management number No. 4 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated. Management number No. 15 to the management number No. Upon proceeding to 16, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 switches from two phases to one phase.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 17 denotes a rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, a pulse width (ms): 4, an excitation time (ms): 4, an excitation mode: two phases, and a voltage (V): +12 (for operation). Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with No. 17, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 assumes a rotation position of one step CCW (counterclockwise), and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is controlled by the gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) To the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. Then, from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by No. 16, it rotates toward the position of the inverted mechanical end by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by No. 17 is indicated by the management number No. 3 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated. Management number No. 16 to the management number No. When the step proceeds to 17, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 18 indicates the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 1 phase, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with No. 18, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 becomes a rotation position CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is controlled by the gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) To the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 17 and rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 17 toward the position of the inverted mechanical end in the vertical direction by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by No. 18 is indicated by the management number No. 2 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated. Management number No. 17 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 18, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Management number No. 19, rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 are specified. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 19, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 assumes a rotation position CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is controlled by the gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) To the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. Then, from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 18, it rotates toward the position of the inverted mechanical end in the vertical direction by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by No. 19 is indicated by the management number No. 1 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end which is vertically inverted, and is connected to the starting gate 4803 via the left-handed passage 4842. That is, the right rear passage 4841 connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is closed. Management number No. 18 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to step 19, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), as described above, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a becomes 10 ° counterclockwise from the center line in the horizontal direction. A position rotated by (tolerance ± 3 °) becomes a D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 is at the left mechanical end position, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 °), and is designed in advance to be a D-cut angle position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotation position (excluding the position of each mechanical end) of the second electric distribution piece 4840 can be determined. Therefore, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), so that the second electric distribution piece 4840 is rotated. When the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the inverted mechanical end position in the vertical direction, while φ4 and φ2 are set to the left mechanical end position, φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited. By turning on (ON), the second electric distribution piece 4840 is at the mechanical end position where it is inverted in the vertical direction. Management number No. 18 to the management number No. 19, the second electric distribution piece 4840 becomes the position of the mechanical end that is vertically inverted. 1 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 20 denotes rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to the control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 19 is maintained. Thereby, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end that is vertically inverted and is kept stopped, and is connected to the starting gate 4803 via the left hand passageway 4842 (that is, the third electric distribution piece 4840). The right rear passage 4841 connected to the distribution unit 4829c is closed). Management number No. 19 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 20, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases.

  Management number No. Reference numeral 21 indicates the rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 428, excitation mode: two phases, voltage (V): +5 (stop voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Management number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to the control number No. 20 (management number No. 19), the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated is maintained. Thereby, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end that is vertically inverted and is kept stopped, and is connected to the starting gate 4803 via the left hand passageway 4842 (that is, the third electric distribution piece 4840). The right rear passage 4841 connected to the distribution unit 4829c is closed). Management number No. 20 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 21, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched from + 12V as the operating voltage to + 5V as the stop voltage.

  Management number No. 21, the management number No. The rotation direction at 20: stop, excitation mode: two phases are maintained, respectively, while the voltage is switched from + 12V (operating voltage) to + 5V (stop voltage). In addition, the management number No. In the case of No. 20, the excitation time (ms) is 12, whereas the control number No. 21, the excitation time (ms) is 428. That is, the management number No. 21, the management number No. The voltage is as small as about 42% of the voltage specified in No. 20, and the excitation time is about 35.7 times longer, and the stop time is longer. Accordingly, even if the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is constantly driven, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the second distribution stepping motor 4909 from excessively generating heat. This can be prevented from occurring.

  The management number No. Following the management number No. 21 again. 1 and the management number No. No. 1 to management number No. The second distribution stepping motor 4909 is repeatedly driven in accordance with the conditions specified in 21, and the second electric distribution piece 4840 is a wiper that constantly reciprocates between the left mechanical end position and the vertically inverted mechanical end position. Swings in the shape of The time at which the second electric distribution piece 4840 stops at the position of the mechanical end that has been inverted in the vertical direction is determined by the management number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in No. 20: 12, control number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in No. 21: 428, and control number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in 1: 452 ms obtained by adding 12, the voltage is switched from +12 V as the operating voltage to +5 V as the stopping voltage, and stops at the mechanical end position on the left side thereof. The time is indicated by the management number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in No. 10: 12, control number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in No. 11: 32, and control number No. 11 The excitation time (ms) specified in 12 is 48 ms obtained by adding 4, and the voltage is switched from +12 V as the operating voltage to +5 V as the stop voltage. As described above, although the stop time at the left mechanical end position and the stop time at the vertically inverted mechanical end position are different, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 stops, the voltage is always the operating voltage. The voltage is switched from a certain +12 V to a stop voltage +5 V.

  Also, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is stopped (that is, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is stopped), and the management number No. 1, management number No. 10, management number No. 11, management number No. 12, management number No. 20, and the management number No. 21, two phases are defined in the excitation mode. 1, management number No. 10, management number No. 11, management number No. 12, management number No. 20, and the management number No. In the excitation phase designation of No. 21, φ1 and φ2 are defined, and the management number No. 1, management number No. 10, management number No. 12, and the management number No. + 12V is defined for the voltage of the control number No. 20. 11, and the management number No. The voltage of 21 is specified as + 5V. That is, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 is stopped (when the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is stopped), the excitation mode is always two-phase and the excitation phase regardless of the magnitude of the voltage. As designated by φ1 and φ2, the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven.

  Also, in addition to the power-on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the management number No. No. 1 to management number No. 21, the control number No. 21 is a control number defined as the rotation direction: stop. 1, management number No. 10, management number No. 11, management number No. 12, management number No. 20, and the management number No. Except for the management number No. 21, starting from one management number. The second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven one by one in accordance with the conditions specified in the management number one by one. Then, the management number No. Following the management number No. 21, 1, management number No. ,..., The second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with the conditions specified by the management number immediately before the one management number. No. 1 to management number No. The second distribution stepping motor 4909 is repeatedly driven according to the conditions specified in 21. The “one management number” may be set in advance as an initial value (default), or a random number is obtained at the time of power recovery, and a predetermined calculation is performed in accordance with the obtained random number or the obtained random number. The determination may be made based on the result obtained by executing, or a unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a may be extracted, and the determination may be made based on the extracted ID code.

  Note that the management number immediately before the power-off of the pachinko machine 1 (including a power failure and a momentary power failure) may be included in the above-mentioned game backup information. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a reads the management number from the game backup information at the time of power recovery, and starts driving the second distribution stepping motor 4909 in accordance with the condition specified by the read management number.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is rotating in the CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise) direction, φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 are rotated. Although the excitation to φ2 has been performed almost as a so-called 1-2-phase excitation, it may be performed by a 1-1-phase excitation or a 2-2-phase excitation. For example, in the case of performing 1-1 phase excitation in CW (clockwise), when excitation is performed in the order of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2, the first to fourth of the second distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310q The order in which the back electromotive force from the φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is converted into heat is as follows: the first diode, the third diode, the second diode, and the fourth diode. Diode. Thereby, as described above, the chip in which the first diode and the second diode are paired and the chip in which the third diode and the fourth diode are paired can generate heat alternately. This can contribute to a reduction in the temperature rise of the package of the second distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310q. Therefore, failure of the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors due to heat can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the positions of the mechanical ends overlap in the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840. , The excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 may be determined. For example, when the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven, as described above, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the gear mechanism (see FIG. 238). In this gear mechanism, the gear ratio (current gear ratio) in the above-described embodiment is changed to reduce the number of steps and to prevent the positions of the respective mechanical ends from overlapping, so that the second electric distribution piece is used. The range in which the 4840 always swings in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end) is determined by the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909, (2) The rotation position of the electric distribution piece 4840 can be determined, and the second distribution step It is possible to define the drive control block Gumota 4909.

[Method of mounting field effect transistor]
Next, a method of arranging the field effect transistor MF50 of the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m and the field effect transistor MF60 of the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p will be briefly described. FIG. 255 is a schematic view of a method for mounting a field effect transistor.

  As shown in FIG. 255, the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 includes a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302, and houses a main control board 1310. In the state where the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 in this manner, the distance dimension from the mounting surface of the main control board 1310 to the back surface (ceiling) of the cover 1301 in this embodiment is 15.0 mm. Therefore, it is necessary to mount various electronic components on the main control board 1310 within this distance dimension.

  However, the package of the field-effect transistors MF50 and MF60 adopted in the present embodiment is a so-called TO type package, and the main body of the field-effect transistors MF50 and MF60 is large and protrudes from the main body of the field-effect transistors MF50 and MF60. When the various terminals to be mounted are mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310 as they are, the main bodies of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 interfere with the back surface (ceiling) of the cover 1301 and the main control board 1310 is moved to the main control board box 1320. Can not be accommodated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, various terminals of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 are configured to be bent at a predetermined angle using a predetermined jig, and then mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main bodies of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 are mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310 in a state where the main bodies of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 are inclined and at a predetermined distance d from each other. The main body does not interfere with the back surface (ceiling) of the cover body 1301, the main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the main control board box 1320, and the main body of the field effect transistor MF50 in a state of being inclined obliquely below the main body. The resistors MR52 and MR53 (including the component numbers attached to the mounting surface), which are electronic components mounted on the device, can be visually recognized through the transparent cover body 1301, and the field effect transistor is in an inclined state. The resistors MR62 and MR63 (electronic components mounted below the main body of the MF60) Also part number comprises. A), can be viewed through a predetermined distance field becomes tilted obliquely arranged while keeping a dimension d effect transistor MF50, MF60 transparent cover member 1301 from between the main body.

[Countermeasures]
Next, by vibrating the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, the path of the game ball flowing down the game area 5 a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 is changed and provided on the game board 5. The following describes a circuit for detecting an illegal action (referred to as “docking”) that makes the player enter various winning ports or gates. FIG. 256 is a circuit diagram showing a vibration detection circuit.

  Although not shown, an upper vibration detection switch 3005 and a lower vibration detection switch 3006 are arranged at predetermined locations on the game board 5, respectively. A circuit capable of setting sensitivity for detecting vibration is provided on panel relay board 1710. As shown in FIG. 256, the panel relay board 1710 can set the sensitivity of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 for vibration detection by the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the sensitivity of the vibration detection by the lower vibration detection switch 3006 to the sensitivity setting circuit 1710za. A sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb for a lower vibration detection switch that can be set is provided.

  Here, since the sensitivity setting circuit 1710za for the upper vibration detection switch and the sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb for the lower vibration detection switch have the same circuit configuration, the sensitivity setting circuit 1710za for the upper vibration detection switch and the sensitivity setting circuit for the lower vibration detection switch In the description of the circuit 1710zb, the reference numeral related to the sensitivity setting circuit 1710za for the lower vibration detection switch is shown in parentheses following the reference numeral related to the sensitivity setting circuit 1710za for the upper vibration detection switch.

  The upper vibration detection sensor, which is a detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005, and the lower vibration detection sensor, which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006, are signals that are wired or connected in the panel relay board 1710 to detect vibration. The signal is transmitted to the main control board 1310 as a sensor, and is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit 1310b described above. The main control MPU 1310a reads the vibration detection sensor which is a wired-OR connected signal in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 which is repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms). In the fraud detection processing of step S112 in the main-control-side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177, the presence or absence of a stickiness is determined based on the read vibration detection sensor, which is the wired-or-connected signal, as shown in FIG. 177. In the port output processing of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt processing, the determination result (whether or not there is a stickiness) is output to the external terminal board 558 described above, and the periphery of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Control board command transmission In sense, and transmits a command to tell the determination result that Dotsukigoto is being performed to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The panel relay board 1710 is supplied with +35 V from the main control board 1310, and has the same ground (GND) as the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310. The ground (GND) to the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the panel relay board 1710.

  The sensitivity setting circuit 1710za (1710zb) for the upper vibration detection switch mainly includes the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80), the resistors MR70 to MR73 (MR80 to MR83), the Zener diode MD70 (MD80), and the electrolytic capacitor MC70 (MC80). I have. This shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80) has reduced temperature drift due to ambient temperature, and can create and supply a stabilized power supply that is maintained at a constant voltage to a load.

  The other end of the resistor MR70 (MR80) whose one end is electrically connected to the + 35V power supply line is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of a Zener diode MD70 (MD80) whose anode terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND). And is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR71 (MR81). The other end of the resistance MR71 (MR81) is electrically connected to one end of the resistance MR72 (resistance MR82), and is also electrically connected to the K terminal which is a cathode terminal of the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80). 1 (vibration detection power supply 2) is supplied to the upper vibration detection switch 3005 (3006). A line for supplying the vibration detection power supply 1 (vibration detection power supply 2) is electrically connected to a positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC70 (MC80) having a negative terminal electrically connected to a ground (GND). The ripple (AC component superposed on the voltage) of the vibration detection power supply 1 (vibration detection power supply 2) is removed and smoothed. The electrolytic capacitor MC70 (MC80) also plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  The other end of the resistor MR72 (MR82) is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR73 (MR83), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage input of the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80). It is electrically connected to a REF terminal which is a terminal. An A terminal that is an anode terminal of the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  The vibration detection power supply 1 is determined by 2.5V × (MR72 + MR73) ÷ MR73 by the resistance values of the resistors MR72 and MR73. Like the vibration detection power supply 1, the vibration detection power supply 2 is determined by 2.5V × (MR82 + MR83) ８３MR83 by the resistance values of the resistors MR82 and MR83.

  The upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 can change the sensitivity of vibration detection by the supplied power, and are used for the sensitivity setting circuit 1710za for the upper vibration detection switch and the lower vibration detection switch. The sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb can set the sensitivity of vibration detection by the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the upper vibration detection sensor that is the detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor that is the detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006 are wired on the panel relay board 1710 as described above. It is OR-connected and transmitted to the main control board 1310 as a vibration detection sensor, and is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit. This is because, depending on the mode of hitting (hitting position, hitting angle, hitting strength, etc.), one or both of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 do not react at all, or This is because the sensitivity of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 for vibration detection and the sensitivity of the lower vibration detection switch 3006 for vibration detection are mutually complemented because one or both may react excessively.

  Through various tests, the resistances of the resistors MR72 and MR73 and the resistances of the resistors MR82 and MR83 are selected, and the sensitivity of the vibration detection of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the sensitivity of the vibration detection of the lower vibration detection switch 3006 are determined. Is set.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the upper vibration detection sensor that is a detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor that is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006 are connected to the panel relay board 1710 as described above. Was wired-OR connected and transmitted to the main control board 1310 as a vibration detection sensor and input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control-side input circuit 1310b, but was not wired-OR connected to the panel relay board 1710, and The signal may be independently transmitted to the main control board 1310 and input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit 1310b. By doing so, the main control of the docking mode is performed using a combination of the upper vibration detection sensor that is a detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor that is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006. The MPU 1310 can determine and transmit the discrimination to the outside (a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) from the external terminal board 558).

  For example, when both the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 do not respond, the 0th (zero) tapping mode in which no vibration is performed, and the upper vibration detection switch 3005 responds If the lower vibration detection switch 3006 does not respond, the first tapping mode may be aggravated. If the upper vibration detection switch 3005 does not respond and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 responds, a pounding is performed. In the case where both the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 respond to the second beating mode that may be in operation, the third beating mode in which the pounding is performed can be cited.

[Abnormal notification of various sorting units]
Next, abnormality notification of the first, second, and third distribution units 4829a, 4829b, and 4829c will be briefly described. As described above, the first distribution unit 4829a is configured to be divided into a right traveling path flowing rightward toward the front of the ball passage 4834 and a left traveling path flowing leftward by the swing timing of the first electric distribution piece 4835. Have been. As described above, the first electric distribution piece 4835 always swings in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end). An optical type first electric distribution piece sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not the first electric distribution piece is provided in the first distribution section 4829a. As described above, the second distribution unit 4829b is configured to be distributed to the right rear passage 4841 and the left hand passage 4842 by the swing timing of the second electric distribution piece 4840. As described above, the second electric distribution piece 4840 always swings in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the left mechanical end position and the vertically inverted mechanical end position). An optical type second electric distribution piece sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not swinging is provided in the second distribution section 4829b. As described above, the third sorting unit 4829c is configured so that the rotating member 4846 of the ball turning type sorting device 4843 is always rotated, and an optical rotating member (not shown) that detects whether or not the rotating member 4846 is rotating. Sensor is provided in the third sorting unit 4829c.

  The detection signals from the first and second electric distribution piece sensors and the rotary member sensor are input to the main control board 1310, and are input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit 1310b described above. In the main control MPU 1310a, the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 which is repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms) is performed by the main control MPU 1310a. The detection signals from the sensor and the rotation member sensor are read, and in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, the read first and second electric distribution piece sensors, and A swing abnormality or a rotation abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the rotation member sensor, and in the port output processing of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177, the determination result (the first electric distribution piece) is obtained. Whether or not the swing operation of the 4835 has occurred, and the swing operation of the second electric distribution piece 4840 177, a lighting signal is output individually to the corresponding decoration lamps provided on the game board 5, and the main control timer interrupt shown in FIG. 177 is performed. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the processing, this determination result (abnormal oscillating operation of first electric distribution piece 4835, abnormal oscillating operation of second electric distribution piece 4840, or rotational operation of rotating member 4846) A command notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) lights the corresponding first electric distribution piece decorative lamp provided on the game board 5 in a red light emission mode when the first electric distribution piece 4835 has a swinging operation abnormality. Then, when the swing operation abnormality of the second electric distribution piece 4840 occurs, the corresponding decorative lamp for the second electric distribution piece provided on the game board 5 lights in green, and the rotational operation abnormality of the rotating member 4846 occurs. Then, the corresponding rotary member decorative lamp provided on the game board 5 is lit in a blue light emission mode. Using one full-color LED, the red LED element is notified in association with the presence or absence of the occurrence of the oscillating operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the green LED element is oscillated by the second electric distribution piece 4840. It is also possible to notify by associating the presence or absence of the occurrence of the operation abnormality and to notify the blue LED element by associating the occurrence of the rotation operation abnormality of the rotating member 4846.

  The peripheral control board 1510 is a command from the main control board 1310 for notifying the occurrence of the swing operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the occurrence of the oscillation operation abnormality of the second electric distribution piece 4840, or the occurrence of the rotational operation abnormality of the rotating member 4846. Is received, based on the command, if there is an abnormal swinging operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835, control is performed to output the first electric distribution piece notification sound from various speakers, and the second electric distribution piece 4840 is controlled. In the case where the rocking operation abnormality occurs, control is performed to output the second electric distribution piece notification sound different from the first electric distribution piece notification sound from various speakers, and in the case where the rotation member 4846 has a rotational operation abnormality, A control is performed to output the notification sound for the rotating member, which is different from the notification sound for the first electric distribution piece and the notification sound for the second electric distribution piece, from various speakers. The first electric distribution piece notification sound, the second electric distribution piece notification sound, and the rotating member notification sound have different timbres.

  As described above, by notifying the occurrence of the oscillating operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the occurrence of the oscillating operation abnormality of the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the occurrence of the rotational operation abnormality of the rotating member 4846, the presence or absence of the abnormality is determined. It is possible to promptly inform sales staff and clerks at the game hall. In addition, even if a fraudulent act of stopping the operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the rotating member 4846 with a wire, a string, or the like is performed, a region that is advantageous to a fraudulent person is obtained. Can be promptly notified to the clerk or clerk at the game hall.

  In addition, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) may output a signal to be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558 when the first electric distribution piece 4835 has a swing operation abnormality. When an abnormal swing operation of the second electric distribution piece 4840 occurs, a signal to be transmitted to the hall computer may be output via the external terminal plate 558. A signal transmitted to the hall computer may be output via the terminal plate 558. Such signals can be individually output and transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. Any one of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the rotating member 4846 can be used. Finally, when an abnormality occurs (that is, it is not possible to identify the target in which the abnormality has occurred), a signal may be output and transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. .

  In the case where a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided on the game board 5, the peripheral control board 1510 generates an abnormal swing operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835 from the main control board 1310, and generates the second electric distribution piece. Upon receiving a command for notifying the occurrence of the swing operation abnormality of the 4840 or the rotation operation of the rotating member 4846, if there is the occurrence of the swing operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835 based on the command, the fact is notified. A control to display a message on the display device may be performed, or a control to display a message to that effect on the display device when there is a swing operation abnormality of the second electric distribution piece 4840 may be performed. Alternatively, if there is a rotation operation abnormality of the rotating member 4846, control may be performed to display a message notifying the occurrence on the display device. . The peripheral control board 1510 is provided when any one of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the rotating member 4846 from the main control board 1310 has an abnormality (that is, an abnormality has occurred). (Although it is not possible to specify the target where the error has occurred), control may be performed to display a message indicating the occurrence of the abnormality on the display device.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 251 that can control the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of FIG. 244, and is provided on the game board 5 of FIG. 231. At the same time, the right-hand path and the front of the ball passage 4834 that flow the game ball entered from the dive portion 4827 of FIG. 232 as the ball entering ball portion toward the front of the ball passage 4834 of FIG. A first distribution unit 4829a in FIG. 232, which is a distribution device capable of performing distribution by controlling the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 to the left traveling path flowing to the left side toward the left, is provided. The first distribution unit 4829a can discharge the rightward path flowing to the right side of the front of the ball path 4834 and the leftward path of the left side flowing to the front of the ball path 4834 to an area that is advantageous for the player. It has a rightward course that flows to the right as viewed from the front of the ball passage 4834, which is a specific ball discharge unit that can be used. The main control board 1310 determines the time to be distributed to the right path flowing to the right side in front of the ball passage 4834 and the left path flowing to the left side in front of the ball path 4834 which is the other ball discharge section excluding the specific ball discharge section. The excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 can be controlled so that the distribution time is different.

  Specifically, the time when the first electric distribution piece 4835 stops at the position of the mechanical end on the right side is determined by the management number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in No. 19: 12, control number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in No. 20: 324, and control number No. In contrast to the excitation time (ms) defined by the first time (ms): 348 ms obtained by adding 12, the time of stopping at the mechanical end position on the left side is determined by the management number No. 1. The excitation time (ms) specified in 10 is only 8 and is 8 ms alone, and the stop times at the mechanical end positions on the left and right sides are different, and the stop time is long.

  As described above, by controlling the first sorting unit 4829a by the first sorting stepping motor 4908, the time to be sorted to the right path flowing rightward in front of the ball passage 4834, which is the specific ball emitting unit, and the specific ball emitting unit are determined. It is possible to finely adjust the time allocated to the left traveling path flowing to the left side in front of the ball passage 4834, which is the other ball discharge unit, and to stabilize the distribution ratio by the first distribution unit 4829a. it can. Therefore, the distribution ratio by the first distribution unit 4829a can be stabilized, and the distribution ratio can be finely adjusted.

From the above, the embodiment includes the following technical ideas.
"A gaming machine provided with a ball rolling member for rolling a game ball in a game area visible to a player,
The ball rolling member,
A ball flow path having at least a bottom wall portion and a peripheral wall portion, and a ball flow path that is curved in an annular or arc shape such that a centrifugal force directed toward the peripheral wall portion is applied to a game ball rolling on the bottom wall portion,
A ball guiding portion provided in the ball flow path and capable of guiding the game ball to a position slightly away from the peripheral wall by contacting a lower side of the center of the game ball rolling on the bottom wall. Gaming machine. "
According to such a technical idea, it is possible to provide a gaming machine provided with a ball rolling member capable of preventing actual damage due to a pounding.
In order to ensure that the ball guiding portion is sunk under the game ball by vibration, the shape of the ball guiding portion should be a wedge-shaped cross section that is inclined downward toward the contact point with the bottom wall portion of the game ball. Is good.

Further, from the above, the embodiment includes the following technical ideas.
"A gaming machine that performs a predetermined game using a game medium and includes a display device for staging in a game area,
The display device (third display device)
A display member capable of variably displaying characters, figures, images, and the like;
A display frame that supports the display member,
The display frame includes:
A frame body variably attached in the game area,
A game machine comprising: a movable portion movably attached to the frame body. "
Such a gaming machine changes the position or posture of the display member by changing the frame main body in the game area while performing an effect such as an image with the display member of the display device, and furthermore, the movable portion with respect to the frame main body. The movement of the display member can effectively enhance the effect of the display member.

  Although the present invention has been described with reference to the embodiment, in the embodiment, the first movable portion 4888 and the second movable portion 4889 are used as a third display device 4818 which is an example of a display device, Although it is made to fluctuate at 4897, a drive source different from the lifting / lowering device 4897 may be provided to make the operation of the first movable portion 4888 and the second movable portion 4889 independent. By doing so, more complex productions can be performed.

  Further, in the embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments. For example, in the embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but the present invention can be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arranged ball machine. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates a reel. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 257 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 257, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door 6002 and a main body 6004. The front door 6002 and the main body 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the main body 6004 by inserting a key into a keyhole 6005 provided on the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise with the hinge as a rotation center.

  A game panel 6006 is provided on an upper half of the front door 6002, and a projection protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on a lower half of the front door 6002. A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 in this protruding portion. Further, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative board 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative board 6024. These bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, and the accumulation settlement button 6022 are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game. Have been. The main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body 6004.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006. Through this display window, three variable rotating bodies (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 are provided. It can be seen through. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002.

  On these variable rotators, a translucent design band on which a plurality of types of designs (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as design information is affixed to each tubular frame. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotator is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) is connected to each variable rotator. The drive of these stepping motors is controlled by a main control board 1310. When the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from the above-described display window from the top to the bottom. Has become visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effectors (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of the plurality of movable effectors, the drawing control of the effect display device 1600, the light emission control of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards, and the like based on various commands from the main control board 1310. By performing various controls, the progress of the effect is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the above-described peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530.

  The main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 as a game medium, starts changing the symbol information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and has a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, and a right stop button 6018. The change display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as game media to the tray 6026.

  In the fusion machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008 ', and the main control board 1310 allows a predetermined number of game balls to be thrown into the ball slot 6008' as a game medium. Based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the elapse of a predetermined time, the display of the fluctuation of the symbol information is stopped. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as game media to the tray 6026.

1… Pachinko machine (game machine)
5a: gaming area 4818: third display device (display device)
4845 ball rolling member 4849 bottom wall 4850 peripheral wall portion 4852 ball guiding portion 4884 display member 4885 display frame 4887 frame body 4888 first movable portion (movable portion)
4889… second movable part (movable part)

Claims (1)

A game machine comprising: a game board in which a game using a game ball is performed; and a liquid crystal display device that displays a predetermined effect image in relation to the game,
On the back side of the gaming machine,
A substrate on which electronic components are mounted,
A substrate box for housing the substrate,
A game ball supply unit that receives game balls from outside the gaming machine and guides the game balls downstream;
An upper plate surface having a predetermined width in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, and a rear plate surface having a predetermined length in the vertical direction of the gaming machine,
Is provided,
The game ball supply unit,
A ball tank that receives and stores game balls,
A tank rail formed from substantially the center in the left-right direction of the gaming machine to near one side end of the gaming machine so as to roll the gaming balls stored in the ball tank toward the downstream side. , And
At least a part of the tank rail is formed with a discharge hole that allows foreign substances to drop downward,
The protection portion is disposed at a position below the tank rail so as to be located directly below the discharge hole, and from a position below the tank rail while the upper plate surface is kept directly below the discharge hole. It is possible to move,
The substrate box has a plurality of walls forming an internal space in which the substrate is housed, and is arranged without sandwiching another substrate box below the upper plate surface of the protection unit, The wall portion serving as a rear surface of the substrate box is disposed on the front side of the rear plate surface of the protection unit, and the wall portion serving as a rear surface of the substrate box is disposed on the front side of the emission hole. Are arranged to be substantially horizontal,
A gaming machine characterized by that: